Material Handling.qxd

Transcription

ANYTHING | ANYTIME | ANYWHERE
ASD SERIES COMPACT ECONOMY DRYERS
MATERIAL HANDLING
WHITLOCK • MATERIAL HANDLING
ASD SERIES COMPACT DEHUMIDIFYING DRYERS
15-60 CFM (25-101 m3/hr)
AEC’s ASD Series cabinet-style mini-dryers are the smallest desiccant
dryers we offer. The unique energy-efficient design features Hi-Core™
Technology, which places the electric heating element inside the hollow
core of the desiccant canister, allowing faster regeneration and cooling of
the desiccant in less than one hour. -40ºF air dewpoint is used to regenerate
and cool the desiccant for additional material drying where consistent low
dewpoint is required.
STANDARD FEATURES
ASD Series Dryer
• 15, 30 or 60 CFM (25, 50 or 101 m3/hr) models available
• Small footprint (12” x 24”, 12” x 36”)
• Economical price
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Off-the-shelf programmable controller and 1/16 DIN digital
temperature controller
• Standard units 180ºF to 250ºF
• Low temperature units 120ºF to 180ºF
• High temperature units 250ºF to 400ºF
• Low heat operation 120ºF to 180ºF (includes a pre-cooler)
• High heat operation 250ºF to 400ºF (includes a return
air after-cooler to maximize the efficiency of the dryer
and an external process heater)
• Dual-bed design for continuous operation
• After-cooler
• Single regenerative process blower
• Dew point monitor
• Non-fused electrical disconnect (with three phase only)
• Other voltages available
• High process and regeneration temperature safeties
• Heavy-duty 4" casters
• Machine-mount adapter
• 13X molecular sieve
• Portable cart for dryer and drying hopper
• 115/1/60 standard supply voltage (15/30 CFM [25/50 m3/hr]
models only) 460/1/60 voltage on ASD60 (100 m3/hr)model
• Electric actuated air valve
1
ASD SERIES COMPACT ECONOMY DRYERS
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
ASD 15
ASD 30
ASD 60
Airflow,
cfm (m3/hr)
Air inlet/outlet OD,
in. (mm)
30 (50)
2.5 (63.5)
15 (25)
60 (100)
* Add 4” to height for casters.
MATERIAL HANDLING
Full load
amps
Width,
in. (mm)
Depth,
in. (mm)
Height,
in. (mm)*
Shipping weight,
lbs. (kg)
36 (914)
24 (610)
125 (57)
2.5 (63.5)
19 (@115V)
12 (305)
23.5 (597)
2.5 (63.5)
12 (@460V)
12 (305)
36 (914)
27 (@115V)
12 (305)
24 (610)
29 (737)
85 (39)
160 (73)
AFTER-COOLERS PLASTICIZER TRAP
The ASD after-coolers are used in high temperature (above 250ºF) or batch drying applications to reduce the return air temperature.
All after-coolers are mounted on the dryer with a 1/2” NPT cooling water connection.
DRYER OPERATING PARAMETERS
ASD 15
ASD 30
ASD 60
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
115/1/60
19.3
27.3
X
ASD15
0.85 ft3 /
24 liters
28.5
30
28
11.5
22
28
47.5
29.5
23.5
30
31.5
220/1/50
10.3
14.3
X
1.7 ft3 /
48 liters
28.5
30
28
11.5
22
28
56.5
29.5
23.5
30
40.5
1.7 ft3 /
48 liters
28.5
30
28
11.5
22
28
56.5
29.5
23.5
30
40.5
Specifications, appearances and dimensions are subject to change without notice.
FLA (Full Load Amps)
208/3/60
230/3/60
13.4
12.2
14.4
13.2
26.2
21.5
ASD30
4.0 ft3/
3.0 ft3 /
85 liters
113 liters
30.5
30.5
42.5
42.5
28
28
11.5
11.5
22
22
28
28
60.5
66
36
36
36.5
36.5
38.5
38.5
44.5
56
2
6.0 ft3/
170 liters
30.5
42.5
28
11.5
22
28
78
36
36.5
38.5
68
400/3/50
8.3
9.3
13.8
3.0 ft3 /
85 liters
30.5
42.5
33
11.5
22
33
60.5
36
36.5
38.5
44.5
460/3/60
7.1
8.1
12.3
575/3/60
5.9
6.9
9.6
ASD60
4.0 ft3/
6.0 ft3/
113 liters
170 liters
30.5
30.5
42.5
42.5
33
33
11.5
11.5
22
22
33
33
66
78
36
36
36.5
36.5
38.5
38.5
56
68
9.0 ft3/
255 liters
30.5
42.5
33
11.5
22
33
90
36
36.5
38.5
80
AD SERIES
WDMINI
SERIES
FLOOR
CABINET
MOUNTDRYERS
DRYERS
MATERIAL HANDLING
AD SERIES COMPACT DEHUMIDIFYING DRYERS
15-60 CFM (25-100 m3/hr)
The AD Series dryers are quality engineered to provide optimum drying
performance under the most demanding conditions. The dual-bed, closedprocess loop design incorporates many innovative features that consistently
provide -40ºF dewpoint in high humidity environments all the way up to 150
grains moisture level. All models include off-the-shelf microprocessor control
for process temperature and desiccant regeneration. With high performance
features in a simple, compact design, our AD Series dryers combine superior
performance with easy operation and serviceability at an affordable price.
STANDARD FEATURES
AD Series
• Off-the-shelf programmable controller and 1/16 DIN digital
temperature control
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Regenerative process blower
• High temperature operation of 250ºF to 400ºF. Includes
• Low temperature option 120°F to 180°F (includes a
pre-cooler to cool the dry air before entering the
process heater)
an insulated process delivery air hose and return air
after-cooler to maximize the efficiency of the dryer
• “Process high temp” alarm light
• Process and regeneration high temperature safeties
• Audible high-process temperature alarm with reset
button
• 2.5” dryer hose connections
• Heavy duty 4” casters
• NFPA79, UL and CUL electrical standards conformance
• AP1 Controller, including touch-screen interface, solid
state relay for heater control, dewpoint monitor, dirty
filter indicator, 7-day timer, material overdrying
protection and expanded diagnostics
• NEMA 12 control enclosure
• Electrically-actuated air valve
• Non-fused electrical disconnect
• Ethernet module for remote communication (with AP1
controller only)
• Branch fusing
• Dewpoint monitor (15 to -40ºF) (standard with AP1)
• Supply voltage (specify): 208, 230, 460, 575/3/60
• Redundant process air safety: separate temperature
controller and thermocouple
• Three-year temperature controller warranty
• 12’ low-temperature return air hose
• 220/3/50 or 400/3/50 and CE compliance (touch-safe
fuse holders for Euro fuses and touch-safe transformer).
De-rate cfm by 17% for 50 hz applications
• 12’ high-temperature silicone dryer delivery air hose with two clamps
• Thermocouple to mount in drying hopper air inlet
• Stainless steel plasticizer trap (with after-cooler) in lieu of standard
after-cooler included in temperature package (mounts outside the dryer)
3
AD SERIES MINI FLOOR MOUNT DRYERS
SPECIFICATIONS
Process Air Flow, cfm
AD-15
(m3/hr)
Standard Voltage
Full Load Amps
Weight, lbs. (kg)
Recommended Drying Hoppers*, cu. ft. (l)
* Drying hoppers sold separately.
B
MATERIAL HANDLING
AD-30
15 (25)
30 (50)
60 (101)
7.7
8.8
17.2
460/3/60
290 (135)
0.85 (20) or 1.7 (40)
Front View
AD-60
305 (140)
1.7 (40), 3.0 (80), 4.0 (120), or 6.0 (160)
Top View
370 (170)
4.0 (120) or 6.0 (160)
STANDARD CONTROLLER
D
C
A
E
Dimension
AD-15
A
20" (51 cm)
B
32.5" (83 cm)
C
30" (76 cm)
D
30" (76 cm)
E
23.75" (60 cm)
AD-30
AD-60
20" (51 cm)
24" (61 cm)
32.5" (83 cm) 32.5" (83 cm)
30" (76 cm)
30" (76 cm)
30" (76 cm)
34" (86 cm)
23.75" (60 cm) 28" (71 cm)
AFTER-COOLERS AND PLASTICIZER TRAPS
After-coolers are used in high temperature drying applications
to lower return temperatures and enhance or batch dryer
performance. The after-cooler option is required on all models
when process temperatures are above 250ºF. All aftercoolers are mounted inside the dryer cabinet and include
external 1/2” NPT cooling water connections.
Dryer Size
AD15 AD30 AD60
After-cooler water
3 (11.4)
flow, gpm (l/m)
Additional shipping
10 (4.5)
weight, lbs. (kg)
All plasticizer trap/after-cooler combinations are mounted outside the cabinet on the back of the dryer.
4
AD SERIES MACHINE MOUNT DRYERS
MATERIAL HANDLING
AD SERIES COMPACT DEHUMIDIFYING DRYERS
15-60 CFM (25-100 m3/HR)
The AD Series dryers are quality engineered to provide optimum drying
performance under the most demanding conditions. The dual-bed,
closed-process loop design incorporates many innovative features that
consistently provide -40ºF dewpoint in high humidity environments all
the way up to 150 grains moisture level. All models include off-the-shelf
microprocessor control for process temperature and desiccant
regeneration. With high performance features in a simple, compact
design, our AD Series dryers combine superior performance with easy
operation and serviceability at an affordable price.
STANDARD FEATURES
ADM Machine Mount Dryer
• Off-the-shelf programmable controller with 1/16 DIN digital
temperature control
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Audible high-process temperature alarm with reset button
• Regenerative process blower
• Low temp operation 120º to 180ºF. Low heat operation
includes a pre-cooler to cool the dry air before entering
process air heater
• Process and regeneration high temperature safeties
• High temperature operation 250ºF to 400ºF. Includes insulated
process delivery air hose and return air after-cooler to
maximize the efficiency of the dryer
• AD-15 through AD-60 – 2.5” connections
• NFPA79, UL and CUL electrical standards conformance
• Stainless steel premium slide gate (square flange) or drawer
magnet (square flange)
• AP1 Controller, including touch-screen interface, solid state
relay for heater control, dewpoint monitor, dirty filter indicator,
7-day timer, material over-drying protection and expanded
diagnostics, and optional Ethernet module
• Non-fused electrical disconnect
• Branch fusing
• Portable cart with appropriate flange (no conveying)
• Dewpoint monitor (15 to -40ºF) (standard with AP1)
• Redundant process air safety: separate temperature
controller and thermocouple
• Insulated stainless steel mass flow drying hopper with standard slide
gate and sight glass. Access doors on the 3-9 cu. ft. (85-250 liter)
models are standard. Access doors are optional on the 1.7 cu. ft.
(50 liter) model but are not available on the 0.85 model (25 liter)
• 220/3/50 or 400/3/50 and CE compliance (touch-safe fuse
holders for Euro fuses and touch-safe transformer). De-rate
cfm by 17% for 50 hz applications
• Covers to mount SRC or SRI vacuum receiver or hopper loader
• Stainless steel plasticizer trap (with after-cooler) in lieu of standard
after-cooler included in temperature package (mounts outside the dryer)
5
AD SERIES MACHINE MOUNT DRYERS
SPECIFICATIONS
Process Air Flow, CFM (m3/hr)
Standard Voltage
Full Load Amps (@ 460/30/60)
Weight, lbs. (kg)
Drying Hopper
AD-15
0.85M
15 (25)
AD-15
1.7M
15 (25)
MATERIAL HANDLING
AD-30
1.7M
30 (50)
AD-30
3M
30 (50)
AD-30
4M
30 (50)
460/3/60
AD-60
3M
60 (101)
AD-60
4M
60 (101)
AD-60
6M
60 (101)
7.7
8.8
17.2
520 (240) 540 (245) 560 (255) 650 (295) 680 (310) 725 (330) 760 (345) 790 (360)
SD-0.85
SD-1.7
SD-1.7
SD-3
SD-4
SD-3
SD-4
SD-6
C
B
A
Diameter AD-15
in. (cm) (0.85)
A
B
C
D
E
F
42 (107)
33 (85)
30 (76)
35 (89)
7 (18)
3.0 (3.8)
Hopper mounting flanges on
0.85 and 1.7 cu. ft. hoppers
are supplied blank so the
customer can drill to match
existing machine throat.
D
AD-15
(1.7)
45 (115)
45 (115)
30 (76)
35 (89)
7 (18)
3.0 (3.8)
Mounting Flange
E
E
F
AD-30
(1.7)
45 (115)
45 (115)
30 (76)
35 (89)
7 (18)
3.0 (3.8)
AD-30
(3.0)
48 (122)
44 (115)
30 (76)
35 (89)
7 (18)
3.0 (5.1)
AD-30
(4.0)
48 (122)
51 (130)
30 (76)
35 (89)
7 (18)
3.0 (5.1)
AFTER-COOLERS AND PLASTICIZER TRAPS
AD-60
(3.0)
56 (145)
44 (115)
34 (86)
46 (116)
7 (18)
3.0 (5.1)
After-coolers are used in high temperature drying applications
to lower return temperatures and enhance dryer performance.
The after-cooler option is required on all models when process
temperatures are above 250ºF or batch drying applications.
All after-coolers are mounted inside the dryer cabinet and
include external 1/2” NPT cooling water connections.
AD-60
(4.0)
56 (145)
51 (130)
34 (86)
46 (116)
7 (18)
3.0 (5.1)
AD-60
(6.0)
56 (145)
63 (160)
34 (86)
46 (116)
7 (18)
3.0 (5.1)
AD-60
(9.0)
56 (145)
81 (206)
34 (86)
46 (116)
7 (18)
3.0 (5.1)
Dryer Size
AD15 AD30 AD60
After-cooler water
3 (11.4)
flow, gpm (l/m)
Additional shipping
10 (4.5)
weight, lbs. (kg)
All plasticizer trap/after-cooler combinations are mounted outside the cabinet on the back of the dryer.
6
C/F
SD-9
STANDARD CONTROLLER
Top View
Front View
AD-60
9M
60 (101)
WD SERIES CABINET DRYERS
MATERIAL HANDLING
WD CABINET SERIES DEHUMIDIFYING DRYERS
90-225 CFM (150-380 m3/hr)
The WD Series desiccant dryers create super-dry, hot air. This dry air
stream moves through the hygroscopic materials and efficiently removes
moisture. The saturated air passes again through the desiccant, releasing
moisture to the desiccant. The closed-loop system dries and reheats the
airstream.
WD Series dryers are available with numerous options. AEC also provides
a complete line of drying hoppers with capacities from 0.40 to 425 cu. ft.
(11 to 12,035 liter)
STANDARD FEATURES
WD Series Dryer
• Regenerative-type process and regeneration blowers
• Cartridge-type process return and regeneration air filters
• Compressed air-operated cast aluminum valves
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• 208 or 2303/60; 380, 400 or 415/3/50, 575/3/60
(de-rate dryer airflow cfm by 5/6th for 50 hz voltages)
• Low compressed air supply alarm
• Type 4A desiccant
• Dewpoint meter with dirty filter indicator
• Casters
• Dewpoint bed switching
• Non-fused disconnect switch with door-mounted
handle
• Two 12-foot (3.66 m) lengths of flexible high-temperature hose
• LED readout of set point and process temperatures
• NEMA 12 window kit
• Off-the-shelf PID temperature controller
• 7 day timer
• Graphic display with indicator lights
• External communication: SPI protocol dual ports, or
NX protocols types RS-232C/422/485 single port
• Mercury process heater contactor(s)
• Branch fusing
• 12 ft. insulated process hose
• 460/3/60 supply voltage
• Audible/visual alarm for high temperature and low
compressed air
• Heater burnout indicator (consult factory for lead time)
• High temperature process air return filter (consult
factory)
• High temperature process air delivery filter with
canister (consult factory)
7
WD SERIES CABINET DRYERS
SPECIFICATIONS
Process air flow, cfm (m3/hr)
Hose conn. dia., in. (mm)
Temp. range, ºF (ºC)1
FLA (@460/3/60)
Process blower, hp (kW)
Regen. blower, hp (kW)
Length, in. (cm)
Width, in. (cm)
Height, in. (cm)
Shipping weight, lbs. (kg)
WD 90
90 (150)
2.5 (63.5)
140-400 (60-204)
20
1 (.75)
0.25 (0.19)
27 (69)
27 (69)
68 (173)
440 (200)
1 After-cooler required above 250ºF (121ºC)
2 WD100 operation below 185ºF (85ºC) requires a pre-cooler
MATERIAL HANDLING
WD 100
100 (170)
2 (50.8)
185-400 (85-204)2
23
4 (3)
0.25 (0.19)
27 (69)
27 (69)
68 (173)
475 (216)
WD 150
150 (250)
2.5 (63.5)
160-400 (71-204)
34
4 (3)
0.33 (0.25)
37 (79)
37 (79)
79 (200)
750 (341)
WD 225
225 (380)
4 (101.6)
160-400 (71-204)
45
5 (3.75)
0.33 (0.25)
37 (79)
37 (79)
87 (220)
850 (386)
AFTER-COOLERS AND PRE-COOLERS
After-coolers are used in high-temperature drying applications (process temperatures
above 250ºF [121ºC]) as well as with materials that emit volatiles. After-coolers are
designed to reduce return air from 250°F to 150°F (121ºC to 66ºC); incoming water
rises from 85°F to 95°F (29ºC to 35ºC).
AFT30/100 through AFT225 after-cooler models include aluminum housing, copper
tube heat exchanger, and flexible hose and clamps.
B
A
A
B
Pre-coolers should be used in low-temperature drying applications to hold consistent
process temperatures below 170°F (77ºC).
After-cooler model
Water flow, gpm (lpm)
Fitting size, in. (mm)
Diameter, in. (cm)
Height, in. (cm)
WD 90
AFT 30/100
3 (11.4)
0.5 (12.7)
8 (20.3)
36 (91.4)
35 (16)
WD 100
AFT 30/100
3 (11.4)
0.5 (12.7)
8 (20.3)
36 (91.4)
35 (16)
WD 150
AFT 150
4 (15.1)
0.5 (12.7)
12 (30.5)
36 (91.4)
35 (16)
8
WD 225
AFT 225
6 (22.7)
0.5 (12.7)
B
A
12 (30.5)
A
49 (124.5)
60 (28)
A0534806
WD SERIES HIGH CAPACITY DRYERS
MATERIAL HANDLING
WD SERIES HIGH CAPACITY DEHUMIDIFYING DRYERS
350-500 CFM (595-850 m3/hr)
These high capacity models feature twin plenum chambers in each tower
for even air flow across desiccant beds. Skid-mounted construction lowers
rigging, installation, and maintenance costs.
The WD Series high capacity dryers offer user-friendly, off-the-shelf
controls. The unit provides a compact frame with minimum moving parts,
easy accessibility for maintenance, and a small footprint. Every dryer is
factory-tested before shipment to assure reliable performance for years to
come. Optimal desiccant utilization guarantees lowest dew point.
STANDARD FEATURES
WD Series High Capacity Dryer
• 160ºF - 300ºF (71ºC - 149ºC) output temperature range
• LED readout of set point and process temperatures
• Off-the-shelf PLC controller
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• 208 or 230/3/60, 380, 400 or 415/3/60; 380/3/60;
575/3/60
• Dew point bed switching with dew point meter and dirty filter
indication
• Process and regeneration air filters
• Disconnect switch with door-mounted handle:
460/3/60 (non-fused); 230/3/60 (non-fused); 380, 400
or 415/3/50; 380/3/60; 575/3/60
• Mercury contactors on process heaters
• Valve positioning error alarm
• Off-the-shelf PID temperature controller
• Heater burnout indicator (ammeters)
• One 12-foot (3.6 m) length and one 20-foot (6.1 m) length of hightemperature flexible hose with four clamps (WD350 model has
two 12-foot (3.6 m) lengths with four clamps)
• 4-way air-actuated cast aluminum valves
• Regenerative-type process blower
• Redundant high-temperature shut-down
• Audible and visual alarm annunciator
• High temperature process air delivery filter
• Return air temperature digital display
• Branch fusing
• Alarms for: high dewpoint, dirty filter, high or low process
temperature, high or low regeneration air temperature, process
or regeneration blower failure
• 12 ft. insulated process hose
• 7 day timer
• External communication: SPI protocol dual ports, or
NX protocols types RS-232C/422/485 single port
• Less process heaters (HE style), less process
heaters and controller (CHE style), less process
blower, heaters, and controller (BCHE style)
• High temperature operation up to 400ºF
9
• Designed for elevations above 3000 ft.
WD 350 TO WD 500 DIMENSIONS
MATERIAL HANDLING
63"
(160 cm)
Regen air in
66"
(168 cm)
Top View
Process air
delivery (out)
Front View
Right Side View
Process air return(in)
Process air
delivery (out)
Regen air out
93"
(236 cm)
Rear View
Left Side View
10
SPECIFICATIONS
Airflow
Hose con. dia.
WD 350
350 (595)
4 (101)
WD 500
500 (850)
Model
WD 425
cfm (cfh)
425 (720)
in (mm)
MATERIAL HANDLING
Process blower Regen. Blower
FLA
460/30/60
hp (kW)
hp (kW)
54
5 (127)
55
5 (127)
72
Length
in (cm)
Width
in (cm)
Height
Shipping Weight
in (cm)
lbs. (kg)
5 (3.73)
0.5 (0.37)
56 (142)
56 (142)
73 (185)
1000 (455)
7.5 (5.6)
0.5 (0.37)
63 (160)
66 (168)
94 (239)
1200 (545)
7.5 (5.6)
0.5 (0.37)
61 (155)
52 (132)
82 (208)
1100 (500)
REMOTE-MOUNT DEW POINT MONITORS
Dew point monitors include: meter, set plugs and cord set for 115/1/60, sensor for delivery air, and lights.
DMP20 model includes audible alarm with reset button; DMPS model includes output for remote alarm.
DPM20 operating range is -40ºF to 10ºF (-40ºC to -24ºC)
DPMS operating range is -80ºF to -20ºF (-62ºC to -29ºC)
WD-RT HIGH-TEMPERATURE MODELS
WD350-RT
64
Amp Draw
WD500-RT
75
AFTER-COOLERS AND PRE-COOLERS
AFT350 through AFT500 models come standard with mild steel housing, copper/steel fin and coil heat
exchanger, and flexible hose and clamps.
Aftercoolers are used in high temperature drying applications when process temperatures are above
250ºF (121ºC). Precoolers are used in low temperature drying applications to hold consistent process
temperatures below 170°F (77ºC).
Model
After-Cooler
Water Flow, gpm (lpm)
Fitting Size, in. (mm)
Shipping Wt., lbs. (kg)
WD 425
AFT425
10 (37)
1 (25)
120 (55)
WD 350
WD 500
AFT350
AFT500
7 (26)
0.75 (19)
10 (37)
1 (25)
After-coolers and pre-coolers are mounted to the frame and do not increase dryer size.
11
100 (46)
120 (55)
NOTES:
MATERIAL HANDLING
12
LARGE ADL SERIES ELECTRIC DRYERS
MATERIAL HANDLING
LARGE ADL SERIES ELECTRIC DEHUMIDIFYING DRYERS
ADL Series dryers are designed to dry (remove 1% water per hour) hygroscopic
pelletized plastic material, when used in conjunction with an appropriately
sized drying hopper. The unique energy-efficient design features Hi-Core™
Technology, which places the electric heating element inside the hollow core
of the desiccant canister, allowing faster regeneration and cooling of the desiccant
in less than one hour.
All the models are available in three temperature ranges—standard, low
and high heat. With the advanced PLC control, the features can be easily
expanded to take advantage of additional energy savings options.
STANDARD FEATURES
ADL Series Dryer
• Standard off-the-shelf programmable controller and 1/16 DIN
digital temperature control
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Low temperature operation 120ºF - 180ºF includes a
pre-cooler to cool the dry air before entering process air heater
• High process and regeneration temperature control safeties
• 13X desiccant (molecular sieve)
• Easy to access process, regeneration, and air filters
• High-pressure centrifugal blower (peripheral blowers available)
delivers stated airflow under load. (High performance dryers
are equipped with multiple regenerative blowers.)
• NFPA79, UL and CUL machinery electrical standards, including
NEMA 12 controls, components & enclosure; lockable electrical
disconnect; branch fusing; regeneration temperature control;
“Process high temp” indication light and audible alarm; and
sequence shutdown switch
• Dirty filter check, both process and regeneration
• High temperature operation 250ºF - 400ºF includes insulated
process delivery air base, additional heaters, electronics to
support this operation, and return air after-cooler to maximize
the efficiency of the dryer
• Stainless steel plasticizer trap/after-cooler with filter
• Material miser valve (overdrying protection)
• Temperature set back (overdrying protection) may require
low temperature option
• Closed-loop regeneration cooling valve (includes cooling coil)
• 15ºF to -40ºF dewpoint meter or 15ºF to -80ºF dewpoint meter
• Sound insulation package for under 85 dba noise level
(not required on ADL 1000, ADL 1450, and ADL 1700)
• Dust collector
• PLC (AP1) control including dew point meter with regeneration
demand, 7 day timer, dirty filter indication, airflow monitoring,
and temperature set back
• PLC+ (AP1) controller includes PLC features plus 5” x 4”
touch-screen
• Stainless steel desiccant tanks, filter housings and after-coolers
• Remote operator interface
• 400/3/50 voltage (De-rate cfm by 17% for 50 hz applications)
• Ethernet module for remote communication
13
• CSA approval or CE compliance
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
ADL1000
ADL 1450
ADL 1700
ADL 2100
ADL 2550
ADL 3400
ADL 4250
ADL 5100
Airflow,
cfm (m3/hr)
600 (1015)
850 (1440)
1000 (1695)
1250 (2120)
1500 (2545)
2000 (3395)
2500 (4245)
3000 (5095)
in. (mm)
8 (203)
8 (203)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
Height,
in. (cm)
67 (170)
67 (170)
81 (206)
81 (206)
81 (206)
83 (210)
83 (210)
83 (210)
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS: LOW HEAT AND STANDARD
Model
ADL1000
ADL 1450
ADL 1700
ADL 2100
ADL 2550
ADL 3400
ADL 4250
ADL 5100
FLA @ 208/3/60
152
217
249
314
378
n/a
n/a
n/a
FLA @ 230/3/60
137
196
225
284
341
n/a
n/a
n/a
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS: HIGH HEAT
Model
ADL1000
ADL 1450
ADL 1700
ADL 2100
ADL 2550
ADL 3400
ADL 4250
ADL 5100
FLA @ 208/3/60
207
296
342
430
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
FLA @ 230/3/60
187
267
309
389
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
MATERIAL HANDLING
Depth,
in. (cm)
80 (203)
80 (203)
116 (295)
116 (295)
116 (295)
148 (376)
148 (376)
148 (376)
Width,
in. (cm)
63 (160)
63 (160)
73 (185)
73 (185)
73 (185)
73 (185)
73 (185)
73 (185)
Shipping weight,
lbs. (kg)
2100 (953)
2200 (998)
2950 (1338)
4350 (1973)
4700 (2131)
6500 (2948)
7300 (3311)
8450 (3833)
FLA @ 400/3/50
79
113
129
163
197
270
339
424
FLA @ 460/3/60
69
98
112
142
171
234
294
370
FLA @ 575/3/60
55
78
90
114
137
188
236
295
FLA @ 400/3/50
108
154
178
224
269
366
n/a
n/a
FLA @ 460/3/60
94
134
154
194
234
318
399
494
FLA @ 575/3/60
75
107
123
156
187
254
319
395
14
TEMPERATURE CONTROL UNITS
MATERIAL HANDLING
STANDARD CONTROL SYSTEM FEATURES
• Off-the-shelf 1/16 DIN temperature controller with
auto tune and PID
• Programmable logic based control system
The standard control
system features digital
temperature control.
• Enclosure meets NFPA 79, UL and CUL electrical
standards
• Non-fused disconnect
• High process temperature alarm light
• Temperature controlled regeneration with safety
STANDARD CONTROL SYSTEM OPTION
• Audible alarm with silence button
• Digital dewpoint monitor to -40ºF
AP1 CONTROLLER FEATURES
• Touch-screen interface provides clear information about
desiccant bed regeneration, process temperature, and
dewpoint
• Off-the-shelf programmable controller monitors and
controls the drying and conveying system
The AP1 PLC controlled
system includes a
touch-screen interface.
• Allows simple start-up, shut-down, and adjustment of
drying and conveying parameters
• Integral PID temperature control with display of setpoint
and actual process temperature
• Display of “actual” dewpoint
• Alarm indication also includes high temperature
conditions, dirty filters, and heater failure
• Dryer “auto shutdown” sequence
• Loop break alarm
• 7 day timer
• Material over-drying protection
AP1 CONTROLLER OPTION
• Ethernet module
15
NOTES:
MATERIAL HANDLING
16
LARGE ADLG SERIES GAS DRYERS
MATERIAL HANDLING
ADLG SERIES GAS DEHUMIDIFYING DRYERS
ADLG high-capacity, low-cost gas-fired dryers deliver consistent temperature
(+/- 1ºF) and –40ºF dew point even in high-humidity environments. These
dryers are able to reduce energy costs 50% to 85% over electric dryers and
will dry high throughput materials centrally or beside the machine.
The unique energy-efficient design features Hi-Core™ Technology, which
places the gas-fired heating element inside the hollow core of the desiccant
canister, allowing faster regeneration and cooling of the desiccant in less than
one hour. All the models are available in three temperature ranges—standard,
low and high heat. With the advanced PLC control, the features can be
easily expanded to take advantage of additional energy savings options.
STANDARD FEATURES
ADLG Series Dryer
• Expandable PLC control (AP1) displaying the process temperature
and dew point as low as –40°F. Display of process temperature
set point and actual
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Low temperature operation 120ºF - 180ºF
• Includes a pre-cooler to cool the dry air before
entering process air heat exchanger
• High process and regeneration temperature control safeties
• High temperature operation 250ºF - 400ºF
• Includes insulated proces delivery air hose, larger
burner/gas heat exchangers, additional electronics
to support this operation, return air after-cooler
• 13X desiccant (molecular sieve)
• Easy to access process, regeneration, and combustion air filters
• High-pressure centrifugal blower (peripheral blowers available)
delivers stated airflow under load. (High performance dryers
are equipped with multiple regenerative blowers.)
• Stainless steel plasticizer trap/after-cooler with filter
• Material miser valve (overdrying protection)
• Temperature set back (overdrying protection) may require
low temperature option
• PLC control including dew point meter with regeneration on
demand, 7 day timer, dirty filter indication, airflow monitoring,
and temperature set back
• Closed-loop regeneration cooling valve includes cooling coil
• 15ºF to -40ºF dewpoint meter or 15ºF to -80ºF dewpoint meter
• Sound insulation package for under 85 dba noise level
(not required on ADLG 1000, ADLG 1450, and ADLG 1700)
• NFPA86, UL, AGA and CGA machinery electrical standards
• Dust collector
• Can be run using natural gas or propane
• AP1+ controller includes PLC features plus 5” x 4”
touch-screen
• Dirty filter indication
• Process air
• Regeneration air
• Composition air
• Remote operator interface
• 400/3/50 voltage (De-rate cfm by 17% for 50 hz applications)
• Stainless steel desiccant tanks, filter housings and after-coolers
• CSA approval, UL rating, or CE compliance
17
LARGE ADLG SERIES GAS DRYERS
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
ADLG 1000
ADLG 1450
ADLG 1700
ADLG 2100
ADLG 2550
ADLG 3400
ADLG 4250
ADLG 5100
Airflow,
cfm (m3/hr)
600 (1015)
850 (1440)
1000 (1695)
1250 (2120)
1500 (2545)
2000 (3395)
2500 (4245)
3000 (5095)
in. (mm)
8 (203)
8 (203)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
MATERIAL HANDLING
Height,
in. (cm)
67 (170)
67 (170)
81 (206)
81 (206)
81 (206)
83 (211)
83 (211)
83 (211)
Depth,
in. (cm)
98 (249)
98 (249)
116 (295)
116 (295)
116 (295)
148 (376)
148 (376)
148 (376)
Width,
in. (cm)
63 (160)
63 (160)
73 (185)
73 (185)
73 (185)
73 (185)
73 (185)
73 (185)
Shipping weight,
lbs. (kg)
2950 (1338)
3050 (1383)
4125 (1871)
4850 (2200)
5050 (2291)
8125 (3685)
8875 (4025)
9050 (4105)
GAS FLOW REQUIREMENTS
Model
ADLG 1000
ADLG 1450
ADLG 1700
ADLG 2100
ADLG 2550
ADLG 3400
ADLG 4250
ADLG 5100
Low heat gas High heat gas Exhaust duct Combined
flow rate,
flow rate,
sizes,
flue air flow,
CFH
CFH
in. (mm)
cfm
159
227
3 (76)
87
225
322
3 (76)
123
265
378
4 (102)
145
331
473
4 (102)
182
397
568
5 (127)
218
528
756
5 (127)
290
661
945
6 (152)
363
793
1134
6 (152)
436
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Model
ADLG 1000
ADLG 1450
ADLG 1700
ADLG 2100
ADLG 2550
ADLG 3400
ADLG 4250
ADLG 5100
FLA @
208/3/60
36
47
48
61
75
120
150
191
FLA @
230/3/60
33
43
44
55
67
109
136
173
FLA @
400/3/50
19
25
25
32
39
62
78
99
FLA @
460/3/60
16
22
22
28
34
54
67
87
FLA @
575/3/60
13
17
17
22
27
43
54
69
The AP1 PLC controlled
system includes a
touch-screen interface.
AP1 CONTROLLER FEATURES
• Touch-screen interface provides clear information about
desiccant bed regeneration, process temperature, and
dewpoint
• Off-the-shelf programmable controller monitors and
controls the drying and conveying system
• Allows simple start-up, shut-down, and adjustment of
• Integral PID temperature control with display of setpoint
and actual process temperature
• Display of “actual” dewpoint
• Alarm indication also includes high temperature
conditions,dirty filters, and heater failure
• Dryer “auto shutdown” sequence
• Loop break alarm
• 7 day timer
AP1 CONTROLLER OPTION
• Ethernet module
18
ACD10 SERIES COMPRESSED AIR DRYERS
MATERIAL HANDLING
10 CFM (17 m3/hr)
The ACD10 compressed air dryer offers efficient drying performance in an ultracompact cabinet. The 12” x 12” x 6” dryer cabinet fits easily into the tightest
spaces, and for added flexibility, it can be mounted on the floor or directly to
a hopper. The dryer is so effective, it can reduce the incoming compressed
air source dewpoint by up to 50ºF to as low as –10ºF (-40ºF with the
optional membrane dryer).
ACD10 Series Dryer shown
with optional drying hopper
STANDARD FEATURES
• Hopper mount configuration
• Average dewpoint of -10ºF (-40ºF with optional membrane dryer)
• 115/1/60 operation (other voltages available)
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Heating capabilities up to 400ºF
• Large particle compressed air filter with regulator
• Remote-mount membrane dryer with 0.1-micron
filter assembly for -40ºF (-40ºC) dewpoint operation
• Exhaust air cartridge filter
• 230/1/60 voltage
• 220/1/50 voltage
• Floor-mount configuration, including 12’ ft dryer hose
and 2 hose clamps
19
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
Width, in. (mm)
ACD10
MATERIAL HANDLING
Height, in. (mm)
7.3 (185)
13.4 (339)
Depth, in. (mm)
Weight, lbs. (Kg)
15.7 (396)
25 (11.3)
DRYER OPERATING PARAMETERS
Material
ABS
Drying
Temp.,
ºF (ºC)
176 (80)
2-3
0.45
0.15
5.6 (2.5)
11.2 (5.1)
12.6 (5.7)
176 (80)
2-3
0.7
0.15
5.6 (2.5)
11.2 (5.1)
12.6 (5.7)
176 (80)
2-3
5.6 (2.5)
11.2 (5.1)
ASA
212 (100)
CP
167 (75)
CA
EVA
Average Drying Hopper Capacity,1 lbs./hr (kg/hr)
Drying Initial
Final
ACD10 with ACD10 with ACD10 with
Time in Moisture Moisture
0.4 cu. ft.
0.8 cu. ft.
0.9 cu. ft.
Hours Content Content
(11 liter)
(22 liter)
(25 liter)
H20 in % H20 in % drying hopper drying hopper drying hopper
Ionomere 194 (90)
3
2-3
3.5
1.0
0.15
PA11
167 (75)
4-6
0.7
0.07
PA6
176 (80)
4-6
0.5
0.05
PA12
PA6.6
PA6.6
GF35
167 (75)
176 (80)
176 (80)
PBT
266 (130)
PE Filled
185 (85)
PC
PE
248 (120)
194 (90)
PEEK
302 (150)
PES
302 (150)
PEI
302 (150)
4-6
4-6
4-6
0.7
0.5
0.5
3-4
0.25
3-4
0.50
2-4
1-2
4
0.16
0.05
0.25
2
0.1
4-5
212 (100)
PPO
212 (100)
2-3
PS
176 (80)
1-2
0.05
3-4
0.4
302 (150)
PVC
158 (70)
PUR
SAN
SB
TPE
TPU
176 (80)
176 (80)
176 (80)
230 (110)
194 (90)
3-9
0.1
POM
PSU
0.01
0.02
2-3
284 (140)
0.02
0.002
176 (80)
PPS
0.01
0.25
PMMA
194 (90)
0.02
0.01
0.43
4-6
PP
0.04
0.25
4
300-392
(150-200)
149 (65)
0.05
4
PETP
PETG
0.07
3-4
3-4
1-2
2-3
2
3-4
2-3
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.02
0.04
0.05
0.05
4.6 (2.1)
5.6 (2.5)
4.0 (1.8)
2.8 (1.3)
2.8 (1.3)
2.8 (1.3)
2.8 (1.3)
2.8 (1.3)
4.0 (1.8)
4.6 (2.1)
4.6 (2.1)
7 (3.2)
3.5 (1.6)
9.2 (4.2)
11.2 (5.1)
8.0 (3.6)
5.6 (2.5)
5.6 (2.5)
5.6 (2.5)
5.6 (2.5)
5.6 (2.5)
8.0 (3.6)
7 (3.2)
7 (3.2)
6.3 (2.9)
6.3 (2.9)
7.9 (3.6)
14 (6.4)
15.8 (7.1)
9.2 (4.2)
14 (6.4)
4.6 (2.1)
9.2 (4.2)
0.05
4.6 (2.1)
9.2 (4.2)
0.10
9.3 (4.2)
18.6 (8.4)
4.6 (2.1)
5.6 (2.5)
7 (3.2)
5.6 (2.5)
9.2 (4.2)
11.2 (5.1)
• Requires approximately 2 SCFM compressed air at
80 psig for proper operation
7.9 (3.6)
10.4 (4.7)
12.6 (5.7)
10.4 (4.7)
15.8 (7.1)
16.4 (7.4)
16.4 (7.4)
41.9 (19)
25.2 (11.4)
31.5 (14.3)
11.2 (5.1)
12.6 (5.7)
1 Performance may vary based on initial quality of the compressed air supply to the dryer.
• 10 CFM (17 m3/hr) process air
5.2 (2.3)
14 (6.4)
9.2 (4.2)
• Approximate weight: 25 lbs. (11.3 kg)
7.9 (3.6)
7 (3.2)
4.6 (2.1)
• Full load amps: 12.5 @115V
6.25 @ 230V
7.9 (3.6)
12.6 (5.7)
7 (3.2)
• Average dew point temperature of -10ºF (-23ºC)1
10.4 (4.7)
11.2 (5.1)
Standard machine
mount configuration
• Operates with 115/1/60
9.0 (4.1)
5.6 (2.5)
3.5 (1.6)
PERFORMANCE
6.3 (2.9)
4.6 (2.1)
7 (3.2)
0.02
6.3 (2.9)
2.3 (1.0)
0.02
0.03
6.3 (2.9)
15.8 (7.1)
7 (3.2)
11.2 (5.1)
0.03
5.2 (2.3)
14 (6.4)
9.2 (4.2)
5.6 (2.5)
0.01
9.0 (4.1)
10.4 (4.7)
0.02
0.05
12.6 (5.7)
9.2 (4.2)
3.5 (1.6)
3.5 (1.6)
10.4 (4.7)
16.4 (7.4)
Optional floor mount model
20
AC FLOOR MOUNT COMPRESSED AIR DRYERS
MATERIAL HANDLING
LARGE AC FLOOR MOUNT COMPRESSED AIR DRYERS
30 AND 60 CFM (50 AND 100 m3/hr)
AEC's AC and ACM Compressed Air Dryers offer compact size with full
performance. The standard model reduces dewpoint of compressed air
supply by 50ºF, and can achieve a dewpoint of 0ºF or as low as -10ºF if the
plant air compressor is equipped with a refrigerated air dryer. The membrane
option maintains -40º dewpoint in all environments without a dryer on the
compressor. (120º F maximum compressed air supply temperature.)
STANDARD FEATURES
AC Series Dryer
• Mitsubishi programmable relay controller
• 1/16 DIN PID temperature controller
• Drying temperature of 110º - 300ºF (Compressed air supply
temperature must be lower than process temperature.)
NEMA 12 control enclosure, non-fused electrical disconnect,
solid state relay for heater control, and branch fusing
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Additional compressed air pre-filter assembly
mounted on outside of dryer cabinet
• Exhaust air filter (350º F maximum)
• Casters - add 4” to overall height
• High process temperature safety
• 12’ insulated process hose
• Automatic shut-off system to monitor compressed air supply
• Dewpoint monitor
• Dual compressed air filter assembly
• Audible high process temperature alarm with reset
button
• Dirty filter indicator
• Air pressure gauge
• ACM models also include a proprietary membrane assembly to
further reduce the dewpoint of the process air
• Rubber feet
• Three year temperature controller warranty
21
AC FLOOR MOUNT COMPRESSED AIR DRYERS
SPECIFICATIONS
Process Air Flow, cfm (m3/hr)
Standard Voltage
Full Load Amps
Air Outlet O.D., in. (mm)
Compressed Air Requirements
SCFM @ 80 psi
Width, in. (mm)
Depth, in. (mm)
Height, in. (mm)
Weight, lbs. (kg)*
*Add 5 lbs. (2.25 kg) for ACM membrane option
AC30F
30 (50)
4.25
2.5 (50)
5
20 (510)
16 (410)
32 (815)
125 (60)
460/3/60
MATERIAL HANDLING
AC60F
60 (100)
STANDARD CONTROLLER
8
2.5 (63)
10
25 (635)
16 (410)
32 (815)
155 (70)
DIMENSIONS
D
B
C
Dimension, in. (mm)
A
B
C
D
AC30F
22 (560)
12.75 (325)
16 (410)
28 (715)
AC60F
25 (635)
12.75 (325)
16 (410)
28 (715)
A
22
ACMACHINE MOUNT COMPRESSED AIR DRYERS
MATERIAL HANDLING
AC MACHINE MOUNT COMPRESSED AIR DRYERS
30 AND 60 CFM (50 AND 100 m3/hr)
AEC's AC and ACM Compressed Air Dryers offer compact size with full
performance. The standard model reduces dewpoint of compressed air
supply by 50ºF, and can achieve a dewpoint of 0ºF or as low as -10ºF if the
plant air compressor is equipped with a refrigerated air dryer. The membrane
option maintains -40º dewpoint in all environments without a dryer on the
compressor. (120º F maximum compressed air supply temperature.)
STANDARD FEATURES
ACM Series Dryer
(shown with optional cart)
• Mitsubishi programmable relay controller
• 1/16 DIN PID temperature controller
• Drying temperature of 110º - 300ºF (Compressed air supply
temperature must be lower than process temperature.)
NEMA 12 control enclosure, non-fused electrical disconnect,
solid state relay for heater control, and branch fusing
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Additional compressed air pre-filter assembly
mounted on outside of dryer cabinet
• Exhaust air filter (350º F maximum)
• High-temperature operation up to 400º F, including
insulated process hose (in lieu of standard) and
Pyrex® sight glass in drying hopper
• High process temperature safety
• Automatic shut-off system to monitor compressed air supply
• Dual compressed air filter assembly
• Drawer magnet, 7” x 7” square, SST construction
(mounted under drying hopper)
• Air pressure gauge
• Audible high process temperature alarm with reset
button
• ACM models also include a proprietary membrane assembly to
further reduce the dewpoint of the process air
• Machine-mount adapter and SD Series drying hopper, including
stainless steel drying hopper construction, full insulation, access
door (3.0 cu. ft. [85 liter] and larger), sight glass, hopper drain,
7” x 7” mounting flange, slide gate, and cover for SRC02-16
receivers, SLC loaders, ASV loaders, manual fill or blank cover
• Three year temperature controller warranty
23
• Portable cart for dryer and drying hopper, no
conveying
ACMACHINE MOUNT COMPRESSED AIR DRYERS
SPECIFICATIONS
(m3/hr)
AC30/1.5M
AC30/3M AC30/4M
30 (50)
3 (85)
4 (110)
100
150
MATERIAL HANDLING
AC30/6M
AC60/3M
AC60/4M AC60/6M
60 (100)
4 (110)
6 (170)
150
200
AC60/9M1
Process airflow, cfm
Drying hopper, cu. ft. (l)
1.7 (40)
6 (170)
3 (85)
9 (255)
Capacity @ 35 lbs./cu. ft.
50
200
100
300
Standard voltage
460/3/60
Full Load Amps (430/3/60)
4.25
8
Compressed air
5
10
requirements, SCFM @ 80 psi
Width, in (mm)
22 (560)
25 (635)
Depth, in (mm)
40 (1020)
47 (1195)
Height, in (mm)
37.5 (955) 44.5 (1130) 50.5 (1285) 62.5 (1588) 44.5 (1130) 50.5 (1285) 62.5 (1590) 80.5 (2045)
365 (170) 455 (210) 485 (225) 530 (240) 505 (229) 525 (238) 555 (255) 585 (265)
Weight2, lbs. (kg)
1 Consult factory for delivery
2 Add 5 lbs. (2.25 kg) for ACM membrane option
STANDARD CONTROLLER
C
B
A
D
Mounting Flange:
7” square
5.5” square bolt pattern
0.625” dia. bolt holes
2” diameter discharge hole
Dimensions,
AC30/1.7 AC30/3 AC30/4 AC60/3 AC60/4 AC60/6 AC60/9
in. (mm)
A
40 (1020)
47 (1195)
37.5
44.5
50.5
44.5
50.5
62.5
70
B
(955)
(1320) (1285) (1320) (1285) (1590) (1778)
C
22 (560)
25 (635)
D
28 (715)
38 (965)
24
NOMAD II PORTABLE DRYING SYSTEMS
MATERIAL HANDLING
15-60 CFM (25-100 m3/hr)
The Nomad II portable drying and conveying systems combine the
advanced features and reliability of AEC’s AD dryers with an integral
conveying system. These systems provide simple and fast loading of
your process machine and the Nomad II. The entire system is mounted
on a rugged, portable cart.
STANDARD FEATURES
• PLC with touch-screen interface for control of the drying and
conveying process, with digital dewpoint display and complete
diagnostics for monitoring system status
Nomad II
• Insulated stainless steel drying hopper with slide gate, drain, and
sight glass (3.0 cu. ft. [85 liter] and larger hoppers include an
access door)
• Loading system to load the drying hopper and/or the process
machine(s), depending on the model, includes closed-loop
conveying to machine (if equipped), 1 HP centrifugal blower(s),
2-stage cyclonic filter with dust canister, SRI Series minimal
inventory sight glass receiver with demand proximity switch
(machine loading only), and 2 ten foot lengths of vinyl flex hose
with 4 clamps
• Quick-connect wiring for SRI machine loader
• Mounted on a rugged, compact frame with heavy-duty casters
• NFPA79, UL and CUL electrical standards including NEMA 12
control enclosure, electrical disconnect for complete system, and
branch fusing
• Integral control of drying, loading and optional proportioning valve
• One year parts warranty
25
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Low temperature operation 120º to 180ºF. Low heat
operation includes a pre-cooler to cool the dry air
before entering process air heater
• High temperature operation 250ºF to 400ºF. Includes
insulated process delivery air hose and return air
after-cooler to maximize the efficiency of the dryer
• Premium gate: steel or stainless steel
• SRI02 in lieu of SRI01 for process machine
• Stainless steel flex hose (required when conveying
materials above 250ºF)
• Magnet under SRIL loader on machine
• AP2 control system (Allen-Bradley PLC with color
touch-screen)
• Plasticizer trap (with after-cooler) in lieu of standard
after-cooler included in high temperature package
(mounts outside the dryer)
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
AD15/0.85
AD15/1.7
AD30/1.7
AD30/3.0
AD30/4.0
AD60/3.0
AD60/4.0
AD60/6.0
AD60/9.0
FLA
(@ 460/3/60)
12.7
12.7
13.8
13.8
13.8
22.2
22.2
22.2
22.2
Dryer Process airflow
cfm
m3/hr
15
25
15
25
30
50
30
50
30
50
60
100
60
100
60
100
60
100
Note: High temperature package available for up to 400ºF (205ºC)
DIMENSIONS
Model
AD15/0.7
AD15/1.5
AD30/1.5
AD30/3.0
AD30/4.0
AD60/3.0
AD60/4.0
AD60/6.0
AD60/9.0
Width,
in. (cm)
48 (122)
50 (127)
50 (127)
53 (135)
53 (135)
53 (135)
53 (135)
53 (135)
53 (135)
Depth, Height,
in. (cm) in. (cm)
33 (84)
33 (84)
33 (84)
33 (84)
33 (84)
34 (87)
34 (87)
34 (87)
34 (87)
63 (160)
72 (183)
72 (183)
71 (180)
78 (200)
71 (180)
78 (200)
90 (230)
97 (246)
Weight,
lbs. (kg)
670 (305)
690 (315)
705 (320)
795 (365)
825 (375)
860 (395)
890 (405)
920 (420)
1020 (463)
AP1 CONTROLLER
• Mitsubishi programmable controller with monochrome
touch-screen interface
• Integral PID temperature control and safety for process
and regeneration
• Audible and visual alarm
• Diagnostics
• Material over-drying protection (process temperature
setback based on a rise in return air temperature)
• “Auto Start” timer
• Quick disconnect receptacles for interface of
conveying components
MATERIAL HANDLING
Temperature Range
ºC
ºF
180-300
71-149
Insulated Drying Hopper Capacity
cu. ft.
kg
liters
lbs.
0.85
25
30
14
1.7
50
60
27
1.7
50
60
27
3.0
85
100
45
4.0
110
150
68
3.0
85
100
45
4.0
110
150
68
6.0
170
200
90
9.0
250
300
90
CONVEYING PACKAGES
Package
A
Features
MACHINE LOADING
• Machine loading control
• Closed-loop dry air conveying to process machine
• SRI Series stainless steel sight glass receiver for machine
B
DRYING HOPPER LOADING
• Conveying system fills the drying hopper instead of the
process machine
• Includes SRC02 material receiver with hose and pick-up wand;
1.5 FCO open loop standard take-off on hopper discharge
C
MACHINE & DRYING HOPPER LOADING
• Uses all of the above features to convey to both the
drying hopper and the machine
D
2 MACHINES & DRYING HOPPER LOADING
• Self-contained system to load drying hopper and two machines
BP
DRYING HOPPER LOADING WITH PROPORTIONING VALVE
• Loading drying hopper from 2 different sources using a
proportioning valve
CP
• Uses the features of System BP and will convey to one machine
DP
• Uses the features of System BP and will convey to two
machines using a proportioning valve
26
NOMAD PORTABLE DRYING SYSTEMS
MATERIAL HANDLING
90-225 CFM (150-380 m3/hr)
Nomad™ portable drying systems provide complete drying and conveying
in one compact, portable package. These units automatically convey on
demand while providing closed loop drying.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Integrated control interface provides status of drying and conveying
functions. Also allows simple start-up, shutdown, and change of
• “Off-the-shelf” programmable controller controls drying and
conveying functions
• PID temperature controller provides LED readout of set point and
actual process temperature
• Digital dew point indicator displays “actual dew point” and “high
dew point” alarm settings
• Sightglass material receiver for minimal inventory on the process
machine
• Insulated drying hopper with sight glass and slide gate. Large
cleanout door on hoppers
Nomad™ PD-3 Level C
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Stainless steel flex hose (required when conveying
materials above 250ºF)
• Individual visual dirty filter indicator
• Remote proportioning valve mounted to vacuum
receiver to fill drying hopper
• SRL and SLC hopper loader to fill drying hopper
proportioning/non-proportioning
• SRL control mounting bracket
• Stainless steel drying hoppers (SD12, SD17, and
SD23)
• Single power connection point with electrical disconnect on
control cabinet
• SD6.0 and SD9.0 stainless steel drying hoppers
• SD12, SD17, and SD23 carbon steel drying hoppers
27
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
PD-2A
PD-2C
PD-2B
Dryer Process Air Flow
cfm
m3/hr
90
150
90
90
PD-3
100
PD-4B
150
PD-4A
PD-4C
150
225
MATERIAL HANDLING
Amp Draw
150
24
150
24
170
250
250
380
Voltage
6.0
24
9.0
27
460/3/60
38
38
Level A
Level B
Drying Hopper
Loading Only
• Indicator lights and display provide status of desiccant bed
regeneration heaters, process and regeneration blowers,
and material loading system
• Switch on dewpoint demand
• Dryer process auto shutdown sequence
12.0
liters
lbs.
kg
250
300
135
400
181
170
200
340
400
340
340
400
480
600
650
800
90
181
181
272
363
All features listed above plus:
• Machine loader convey station control
Machine Loading Only • Closed-loop dry air conveying to process
• SRI Series stainless steel sight glass receiver
• Digital dewpoint indication with customer-adjustable high
dewpoint alarm set point and LED readout of actual process
dewpoint
• Alarm indication includes: high temperature process air, high
temperature regeneration air, and high dewpoint (dirty filter
alarm optional)
12.0
23.0
NOMAD™ SERIES CONTROL
(DUAL BLOWER DRYER MODEL SHOWN)
• 1/16 DIN temperature controller with LED readout of process
air actual and set point temperature
12.0
17.0
48
• “Off-the-shelf” PLC control of drying and conveying functions
• Independent operation of dryer and conveying control circuits
cu. ft.
Insulated Drying Hopper Size
Level C
All features listed above, with the following modifications:
• Drying hopper loader fills the drying hopper in lieu of
machine loader
• Includes SRC02 material receiver with hose and pickup
wand 1.5" (38mm) FCO open loop standard take-off on
discharge of drying hopper
All features listed above, including both machine
loader and drying hopper loader plus:
Machine Loading and • Machine loader convey station with closed loop dry air
convey and SRI sight glass vacuum receiver
Dryer Hopper Loading
• Drying hopper loader with SRC02 material vacuum
receiver and 1.5" (38mm) OD pickup wand with hose
28
HA SERIES HOT AIR DRYERS
MATERIAL HANDLING
HA Series Hot Air Dryers feature a single blower that provides heated air to
dry non-hygroscopic materials. Set point process temperature control to
300ºF (149ºC). 60-1500 CFM (102-2548 m3/hr) airflow available.
HA Series Hot Air Dryers include one 12-foot length of high temperature
flexible dryer hose. HA Series dryers should be used in conjunction with an
appropriately-sized drying hopper.
STANDARD FEATURES
HA Small Series Dryer
• Regenerative (60/150/260 cfm) or centrifugal blower (525/1000/
1250/1500 cfm)
• NEMA 1, standard 460/3/60 control panel
• Built-in high-temperature safety
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Set point process temperature control to 300ºF (149ºC)
• Casters
• One 12 foot (3.6 m) length of high temperature dryer hose
• 208/3/60, 230/3/60, 380/3/50, 415/3/50, or 575/3/60
• Inlet air filter
• Process heater burnout indicator
• “Cabinet style” enclosure with casters on 60/150/260/525
cfm models
• Redundant process air safety
• Electrical non-fused disconnect
29
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL HANDLING
Max Process
Airflow,
cfm (m3/hr)
Hose Con. Dia.,
in. (mm)
HA-150
150 (250)
2 (64)
46 (1168)
HA-450
525 (900)
5 (127)
Model
HA-60
HA-225
60 (100)
2 (64)
Length, in. (mm) Width, in. (mm) Height, in. (mm)
34 (864)
29 (737)
46 (1168)
22 (559)
22 (559)
42 (1067)
37 (940)
50 (1270)
87 (2210)
74 (1880)
42 (1067)
260 (450)
4 (102)
HA-1000
1000 (1700)
6 (152)
74 (1880)
HA-1500
1500 (2550)
8 (203)
55 (1397)
HA-1250
1250 (2100)
8 (203)
33 (838)
42 (1067)
65 (1651)
42 (1067)
81 (2057)
81 (2057)
80 (2032)
Shipping weight,
lbs. (kg)
225 (102)
275 (125)
300 (136)
650 (295)
1180 (536)
1275 (580)
1350 (614)
HA Large Series Dryer
30
SD SERIES SMALL DRYING HOPPERS
MATERIAL HANDLING
0.40-9.0 CU. FT. (11-250 LITER)
SD Series drying hoppers are available in machine-mount and floor-mount
configurations. They feature unique mass-flow design, full hopper insulation,
slide-gate shut off, and a large access door for easy clean out. The
adjustable quick release clamps allow for easy cleanout.
STANDARD FEATURES
SD Series Drying Hoppers
• Unique mass flow design
• Stainless steel construction (inside and out)
• Hinged access door (3.0 cu. ft. [85 liter] and larger models)
(Hinged access door on 1.7 cu. ft. [50 liter] is optional and is
not available on 0.85 cu. ft. [25 liter])
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Slide gate
• Handle kit with casters for floor stand (SD 0.40 - SD
9.0 floor-mount models only)
• Floor stand (less casters)
• Dual-wall insulated cylinder and cone section
• Extended length sight glass on the hopper door
• Cart to mount 1 drying hopper and 1 AD/ASD/AC/ACM
Series dryer
• Cover selections: SRC/SLC, SRH/SRL, manual fill,
or blank
• Hopper loader mounting bracket
• Gaylord fill stand, including slide gate. Requires 50”
(127 cm) clearance
• Adjustable proximity switch
• Flange with special mounting holes
• Cover with special bolt pattern
• Drain port (standard for machine mount units)1
1 Not
31
available on SD 0.4 model
AIR INLET/OUTLET TUBE SIZES
SD0.40
1.5
(38)
Tube Size
in. (mm)
DIMENSIONS: MACHINE MOUNT
Drying
Hopper
SD-0.40
SD-0.85
SD-1.7
SD-3.0
SD-4.0
SD-6.0
SD-9.0
A, in.
B, in.
18
25
34
38
44
56
68
Model
11
14
14
22
22
22
22
SD0.40
SD0.85
2.5
(64)
C, in.
1.5
2 1/2
2 1/2
2 1/2
2 1/2
2 1/2
2 1/2
MATERIAL HANDLING
SD1.7
2.5
(64)
SD3.0
2.5
(64)
SD4.0
2.5
(64)
SD6.0
2.5
(64)
SD9.0
2.5
(64)
D, in.
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
SD0.85 SD1.7 SD3.0 SD4.0 SD6.0 SD9.0
E: Height,
31
40
44
50
62
74
N/A1
in. (cm)
(79)
(102) (112) (127) (158) (188)
F: Diameter,
9 (22.9)
12 (30.5)
20 (50.8)
in. (cm)
H: Square flange 4 x 5.5
dimensions,
7 x 7 (178 x 178)
(102 x140)
in. (mm)
J: Material
discharge dia.,
2 (5.0)
2 (5.0) 2 (5.0) 3 (7.6) 3 (7.6) 3 (7.6) 3 (7.6)
in. (cm)
1 Machine mount adapter not available for SD0.4 model
PORTABLE CARTS
SD-3.0 to SD-9.0
SD-0.40 to SD-1.7
F
Portable carts are available to mount one drying hopper to an AD,
ACM or ASD cabinet-style dryer.
Mounting Flange
H
4" diameter heavy-duty casters are standard on portable carts.
Specify square slide gate with or without 10” TOC adapter.
E
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
H
J
• Smooth surface
• No material hangups
• Easy to clean
Front View
• Large access door with
sight glass
32
SDSERIESMEZZANINE MOUNT DRYING HOPPERS
MATERIAL HANDLING
SD SERIES MEZZANINE MOUNT DRYING HOPPERS
12-425 CU. FT. (340-12,035 LITER)
Standard models are constructed of insulated carbon steel and contain
no material hang-up points with solid internal walls. Value-added standard
equipment includes heavy duty slide gate, convenient lifting lugs and
hopper cover. No gaskets are used in the SD hoppers, which allows for a
precision, laser cut door.
STANDARD FEATURES
SD Series Drying Hopper
• Carbon steel construction with aluminum cover on the outside
• Integral welded carbon steel frame
• 2” (5 cm) fiberglass insulation
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Inlet/outlet tube stubs should be specified when ordering
• Sensors, less controls: Single level RF-style sensor
115 or 230V; dual level RF-style sensor 115 or 230V;
demand level sensor 115V
• Hinged access door with long sight glass
• Stainless steel construction inside and out
• Slide gate
• Drain port
• Air-operated discharge slide gate with 4” material
tube stub, less controls
• Adapter to mount SRC 30/60 vacuum receiver onto
SD 12-45 hopper models
33
SDSERIESMEZZANINE MOUNT DRYING HOPPERS
DIMENSIONS
Size,
cu. ft. (l)
12 (340)
17 (481)
23 (651)
30 (850)
45 (1274)
60 (1699)
75 (2124)
90 (2549)
135 (3823)
180 (5097)
240 (6796)
300 (8495)
425 (12,035)
Model
SD12
SD17
SD23
SD30
SD45
SD60
SD75
SD90
SD135
SD180
SD240
SD300
SD425
Weight,
lbs. (kg)
420 (191)
595 (270)
805 (365)
1050 (476)
1575 (714)
2100 (953)
2625 (1191)
3150 (1429)
4725 (2143)
6300 (2858)
8400 (3810)
10,500 (4763)
14,875 (6747)
Note: All dimensions are in inches
A
B
24
24
30
30
30
40
40
50
50
64
64
74
74
28
28
34
34
34
44
44
54
54
68
68
78
78
C
11
11
11
11
49
15
36
23
52
63
92
75
114
D
68
88
81
99
137
120
141
126
163
156
185
186
225
E
3
3
3
3
3
5
5
8
8
8
10
10
10
F
3
3
3
3
3
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
G
10
10
10
10
10
16 1/4
16 1/4
16 1/4
16 1/4
16 1/4
16 1/4
16 1/4
16 1/4
MATERIAL HANDLING
H
9
9
9
9
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
J
10 1/8
10 1/8
10 1/8
10 1/8
17 1/8
17 1/8
17 1/8
17 1/8
17 1/8
17 1/8
17 1/8
17 1/8
17 1/8
NOTES:
To calculate full weight capacity, multiply hopper
volume in cu. ft. (liters) by the bulk density in lbs.
per cu. ft. (Kg/cu. m) of the material being used.
Weight shown is for insulated floor-mount
models. Weights for other model configurations
may vary.
To calculate maximum operating weight,
calculate maximum total weight capacity and add
to dry hopper weight.
To calculate maximum footpad weight, calculate
the maximum operating weight and divide by 4
(number of footpads).
BOLT PLACEMENT
Model
SD12
SD17
SD23
SD30
SD45
SD60
SD75
SD90
SD135
SD180
SD240
SD300
SD425
A
1/4-20
1/4-20
1/4-20
1/4-20
1/4-20
1/4-20
1/4-20
1/4-20
1/4-20
1/4-20
1/4-20
1/4-20
1/4-20
B
6
6
6
6
6
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
C
11
11
11
11
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
D
10-1/8
10-1/8
10-1/8
10-1/8
14-1/8
14-1/8
14-1/8
14-1/8
14-1/8
14-1/8
14-1/8
14-1/8
14-1/8
E
28
28
34
34
34
44
44
54
54
68
68
78
78
F
5/8
5/8
5/8
5/8
5/8
5/8
5/8
5/8
5/8
5/8
5/8
5/8
5/8
G
23
23
29
29
29
39
39
49
49
63
63
73
73
34
SD SERIES FLOOR MOUNT DRYING HOPPERS
MATERIAL HANDLING
12-425 CU. FT. (340-12,035 LITER)
Standard models are constructed of insulated carbon steel and contain
no material hang-up points with solid internal walls. Value-added standard
equipment includes heavy duty slide gate, convenient lifting lugs and
hopper cover. No gaskets are used in the SD hoppers, which allows for a
precision, laser cut door.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Carbon steel construction with aluminum cover on the outside
SD Series Drying Hopper
• Integral welded carbon steel frame
• 2” (5 cm) fiberglass insulation
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Inlet/outlet tube stubs should be specified when ordering
• Sensors, less controls: Single level RF-style sensor
115 or 230V; dual level RF-style sensor 115 or 230V;
demand level sensor 115V
• Hinged access door with long sight glass
• Stainless steel construction inside and out
• Slide gate
• Drain port
• Air-operated discharge slide gate, less controls
• Adapter to mount SRC 30/60 vacuum receiver onto
SD 12-45 hopper models
35
DIMENSIONS
Model
SD12
SD17
SD23
SD30
SD45
SD60
SD75
SD90
SD135
SD180
SD240
SD300
SD425
Size,
cu. ft. (l)
12 (340)
17 (481)
23 (651)
30 (850)
45 (1274)
60 (1699)
75 (2124)
90 (2549)
135 (3823)
180 (5097)
240 (6796)
300 (8495)
425 (12,035)
Weight,
lbs. (kg)
420 (191)
595 (270)
805 (365)
1050 (476)
1575 (714)
2100 (953)
2625 (1191)
3150 (1429)
4725 (2143)
6300 (2858)
8400 (3810)
10,500 (4763)
14,875 (6747)
A
24
24
30
30
30
40
40
50
50
64
64
74
74
FLOOR STAND DIMENSIONS
Model
SD12
SD17
SD23
SD30
SD45
SD60
SD75
SD90
SD135
SD180
SD240
SD300
SD425
A
24
24
30
30
30
40
40
50
50
64
64
74
74
AA
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
68
68
78
78
BOLT PLACEMENT
Model
SD12
SD17
SD23
SD30
SD45
SD60
SD75
SD90
SD135
SD180
SD240
SD300
SD425
A
1/4-20
1/4-20
1/4-20
1/4-20
1/4-20
1/4-20
1/4-20
1/4-20
1/4-20
1/4-20
1/4-20
1/4-20
1/4-20
B
6
6
6
6
6
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
B
BB
C
11
11
11
11
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
D
10-1/8
10-1/8
10-1/8
10-1/8
14-1/8
14-1/8
14-1/8
14-1/8
14-1/8
14-1/8
14-1/8
14-1/8
14-1/8
28
28
34
34
34
44
44
54
54
68
68
78
78
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
74
74
84
84
B
28
28
34
34
34
44
44
54
54
68
68
78
78
C
11
11
11
11
49
15
36
23
52
63
92
75
114
D
68
88
81
99
137
120
141
126
163
156
185
186
225
E
3
3
3
3
3
5
5
8
8
8
10
10
10
D
D
E
(Std) (Gaylord) (Std)
25
52
28
25
52
28
25
52
28
25
52
28
25
52
28
25
52
28
25
52
28
25
52
28
25
52
28
25
52
28
25
52
28
25
52
28
25
52
28
E
28
28
34
34
34
44
44
54
54
68
68
78
78
F
5/8
5/8
5/8
5/8
5/8
5/8
5/8
5/8
5/8
5/8
5/8
5/8
5/8
F
3
3
3
3
3
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
G
10
10
10
10
10
16 1/4
16 1/4
16 1/4
16 1/4
16 1/4
16 1/4
16 1/4
16 1/4
MATERIAL HANDLING
H
9
9
9
9
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
J
10 1/8
10 1/8
10 1/8
10 1/8
17 1/8
17 1/8
17 1/8
17 1/8
17 1/8
17 1/8
17 1/8
17 1/8
17 1/8
E
(Gaylord)
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
G
23
23
29
29
29
39
39
49
49
63
63
73
73
Hoppers w/
Gaylord Fill Stands
36
MH SERIES MACHINE HOPPERS
MATERIAL HANDLING
AEC’s MH Series machine hopper loaders offer a unique mass flow and
compact design. MH machine hoppers can be insulated or non-insulated
(0.85 and 1.7 cu. ft. models only) and have a hinged access door (3.0 cu.ft
and larger models) for easy access and maintenance.
MH Series Machine Hopper
STANDARD FEATURES
• Compact design
• Hinged access door (3.0 cu. ft. [85 liters] and larger models)
• Slide gate
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Stainless steel construction
• Insulated construction (0.85 and 1.7 cu. ft.models [25 and
50 liter] only)
• Premium machine-mount slide gate
• Flange transition, 7” to 4” square
• Easy-view Lexan® sight glass
• Drawer magnet with slide gate; 0.85 to 6.0 cu. ft.
(25 to 170 liters) (7” x 7” square flange)
• Adjustable quick-release clamp design
• Blank cover
• Cover selections available for mounting various loaders
configurations
• Manual fill cover
• Vacuum hopper cover
• Manual fill cover
37
DIMENSIONS
Model
Capacity (cu. ft./l)
Square flange
Insulated dia., in. (mm)
0.85*
0.85/25
1.7*
1.7/50
14 (356)
14 (356)
* Consult factory for non-insulated supply hoppers
MATERIAL HANDLING
MHx.x
1.7 w/ door
1.7/50
7” x 7” (178 x 178 mm)
16 (406)
38
3.0
3.0/85
6.0
6.0/170
22 (559)
22 (559)
CDS SERIES CENTRAL DRYING SYSTEMS
MATERIAL HANDLING
AEC’s Central Drying Systems feature an energy-efficient design that
reduces material changeover times, saving space, energy and labor costs.
AEC’s central drying systems are custom designed to enable our customers
to dry several different resins or different colors at the same time using one
central dry with multiple hoppers. Systems capacities range from 5 to 6,000
lbs./hr (2.27-2,722 kg/hr).
CDS Series Central Drying Systems
STANDARD FEATURES
• Unique mass flow design drying hoppers
• Rugged construction
• Isolation valve
• Compact design
• For use with 15-3000 cfm (25-5100 m3/hr) dryers and 0.85-9.0
cu. ft. (25-250 m3/hr) stainless steel drying hoppers or 12-45
cu. ft. (340-1275 m3/hr) stainless steel or carbon steel drying
hoppers (sold separately)
• Carts available in 1-, 2-, or 3-hopper configurations for maximum
flexibility
• Delivery and return air manifold
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• 0.85-9.0 cu. ft. (25-250 liter) stainless steel drying
hoppers
• 12-45 cu. ft. (340-1275 liter) stainless steel or carbon
steel drying hoppers
• 15-3000 cfm (25-5100 m3/hr) dehumidifying dryers
• Air heat booster
• Heat directly at the drying hopper with complete
flexibility of temperature settings
• Air booster
• Material miser valve
• Purge and dry air conveying
• Bypass valve
• Insulated delivery air manifold
39
SPECIFICATIONS
Cart
CRT-1
CRT-2
CRT-3
CRT-4
CRT-5
CRT-6
For larger hoppers, consult factory
# of hoppers
2
3
2
3
1
2
MATERIAL HANDLING
Drying hoppers, cu. ft. (liter)
0.85-1.7 (25-50)
0.85-1.7 (25-50)
0.85-9.0 (25-250)
0.85-9.0 (25-250)
12-45 (340-1275)
12-45 (340-1275)
Depth, in. (D)
34
34
34
34
48
48
Width, in. (W)
49
69
59
89
46
86
BENEFITS
• Allows for quick mold changes by changing the material
conveying route from one hopper to the next without having
to empty and clean the hopper
• Reduces material inventory at the machine and reduces the
chances of the material gaining moisture
• Reduces chances of accidents on the shop floor because the
hopper is no longer located on top of the processing machine
• For use with 15-3000 cfm (25-5100 m3/hr) dryers and 0.85-9.0
cu. ft. (25-250 liter) stainless steel drying hoppers or 12-45
cu. ft. (340-1275 liter) stainless steel or carbon steel (sold
separately)
• Carts available in 1-, 2-, or 3-hopper configurations for
maximum flexibility
40
APK SERIES RESIN CRYSTALLIZER
MATERIAL HANDLING
AEC crystallizers convert amorphous plastics into a semi-crystalline state
so that a subsequent drying sequence is possible. In the process, the
material is heated and kept moving constantly (using an agitator) during the
crystallization phase. This prevents the clumping of the material during
crystallization. The system is operated by a microprocessor control system.
STANDARD FEATURES
Crystallizer System
• Stainless steel contact surfaces
• Enlarged access for cleaning
• Microprocessor control system
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Special advanced start-up sequence
• Pre-programmed crystallization time
• Exhaust filter/separator for processing of dusty
materials
• Automatic inlet valve
• V24 printer interface
• Filling level indicator for high-level
• Safety temperature limiter on heater
• Even, optimum degree of crystallization due to horizontal agitator
• Designed for continuous material processing
41
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
APK 50
APK 200
APK 400
APK 600
APK 1000
APK 2000
CF = Consult factory
MATERIAL HANDLING
A, in. (mm)
B, in. (mm)
50.8 (1290
63.0 (1600)
72.8 (1850)
72.8 (1850)
CF
CF
74.8 (1900)
94.5 (2400)
109.4 (2780)
125.2 (3180)
CF
CF
C, in. (mm)
31.5 (800)
50.4 (1280)
58.7 (1490)
58.7 (1490)
CF
CF
PERFORMANCE
• Maximum throughput of 1.87 lbs./l (0.85 kg/l)
APK 50: 176 lbs./hr (80 kg/hr)
APK 200: 661 lbs./hr (300 kg/hr)
APK 400: 1323 lbs./hr (600 kg/hr)
APK 600: 1764 lbs./hr (800 kg/hr)
• Voltage 460/3/60 (Other voltages available. Consult factory.)
• Power consumption
APK 50: 4 kW
APK 200: 19 kW
APK 400: 34 kW
APK 600: 40 kW
• Larger models are available - consult factory
42
CL SERIES RESIN CRYSTALLIZER
MATERIAL HANDLING
AEC’s CL Series crystallizers are used to crystallize amorphous material
in a continuous process. Slow speed agitation of the material prevents
agglomeration and minimizes product degradation.
CL Series resin crystallizers are engineered for each application. Consult
factory for lead time and price. All gasket material is capable of
withstanding process air temperatures in excess of 350ºF.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Agitated hopper with floor stand
• High temperature (400ºF maximum) blower and heater assembly
• Fully insulated, mild steel hopper
Crystallizer System
• Hinged door with sight glass
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• High and low level sensors
• Dust collection system (in addition to cyclone)
• Safety interlocks on door shut down agitator
• Gas-fired air heater
• Mid-level thermocouple
• Heavy-duty drive and agitator arm assembly designed for 5 rpm
• Rotary air lock
• Stainless steel hopper construction
• Mezzanine mount hopper
• Dual hinged access doors
• Additional sight glass
• Surge hopper with high level shut down
• Mid-level sensor
• Duct work for typical installation
• Additional thermocouple (specify position)
• Relay control logic
• 460/3/60
• Requires positive shut-off vacuum receiver to load crystallizer
• Two position take-off box is required
43
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
CL 90
CL 180
CL 270
CL 450
CL 660
CL 900
CL 1350
CL 1800
CL 2700
CL 4000
CF = Consult factory
Max. Throughput, lbs./hr
90
180
270
450
660
900
1350
1800
2700
4000
MATERIAL HANDLING
Hopper Capacity, cu. ft. (liter)
5 (140)
10 (285)
15 (425)
25 (710)
37 (1050)
50 (1415)
75 (2125)
100 (2830)
150 (4250)
CF
44
Dryer Size, CFM (m3/hr)
85 (145)
185 (315)
255 (430)
400 (680)
600 (1015)
750 (1270)
1200 (2035)
1500 (2550)
2700 (4580)
N/A
Duct Size, in.
4
4
4
6
6
6
8
8
10
N/A
PNEUMATIC CONVEYORS
MATERIAL HANDLING
500, 1000, AND 2000 SERIES PNEUMATIC CONVEYORS
AEC Pneumatic Conveyors are available as free-standing machine side
loaders, granulator unloaders (1050 Series) and horizontal pick-up conveyors.
The 500 Series is designed to convey 300 to 500 lbs. (136-227 kg) per
hour over short distances. The 1000 Series is recommended for larger
material particle sizes and conveying rates up to 1000 lbs. (455 kg) per
hour. The 2000 Series will convey up to 1900 lbs. (864 kg) per hour. Some
models feature automatic conveying controls, which monitor material supply.
If material is needed, the unit conveys until the machine hopper is full.
Model 500 Model 506 Model 1000 Model 1006
Model 1050 Model 1052 Model 2002 Model 2006
STANDARD FEATURES
• Models 500, 506, 1000, 1006, 2002, and 2006 are fitted with
stationary vertical pick-up tubes. All pick-up tubes are held in
place by a flexible grommet to speed container changes
• Model 2000 and 2001 feature a horizontal material pickup
arrangement to remove virgin or regrind materials from the
bottom of surge bins
• The AEC Series 1050 offers low cost granulator unloading of
material with particle sizes up to 3/8" (9.5 mm). They include
the manually operated Model 1050, and granulator interlocked
Model 1052. These compact units provide a constant removal of
granulate from collection bins on granulators and auger grinders
• 115/1/60 or 230/1/60 operating voltage on automatic models
45
Model 2000
OPTIONAL FEATURES
Model 2001
• An optional filter cone attachment is available for all
AEC Pneumatics to help prevent “dusting” of granular
materials
PNEUMATIC CONVEYORS
SPECIFICATIONS
Model Type
500
506
1000
1006
1050
1052
2000
2001
2002
2006
Conv. Capacity,
lbs./hr (kg/hr)1
Max.
Max.
Conv. Dist., Vert. Lift,
ft. (m)2
ft. (m)
Vert. 300-500 (136-227)
100 (30)
Vert. 300-500 (136-227)
100 (30)
Vert. 700-1000 (318-455)
125 (38)
Vert. 700-1000 (318-455)
125 (38)
Gran.
750 (341)
10-15 (3-5)
Gran.
750 (341)
10-15 (3-5)
Horiz. 1700-1900 (773-864) 150 (45)
Horiz. 1700-1900 (773-864)
Vert. 1700-1900 (773-864)
Vert. 1700-1900 (773-864)
150 (45)
150 (45)
150 (45)
20 (6)
20 (6)
25 (8)
25 (8)
20 (6)
25 (8)
20 (6)
25 (8)
30 (10)
30 (10)
Air Supply
Line,
in. (mm)
3/8 (9.5)
3/8 (9.5)
3/8 (9.5)
3/8 (9.5)
3/8 (9.5)
3/8 (9.5)
1/2 (12.7)
1/2 (12.7)
1/2 (12.7)
1/2 (12.7)
MATERIAL HANDLING
CFM
(cmh)
7 (12)
7 (12)
10 (17)
10 (17)
10 (17)
10 (17)
35 (60)
35 (60)
35 (60)
35 (60)
Supply Mtl. Line OD,
PSI (Min.) in. (mm)
80
80
90
90
80
80
90
90
90
90
1 1/8 (28 1/8)
1 1/8 (28 1/8)
1 1/2 (38)
1 1/2 (38)
1 1/2 (38)
1 1/2 (38)
2 (51)
2 (51)
2 (51)
2 (51)
1 Conveying capacity is based on virgin polystyrene over 10' (3m) vertical and 10' (3m) horizontal distance.
Material size and flow characteristics as well as greater distances will affect the rates listed above.
2 Distances vertically or horizontally longer than those noted will cause a drop in conveying capacity.
Mtl. Particle
Ship Wt.,
Size,
Operation
lbs. (kg)
in. (mm)
1/4 (6)
1/4 (6)
5/16 (8)
5/16 (8)
3/8 (9.5)
3/8 (9.5)
3/8 (9.5)
3/8 (9.5)
3/8 (9.5)
3/8 (9.5)
Manual
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
100 (45)
119 (54)
104 (47)
120 (55)
50 (23)
50 (23)
80 (36)
120 (55)
120 (55)
140 (63)
DIMENSIONS
Granulator Series 1050 (mm)
A
7 1/2" (190)
B
3" (76)
C
3 1/2" (89)
D
1" (25)
E
6" (152)
F
7" (178)
G
8 1/4" (210)
H
6 1/4" (159)
I
4" (102)
J
5" (127)
Horizontal Pick-Up
Conveyors (mm)
A
48" (1219)
B
9" (229)
C
11" (279)
D
6 1/4" (159)
Series
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
46
Vertical Series (mm)
500
1000
47" (1194) 48 1/2" (1232)
68" (1727)
72" (1829)
8'-4" (1930) 9'-3" (2819)
10'-6" (3200) 11'-6" (3505)
14'-7" (4445) 14'-7" (4445)
8" (203)
8" (203)
10'-1" (3073) 12'-2" (3708)
8'-3" (2515) 9'-11" (3023)
5'-1" (1549) 6'-2" (1880)
2000
49" (1245)
72" (1829)
9'-3" (2819)
11'-6" (3505)
14'-7" (4445)
8" (203)
12'-2" (3708)
9'-11" (3023)
6'-2" (1880)
SRL, SLC AND SRIL HOPPER LOADERS
MATERIAL HANDLING
SRL, SLC and SRIL loaders are used to convey material into the processing
machine from storage containers or from nearby storage containers. The
SRL01 is used for virgin material and clean additives only. The SLC02-16
models can be used to convey virgin and regrind materials. The modular
design allows these units to be economically reconfigured to accommodate
future production requirements. For visual monitoring of material flow,
Pyrex™ sight glass models are also available. Sight glass assemblies are
equipped with an adjustable proximity sensor to ensure full material
discharge on each cycle.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Brushed stainless steel construction with stainless steel product
contact surfaces
• 3/8” high flow blowback valve with electrical quick disconnect
• Accumulator tank on SLC02/04
SLC Hopper Loader
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• 1.5” OD material inlet
• Removable inlets on 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, and 1.6 cu. ft. (6, 11, 23, and
45 liter) models
• Material demand/level sensor
• Hopper-mounted junction box with 12 feet (3.6 m) of cable to a
field-mounted 115/1/60 control box
• Aluminum pickup wand with ten feet (3 m) of flexible vinyl
hose and two hose clamps
• 230/1/50 or 230/1/60
• Series One Plus Controller (not available on SRL01
model. This option is required when RPV
proportioning valve is used)
• High-temperature (400º F) silicone discharge throat
gasket (available for SLC style loaders only)
• White neoprene discharge throat gasket: 180ºF
(available for SLC style loaders only)
• Nylon filter in lieu of standard polyester recommended for dusty, non-abrasive regrind
material
• 9-foot (2.7 m) power cord
• Glazed polyester reinforced flat filter
• High-performance centrifugal motor with electrical quick
disconnect (optional)
• Series One Plus models include a proximity level sensor for
volume filling, built-in proportioning, control capacity, and a batch
counter; RPV available separately
47
• Remote proportioning valve with 1 aluminum pickup
wand, 10’ of flexible hose, O-ring coupler, 2 hose
clamps, and cable assembly RPV connection to
Series One Plus controller. 1.5” O.D. inlet/outlet tube;
115/1/60 or 230/1/60 voltage. Hopper mount is
standard; wall mount or floor stand are also available
• Sight glass with proximity sensor for minimum
inventory on molding machine, with square flange
MATERIAL HANDLING
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
SRL01
SRIL01
SLC02
SRIL02
SLC04
SRIL04
SLC08
SLC16
Hopper
Capacity,
cu. ft. (l)
0.1 (2.8)
0.1 (2.8)
0.2 (5.6)
0.2 (5.6)
0.4 (11.3)
0.4 (11.3)
0.8 (22)
1.6 (45)
Hopper Capacity,
lbs. (kg)
FLA
3.5 (1.5)
3.5 (1.5)
7.0 (3.1)
7.0 (3.1)
14.0 (6.3)
14.0 (6.3)
28 (12.7)
56 (25.4)
11
11
10
10
10
11
10
10
Shipping
Weight,
lbs. (kg)
47 (22)
50 (23)
65 (30)
70 (32)
67 (31)
72 (33)
75 (34)
80 (36)
Throughput non-proportioning
lbs./hr (kg/hr)*
150 (68)
150 (68)
500 (227)
500 (227)
1000 (454)
1000 (454)
1500 (680)
1700 (771)
Throughput proportioning,
lbs./hr (Kg/hr)*
N/A
N/A
400 (181)
400 (181)
800 (363)
800 (363)
1200 (544)
1350 (612)
* Maximum throughput beside-the-press loading; includes 12’ vertical lift. Rates decrease as horizontal distance increases.
DIMENSIONS
F
D
B A
A
C
4.125 dia.
.312
dia hole
H
J
K
120
TYP.
(12 places,
equally
12
dia.
spaced
on a 11”
2 dia.
dia. B.C.)
F
C
D
B
C
E
B
17.16 (44)
18.89 (48)
24.11 (61)
30.25 (77)
36.5 (93)
C
6.375 (16)
5.5 (14)
11.5 (29)
10.5 (27)
17.75 (45)
Model
SRIL01
SRIL02
SRIL04
SRIL Dimensions, in. (cm)
A
B
C
D
E
G
27.625 (70)
17 (43) 6.375 (16) 1.75 (4) 4 (10) 2 (5)
35.25 (90) 19.5 (50) 9.125 (23) 3 (8) 7 (18) 3.5 (9)
41.25 (105) 25.75 (65) 9.125 (23) 3 (8) 7 (18) 3.5 (9)
1) 5/16” (8 mm) dia. holes; 2 places, equally spaced
2) 5/18” (7 mm) dia. holes; 4 places equally spaced
4) 0.281” (7.1 mm) dia. holes; 4 places equally spaced
SRIL 01
SRIL 02, 04
SRL and SLC Dimensions, in. (cm)
D
E
F
H1
12 (31)
1.75 (4)
6.375 (16)
5.5 (14)
12 (31)
4 (10)
9.125 (23)
N/A
12 (31)
4 (10)
9.125 (23)
N/A
12 (31)
4 (10)
14.125 (36)
N/A
12 (31)
4 (10)
14.125 (36)
N/A
A
24.625 (63)
24.64 (63)
29.875 (76)
36 (92)
42.25 (107)
B
E
SRL01
Model
SRL01
SLC02
SLC04
SLC08
SLC16
A
I
L
SLC 02, 04, 06, 08, 16
Sight Glass
Capacity,
lbs. (kg)
N/A
0.68 (0.31)
N/A
3.25 (1.48)
N/A
3.25 (1.48)
N/A
N/A
SLC Flange
SRL Flange
I
Sight Glass
Capacity,
cu. ft. (l)
N/A
0.02 (0.57)
N/A
0.09 (2.55)
N/A
0.09 (2.55)
N/A
N/A
H
1.25 (3)
2.75 (7)
2.75 (7)
48
I2
6.8125 (17)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
H
J
G
E
Square Flange
J3
11 (28)
11 (28)
11 (28)
11 (28)
11 (28)
K
4.75 (12)
4.75 (12)
4.125 (11)
4.125 (11)
4.125 (11)
L
6.75 (17)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
3) 1/4” (6.3 mm) dia. holes; 6 places equally spaced (J is standard pattern)
I4
2.5 (6)
5.5 (14)
5.5 (14)
J
2 (5)
3 (8)
3 (8)
PHL POWDER HOPPER LOADER
MATERIAL HANDLING
PHL POWDER HOPPER LOADER
AEC’s PHL Powder Hopper Loader is used to convey free-flowing powder
materials like PVC and PE from gaylords to machine hoppers, blenders, or
surge bins. This unit can also be used to convey free-flowing dusty regrind.
Model PHL-50
STANDARD FEATURES
• SR style vacuum receiver with stainless steel construction
• Counter-weighted flapper assembly
• Twin bag filter assembly (acrylic-lined filter media)
• High flow blowback valve with accumulator and electrical quick
disconnect
• 1.5” OD tangential material inlet
• Hopper-mounted junction box
• Remote control box with 10’ cable
• High-performance, three-stage centrifugal motor with electrical
quick disconnect
• 9-foot power cord
• Series One controller
• Dual tube aluminum pick-up wand with 10 feet of vinyl hose and
two 2 hose clamps
• Sound enclosure
Note: Unit must ship by truck; unit is too tall for UPS
49
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• 230/1/50 or 230/1/60
PHL POWDER HOPPER LOADERS
SPECIFICATIONS: PHL 50
MATERIAL HANDLING
Inlet/outlet range, in. (mm)
1.5 (38)
Mounting flange dimensions
12” diameter with 11” bolt circle
Height, in. (mm)
51 (1295)
Hopper capacity, lbs. (kg)
50 (22)
Maximum throughput*, lbs./hr (kg/hr)
1000 (454)
Width, in. (mm)
26 (660)
120 (55)
* Maximum throughput beside-the-machine loading - includes 12-foot vertical lift with 1.5” OD flexible hose conveying free-flowing powder weighing 37 lbs./cu. ft.
BLOWBACK SYSTEM
SERIES ONE CONTROLLER
Series One Controller
features on/off operator
control with visual indicator.
Adjustable time filling
provides up to 1000 lbs./hr.
Accumulator blowback
with large solenoid assures
maximum filter cleaning of
dual bag filter assembly.
DUAL BAG FILTER
Dual bag filter assembly
(with acrylic-lined filter bags)
efficiently traps fines and dust.
50
ASV SERIES COMPRESSED AIR LOADERS
MATERIAL HANDLING
AEC’s compressed air loaders are designed for use in facilities where a
central conveying system is impractical. With three models available, each
compressed air loader includes an integrated filter. The ASV compressed
air loaders work according to the venturi principle: material is conveyed
using compressed air. Depending on the model, both pellet and regrind can
be processed.
ASV Series Compressed Air Loaders
STANDARD FEATURES
• Hopper with sight glass assembly
• Hinged lid (ASV05R only)
• Control assembly with filter/regulator/pressure gauge
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Venturi/wand assembly
• 230/1/50-60
• Level sensor
• Grinder venturi take-off in lieu of standard venturi wand
• Material transfer hose 10 ft. (3 m)
• Two material capability (consult factory)
• Integrated filter
• Mounting plate
• Parts that come in contact with material are made of
glass, stainless steel or aluminum
51
SPECIFICATIONS
Maximum Throughput,
lbs./hr (kg/hr)
330 (150)
Maximum Conveying Distance,
ft. (meters)
Horizontal 10 (3)
Vertical 6.5 (2)
MATERIAL HANDLING
Connected Load
Compressed Air Supply, Maximum Material Temp.,
PSI (bar)
ºF (ºC)
115 V, AC
60-90 (5-6)
170 (80)
Material throughput beside-the-press loading, compressed air line pressure and SCFM supply along with conveying distance will determine actual rate.
ASV 05 COMPRESSED AIR LOADER
The ASV 05 allows for the conveying of free-flowing
pelletized plastic materials to an injection molding or
process machine. Not recommended for regrind
applications.
ASV 05/R COMPRESSED AIR LOADER
0.50” (13mm)
4.34”
(110mm)
5.9” (150mm)
4.34” (110mm)
Mounting
Flange Detail
The ASV 05/R allows for the conveying of free-flowing
pelletized plastic materials or regrind to an injection
molding or process machine.
ASV 05
Single Inlet
5.9” (150mm)
ASV 05/R
Single Inlet
Wand
52
AVL SERIES COMPRESSED AIR LOADERS
MATERIAL HANDLING
AEC’s compact AVL loaders are designed to provide trouble-free conveying using
compressed air. These highly efficient, self-contained loaders use compressed air and
use an efficient venturi to draw material from drums, bins or gaylords. The material is
drawn through the venturi under vacuum and then conveys into the receiver using the
shop compressed air. The material is separated from the air stream and is deposited
into the bin or process machine. An efficient filtering system is used to capture material
fines before air is exhausted into the plant. A simple control assembly is easy to
operate and makes this loader a good choice for many single loading material
conveying applications. Choose the configuration that is correct for your application.
AVL Series Compressed Air Loaders
AVL-A AND AVL-B SERIES STANDARD FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Receiving hopper
Standard flange with quick release fasteners
Control assembly with low power consumption solenoid – 115/1/50-60 Hz
Air filter/regulator combination with pressure gauge
Capacitive sensor for material demand with 16.4 foot (5 meter) quick
disconnect cable to control
Venturi/wand assembly with quick connect air line fittings
3/8” poly hose air line – 10 ft.
1-1/4” standard vinyl flexible hose – 10 ft.
Two hose clamps for 1-1/4” vinyl flex hose
AVL-C SERIES STANDARD FEATURES
• Second venturi/wand assembly with quick connect air line fittings
• 1-1/4” O.D. wye-tube with coupler to attach to material inlet on
receiving hopper
• Additional 3/8” poly hose air line – 10 ft.
• Additional 1-1/4” standard vinyl flexible hose – 10 ft.
• Additional Two hose clamps for 1-1/4” vinyl flex hose
• Control assembly set up for two venturi assemblies including two
additional regulators with pressure gauges
AVL-D SERIES STANDARD FEATURES
• Mobile drum stand with filtered drum cover
• Control assembly with low power consumption solenoid – 115/1/50-60Hz
• Capacitive sensor for material demand with 16.4 ft (5 meter) quick
disconnect cable to control venturi/wand assembly with quick connect
air fittings
• 1-1/4” standard vinyl flexible hose -10 ft.
• Two hose clamps for 1-1/4” vinyl flex hose
• 3/8” poly hose air line - 10 ft.
53
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• 230/1/50-60 voltage
• Universal adapter for grinder take-off attachment to
fit up to 2” O.D. Material line connection (slips over
existing tube stub)
• Dust bag kit with tube in lieu of standard filter for
dusty regrinds (not available for AVL-A loaders)
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
AVL-A
AVL-B
AVL-C
Maximum
Throughput,
lbs./hr (kg/hr)
475 (215)
AVL-D
Shipping
Weight1,
lbs. (kg)
16.6-20.6
(7.5-9.3)
19.8-23.8
(9.0-10.8)
29.6-33.6
(13.4-15.2)
Operating
Voltage
115/1/50-60
Noise
Level,
dbA
‹ 75
MATERIAL HANDLING
Vacuum
Compressed Compressed Air
Typical
Max. Product
Air Supply,
Consumption, Performance, Comp. Air
Temp.,
PSI (bar)
scfm (psig)
Fº (Cº)
H20 (kPa) Consumption
70-90 (5-6)
25.9 (280)
(Based on 100%
continuous use)
8-10 scfm @
80 psig based
on 30% duty
cycle for
intermittent
use
-42” (-11)
125.0 (56.7)
1 All weights include 10 lbs. for packing materials
MODEL NAMING MATRIX
A
_ V_ L_ - X
_ voltage
_____ X
_X
_X
_ X_
Model
3 basic body styles
(A, B, C, or D)
Voltage
(115/5/50 or 115/5/60)
3 basic mounting
configurations
(A, B, or C)
2 basic filter types
(A or B)
2 basic types for #1 wand
(P, T)
2 basic types for #2 wand
(P, T)
Example: AVL-CCAG
AVL loader for two materials, sightglass
assembly for machine mount with a cartridge
filter assembly, with one wand and one grinder
take-off attachment and 115/1/60 control assembly.
Body Type: (1st position of model number)
A: Single inlet for clean pellets ONLY
B: Single inlet for pellets or regrind
C: Single inlet tank with WYE tube inlet two materials
D: Drum fill station with one inlet for pellets or regrind
Voltage: (2nd position of model number)
115/1/60: 115/1/60 VAC Control Assembly
220/1/50: 220/1/50 VAC Control Assembly
176 (80)
MODEL DESCRIPTION
AVL-A
The AVL-A is a single inlet venturi loader used to convey
clean, pelletized material into a process. Price includes
one pick-up material probe and single inlet control
assembly. 115VAC.
AVL-B
The AVL-B is a single inlet venturi loader used to convey
clean pellets or regrind material into a process. Price
includes one pick-up device and single inlet control
assembly. 115 VAC.
AVL-C
The AVL-C is a single inlet venturi loader with a special
wye tube attachment that allows conveying of two
materials (usually a virgin and regrind material) into a
process. Price includes two pick-up devices and dual inlet
control assembly. 115 VAC.
AVL-D
The AVL-D is a mobile stand with a single inlet conveying
pellets or regrind to fill material drums. Price includes
drum stand, one pick-up device, filtered drum cover and
single inlet control assembly.
Mounting: (3rd position of model number)
A: Direct Mount (Less Flange Options - Standard)
B: Bin Mount flange adapter (with SRC 02-16 bolt pattern)
C: Sight glass assembly for machine mount
Wand Selection: (5th and 6th positions of model number)
P: Pickup
T: Takeoff
Filter: (4th position of model number)
A: Cartridge Filter for pellets and clean regrind
B: Dust bag kit with tube in lieu of standard filter for
dusty regrinds (not available on AVL-A model)
54
MATERIAL HANDLING
AVL-A SPECIFICATIONS - ONE MATERIAL CONVEYING (CLEAN PELLETS ONLY)
AVL-B SPECIFICATIONS - ONE MATERIAL CONVEYING (PELLETS OR CLEAN REGRIND)
55
AVL-C SPECIFICATIONS - TWO MATERIAL CONVEYING
MATERIAL HANDLING
AVL-D SPECIFICATIONS - BARREL/DRUM FILL SYSTEM
DUST BAG FILTER OPTION
UNIVERSAL TAKE-OFF ADAPTER
56
POWDRPUMP™ DENSE PHASE CONVEYOR
MATERIAL HANDLING
AEC’s PowdrPump conveyor is a low-velocity, pneumatic conveying system
designed to move a wide variety of difficult powdered materials cleanly and
efficiently, with minimal degradation and separation. They can convey up to
200 equivalent feet.
The PowdrPump operates on very low volumes of compressed air at supply
pressures of 60-80 psig. Conveying air pressures vary between 25-80 psig,
depending upon the conveying characteristics of particular powders.
Four easy-to-operate times control the conveying rate by varying the time
for material filling and unloading of the pressurizing chamber.
PowdrPump
STANDARD FEATURES
• Epoxy-coated, mild steel construction
• Minimal moving parts
• No lubrication or special tools required for maintenance
• Small conveying air requirement makes it economically feasible to
use inert gas in hygroscopic and explosive material applications
• Low conveying air velocity creates minimal dusting of conveyed
powders and eliminates material degradation
• Slugs of materials are conveyed rather than individual particles,
so mixes are kept intact
• Pressurizing chamber
• Pneumatic valve activating cylinder with material valve
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• 304 stainless steel with 2B finish
• Storage bin
• Fluidizing pads (2) including regulator, piping, and
tubing: steel or stainless steel
• Explosion-proof construction
• NEMA 4 electrical panel and solenoids
• Polished interior surfaces for sanitary applications
• Air distribution assembly
• AEC “Warm Gray” paint
• NEMA 12 solid-state control panel including: Mitsubishi programmable-relay controller, with indicating lights and on/off switch
• 115/1/50-60 or 230/1/60 supply voltage – specify with order
57
• 10 cu. ft. bag dump station with 19” x 40” opening,
removable bag break rack at 36” work height, 16”
square discharge flange with 26’ clearance, steel
or stainless steel. Optional dust collection system
includes 1.5 HP dust collector, 460/3/60, and NEMA
12 control enclosure
SPECIFICATIONS
Max. Capacity,
Take-off
cu.ft./hr
assembly size
Model 31
50
1” Sch. 40
Model 32
200
2” Sch. 40
Length,
in.
25
25
Model
Width,
in.
17
17
CONVEYING PIPE: BLACK (STEEL)
Line Size
Shipping
Type
Degrees
(Sch. 40)
Weight, lbs.
1"
Straight (plain ends) - 20 ft
2
1"
Bends -12” radius
30
8
1"
Bends -12” radius
45
8
1"
Bends -12” radius
60
8
1"
Bends -12” radius
90
8
2"
4
2"
Bends -12” radius
30
18
2"
Bends -12” radius
45
18
2"
Bends -12” radius
60
18
2"
Bends -12” radius
90
18
CONVEYING PIPE: 304 STAINLESS STEEL
Line Size
(Sch. 40)
CONVEYING PIPE: ALUMINUM (6063 T6)
Part
Number
W00005294
W00017383
W00017381
W00017430
W00016766
W00005297
W00017384
W00017382
W00017431
W00016768
Line Size
Shipping
Type
Degrees
(Sch. 40)
Weight, lbs.
1"
12
1"
Bends -12” radius
30
2
1"
Bends -12” radius
45
2
1"
Bends -12” radius
60
2
1"
Bends -12” radius
90
2
2"
26
2"
Bends -12” radius
30
2
2"
Bends -12” radius
45
2
2"
Bends -12” radius
60
2
2"
Bends -12” radius
90
2
Shipping
Weight, lbs.
Part Number
Bends -12” radius
45
18
W00017341
2"
Bends -12” radius
Line Size
(Sch. 40)
1"
2"
Air consumption, Shipping Weight,
SCFM @ 80 PSI
lbs.
20
75
35
100
Degrees
Bends -12” radius
Bends -12” radius
Bends -12” radius
Bends -12” radius
Bends -12” radius
2"
Height,
in.
21
21
Type
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
2"
2"
2"
MATERIAL HANDLING
Bends -12” radius
Shipping Weight, lbs.
2
3
30
45
60
90
30
60
90
2
8
8
8
8
4
18
18
18
W00016745
W00017358
W00017335
W00017407
W00016766
W00016746
W00017364
W00017413
W00016768
Part Number
W00016747
W00016748
58
MTO MODULAR TAKE-OFF BOXES
MATERIAL HANDLING
MTO SERIES MODULAR TAKE-OFF BOXES
Modular take-off boxes are designed for free-flowing materials and provide
durable construction in a simple modular design. The MTO Series take-off
boxes feature stainless steel construction with lightweight aluminum tube
assemblies. The versatile modular design is compatible with a wide range of
applications and allows for easy assembly and cleanout.
MTO take-off boxes are available in single or multiple lines with styles
including complete clean-out type with tapered bottom, or box type, which
provides various material line take-off configurations. All compartments
have adjustable tubes for air/material balancing.
MTO Modular Take-Off Boxes
STANDARD FEATURES
• Stainless steel box
• Aluminum tubes
• Material view port on body styles A, B, and C
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Available sizes: 16” (406mm), 10” (254mm), and 7” (178mm) square flanges
• Material clean-out gate
NOTES
• Blank plate
• Check available clearance below bin mounting flange
• Adapter plate to mate to 7” x 7” or 9” x 9” square
flange drying hoppers
• Do not mix tube sizes without consulting the factory first
• Dual tube models for regrind and non-free-flowing
materials
• Pick correct box type
• Take-off tubes: 1.5”, 2”, 2.5”, 3”, 3.5”, 4”
• Use MDT dual tube modular take-off boxes if you are conveying
hard-to-flow materials, such as flakes or powders or conveying
free-flowing pelletized materials over 200 equivalent feet
• Maximum three (3) box stack-up allowed (consult factory)
Typical MTO Style
material tube assembly
59
MATERIAL HANDLING
MTO MODULAR TAKE-OFF BOXES
SPECIFICATIONS
Style A
Square Flange Size
in. (mm)
16 (406)
16, 10 (406, 254)
10 (254)
10, 7 (254, 178)
7, 4.5 (178, 114)
Style
A
B
C
D
E
Height, in. (mm)
6 (152)
8 (203)
6 (152)
5.5 (140)
4.5 (114)
BOLT PATTERNS
1.25 TYP
Style B
Bolt pattern
Top
Bottom
16 holes
16 holes
16 holes
12 holes
12 holes
12 holes
12 holes
8 holes
8 holes
5 holes
0.94 TYP
1.25 TYP
11.5
16.25
CLEAN-OUT GATES
Style
A
B, C
D*
15
3.0
0.63
6.25
10.0
9.25
3.13
7.0
D, in. (cm)
16.25 (41.3)
10 (25.4)
7 (17.8)
W
0.38
D
6.25
2.0
0.38
4.0
4.75
A, in. (cm)
3.14 (7.9)
3.06 (7.8)
2.38 (6.1)
0.38
B, in. (cm)
6.38 (16.2)
6.38 (16.2)
4.75 (12.1)
4.75
4.0
4.75 4.0
1.19
B
Style E
0.38
* Style D MTO take-off boxes use a Style E take-off box with a bottom-mounted Style E cleanout assembly
A
Number of tubes per MTO box
2.0”
2.5”
3.0”
3.5”
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
n/a
n/a
1
1
n/a
n/a
8 holes,
0.31” dia.
W, in. (cm)
16.25 (41.3)
10 (25.4)
7 (17.8)
H, in. (cm)
6.94 (17.6)
4.31 (10.9)
5.19 (13.2)
Style D
0.94 TYP
0.38
7.5
1.5”
3
3
2
2
1
12 holes,
0.31” dia.
16 holes,
0.44” dia.
3.5
Style C
H
60
0.5
4.0”
2
1
n/a
n/a
n/a
MDT MODULAR TAKE-OFF BOXES
MATERIAL HANDLING
MDT SERIES MODULAR TAKE-OFF BOXES
MDT modular take-off boxes are designed for regrind and hard-to-flow
materials and provide durable construction in a simple modular design. The
MDT Series take-off boxes feature stainless steel construction with stainless
steel tube assemblies. The versatile modular design is compatible with a wide
range of applications and allows for easy assembly and cleanout.
All compartments have adjustable tubes for air/material balancing.
MDT Modular Take-Off Boxes
STANDARD FEATURES
• Stainless steel box and tubes
• Available sizes: 16” (406mm), 10” (254mm) - square flanges
NOTES
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Check available clearance below bin mounting flange
• Material clean-out gate
• Pick correct box type to match your application
• Blank plate on bottom
• Do not mix tube sizes without consulting the factory
• Use MDT dual tube modular take-off boxes if you are conveying
hard-to-flow materials, such as flakes or powders
• Use MDT dual tube take-off boxes if you are conveying any
material over 200 equivalent feet
• Consult factory for dry-air conveying applications or powder
conveying applications
• Maximum three (3) box stack-up allowed (consult factory)
61
• Adapter plate to mate to 7” x 7” or 9” x 9” square
flange drying hoppers
• Take-off tubes: 1.5”, 2”, 2.5”, 3”, 3.5”, 4”
MDT MODULAR TAKE-OFF BOXES
Style A1
SPECIFICATIONS
Square Flange Size
in. (mm)
16 (406)
10 (254)
Style
A
B
Style B1
6 (152)
6 (152)
BOLT PATTERNS
1.25 TYP
0.94 TYP
1.25 TYP
11.5
16.25
CLEAN-OUT GATES 1
Style
A
B
1.5”
3
2
Number of tubes per MTO box
2.0”
2.5”
3.0”
3.5”
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
1
0.94 TYP
12 holes,
0.31” dia.
16 holes,
0.44” dia.
7.5
Bolt pattern
Top
Bottom
16 holes
16 holes
12 holes
12 holes
Height, in. (mm)
1 See chart for maximum number of tubes available per section
3.5
MATERIAL HANDLING
15
3.0
0.63
10.0
H, in. (cm)
6.94 (17.6)
4.31 (10.9)
1 Clean out gate is optional. Flat bottom plate is standard.
6.25
9.25
0.38
W, in. (cm)
16.25 (41.3)
10 (25.4)
D, in. (cm)
16.25 (41.3)
10 (25.4)
A, in. (cm)
3.14 (7.9)
3.06 (7.8)
B, in. (cm)
6.38 (16.2)
6.38 (16.2)
W
D
A
H
B
62
4.0”
2
1
TAKE-OFF COMPARTMENTS
MATERIAL HANDLING
FCO
FCO, FEVTO, & EVTO TAKE-OFF COMPARTMENTS
EVTO
FCO Series fast clean-out vacuum take-off compartments meter freeflowing pellets into a vacuum conveying system. EVTO and FEVTO
expandable and filtered expandable vacuum take-off compartments are ideal
for metering regrind and PVC, and for distances greater than 200 feet.
MDT Series vacuum take-off compartments are used for regrind and hardto-flow materials. They are ideal for conveying distances greater than 200
equivalent feet.
FEVTO
FCO STANDARD FEATURES
• Mild steel construction
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Easy cleanout drain port
• FCO Series
• Stainless Steel construction
• Round flange
• Dry-air connection
• 7" x 7" to 10" x 10" flange adapter with square
clamp. (Not available on 1.25" models)
FEVTO/EVTO STANDARD FEATURES
• FEVTO - filtered suction air
• FEVTO/EVTO - aluminum construction
• 16.25" square flange
• FEVTO/EVTO Series
• Dry-air tube stub
• Powder check valve adapter
• 6" manual dump valve, with aluminum adapter plate
(MDV-6A/16T)
• Three - aluminum tubes (1.5", 2.0", 2.25", 2.5")
• Dual tube design, adjustable airflow
63
TAKE-OFF COMPARTMENTS
FCO FAST CLEAN-OUT TAKE-OFF COMPARTMENTS
Model
FCO1.25
FCO1.5
FCO1.5D
FCO2.0
FCO2.0D
FCO2.5
FCO2.5D
FCO3.0
FCO3.0D
MATERIAL HANDLING
Tube dia. OD, in.
1.25
1.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
Dry air tube dia. OD, in.
n/a
n/a
2.0
n/a
2.5
n/a
2.5
n/a
3.5
Flange size, in. *
6.75 dia.
10 x 10 square
10 x 10 square
10 x 10 square
10 x 10 square
10 x 10 square
10 x 10 square
10 x 10 square
10 x 10 square
Line size OD, in.
1.5
2
2.25
2.5
1.5
2
2.25
2.5
Flange Size, in.
16.25 x 16.25 square
16.25 x 16.25 square
16.25 x 16.25 square
16.25 x 16.25 square
16.25 x 16.25 square
16.25 x 16.25 square
16.25 x 16.25 square
16.25 x 16.25 square
* 6.75” round flange is available at no charge on the 1.5 and 2.0 models.
Floor or cart mount DH1.5-DH6.0 mass flow drying hoppers require round flange clamp assembly.
EVTO/FEVTO EXPANDABLE TAKE-OFF COMPARTMENTS
Model Number
6F1.5A3
6F2A3
6F2.25A3
6F2.5A3
6E1.5A3
6E2A3
6E2.25A3
6E2.5A3
Type
FEVTO
FEVTO
FEVTO
FEVTO
EVTO
EVTO
EVTO
EVTO
64
SYSTEM COMPONENTS, TUBING AND PIPE
MATERIAL HANDLING
Tubing, pipe, elbows, couplers, and other conveying components are
available in a variety of sizes. Pickup wands, transitions, couplers,
plugs, and caps are also available.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Tubing is specified by OD and is 16 ga. (0.065”) from 1.5” to 4”
OD and 14 ga. (0.083”) from 4.5” to 6” OD
• Pipe is specified by a schedule number, such as Sch. 5
OPTIONAL FEATURES
STANDARD FEATURES
• 1.5”, 2.0”, 2.25”, 2.5”, 3.0”, 3.5” (3” Sch. 5), 4.0”, 4.5” (4” Sch. 5),
5”, 5” Sch. 10, 6”, and 6” Sch. 10 OD sizes.
65
• Aluminum or stainless steel construction
• 1.5”, 2.0”, 2.25”, 2.5”, 3.0”, 3.5” (3” Sch. 5), 4.0”, 4.5”
(4” Sch. 5), 5”, 5” Sch. 10, 6”, or 6” Sch. 10 OD sizes
• Specialty elbows to reduce angel hair
1.5” OD TUBING, 16 GA.
Description
20 ft, aluminum
20 ft. stainless steel
Single line Y, aluminum
Single line Y, stainless steel
Manifold Y, 30º aluminum
Manifold Y, 30º stainless steel
Vacuum T
1.5” OD ELBOWS, 16 GA.
Description
30º, 6” radii, aluminum
30º, 7.5” radii, stainless steel
30º, 18” radii, stainless steel
1.5” OD COUPLERS
Description
Bolted, 3 bolts
MATERIAL HANDLING
1.5” OD QUICK CHANGE COUPLERS
Model no. Ship wt., lbs.
A0556552
10
W00052362
25
W00002141
1
W00012200
2
W00001179
1
W00011183
1
W00001891
1.5
Model no.
A0555400
A0555408
A0555401
A0555409
A0555402
A0555410
A0555403
A0555411
A0555404
A0555412
A0555405
A0555413
A0555406
A0555414
A0555407
A0555415
Description
Male, quick chg, aluminum
Female, quick chg, aluminum
Plug, male, quick chg, almn.
Cap, female, quick chg, almn.
1.5” OD PICK UP WANDS
Description
Single tube, aluminum
Single tube, stainless steel
Double tube, aluminum
Double tube, stainless steel
Ship wt., lbs.
1
1
1.5
1.5
1
1
1.5
1.5
1
1
1.5
1.5
1
1
1.5
1.5
1.5” OD HOSES
Description
5 ft. stainless steel flexible hose, plain end
Flexible hose, clear vinyl
Hose clamps
Flexible hose, clear grounded vinyl
1.5” OD ALUMINUM TRANSITIONS
Description
1.5” to 2” OD
1.5” to 3” OD
W00003744
2.9
W00001164
1
W00001000
1
W00001822
1
W00001826
1
66
Model no.
A0533933
A0533926
W00018213
W00050295
Model no.
W00001091
W00001096
W00001101
W00001106
W00017594
W0001917
A0550737
Model no.
W00012338
W00012274
Description
20 ft, aluminum
Vacuum T
Description
2.0” OD COUPLERS
Description
Bolted, 3 bolts
MATERIAL HANDLING
A0556554
12
W00052363
28.3
W00002142
1
W00012199
2
W00001155
1
W00011182
3.5
W00001892
1.5
Model no.
A0555416
A0555424
A0555417
A0555425
A0555418
A0555426
A0555419
A0555427
A0555420
A0555428
A0555421
A0555429
A0555422
A0555430
A0555423
A0555431
Description
W00001166
1
W00000781
1
W00001823
1
W00001827
1
Description
Ship wt., lbs.
1
2.1
2
6.3
1
2.1
2
6.3
1
2.1
2
6.3
1
2.1
2
6.3
2.0” OD HOSES
Description
Hose clamps
Description
2.0” to 1.5” OD
2.0” to 2.25” OD
2.0” to 2.5” OD
2.0” to 3.0” OD
W00003745
3.1
67
Model no.
A0536900
A0536901
W00002017
W00050296
Model no.
W00001092
W00001097
W00001102
W00001107
W00050832
W0001917
A0550738
Model no.
W00012338
W00012339
W00013464
W00012275
Description
20 ft, aluminum
Vacuum T
Description
2.25” OD COUPLERS
Description
Bolted, 3 bolts
MATERIAL HANDLING
A0556555
14
W00052364
30
W00002231
1
W00012198
3.5
W00001156
2
W00011181
4
W00001893
2
2.25” OD QUICK COUPLERS
Description
Description
W00017319
1
W00017365
2.9
A0555432
2.4
A0555436
7.2
W00017290
1
W00017342
2.9
A0555433
2.4
A0555437
7.2
W00017391
1
W00017414
2.9
A0555434
2.4
A0555438
7.2
W00018597
1
W00017291
2.9
A0555435
2.4
A0555439
7.2
2.25” OD HOSES
Description
Hose clamps
Description
2.25” to 2” OD
2.25” to 3” OD
W00003746
3.2
W00001168
1
W00001170
1.5
W00001824
1.4
W00001828
1
68
Model no.
A0536902
A0536903
W00002018
W00050297
Model no.
W00001093
W0001098
W0001103
W0001108
W00050833
W0051440
A0550739
Model no.
W00012339
W00012276
Description
20 ft, aluminum
Vacuum T
Description
2.5” OD COUPLERS
Description
Bolted, 3 bolts
MATERIAL HANDLING
2.5” OD QUICK COUPLERS
A0556556
16
W00052365
33
W00003575
1.5
W00015431
4
W00001157
2
W00011180
4.5
W00001894
2.5
Description
W00001169
1
W00000725
1.5
W00001824
1.4
W00001828
1
Description
W00017321
1.2
W00017367
3.3
A0555440
2.9
A0555444
8.2
W00017294
1.0
W00017344
3.3
A0555441
2.9
A0555445
8.2
W00017393
1.0
W00017416
3.3
A0555442
2.9
A0555446
8.2
W00017283
1.0
W00017293
3.3
A0555443
2.9
A0555447
8.2
2.5” OD HOSES
Description
Hose clamps
Description
2.5” to 2.0” OD
2.5” to 3.0” OD
W00003747
3.3
69
Model no.
A0536904
A0536905
W00002019
W00050298
Model no.
W00001094
W0001099
W0001104
W0001109
W00050834
W0051440
A0550740
Model no.
W00013464
W00012277
Description
20 ft, aluminum
Vacuum T
Description
3.0” OD COUPLERS
Description
Bolted, 3 bolts
MATERIAL HANDLING
A0556557
18
W00052366
36
W00003579
2
W00015432
5
W00001158
2
W00011179
5.5
W00001895
3
Description
Description
A0555448
1.4
W00017369
3.9
W00017324
3.4
W00017370
9.6
A0555449
1.4
W00017346
3.9
W00017300
3.4
W00017347
9.6
A0555450
1.4
W00017418
3.9
W00017396
3.4
W00017419
9.6
A0555451
1.4
W00017295
3.9
W00003041
3.4
W00003097
9.6
3.0” OD HOSES
Description
Hose clamps
Description
3.0” to 1.5” OD
3.0” to 2” OD
3.0” to 2.25” OD
3.0” to 2.5” OD
3.0” to 3.5” OD
3.0” to 4.0” OD
W00003748
4.5
W00001172
1.5
W00000740
1.8
W00001825
1.6
W00001829
1.8
70
Model no.
A0536906
A0536907
W00002020
W00050299
Model no.
W00001095
W0001100
W0001105
W0001110
W00050835
W0000334
A0550741
Model no.
W00012274
W00012275
W00012276
W00012277
A055505
A055504
3.5” OD (3” SCH. 5) TUBING, 16 GA.
Description
20 ft, aluminum
Vacuum T
MATERIAL HANDLING
A05565585
20
A0556565
39
A0556558
2.7
A0556566
7.5
A0556559
2.6
A0556567
7.7
A0556560
3.3
3.5” OD (3” SCH. 5) QUICK CHANGE COUPLERS
Description
3.5” OD (3” SCH. 5) PICK UP WANDS
3.5” OD (3” SCH. 5) ELBOWS, 16 GA.
Description
30º, 7.5” radii, aluminum
Description
A0555452
2.0
A0555456
5.9
A0556561
4.8
A0556568
14.5
A0555453
2.0
A0555457
5.9
A0556562
4.8
A0556569
14.5
A0555454
2.0
A0555458
5.9
A0556563
4.8
A0556570
14.5
A0555455
2.0
A0555459
5.9
A0556564
4.8
A0556571
14.5
3.5” OD (3” SCH. 5) HOSES
Description
Hose clamps
Model no.
A0536908
A0536909
W00018217
W00050300
Model no.
W00001881
W00001883
W00001885
W00001887
A0559377
A0534115
A0559378
3.5” OD (3” SCH. 5) ALUMINUM TRANSITIONS
3.5” OD (3” SCH. 5) COUPLERS
Description
Bolted, 4 bolts
W00000121
1.7
W00002241
2.4
W00001943
2.2
W00001944
3.0
Description
3.5” to 3.0” OD
3.5” to 4.0” OD
W00016769
5.1
71
Model no.
A0555505
A0555506
Description
20 ft, aluminum
Vacuum T
Description
4.0” OD COUPLERS
Description
Bolted, 4 bolts
Model no.
A0539816
A0539818
A0539820
A0539822
A0539824
Ship wt., lbs.
22
40
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
Model no.
A0539826
A0555460
A0539827
A0539835
A0539828
A0555461
A0539829
A539837
A0539830
A0555462
A0539831
A0539839
A0539832
A0555463
A0539833
A0539841
Ship wt., lbs.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
MATERIAL HANDLING
Description
Description
4.0” OD HOSES
Description
Hose clamps
Description
4.0” to 3.0” OD
4.0” to 3.5” OD
W00002244
c.f.
W00000120
c.f.
W00001754
c.f.
W00001943
c.f.
W00001944
c.f.
72
Model no.
A0536912
W00018164
Model no.
A0539800
A0539801
A0539802
A0539803
A0556553
W00001466
A0556550
Model no.
A0555504
A0555506
4.5” OD (4” SCH. 5) TUBING, 14 GA.
Description
20 ft, aluminum
Vacuum T
Model no.
A0556572
A0556579
A0556573
A0556580
A0556574
4.5” OD (4” SCH. 5) ELBOWS, 14 GA.
Description
Model no.
A0556575
A0556581
A0555464
A0555468
A0556576
A0556582
A0555465
A0555469
A0556577
A0556583
A0555466
A0555470
A0556578
A0556584
A0555467
A0555471
MATERIAL HANDLING
Ship wt., lbs.
24
42
3.0
16
4
4.5” OD (4” SCH. 5) QUICK CHANGE COUPLERS
Description
Ship wt., lbs.
6.2
18.3
11.0
32
6.2
18.3
11.0
32
6.2
18.3
11.0
32
6.2
18.3
11.0
32
4.5” OD (4” SCH. 5) PICK UP WANDS
Description
4.5” OD (4” SCH. 5) HOSES
Description
5 ft. reinforced flexible hose w/ tube adapters
10 ft. reinforced flexible hose, tube adapters
4.5” OD (4” SCH. 5) COUPLERS
Description
Bolted, 4 bolts
W00004413
3.7
W00004412
4.0
W00012430
3.0
W00002933
4.0
W00002990
7.7
73
Model no.
A0536910
A0536911
Model no.
W00011876
W00011875
W00011874
W00011873
W00017834
W00017835
W00017836
W00017837
Description
20 ft, aluminum
Mitered bend, 90º, aluminum
Vacuum T
Description
Model no.
A0550730
A0539819
A0559300
A0539821
A0539823
A0539825
Model no.
A0555472
A0555476
A0539843
A0539851
A0555473
A0555477
A0539845
A0539853
A0555474
A0555478
A0539847
A0539855
A0555475
A0555479
A0539849
A0539857
MATERIAL HANDLING
Ship wt., lbs.
26
44
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
5.0” OD COUPLERS
Description
Bolted, 4 bolts
Model no.
A0556586
Description
Ship wt., lbs.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
5.0” OD HOSES
Model no.
A0556587
A0556588
A0556589
A0556590
Description
74
Ship wt., lbs.
c.f.
Ship wt., lbs.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
c.f.
Model no.
A0539804
A0539805
A0539806
A0539807
A0539812
A0539813
A0539814
A0539815
5” SCH. 10 PIPE
Description
20 ft, aluminum
Vacuum T
5.0” SCH. 10 ELBOWS
Description
MATERIAL HANDLING
W00052359
28
W00052369
46
A0559301
c.f.
W00015453
7.5
W00015452
24
W00016773
4.5
5” SCH. 10 COUPLERS
Description
Bolted, 4 bolts
W00002991
8.1
5.0” SCH. 10 QUICK CHANGE COUPLERS
Description
A0555480
10.9
W0555484
35.6
W00017332
17
W00017378
55.3
A0555481
10.9
A0555485
35.6
W00017311
17
W00017355
55.3
A0555482
10.9
A0555486
35.6
W00017404
17
W00017427
55.3
A0555483
10.9
A0555487
35.6
W00003044
17
W00003100
55.3
5.0” SCH. 10 HOSES
W00012428
5
W00012429
6
W00012431
5.5
W00012432
4.5
Description
75
Model no.
W00011576
W00011577
W00011578
W00011579
W00017838
W00017839
W00017840
W00017841
Description
20 ft, aluminum
Vacuum T
Model no.
A0559305
A0559321
A0559302
A0559306
A0559322
A0559307
Ship wt., lbs.
Description
Model no.
A0559308
A0559323
A0559309
A0559324
A0559310
A0559325
A0559311
A0559326
A0559312
A0559327
A0559313
A0559328
A0559314
A0559329
A0559315
A0559330
Ship wt., lbs.
13.6
42.3
21.3
65.9
13.6
42.3
21.3
65.9
13.6
42.3
21.3
65.9
13.6
42.3
21.3
65.9
Description
Bolted, 4 bolts
Model no.
A0559316
Ship wt., lbs.
10.4
6.0” OD COUPLERS, 14 GA.
Description
6” SCH. 10 COUPLERS
Description
Bolted, 4 bolts
Model no.
A0559317
A0559318
A0559319
A0559320
Ship wt., lbs.
7.5
8.5
8.0
5.8
Model no.
W00015847
Ship wt., lbs.
10.4
MATERIAL HANDLING
6” SCH. 10 OD ELBOWS
Description
6” SCH. 10 PIPE
Description
20 ft, aluminum
Vacuum T
Model no.
A0555488
A0555496
A0555489
A0555497
A0555490
A0555498
A0555491
A0555499
A0555492
A0555500
A0555493
A0555501
A0555494
A0555502
A0555495
A0555503
Ship wt., lbs.
13.6
42.3
21.3
65.9
13.6
42.3
21.3
65.9
13.6
42.3
21.3
65.9
13.6
42.3
21.3
65.9
Model no.
W00052360
W00052370
A0559303
W00050412
W00050414
A05559304
Ship wt., lbs.
32
50
c.f.
9.5
32
c.f.
6” SCH. 10 QUICK CHANGE COUPLERS
Description
Model no.
W00015838
W00015839
W00015840
W00015841
Ship wt., lbs.
7.5
8.5
8.0
6.0
Description
Model no.
W00015842
W00015843
W00015844
W00017846
W00017847
W00017848
W00017849
6” SCH. 10 OD HOSES
76
SRH, SRC AND SRI VACUUM RECEIVERS
MATERIAL HANDLING
SR Series vacuum receivers from AEC feature a modular stainless steel
design, offering significant operational advantages. The modular design
allows these units to be economically reconfigured to accommodate future
production requirements. PyrexTM sight glass on SRI models allow for easy
visual monitoring of material flow.
SRH/SRC vacuum receivers are used at each loading point in a central
vacuum conveying system. 0.03, 0.1, and 0.2 cu. ft. receivers are not to be
used on single line “Y” systems, and SRC04 receivers are not recommended.
They should be used beside the machine or with dedicated lines.
STANDARD FEATURES
SRC Vacuum Receivers
• Brushed stainless steel construction
• Internal check valve on material inlet for 1.5”, 2.0”, 2.5” and 3.0”
(not available on 0.03, 0.1, or 0.2 cu. ft. models)
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Removable aluminum inlets and outlets on some models (2” – 4”)
• Volume-fill sensor, 24 VDC or 115 VAC control
voltage (not available on 0.03–0.1 cu. ft. models)
• 4” Sch. 5 and larger inlets and outlets on SRC30/60 receivers are
welded in place
• Stainless steel 20 mesh screen for micro-pellet
applications
• SRC receivers include counter-weighted flapper and elastomer
throat gasket
• Polyester cloth filter in lieu of standard screen/deflector
• Nylon filter in lieu of standard screen/deflector
• Stainless steel filter screen (10 mesh) (0.03–1.6 cu. ft. models),
stainless steel pellet deflector (3.0–6.0 cu. ft. models)
• OptiView riser assembly, 150ºF ambient max. temp.
(not available on SRC 30/60)
• 90º vacuum outlets available on SRC30/60
• Machine-mount adapter for OptiView (or aluminum
riser), square mounting flange (not available on SRC
30/60)
• Sight glass models feature Pyrex™ sight glass, 10-mesh stainless
steel screen, and square flange. SRI04 includes check valve for
single-line Y applications.
• Aluminum riser, flange-mount only (not available
on SRH01 or SRI models)
OPTIONAL REMOTE PROPORTIONING PACKAGE
• Silo-mount riser with gasketed, non-vented access
door, part no. A0566986 (SRC 30/60 only)
• Aluminum riser with vented access door, part
no. A0566987 (SRC 30/60 only)
• Includes proportioning valve, 2 aluminum pick-up wands, 2x10’ vinyl
flex hoses, 4 hose clamps, and controller assembly
• 1.5”, 2”, 2.5” OD inlet/outlet
• High-temperature (400ºF) silicone discharge throat
gasket (not available on 0.03–0.1 cu. ft. models)
• 115/1/60, 230/1/60, or 24 VDC supply voltage
• 90º vacuum outlets (SRC 30/60 only)
• Hopper, floor stand, or wall mounting
• White neoprene discharge throat gasket, FDA approved,
180ºF max. (not available on 0.03–0.1 cu. ft. models)
• 115/1/60 or 24 VDC control voltage
• For 1.75” and 2.25” OD uses, use aluminum transitions/couplers
(quote separately)
• Adapter to fit TF/VF mounting hole, (18” dia. to 15”
dia. BC, part. no. A0569579 (SRC 30/60 only)
77
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
SRH01
SRC02
Receiver
Capacity
cu. ft. (l)
0.1 (2.8)
0.2 (5.6)
Receiver
Capacity
lbs. (Kg)
3 (1.5)
6.0 (3.1)
Shipping
Weight
lbs. (Kg)
29 (13)
31 (14)
25 (12.7)
40 (18)
SRC04
0.4 (11.3)
12.0 (6.3)
SRC16
1.6 (45)
50 (25.4)
SRC08
SRC30
SRC60
0.8 (22)
3.0 (85)
6.0 (170)
100 (45)
200 (90)
43 (20)
75 (34)
95 (43)
SRI002
Receiver
Capacity
cu. ft. (l)
0.028 (0.79)
Receiver
Capacity
lbs. (Kg)
1 (.45)
Shipping
Weight
lbs. (Kg)
15 (7)
SRI04
0.4 (11.3)
12.0 (6.3)
49 (23)
SRI01
SRI02
0.1 (2.8)
0.2 (5.6)
3.0 (1.5)
6.0 (3.1)
SRC Vacuum Receiver
Sight Glass Capacity
cu. ft. (l)
Standard inlet/outlet sizes
1.5 (38)
1.5, 2 (38, 51)
33 (15)
1) includes 2.5” to 2” transition on inlet/outlet and 2” check valve on inlet
Model
MATERIAL HANDLING
2, 2.5, 3,
3.52
(51, 64, 76,
2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 4.5 (64, 76, 89, 101, 114)
2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 4.5, 5 sch. 10 (64, 76, 89, 101, 114, 143)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Sight Glass Capacity
cu. ft. (l)
1.5 (38)
0.01 (0.28)
0.34 (0.15)
1.5, 2, 2.51 (38, 51, 641)
0.09 (2.55)
3.25 (1.48)
1.5 (38)
1.5, 2 (38, 51)
SRI Vacuum Receiver
78
N/A
N/A
2) Includes 3.5” to 3” transition on inlet/outlet and 3” check valve on inlet
27 (13)
47 (22)
N/A
N/A
N/A
892)
Standard inlet/outlet sizes
N/A
N/A
N/A
1.5, 2, 2.51 (38, 51, 641)
2, 2.5, 3 (51, 64, 76)
N/A
N/A
0.02 (0.57)
0.09 (2.55)
0.68 (0.31)
3.25 (1.48)
Remote Proportioning Valve
DIMENSIONS
Model
SRH01
SRC02
SRC04
SRC08
SRC16
SRC30
SRC60
A
14.875 (38)
16.75 (43)
22.375 (57)
26 (66)
32.25 (82)
46.56 (119)
62.56 (159)
B
10.625 (27)
11.5 (29)
17.5 (45)
20.125 (51)
26.375 (67)
39.21 (100)
55.21 (140)
MATERIAL HANDLING
SRH and SRC Dimensions, in. (cm)
C
D
E
F
9.375 (24) 6.38 (16) 12 (31) 1.75 (4)
9.50 (24)
5.5 (14) 12 (31) 4 (10)
13.50 (34)
11.5 (29) 12 (31) 4 (10)
17.625 (45) 11.625 (30) 12 (31) 4 (10)
23.875 (61) 18.125 (46) 12 (31) 4 (10)
N/A
25.75 (66) 16 (41) 6 (15)
N/A
41.75 (106) 16 (41) 6 (15)
1) .312” (8 mm) dia. holes; 2 places, equally spaced
G
H1
6.375 (16) 5.5 (14)
9.125 (23)
N/A
9.125 (23)
N/A
14.125 (36) N/A
14.125 (36) N/A
20 (51)
N/A
20 (51)
N/A
2) .312” (8 mm) dia. holes; 12 places equally spaced
J2
11 (28)
11 (28)
11 (28)
11 (28)
11 (28)
15 (38)
15 (38)
General Notes:
0.03, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 and 1.6 cu. ft.
models have vacuum outlet mounted
on the side of the cover.
3.0 and 6.0 cu. ft. models have the
vacuum outlet at the top of the cover.
SRH01 Vacuum Receiver
SRC16 Vacuum Receiver
Mounting Pattern - Flange Mount Configuration
0.312 clearance holes
on 11.00 dia. (J)
0.312 clearance holes
10” cutout required
for mounting
on 15.00 dia. (J)
12.00 - flange outside
diameter (E)
16.00 - flange outside
diameter (E)
14” cutout required
for mounting
SRC30/60
SRH01/SRC16
79
DIMENSIONS
Model
A
SRI002
17.50 (44)
SRI02
25.625 (65)
SRI01
SRI04
21.25 (54)
31.5 (80)
B
16.125 (42)
SRI Dimensions, in. (cm)
12.50 (32)
6.375 (16)
1.75 (4)
4 (10)
2 (5)
1.25 (3)
I3
2.5 (6)
19.5 (50)
9.125 (23)
3 (8)
7 (18)
3.5 (9)
2.75 (7)
5.5 (14)
C
20 (51)
16.625 (42)
29.625 (75)
25.5 (65)
23.75 (60)
MATERIAL HANDLING
SRI01 Vacuum Receiver
D
E
6.375 (16)
1.75 (4)
9.125 (23)
3 (8)
SRI02 Vacuum Receiver
80
F
4 (10)
7 (18)
G
2 (5)
3.5 (9)
H
1.25 (3)
2.75 (7)
2.5 (6)
5.5 (14)
SRI Mounting Flange
J
2 (5)
3 (8)
2 (5)
3 (8)
LHS LOW HEAD SEPARATORS
MATERIAL HANDLING
LOW HEAD SEPARATORS
AEC LHS low head separator/vacuum receiver combinations are designed
to convey free-flowing powder and dusty materials, i.e. regrind and coarse
materials, with a central vacuum conveying system. The filterless design
provides efficient conveying in the process.
STANDARD FEATURES
Low Head Separator
• Filterless design
• Mild steel low head separator with SRC vacuum receiver
• Flange mount configuration
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Counter-weighted flapper
• Level sensor for volume fill
SRC16 – 4” throat
• 115 VAC control voltage
• Stainless steel construction
SRC30/60 – 6” throat
• Riser mount for SRC receiver
• Line sizes available
1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 4" Sch. 10, 5" Sch. 10
Notes: Requires appropriate sized SRC vacuum receiver
(quote separately)
81
MATERIAL HANDLING
LHS LOW HEAD SEPARATORS
SPECIFICATIONS
Recommended Vacuum
Hopper Size (lbs.)
Recommended Vacuum
Power Unit Size (hp)
Material and Vacuum
Tube Size
Height, in. (mm)
Diameter, in. (mm)
Shipping weight (with vacuum
receiver), lbs. (kg)
3/5
25
3.5
Vacuum receiver and vacuum pump sold separately
7.5/10
50
100
50
3.5
5
7.5
2"
2.5"
1.5"
16 (406)
8 (203)
35 (16)
100
200
7.5/10
10
2.5"/3.0" 2.5"/3.0"
24 (610)
10 (254)
40 (18)
82
40 (18)
100
15
25
200
30
200
200
15
25
30
3"/3.5"
4" Sch. 10
5" Sch. 10
75 (34)
75 (34)
30 (762)
10 (254)
50 (23)
50 (23)
36 (914)
12 (305)
44 (1118)
16 (406)
VACTRAC™ PROPORTIONING DEVICES
MATERIAL HANDLING
VacTrac™ RPV remote proportioning packages proportion virgin and
regrind materials in conjunction with central vacuum receivers.
AV and SV sequencing valves are used for sequencing vacuum and central
vacuum conveying appllications. All VTPB blowback pumps use SV style
valves.
STANDARD FEATURES
• RPV packages feature proportioning valve assembly, 2 aluminum
pickup wands, two 10’ vinyl flex hoses, four hose clamps, an
O-ring coupler, and a controller assembly with quick-connect
cable assembly (specify voltage)
• Line sizes available
• 1.5", 2.0", 2.5"
Remote Proportioning Valve
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Hopper-mount, wall-mount, or floor stand (RPV)
• Spare controller assembly (RPV)
• Consult factory for other line sizes or voltages
83
RPV REMOTE PROPORTIONING VALVE
Available in 1.5”, 2.0”, or 2.5” OD inlet/outlet tubes.
Hopper mount (HM), stand mount (SM), or wall mount (WM).
Voltage configuration
B24
B115
D24
D115
E24
Supply voltage
115/1/50-60
115/1/50-60
230/1/50-60
230/1/50-60
24 VDC
MATERIAL HANDLING
Control voltage
24 VDC
115/1/50-60
230/1/50-60
115/1/50-60
24 VDC
AV/SV AIR-OPERATED SEQUENCING VALVES
Vacuum line size OD,
in. (mm)
1.5 (38.1)
2 (50.8)
2.5 (63.5)
3 (76.2)
4 (101.6)
4.5, 4” sch. 10 (114.3)
5 (127)
Sequence
T-valve
SV1.5
SV2
SV2.5
SV3
SV4
SV4.5
SV5
Sequence valve
plugs
SV1.5P
SV2P
SV2.5P
SV3P
SV4P
SV4.5P
SV5P
Atmospheric valve
AV1.5
AV2
AV2.5
AV3
AV4
AV4.5
AV5
84
FILTER CHAMBER COMBINATIONS
MATERIAL HANDLING
AEC SRC/FC vacuum receiver/filter combinations are designed to convey
free-flowing, coarse powder and granular materials with a central vacuum
conveying system.
AEC SRC/ACA filter combinations are designed to convey free-flowing fine
powder and very dusty materials, i.e. PVC powder, with a central vacuum
conveying system.
FC Style filter chamber combinations must be used with APDB nonreversing vacuum pumps only. ACA style filter chamber combinations can
be used with APD or APDB style vacuum pumps.
STANDARD FEATURES: SRC/FC
SRC30/ACA251
• Mounting type – Non-vented riser with hinged and latched access
door for easy cleanout and service of material discharge. (Note - not
available on SRC16/ACA051 model. Consult factory if required)
• Mild steel construction of filter section
SRC60/FC55
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• SRC-style (time-fill) vacuum receiver
• Counter-weighted flapper
• Bin vent filters (sold separately; recommended for
proper relief of filter cleaning air)
• SRC 16 4” throat
• Acrylic filter media in lieu of standard
• SRC 30/60 6” throat
• Gortex® filter media in lieu of standard
• Stainless steel construction of filter section
• Bag style filter chamber with glazed polyester filter
Note: Blowback air is supplied by the vacuum pump. APDB style vacuum
pump is required.
STANDARD FEATURES: SRC/ACA
• Mounting type – Non-vented riser with hinged and latched access
door for easy cleanout and service of material discharge. (Note - not
available on SRC16/ACA051 model. Consult factory if required)
• Compressed air filter cleaning with control (115/1/60)
• Accumulator tank for compressed air
• SRC-style (time-fill) vacuum receiver
• ACA bag-style filter section with polyester glazed filter media
85
SPECIFICATIONS: SRC/ACA
Model number
SRC16/ACA051
SRC16/ACA131
SRC30/ACA131
SRC60/ACA131
SRC16/ACA251
SRC30/ACA251
SRC60/ACA251
SRC16/ACA251
SRC30/ACA251
SRC60/ACA251
5
2.0
Filter surface area,
sq. ft.
5.1
7.5
2.5
13
10
2.5/3.0
25
15
3.0/3.5
25
Power unit size, HP Line size, in.
SPECIFICATIONS: SRC/FC
Model number
SRC16/FC15
SRC30/FC15
SRC60/FC15
SRC16/FC30
SRC30/FC30
SRC60/FC30
SRC30/FC55
SRC60/FC55
MATERIAL HANDLING
Power unit size, HP Line size, in.
Filter surface area,
sq. ft.
7.5
2.5
15
10
15
2.5/3.0
3.0/3.5
30
25
4.5
55
86
Vacuum receiver size,
cu. ft.
1.6
1.6
3.0
6.0
1.6
3.0
6.0
1.6
3.0
6.0
Mounting
configuration
Flange mount
Non-vented riser
Mounting
configuration
Non-vented riser
VACTRAC ™ FILTER CHAMBERS
MATERIAL HANDLING
VACTRAC™ FILTER CHAMBERS
Every AEC vacuum conveying system uses a remote central filter chamber
to eliminate on-the-machine filter maintenance as well as to protect the
vacuum pump from damage due to dust or particle ingestion.
For use with any VacTrac™ pump, the VFC Cartridge-style filter chamber
features a two-stage dust collector that incorporates a cyclonic vortex
separation chamber with a large-capacity cartridge filter element to produce
a highly efficient, low-maintenance filter.
The FC Series bag-style filter chambers are used with our APDB or VTPB
power units with patented PulseJet™ Blowback for filter cleaning.
VFC CARTRIDGE STYLE FILTER CHAMBERS
VFC Series Cartridge Style
(model CFC-1000 filter shown)
• Two stage cyclone/cartridge filter design
• 29” high floor stand for drum discharge
FC Series Bag Style
(model FC-15 filter shown)
OPTIONAL FEATURES: VFC SERIES
• Reverse pulse filter element
• 45” floor stand, 38” clearance
• Flapper dump valve and filter shroud
• 1/2” compressed air solenoid for blowback (less
controls)
FC BAG STYLE FILTER CHAMBERS
• 1/2” compressed air solenoid for blowback with
stand-alone control assembly
• Removable dust can on 29” floor stand
• 12 oz. glazed polyester felt bags
OPTIONAL FEATURES: FC SERIES
• Flapper dump valve with floor stand and dust shroud
• Floor mount configuration
• 45” floor stand with 38” clearance
• Floor stand with manual dump valve
• Acrylic filter media
• Gore-Tex® filter media
• Enclosed floor stand
• Spare filter bag rack with polyester bags
• Manual dump configuration
87
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
VFC225
Filter area,
sq. ft. (sq. cm.)
35 (225.8)
VFC1000
55 (354.9)
Model
Filter area,
sq. ft. (sq. cm.)
FC15
FC30
FC55
5, 7.5, 10, 15
(3.7, 5.6, 7.5, 11.2)
15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50
(11.2, 14.9, 18.7, 22.4, 29.8, 37.3)
Power unit,
HP (kW)
15 (96.8)
30 (193.6)
55 (354.9)
DIMENSIONS
Model
VFC225
VFC1000
Power unit,
HP (kW)
5, 7.5, 10 (3.7, 5.6, 7.5)
10, 15 (7.5, 11.2)
20, 25, 30 (14.9, 18.7, 22.4)
A, in. (cm)
20 (51)
28 (71)
VFC Cartridge-Style Vortex Filter Chambers
MATERIAL HANDLING
Line size, in. dia. OD
2, 2.5,3, 3, 3.5 (3 Sch. 5)
3.5 (3 Sch. 5), 4, 4.5 (4 Sch.
10), 5, 5 Sch. 10, 6 Sch. 10
Line size, in. dia. OD
2, 2.5, 3
3, 3.5 (3 Sch. 5)
4, 4.5 (4 Sch. 10), 5, 5 Sch. 10
B, in. (cm)
62.88 (160)
78.88 (200)
C, in. (cm)
45.25 (115)
60.88 (155)
88
Length,
in. (cm)
20 (51)
Height,
in. (cm)
73 (186)
Width,
in. (cm)
Ship. weight
lbs. (kg)
26 (66)
90 (229)
26 (66)
200 (91)
20 (51)
Length, Width, in. Height,
in. (cm)
(cm)
in. (cm)
28 (71)
28 (71)
28 (71)
160 (73)
28 (71) 62 (158)
28 (71) 89 (226)
28 (71) 101 (257)
D, in. (cm)
17.50 (45)
25.50 (65)
Ship. weight
lbs. (kg)
120 (44)
160 (53)
200 (84)
E, in. (cm)
29 (74)
29 (74)
DIMENSIONS
Model
FC-15
FC-30
FC-55
A, in. (mm)
56 5/16 (1430)
80 5/16 (2040)
83 (2108)
Floor Mount
FC-15/FC-30
MATERIAL HANDLING
B, in. (mm)
C, in. (mm)
15 1/2 (394)
20 (508)
66 (1676)
76 (1930)
15 1/2 (394)
42 (1067)
Stand Mount
FC-15/FC-30
Floor Mount
FC-55
89
D, in. (mm)
45 (1143)
45 (1143)
50 (1270)
20 (508)
20 (508)
26 (660)
Stand Mount
FC-55
E, in. (mm)
28 (711)
28 (711)
35 (889)
NOTES:
MATERIAL HANDLING
90
VTP SERIES VACUUM POWER UNITS
MATERIAL HANDLING
AEC’s VTP Series vacuum pump uses a positive displacement blower and
is intended to convey pellets and regrind over long distances. It features
continuous conveying with atmospheric relief for high conveying rates,
vacuum gauge on pump for monitoring vacuum level, and high vacuum
relief for safe operation.
Available in 20-30 hp models.
VTP Series
STANDARD FEATURES
• Positive displacement blower
• 460/3/60 totally-enclosed fan-cooled (TEFC) motor
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Atmospheric vent valve
• Sound enclosure
• Adjustable motor mount
• Fused disconnect
• NEMA-12 junction box with starter mounted on unit
• NEMA 4 junction box
• Vacuum gauge
• 208/3/60, 230/3/60, 380/3/50, 415/3/50, 575/3/60
voltage
• Mechanical high vacuum relief valve
• Re-sheave power unit
• High vacuum safety switch
• Self-cleaning cyclone/cartridge combination filter is
also available with optional compressed air cleaning
• Premium discharge silencer
• Retrofit junction box to convert old-style or other
manufacturers’ vacuum power units to use new
VacTrac controllers. Specify HP and voltage when
ordering
91
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
VTP20
VTP30
HP (kW)
20 (14.9)
30 (22.4)
Line Size OD
in. (mm)
4 (101.6)
5 (127)
Air Flow
cfm (cmh)
475 (805)
665 (1127)
MATERIAL HANDLING
Amp Draw
230 V
49.6
76.3
Amp Draw
460 V
24.8
38.1
Rated performance is at standard atmosphere and sea level conditions. High elevation affects system performance.
Note: 3.5” OD is equivalent to 3” Sch. 5; 4.5” OD is equivalent to 4” Sch. 10
Amp Draw
575 V
19.8
30.4
Shipping Weight
lbs. (kg)
1600 (727)
1700 (789)
F
in. (cm)
31 (79)
35.75 (91)
G
in. (cm)
60 (167)
69.3 (176)
Recommended Vacuum Receivers, cu. ft. (l)
3.0, 6.0 (84.9, 169.9)
3.0, 6.0 (84.9, 169.9)
Model
VTP20
VTP30
DIMENSIONS
Model
VTP20
VTP30
A
in. (cm)
32 (81)
38 (97)
B
in. (cm)
56 (142)
50 (127)
C
in. (cm)
65 (178)
85 (216)
D
in. (cm)
32.5 (82)
37.25 (95)
92
E
in. (cm)
53 (134)
48.25 (123)
VTPB BLOWBACK VACUUM POWER UNITS
MATERIAL HANDLING
VTPB SERIES BLOWBACK VACUUM POWER UNITS
AEC’s VTPB Series blowback vacuum pump features non-reversing valves
with Pulse Jet™ Blowback and is designed to convey dusty materials and
some powders over long distances. The blowback cycle cleans the filter on
demand and aids in emptying the vacuum receivers. With the help of
unique air directional valves, the power unit automatically cycles from load
cycle to blowback without stopping and reversing the motor and blower.
Available in 25-30 hp models.
STANDARD FEATURES
VTPB Series
• Positive displacement blower
• 460/3/60 totally-enclosed fan-cooled (TEFC) motor
• Non-reversing valve design
• NEMA-12 junction box with starter mounted on unit
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Mechanical high vacuum relief valve
• Fused disconnect (VTPB 25-30)
• Vacuum gauge
• Sound enclosure
• NEMA 4 junction box
• High vacuum safety switch
• 208/3/60, 230/3/60, 380/3/50, 415/3/50, 575/3/60
voltage
• Premium discharge silencer
• Re-sheave power unit
• Retrofit junction box to convert old-style or other
manufacturers’ vacuum power units to use new
VacTrac controllers. Specify HP and voltage when
ordering.
93
VTPB SERIES VACUUM POWER UNITS
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
HP (kW)
VTPB25
VTPB30
25 (18.7)
30 (22.4)
Line Size OD
in. (mm)
4.5 (4" sch 10)
5" sch 10
Air Flow
cfm (cmh)
570 (968)
711 (1208)
MATERIAL HANDLING
Amp Draw
230 V
49.6
76.3
Amp Draw
460 V
24.8
38.1
Rated performance is at standard atmosphere and sea level conditions. High elevation affects system performance.
Note: 3.5” OD is equivalent to 3” Sch. 5; 4.5” OD is equivalent to 4” Sch. 10
Model
VTPB25
VTPB30
Amp Draw
575 V
19.8
30.4
Shipping Weight
lbs. (kg)
1600 (727)
1700 (789)
Recommended Vacuum Receivers, cu. ft. (l)
3.0, 6.0 (84.9, 169.9)
6.0 (169.9)
DIMENSIONS
Model
VTPB25
VTPB30
A
in. (cm)
80 (203)
80 (203)
B
in. (cm)
60 (152)
60 (152)
C
in. (cm)
39 (101)
39 (101)
D
in. (cm)
74 (188)
74 (188)
E
in. (cm)
42.5 (108)
42.5 (108)
F
in. (cm)
46 (117)
46 (117)
94
G
in. (cm)
65 (166)
65 (166)
H
in. (cm)
9 (23)
9 (23)
I
in. (cm)
31.5 (80)
31.5 (80)
J
in. (cm)
35 (89)
35 (89)
K
in. (cm)
32 (81)
32 (81)
APD AND APC SERIES VACUUM PUMPS
MATERIAL HANDLING
AEC has several types of ultra-compact vacuum power units to suit your
conveying needs. The APD Series Vacuum Pump uses a high-efficiency,
quiet, positive displacement blower and can be utilized to convey pellets
and regrind over long distances. The APC Series Vacuum Pump uses a
quiet, regenerative/vacuum blower and can be utilized to convey freeflowing pelletized materials.
APD STANDARD FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
APD and APC Series
Vacuum Pumps
Ultra-compact design
Positive displacement vacuum pump
High efficiency, quiet blower design
Conveys continuously using an atmospheric relief valve to provide
high conveying rates over long distances
Suitable for all virgin and most regrind applications
Vacuum gauge on pump for visual indication of system performance
High vacuum relief for ensured safe operation
Available in 5-15 hp models (standard)
Larger models available
NEMA -12 junction box with fused electrical disconnect
OPTIONAL FEATURES
APD Series
• Reversing blowback - APDB style
• Premium sound enclosure
• Special voltages
• Central filter
APC STANDARD FEATURES
APC Series
• Regenerative vacuum pump design
• Quiet, efficient system used to convey free-flowing pelletized materials
over short to medium distances
• Available in 3.5-11.5 hp (2.7-8.5 kW) models
• Other sizes available
• High vacuum relief for ensured safe operation
• Vacuum gauge on pump for visual indication of system performance
• NEMA -12 junction box with fused electrical disconnect
95
• Filter mounting plate
• Central filter
MATERIAL HANDLING
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
APC 3.5
APC 6.5
APC 11
APD(B) 5
460V Power
Unit
Dimensions,
in. (cm)
Vacuum
Line Size
Material
Line Size
2.7
2.0
1.5
3.7
2.0
2.0
8.2
2.5
2.5
5
3.7
2.0
2.0
10
7.5
3.0
3.0
HP
35 L x 36 W x 19 H
3.5
(89x91x46)
31 L x 24 W x 18 H
5.0
(79x61x46)
35 L x 31 W x 19 H
11.0
(89x79x48)
APD(B) 7.5
APD(B) 10 31 L x 31 W x 75 H
(79 x 79 x 190)
APD(B) 10
APD(B) 15
APD(B) 15
APD Sound Enclosure
7.5
10
15
15
Full Load Amps
230V
460V
7.1
4.6
12.9
6.5
32.5
16.2
APC 3.5
APC 6.5
APC 11
APD(B) 5 (2.0)
APD(B) 7.5 (2.5)
APD(B) 10 (2.5)
APD(B) 10 (3.0)
APD(B) 15 (3.0)
APD(B) 15 (3.5)
Full Load Amps
230V
460V
13.4
6.7
20.6
10.3
28.4
14.2
29.2
14.6
38.4
19.2
39.2
19.6
APC Series shown
with optional filter
26
(660)
kW
in, OD
5.6
7.5
2.5
2.5
11.2
11.2
3.0
3.5
575V
3.0
4.3
10.6
575V
5.4
8.2
11.4
11.7
15.3
15.7
in, OD
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.5
Recommended Vacuum
Receivers
cu. ft.
0.1, 0.2, 0.4,
0.8
0.1, 0.2, 0.4,
0.8, 1.6
1.6, 3.0
Liters
3.0, 6.0, 11.0,
23.0
3.0, 6.0, 11.0,
23.0, 45.0
45.0, 85.0
0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 6.0, 11.0, 23.0,
1.6
45.0
0.8, 1.6
23.0, 45.0
1.6, 3.0, 6.0 45.0, 85.0, 170.0
1.6, 3.0, 6.0 45.0, 85.0, 170.0
Maximum
Shipping
Airflow
Recommended
Weight, lbs.
Conveying
(kg)
CFM m3/hr
Distance, ft. (m)
0-150 (46)
130 (59)
106
180
0-300 (91)
149 (66)
152
258
0-400 (122)
160 (73)
225
381
385 (175)
120
203
400 (181)
225
381
500 (152)
3.0, 6.0
85.0, 170.0
3.0, 6.0
85.0, 170.0
38 L x 40 W x 43 H (96 x 102 x 109)
400 (181)
400 (181)
420 (190)
420 (190)
155
200
300
360
DIMENSIONS
APC Series
APD Series
APDB Series
59
(1499)
28
(711)
96
263
339
508
610
APD SERIES SOUND ENCLOSURE
MATERIAL HANDLING
APD/APDB SERIES SOUND ENCLOSURE
The APD/APDB Series sound enclosure can be used with AEC’s APD
Series Vacuum Pump. The two-thirds/one-third clamshell design clamps
easily around the pump, providing a minimum 15+ dBA sound reduction.
APD Series
Sound Enclosure
STANDARD FEATURES
• 13-gauge diamond-plate aluminum construction
• Two-thirds/one-third clamshell design with latching clamps
• 2.75" flat foam, fire retardant, high temperature, oil-resistant
insulation
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Resistant to heat and oils
• No optional features are available
• Baffled air inlet assures maximum attenuation
• Design allows for all-weather installation
• Unit ships fully assembled. Light enough to be lifted over package
for installation
• Easy to install
• Easy access for pump service
97
APD SERIES SOUND ENCLOSURE
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL HANDLING
Dimensions, in. (cm)
38 x 40 x 43
(78 cm L x 78 cm W x 215 cm H)
*APD Pump sold separately
DIMENSIONS
3.50
3.50
40
38
(5Hp 28.25)
(7.5Hp 30.75)
(10Hp 31.5)
(15Hp 30.5)
Air vent
21.5
38
40
Air vent
22
38
13 1/8
38
6"x12" Rectangular
Pass-Through
(5Hp 28.25) 43
(7.5Hp 30.75)
(10Hp 31.5)
(15Hp 30.5)
43
Air vent
21.5
14 7/8
38
10 1/2
6
6"x12" Rectangular
Pass-Through
40
4
40
Air vent
22
18 5/8
38
6
14 7/8
4
29 1/2
29 1/2
Non-Reversing APDB Pump Configuration
P/N: A0574776
Standard APD Pump Configuration
P/N: A0573898
10 1/2
98
AFC-S CENTRAL VACUUM SAFETY FILTER
MATERIAL HANDLING
The AFC-S Safety Filter is used as a central dust and fine collection receiver
to protect the vacuum pump from damage. It operates as part of a central
conveying system and is controlled by the central conveying control panel.
The central filter is made out of corrosion and abrasion resistant stainless
steel and cast aluminum. The cleaning of the integrated filter is accomplished
automatically with compressed air blowback. The transparent collection
chamber is easily removed by quick disconnects. The unit is easy to operate,
access, and maintain.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Filter surface area of 50 sq. ft. (4.62 m2), rated for systems up to
360 cfm
• 24V DC control voltage
• Operates at 60-80 PSI (4.1-5.5 bar)
AFC-S Safety Filter
(shown with optional leg kit and
compressed air filter cleaning)
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Wall-mount configuration
• Transparent Plexiglass® collection chamber with quick disconnects
• Line sizes available: 1.5" (40mm), 2" (50mm), 2.5" (65mm),
3" (76mm), 3.5" (88mm), or 4" (110mm)
• Designed for central conveying applications
• Leg kit for floor mounting
• Mounting bracket for APC pump mounting
• Compressed air blowback with or without integrated
controller (110V AC or 24V DC)
• 110V AC control voltage
• Distributed I/O control
• Shipping weight - 85 lbs.
• Cyclone pre-filter for high dust applications - AFC-SC
99
SPECIFICATIONS
Wall Mount
MATERIAL HANDLING
Floor Mount
APC Pump Mount
14
(356)
16
(406)
40
(1016)
38
(965)
59
(1499)
13
(330)
13.50
(343)
All dimensions are in inches and (mm) unless specified otherwise.
26
(660)
FILTER CLEANING OPTIONS
28
(711)
Compressed Air Blowback
100
AFC-SC SERIES CENTRAL VACUUM PRE-FILTER
MATERIAL HANDLING
AFC-SC CENTRAL VACUUM CYCLONIC PRE-FILTER
The cyclonic chamber is used as a pre-filter in central dust and fine
systems to protect the vacuum pump from damage. It operates as part of a
central conveying system. The centrifugal force from the intake air causes
the spinning motion of the rotor to separate particles from the air stream.
The unit is 85% efficient up to 15 microns.
STANDARD FEATURES
AFC-SC Safety Filter
• Extreme duty filtration for high dust loading applications
• Designed for central conveying applications
• Significantly increases the life of the central filter element
• Wall-mount configuration
• Transparent
Plexiglass®
collection chamber with quick disconnects
• Line sizes available: 1.5” (40 mm), 2” (50 mm), 2.5” (65 mm),
3.0” (76 mm), 3.5” (89 mm), 4.0” (102 mm)
• Pre-filters must always be used in conjunction with a central filter
(sold separately)
101
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Leg kit for floor mounting
AFC-SC SERIES CENTRAL VACUUM PRE-FILTER
RUGGED, MODULAR CONSTRUCTION
MATERIAL HANDLING
The central filter is made out of corrosion- and abrasion-resistant stainless steel, aluminum, and non-corrosive engineering resin.
The see-through collection chamber is easily removed by quick disconnects. The unit is easy to operate, access, and maintain.
Note: Consult factory for glass-filled material conveying applications
HOW IT WORKS
AFC-S
Central Filter
AFC-SC Cyclonic
Pre-Filter
Dirty air from process
enters here
Cleaner air then proceeds
to the primary pump
central filter
Dirty process air passes
through the unique AFC-SC
pre-filter.
Clean, filtered air goes to
the vacuum pump
85+% of 15 micron and larger dirt particles are ejected into the collection
chamber. Design features of the AFC-SC minimize particles from re-entering
the air stream.
Note: A central filter is required and must be used in conjunction with this pre-filter
AFC-SC AIRFLOW
ç
Cleaner air proceeds to the central filter
ç
Dirt particles exit into the collection chamber
102
VACTRAC™ LOCAL I/O CONTROLLERS
MATERIAL HANDLING
VACTRAC™ LOCAL I/O CONVEYING SYSTEM CONTROLLERS
Vacuum conveying has never been more simple or versatile than with
AEC’s VacTrac Local I/O Controllers. From a 1-pump/5-station key-pad
interface to a 4-pump/32-station color touch-screen, AEC has the
controller to meet your conveying needs.
VTC 4/32, VTC 1/5
and VTC 2/20
STANDARD FEATURES
• Ability to operate single or multiple VacTrac vacuum power units
(VTP, VTPB or VTTV)
• Automatic pump shutdown
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Up to 33-station control capability
• 115 VAC control output (not available on VTC 2/9)
• Selectable pump and receiver configuration
• “Time-fill” or “volume-fill” operation 115/1/50 or 60 supply voltage
• 24 VDC or 115 VAC control output (except as noted)
• 230/1/60 supply voltage (24 VDC output only)
• 220/1/50 supply voltage and CE compliance
• 10-position, high-level cut-off selector switch (VTC
1/1 only)
• Audible/visual alarm
• PanelView 10” color touch-screen in lieu of standard
6” screen (VTC 4/32 only)
103
VACTRAC ™ LOCAL I/O CONTROLLERS
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
VTC1/1
VTC 1/5
VTC 2/9
VTC 2/20
VTC 3/33
VTC 4/32
Model
VTC 1/1
VTC 1/5
VTC 2/9
VTC 2/20
VTC 3/33
VTC 4/32
Max. Stations
1
5
9
20
33
32
Max. Pumps
1
1
2
2
3
4
MATERIAL HANDLING
Height
in. (mm)
10 (254)
16 (406)
16 (406)
20 (508)
24 (610)
30 (762)
Width
in. (mm)
8 (203)
16 (406)
16 (406)
20 (508)
24 (610)
24 (610)
Depth
in. (mm)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
10 (254)
10 (254)
12 (305)
Weight
lbs. (kg)
12 (5)
20 (9)
20 (9)
65 (30)
65 (30)
75 (34)
Features
Solid State control board - no display, DIP switch settings
Mitsubishi programmable relay controller, numeric display on panel
Mitsubishi PLC, 3" display with keypad
Allen-Bradley MicroLogix 1500 PLC, 6" color touch-screen interface, fused output blocks
Allen-Bradley MicroLogix 1500 PLC, 6" color touch-screen interface, fused output blocks
Allen-Bradley SLC 5/04 PLC, 6" PanelView color touch-screen interface, individual fused outputs, terminal strips for field
connections, 230 volt panels available with 24 VDC only
VTC 1/1 cannot control blowback output. Do not use for APDB or VTPB style vacuum pumps
104
VTC7/50 DISTRIBUTED I/O CONTROLLER
MATERIAL HANDLING
AEC’s VTC 7/50 VacTrac control system features distributed I/O and an
open architecture approach using proven off-the-shelf components. Color
touch-screen interface allows user-friendly control of up to 7 vacuum pumps
and 50 loading stations.
STANDARD FEATURES
VTC 7/50
• Allen-Bradley SLC 5/04 programmable controller with 10” color
touch-screen operator interface
• Diagnostics, operating instructions and parts information built into
controller
• NEMA 4 “insulation displacement” and patch cord connections for
rapid installation
• System designed for easy expansion
• Station options can be easily added or moved
• I/O components can be replaced without shutting down system
• Two cable “Armor Block” I/O modules
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Modem, SCADA/Ethernet capability, or web
server/Internet capability
• Remote interface (two maximum), Remote display
(two maximum)
• Central alarm (three maximum), additional
audible/visual unit with silence button
• Central purge capability
• Single or dual power supplies for network and output
power: 115/1/60 or 230/1/50/60
• Controls up to fifty (50) stations
• Controls up to seven (7) vacuum pumps
• Station interface module with 20’ cable and receptacle
wired into the hopper junction box
• Controls up to three (3) central alarms
• Time-fill or volume-fill operation
• Sequence or external atmospheric valve modification,
20’ cable per station
• 24VDC control voltage
• Low level alarm in material supply hopper, with or
without level switch
• 115/1/60 or 230/1/50/60 supply voltage
• Local station on/off switch with 20’ cable
• 8 or 16 I/O module including time- or volume-fill loading, local
station on/off control, low level input, alarm output, local or central
proportioning control
• 16 I/O module also includes vacuum receiver blowback, vacuum
receiver positive discharge, and local conveying line purge
105
• Local alarm with light box, 20’ cable
• Central or local remote proportioning valve controller
• Vacuum power unit module/circuit breaker/
disconnect, cables for vent valve, high vacuum switch
OPTIONAL POWER SUPPLY
MATERIAL HANDLING
Power supplies are available for network and output power, 115/1/60
and 230/1/50/60 voltage. Power supply sizing is based on power supplies
mounted in center of system; each station has volume-fill with sequence
valve and material proportioning capability. Consult factory if system is
equipped with additional options or does not meet the stated criteria.
Single power supply serves up to 25 stations, 4 pumps, 2 central alarms,
with 300 ft. network or output cable. Dual power supplies serve up to 50
stations, 7 pumps, 3 central alarms, with 600 ft. of network or output
cable.
OPTIONAL REMOTE PROPORTIONING VALVE CONTROLLER
All
___ Material line proofing: how many connections?
___ Local station On/Off control: how many?
___ Low level alarms: how many?
with or without switch? _____
___ Local alarms: how many?
___ Remote proportioning valves: how many?
central or local? _____
___ Vacuum receiver blowback: how many receivers?
Description
246 ft., 656 ft., or 1375 ft. roll
246 ft., 656 ft., or 1375 ft. roll
50 ft., 100 ft, 250 ft., 500 ft., 1000 ft. roll
Kit A: splices existing flat cables
Kit B: Adds power supply
1.5” to 2.5”, 3” and 3.5”, 4” or 5”
___ Positive discharge control: how many receivers?
___ Individual line purge
___ Vacuum pumps: how many?
___ Filter chamber, blowback control: how many?
___ Communication cable
ARMORBLOCK MODULE CONFIGURATION
VTC7/50D
Plus
___ Central purge
___ Internal atmospheric valve adder: how many?
INSTALLATION COMPONENTS
Input
Demand switch
Volume-fill proximity switch
Station bypass switch
Low level switch
Open
Open
Open
Open
___ Central alarm: how many locations?
___ Sequence valve modifications: how many stations?
A retrofit option is available to use existing AEC components with a
distributed I/O system. Consult factory for proper conversion components.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
___ Remote display: how many?
___ Station Armor Block modules: how many?
RETROFIT OPTION
Conduit hangers(100)
___ Remote interface: how many?
future? _____
The local remote proportioning controller includes a connector in the
junction box and 20’ of cable. For use with remote proportioning valve
with E24 controller.
Splice kits
___ Main controller: Central purge option, Modem,
SCADA or Ethernet capability
___ Power supply: how many stations now?
The central remote proportioning controller includes a receptacle in the
junction box and 20’ of cable. For use with remote proportioning valves
without controls.
Component
Communication cable
Power cable
Interface display cable
SYSTEM CHECKLIST
___ Power cable
Output
Sequence valve
Alarm output
Remote proportioning valve
Remote proportioning valve
Positive discharge control
___ Interface display cable
___ Splice kits; required for existing cables only
___ Component hangers
Local purge valve control
Not used
106
MATERIAL HANDLING
Vacuum conveying has never been more simple or versatile than with
AEC’s new VacTrac™ Series 24/128 Controller. The Vactrac 24/128
controller from AEC features enhanced graphics and control of up to 24
vacuum conveying pumps, 128 loading stations and 128 purge valves.
The 24/128 controller utilizes a DeviceNet distributed I/O network, and
standard features include an Allen-Bradley CompactLogix controller with
a 10" color touch-screen operator interface.
STANDARD FEATURES
VTC 24/128
• Time fill loading
• Prioritized station loading
• Manifold line sharing
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Built-in system diagnostics
• Add new equipment and/or equipment options without shutting
down the system
• Optimized for blender applications
• Additional touch-screen operator interfaces for
multi-location access within the plant
• Multiple vacuum pump and filter cleaning options
• Line purging capability
• Closed loop conveying
• Local station On/Off control
• Centralized remote proportioning valve control
• Blowback filter cleaning at the loading station
• Vacuum receiver positive discharge
• Volume-fill of vacuum receiver
• Low-level indication in supply hoppers
• Local and/or centralized alarms
• Ethernet capabilities
• Supply power noise filter surge/suppressor
• Granulator unloading
107
VTC24/128 CONTROLLER
MATERIAL HANDLING
The sample control screens below show how versatile this powerful control platform is. Easy-to-follow graphical touch screens
navigate you through total control of this central vacuum system controller.
Naming of loading stations, pumps,
purge valves and material sources
Pump status
Built-in diagnostics, operating
instructions and installation
instructions
Operator Screen
Set-up Screen
Spare Parts Screen
108
VACUUM/PRESSURE SYSTEMS
MATERIAL HANDLING
AEC provides an economical all-in-one vacuum/pressure package featuring
a single blower and motor. The SVP single blower vacuum/pressure system
is ideal in many applications where pelletized material is to be conveyed
from railcars to bulk storage silos over distances less than 800 equivalent
feet. Dual blower/dual motor vacuum/pressure systems are available for
longer distances and higher rates.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Single or dual blower configurations
• Single blower systems available in 30, 40, or 50 HP
• Cyclone receiver - pellet
• Continuous self-cleaning filters/receiver - powder
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Pressure take-off adapter in mild or stainless steel (product
contact surfaces only)
• Continuous vacuum/pressure power units available
in 7.5 - 50 HP
• Rotary valve
• Alternate voltages
• System after-cooler
• Cartridge-style vortex filter chambers
• Diverter valve with control interconnect
109
SINGLE BLOWER VACUUM/PRESSURE UNITS
MATERIAL HANDLING
12” Hg/6 psi (406 millibars/41.37 kPa) maximum. Single blower units include positive displacement blower, air-operated vacuum
vent valve, 460/3/60 TEFC motor, vacuum and pressure gauges, pressure check valve, and mechanical pressure release valve.
System must be designed with relatively similar vacuum-side and pressure-side equivalent conveying distances for proper
operation. Add proper cyclone/filter receiver, rotary valve, pressure take-off adapter, central filter, and control panel.
Model
SVP 30
SVP 40
SVP 50
Power unit, hp (kW)
30 (22.4)
40 (29.8)
50 (37.3)
Line size, in. OD
3
4
5
Airflow, cfm (cmh)
225 (382)
408 (693)
646 (1097)
Recommended cyclone size
WSC4
WSC5
WSC6
CONTINUOUS VACUUM POWER UNITS
12” Hg/6 psi (406 millibars/41.37 kPa) maximum. All vacuum power units include a positive displacement blower, vacuum gauge,
460/3/60 TEFC motor, and vacuum relief valve.
Model
CVP7.5
CVP10
CVP15
CVP20
CVP25
CVP30
CVP40
CVP50
Power unit, hp (kW)
7.5 (5.6)
10 (7.5)
15 (11.2)
20 (14.9)
25 (18.6)
30 (22.4)
40 (29.8)
50 (37.3)
Line size, in. OD
2.5
3
3, 3.5 (3 Sch. 5)
4
4.5 (4 Sch. 10)
5
5 Sch. 10
6 Sch. 10
Airflow, cfm (cmh)
150 (255
225 (382)
225, 303 (382, 515)
408 (693)
495 (841)
646 (1098)
765 (1300)
1100 (1869)
CONTINUOUS PRESSURE POWER UNITS
All vacuum power units include a positive displacement blower, pressure check valve, mechanical pressure relief valve, 460/3/60
TEFC motor, pressure gauge, inlet filter/silencer and premium discharge silencer.
Model
CPP7.5
CPP10
CPP15
CPP20
CPP25
CPP30
CPP40
CPP50
Power unit, hp (kW)
7.5 (5.6)
10 (7.5)
15 (11.2)
20 (14.9)
25 (18.6)
30 (22.4)
40 (29.8)
50 (37.3)
Line size, in. OD
2.5
3
3, 3.5 (3 Sch. 5)
4
4.5 (4 Sch. 10)
5
5 Sch. 10
6 Sch. 10
On vacuum/pressure systems, starters for the two pumps and the rotary valve and controls are mounted in the NEMA 12 panel
Airflow, cfm (cmh)
150 (255
225 (382)
225, 303 (382, 515)
408 (693)
495 (841)
646 (1098)
765 (1300)
1100 (1869)
SYSTEM AFTERCOOLER: AIR-COOLED/FAN OPERATED
Air-to-air heat exchanger with fan and TEFC motor is recommended for SVP or CPP systems with soft material (PE) and high
ambient temperatures. For temperatures below 250ºF (121ºC), discharge temperature is reduced to approximately 30ºF (17ºC) of
ambient.
110
CONTROL SYSTEM
MATERIAL HANDLING
NEMA 12 control panel, 115/1/60 includes starter for one rotary valve and one or two power units. Optional selector switch for
high level receiver cut-off has up to 10 positions. Starters are available for additional rotary valves.
CYCLONE RECEIVERS
Pellet systems only. All cyclone receivers include 3108-A mounted in sidewall of throw-out cone for high level cutoff.
Model number
WSC3
WSC4
WSC5
WSC6
WSC7
WSC8
Motor power, hp (kW)
5, 7.5 (3.73, 5.59)
10, 15 (7.46, 11.19)
20, 25 (14.92, 18.65)
30 (22.38)
40 (29.84)
50 (37.30)
Line size, in. OD
2, 2.5
3, 3.5
4, 4.5
5
5 Sch. 10
6 Sch. 10
Airflow, cfm (cmh)
103, 153 (175, 260))
225, 303 (382, 515)
408, 495 (693, 841)
646 (1097)
764 (1298)
939 (1595)
CONTINUOUS SELF-CLEANING FILTER/RECEIVERS
Self-cleaning filter/receivers include enamel exterior, primed interior, legs with adequate clearance for airlock with discharge
adapter, NEMA 4 control panel, 3108-A mounted in receiver side wall for high level cutoff, and 115/1/60 voltage.
Model
SCF-51/7.5
SCF-74/10
SCF-106/15
SCF-127/20
SCF-191/25
SCF-229/30
SCF-255/40
SCF-305/50
Vacuum power unit
hp (kW)
7.5 (5.59)
10 (7.49)
15 (11.19)
20 (14.92)
25 (18.65)
30 (22.38)
40 (29.84)
50 (37.30)
Filter area
sq. ft. (sq. m)
51 (4.7)
74 (6.9)
106 (9.8)
127 (11.8)
191 (17.8)
229 (21.3)
255 (23.7)
305 (28.4)
Compressed air
scfm @ 90-100 psi
3.3
3.5
5.1
5.9
6.5
6.8
6.9
7.2
Compressed air,
slpm @ 620-690 kPa
93.4
99.1
144.4
167.1
184.1
192.5
195.4
203.9
SELF-CLEANING BIN VENT FILTERS FOR MOUNTING TO SILOS
Self-cleaning bin vent filters the exhausted conveying air and includes mild steel construction, weather hood, primed interior,
enamel exterior, NEMA 4 control panel, 16 oz. polyester bags, safety grid, and 115/1/60 voltage.
Model
BB-16-58
BB-16-84
BB-25-84
BB-36-84
Max. flow, 5-1
ratio, cfm (cmh)
585 (994)
850 (1444)
1325 (2251)
1910 (3245)
Filter area, Weight, lbs.
sq. ft. (sq. m)
(kg)
117 (10.9)
610 (277)
170 (15.8)
720 (327)
265 (24.6)
940 (427)
382 (35.5)
1200 (545)
Inlet sq. opening,
sq. in. (sq. cm)
32 (81.3)
32 (81.3)
40 (101.6)
48 (121.9)
111
Compressed air,
scfm @ 90-100 psi
5.9
6.2
7.5
8.4
Compressed air,
slpm @ 620-690 kPa
167
176
212
238
MATERIAL HANDLING
CENTRAL FILTERS: SELF-CLEANING
Self-cleaning central filters (CFQ Series) include primed interior, enamel exterior, 115/1/60 voltage, 24” clearance, NEMA 4 control
panel, and manual dump valve on filter discharge flange.
Model
CFQ-51
CFQ-74
CFQ-106
Vacuum power unit, hp (kW)
25, 30, SVP50 (18.6, 22.4, 37.3)
40
50
Filter area
sq. ft. (sq. m)
51 (4.7)
74 (6.9)
106 (9.8)
Airflow
cfm (cmh)
612 (1039)
962 (1634)
1378 (2341)
Compressed air,
scfm @ 90-100 psi
3.3
3.5
5.1
CENTRAL FILTERS: CARTRIDGE STYLE
Model
VFC225
VFC1000
Filter area,
sq. ft. (sq. cm.)
Power unit,
HP (kW)
35 (225.8)
55 (354.9)
5, 7.5, 10, 15
(3.7, 5.6, 7.5, 11.2)
15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50
(11.2, 14.9, 18.7, 22.4, 29.8, 37.3)
Line size OD, in.
2, 2.5,3, 3, 3.5 (3 Sch. 5)
3.5 (3 Sch. 5), 4, 4.5
(4 Sch. 10), 5, 5 Sch. 10,
6 Sch. 10
Compressed air,
slpm @ 620-690 kPa
93.4
99.1
144.4
Length, Height, Width, Ship. weight
in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm)
lbs. (kg)
20 (51) 73 (186) 20 (51)
160 (73)
26 (66) 90 (229) 26 (66)
200 (91)
DIVERTER VALVES
Diverter valve options include aluminum valve construction, stainless steel valve construction, single or double solenoid, proof
switches, and pre-wired terminal box.
Control interconnects for diverter valves are available in 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 position models. Control interconnects work in conjunction
with selector for high level cut-off and include input provisions for proof-switches on the diverter valves.
Model
D2.5-2ALY
D3-2ALY
D3-2ALY-P.5
D4-2ALY
D4-2ALY
D5-2ALY
D5-2ALY-P1
D6-2ALY-P1
Size, in. OD
2.5
3
3.5 (3 Sch. 5)
3.5 (3 Sch. 10)
4
5
5 Sch. 10
6 Sch. 10
112
ROTARY VALVES
MATERIAL HANDLING
All standard rotary valves include an 8-vane, open-end rotor, TEFC motor, roller chain, sprockets, guard, and 230 or 460/3/60
voltage.
Sizing formula is lbs./hr = bulk density: (lbs./cu. ft.) x capacity: (cu. ft./rev.) x rpm: (rev./min) x 60 min./hr. x 0.75
kg/hr = bulk density: (kg/liter) x capacity: (liter/rev) x rpm: (rev./min.) x 60 min./hr. x 0.75
Valve Type
1
2
3
Applications
Non-abrasive, non-critical pellets
Abrasive, dusty, or powdered
material, non-critical
Abrasive pellets,
critical applications
Applications
Examples
Housing
PE, PP, nylon, LLDPE,
non-FDA
PVC powders, PET,
pellets, non-FDA
Cast iron
Rotor
8-vane open end,
carbon steel
Rotor tips
Relieved
Cast iron, 8-vane closed end,
Replaceable
chrome plated
carbon steel
Pharmaceuticals, food
Cast iron,
8-vane open end,
containers, FDA
chrome plated
stainless steel
Relieved
Shaft air purge
Optional
Standard
Optional
All pellet applications require a shear protector (pellet valve) above the rotary valve.
Model
number
FT-7
FT-9
FT-11
FT-12
FT-14
FT-16
Capacities, open rotor,
per rev, cu. ft. (l)
0.12 (3.4)
0.27 (7.6)
0.47 (13.3)
0.75 (21.2)
1.10 (31.1)
1.60 (45.3)
Specifications
Capacities, closed rotor, Motor @ 20 rpm,
per rev, cu. ft. (l)
hp (kW)
n/a
0.33 (0.25)
0.21 (5.9)
0.50 (0.37)
0.41 (11.6)
0.75 (0.56)
0.64 (18.1)
1 (0.75)
0.96 (27.2)
1.5 (1.12)
1.40 (39.6)
2 (1.49)
Valve type (model number)
1 (FT-7/1), 2 (FT-7/2), 3 (FT-7/3)
1 (FT-9/1), 2 (FT-9/2), 3 (FT-9/3)
1 (FT-11/1), 2 (FT-11/2), 3 (FT-11/3)
1 (FT-12/1), 2 (FT-12/2), 3 (FT-12/3)
1 (FT-14/1), 2 (FT-14/2), 3 (FT-14/3)
1 (FT-16/1), 2 (FT-16/2), 3 (FT-16/3)
Available options include CS open-end rotor with relieved tips (Type 1), CS closed end rotor with relieved tips (Type 2), SS open end rotor with relieved tips (Type 3), high
temperature package, and shaft air purge with NEMA 4*, 7, or 9 solenoids.
* standard with Type 2 valves
PRESSURE TAKE-OFF ADAPTERS
PTO Series pressure take-off adapters are available in mild or stainless steel. PTO models F7 through F16 are available for rotary
valve models FT7 through FT16.
RAILCAR KITS AND ACCESSORIES
Railcar kits include components that are required to unload a railcar with an AEC conveying system. The hatch filter (model RHF-1)
is required to properly vent the railcar during the unloading process. Probes are not required or included with 3.5” to 6” kits.
Tubing is aluminum.
3.5” OD
2.0” OD
2.25” OD
2.5” OD
3.0” OD
(3” Sch. 5)
4.0” OD
4” Sch. 5
5” Sch. 10 6” Sch. 10
Part No. W00011564 W00011565 W00011566 W00011567 W00017893 W00011568 W00011569 W00011570 W00052335
113
MATERIAL HANDLING
TYPICAL SINGLE BLOWER SYSTEM FOR FREE-FLOWING PELLETS
TYPICAL DUAL BLOWER SYSTEM FOR FREE-FLOWING PELLETS
114
MATERIAL LEVEL INDICATORS
MATERIAL HANDLING
LEVEL SENSORS AND SILO MEASURING HEADS
AEC offers Bindicator and Monitor rotary level sensors, as well as
Bindicator radio frequency sensors and silo inventory measuring heads.
Control consoles are also available.
ROTARY LEVEL SENSORS
• Cast aluminum housing, stainless steel shaft and paddle
• 115/1/60 VAC motor and two SPDT auxiliary switches
• 18” extension (top-mount units only)
• NEMA 4/5 enclosure
LEVEL INDICATORS: OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Flex coupling and coupler (top-mount units only)
• 230/1/60 voltage (rotary level sensors and RF
12000 only)
RADIO FREQUENCY LEVEL SENSORS
• Cast aluminum housing
• High temperature, 400ºF package: (not available on
Bindicator models or radio frequency level sensors)
• 115/1/60 VAC operation with DPDT output relay
MEASURING HEAD: OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Control console with 2, 4, or 10 control points
• Single probe with 3/4” threaded connector
• Electronic pushbutton calibration
• NEMA 3R or NEMA 7 enclosures
• NEMA 4/5 enclosure
• NEMA 1 or NEMA 7 control console
• Internal heater assembly for control console
• Electronics are remote-mounted with 20 feet of cable
• Air purge for control console
SILO INVENTORY MEASURING HEAD
• Sounding weights for control console
• 230/1/60
• Measuring span up to 100 feet
• Injection-molded Minlon frame and polyethylene cover with 3”
NPT mounting hub
• Plastic sensing weight
• 3” NPT aluminum pipe flanges
• 3” x 12” long (approx. 76 mm x 305 mm) aluminum standpipe
• Count output in 0.39” (1 cm) increments
• 115/1/50-60 VAC electrical wiring
• 3/4” connection
115
MATERIAL LEVEL INDICATORS
ROTARY LEVEL SENSORS
Brand
Bindicator
Bindicator
Monitor
Monitor
Model number
3108AS
3108AT
3108BS
3108BT
MATERIAL HANDLING
Mounting
Side
Top
Side
Top
Diameter, in.
8
8
8
8
Use with control consoles listed below or railcar unloading system for high level cutoff.
Height, in.
6
6
6
6
Ship. weight, lbs.
8
10
8
10
CONTROL CONSOLES
Control consoles are available for use with rotary or radio frequency level sensors. The multiple-point console features high and
low indicating lights, audible alarm, NEMA 1 enclosure, and control contacts rated at 1 amp at 115/1/50-60 VAC. Consult factory
for lead time.
Model Number
RLC2
RLC4
RLC10
* Consult factory for other configurations
Type
Relay-based control
PLC-based control
PLC-based control
Total Control Points
2
4
10
Indicating Lights on Graphic*
1 high; 1 low
2 high; 2 low
5 high; 5 low
SILO INVENTORY MEASURING HEADS
The Bindicator silo inventory measuring head comes with 100 feet of 1/16” braided nylon cable. Cable length should be specified
inside tank height minus 2 feet.
Model IMH-GP-4 features a NEMA 4 enclosure. Model IMH-GP4-EP features a NEMA 7 enclosure, cast aluminum housing, class
I, division I, groups C & D and class II, division I, groups E, F, & G stainless steel plumb bob weight, auxiliary cable wiper.
A 10 watt, 115/1/50-60 internal heater assembly is available, and is required for below-freezing temperatures. Air purge is
available for high-temperature and/or dusty environments, with 1/4” NPT on mechanical side. Sounding weights are available in
standard plastic with spike, 316 stainless steel bob weight, or 316 stainless steel float.
REMOTE DISPLAY CONTROL CONSOLE
The silo inventory measuring head is available with an optional remote NEMA 4x display with keypad.
Control panel includes:
• 115/1/60 (230V optional)
• 4 line x 20 character display
• Programmable sensor names and ranges
• Enable/disable network addresses
• RS-485 (MODBUS) communication
• Up to 99 sensors connected to a single display
• Optional modem
• Optional PC software
116
WELDED SILOS AND ACCESSORIES
MATERIAL HANDLING
AEC Welded Silos offer easy maintenance and unmatched weatherproof
construction. Offering the highest quality standards, these silos include:
tank sections which are dimensionally held to extremely close tolerance for
high weldment integrity; submerged arc welding of carbon steel cylinders
for 100% penetration with no slag or porosity; automatic power brushing of
exterior circumferential welds of white metal finish for inspection and
coating; and sand blasted interiors with high tooth profile for superior paintto-metal bonding with superior grade coatings. Stainless steel and
aluminum silos are also available.
STANDARD FEATURES
Welded Silos
• Skirted design constructed of carbon steel
• Hinged 3'6" x 6'8" louvered access door
• 20" diameter center dome with cover
• 12" diameter bottom discharge opening with 30" clearance and
16" square mounting flange
• Anchor bolts as required
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Deck perimeter guardrail with toe-board
• Ladder, platform and cage to OSHA guidelines
• Standard epoxy interior finish with enamel exterior finish
• Crossover walkways
• Manhole/vent
• Explosion relief deck
• Air pad holes
• Sight glass
• Silo inventory measuring head opening
117
SPECIFICATIONS
Cap.
Silo
Silo. Ht. UsableFt.*
Diameter (To Eave) 45ºCu.
Hopper
18'
799
24'
1,273
30'
1,747
36'
2,221
42'
2,695
10'
48'
3,169
54'
3,643
60'
4,417
Silo
Silo. Ht.
Diameter (To Eave)
10'
18'
24'
30'
36'
42'
48'
54'
60'
Usable Cap.
Cu. Ft.*
45º Hopper
714
1,188
1,662
2,136
2,610
3,084
3,558
4,032
4,032
*Based on 25º angle of repose
**Silo weights do not include accessories
MATERIAL HANDLING
WELDED SILOS WITH 45º CONE
Cap.
Silo
Silo
Silo
Weight** Diameter (To Eave) 45ºCu.
Hopper Weight**
4,637
5,703
6,769
8,601
9,667
11,116
12,565
14,014
12'
24'
30'
36'
42'
48'
54'
60'
66'
72'
1,823
2,501
3,179
3,857
4,535
5,213
5,801
6,569
7,247
7,183
8,466
10,671
11,954
13,698
15,451
17,186
18,930
20,674
WELDED SILOS WITH 60º CONE
Cap.
Silo
Silo
Silo
Weight** Diameter (To Eave) 45ºCu.
Hopper Weight**
4,900
5,966
7,032
8,864
9,930
11,379
12,828
14,277
14,277
12'
24'
30'
36'
42'
48'
54'
60'
66'
72'
1,537
2,215
2,893
3,571
4,249
4,927
5,605
6,283
6,961
7,559
8,842
11,047
12,330
14,074
15,818
17,562
19,306
21,050
Silo. Ht.
(To Eave)
Silo
Weight**
13'++
24'
30'
36'
42'
48'
54'
60'
66'
72'
Usable Cap.
Cu. Ft.*
45º Hopper
2,082
2,880
3,678
4,476
5,274
6,072
6,870
7,668
8,466
Silo
Diameter
Silo. Ht.
(To Eave)
Usable Cap.
Cu. Ft.*
45º Hopper
1,693
2,491
3,289
4,087
4,885
5,683
6,481
7,279
8,077
Silo
Weight**
Silo
Diameter
++ 13' diameter silos cannot be shipped to all locations
118
13'++
24'
30'
36'
42'
48'
54'
60'
66'
72'
10,628
12,518
14,408
16,298
18,188
20,078
21,968
23,858
25,748
11,229
13,119
15,009
16,899
18,789
20,769
22,569
24,459
26,349
NOTES:
MATERIAL HANDLING
NOTES:
MATERIAL HANDLING
BD SERIES BATCH WEIGH BLENDERS
B L E N D
&
BLEND AND RECLAIM
R E C L A I M
The AEC BD Series batch weigh blenders are setting new industry
standards for accuracy and homogeneous blend quality with quick-acting
diamond slide gates, unique mix chambers, and an easy to use touchscreen interface with 3 modes of recipe entry:
EZ mode (factory default): color and additives metered as a percentage of
the virgin material. (1/2% - 100% range, depending on material) Percentage
mode: all ingredients metered as a percentage of the overall batch.
(1/2% to 100%, range depending on material)
Parts mode: (ratio, i.e. 500:1)
STANDARD FEATURES
• Allen-Bradley PLC-based control system with PanelView touch-screen interface
and 8’ (3 m) cable, serial printer port, (optional Ethernet port available), 25 recipe
storage book, alarm light, audible alarm, and 3 modes of recipe entry
• Powder coated, mild steel material supply hoppers with machined polycarbonate
access doors (stainless steel on BD-150)
• Heavy-duty diamond metering gate assemblies (except BD-150)
• Square gate supplied on component #3 regrind on BD-500 and BD-900 and
components #1 and #3 on BD-4000 and BD-6000
• Adjustable stroke limiters for all ingredients (not available with BD-150)
• Precision 0.02% span accurate cantilever load cell weigh system
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Low-level solid-state proximity sensor for each supply
hopper (alarm functions and indicators are included in the
PLC Controller)
• Regrind Auger Metering (RAM) assembly with agitated
straight wall hopper, including interlocked access door (not
available with BD-150 or BD-500) - add “R” to the end of
the model number
• Stainless steel supply hoppers (Allow additional lead time)
• Removable, stainless steel weigh hopper
• Additional drop-in hoppers with blank hand fill lids
(BD-150, BD-500, and BD-900 only)
• Efficient mix chamber design
• Removable stainless steel mixer agitator
• Blender stands with slide gates
• Stainless steel mixer drawer assembly, bolted in place on BD-4000 and
BD-6000 models. Integrated stainless steel mixer bowl on BD-150
• Vacuum take-off boxes mounted below surge hopper under
floor stands
• Interlocked safety system shuts off air and electricity if mix chamber
is opened
• “H” models include two large hoppers with diamond gates and two removable
hoppers with vertical gates
• Supply hopper lids for AEC SRC02-16, SRC30/60 (BD-2500 and larger),
AVL Venturi Loader (additives only) or blank lids. Lids may also be cut for
non-AEC receivers at no additional charge, provided detailed drawings are
received with order
• Aluminum spool (premium mounting flange) with drain port
(8”x8”/200mm square)
• Low-profile drawer-magnet (3 bar)
• Drain tube with slide gate in supply hopper
• Customer-specified (special) mounting hole pattern drawing required with order
• 5th and 6th components include horizontal gates
• 7th and 8th components include additive feeders
• 115/1/50 or 60 and 220/1/50 or 60 supply voltage
Note: Compressed air loaders cannot be used to load BD-150
BD 2500 Blender
119
SPECIFICATIONS
1
2
3
4
Max. Blending Rate, lbs./hr (kg/hr)
# of materials to be blended
Slide Gate Size, Majors, in. (mm)
Slide Gate Size, Minors, in. (mm)
Supply Hopper Capacity, Majors, cu. ft. (l)4
Supply Hopper Capacity, Minors, cu. ft. (l)4
Weigh hopper cap. cu. ft. (l)
Typical batch size, lbs. (kg)
Mixer cap., cu. ft. (l)
Mixer motor size, HP (kW)
Mixer rpm
Load cell capacity, kg
Discharge opening, in. (mm)
Machine weight, lbs. (kg)
Height, in. (mm)
Width, in. (mm)
Depth, in. (mm)
BD-150
150 (68)
2-4
2.0 (50)
1.5 (38)
0.7 (20)
0.2 (5)
0.07 (20)
1.5 (0.7)
0.18 (5)
1/8 (0.09)
42
1 @ 5 kg
2.5 (63)
250 (115)
350 (160)
34.5 (875)
26.0 (650)
22.0 (560)
BLEND AND RECLAIM
BD-500
500 (227)
2-6
0.18 (50)
4 (1.8)
0.25 (7)
2 @ 3 kg
375 (170)
425 (190)
51.5 (1308)
37.5 (952)
37.0 (940)
2.0 (50)
1.5 (38)
1.4 (40)
1.0 (28)
1/6 (0.124)
21
3.0 (76.2)
BD-900
900 (410)
BD-2500
2500 (1135)
0.38 (11)
8 (3.6)
0.56 (16)
2.5 (63)
2.0 (50)
3.0 (85)
2.7 (77)
0.82 (23)
25 (11.3)
1.1 (31)
2 @ 5 kg
2 @ 10 kg
450 (205)
550 (250)
56.5 (1435)
37.0 (940)
40.0 (1016)
650 (295)
800 (360)
69.5 (1765)
45.5 (1156)
46.5 (1181)
BD blender models with “H” designation include two removable hoppers with integral gates
BD blender models with 7 or 8 components include additive feeders for the 7th and 8th component metering and A-B 10” color touch-screen
See below for important rate information concerning each model’s maximum blending rate
Hopper capacity measured excludes straight wall section and is based on vacuum receiver use. Approximate value.
2-8
BD-4000
4000 (1815)
1.23 (34)
35 (15.8)
BD-6000
6000 (2725)
3.0 (76)
3.0 (76)
7.5 (212)
6.0 (170)
2.17 (61)
45 (20.4)
2.72 (77)
1/2 (0.373)
22
2 @ 15 kg
2 @ 20 kg
4.0 (102)
1100 (500)
1300 (590)
85.5 (2172)
89.5 (2337)
57.5 (1461)
57.5 (1461)
57.0 (1448)
IMPORTANT INFORMATION CONCERNING MAX. BLENDING RATE LISTED
Standard maximum blending rate is based on a 3-component blend running 80% virgin, 18% regrind (free-flowing) and 2% pelletized color. Additional components reduce max
rate by approximately 20% each.
Recipes with more than 50% regrind will significantly reduce the throughput and minor ingredient accuracy of the blender.
Two component recipes may REDUCE overall belnder throughput due to reducded available weith hopper capacity. Consult the factory for achieveable rates.
Rates are based on dry, free-flowing virgin pellets with a bulk density of 35 lbs./cu. ft. (560 m3). Rates will vary as a result of the number of blender components, the materials,
and the recipe(s) used. Consult the factory for guaranteed rates.
Material samples are required for testing prior to shipment for guaranteed rates. Consult the AEC Sales Department for shipping instructions and for the amounts of each material
to send for testing. A test request form must be submitted, and typical amounts of material required for small blenders are 50 lbs. (23kg) for major ingredients and 10 lbs. (4.5 kg).
for minor ingredients.
OPTIONAL BLENDER STANDS
Heavy-duty blender stands feature heavy-duty cast aluminum pneumatic slide gate
and valve. BD-150 and 500 models should use 30" wide stands; larger blenders
should use 56" wide stands.
Regular-Duty floor stands are also available with regular-duty pneumatic slide gate,
controls, and 2.0 or 3.5 cu.ft. surge hopper.
Both styles of stands are available in drum fill, gaylord fill, and floor stand
configurations.
Light-duty casters are available (Not for use on 56" wide heavy-duty stands)
Cast aluminum pneumatic slide gate with controls is required to ensure homogenous
mixing prior to discharge, particularly at startup for customer-supplied stands or other
special configurations
ELECTRICAL OPTIONS
• External audible and visual alarm for remote mounting
• PanelView 1000 (10” color touch-screen) in lieu of standard PanelView 550
• Additional touch-screen interface for remote control of blender, with
8 ft. (2.4 m) cable
• 50 ft. (15 m) cable in lieu of 8 ft.
• Parallel printer adapter and 6 ft. (1.8 m) cable
• 220/1/50 or 60 operation (includes CE compliance) - 24 volt controls and
220 volt mixer motor
• A3 communication software for unlimited number of new A-B controlled blenders
• Panasonic color touch-screen in lieu of standard PanelView 550 that can
control up to an 8-component blender
• Siemens control to replace entire Allen-Bradley system with optional
Profibus DP Slave communications
• Modbus Plus communications option available
120
B L E N D
&
R E C L A I M
INTEGRATED BLENDING CONTROL SYSTEM
OFF-THE-SHELF CONTROL WITH PROVEN RELIABILITY
USER-FRIENDLY, MENU DRIVEN INTERFACE
BLEND AND RECLAIM
AEC’s new Allen-Bradley PLC-based blender controller provides state-of-the-art process control right at your fingertips. Operator-friendly
controls simplify operation, store up to 20 recipes and provide unmatched metering accuracy for up to six ingredients, especially below 2%.
The PanelView touch-screen interface displays user-friendly, menu-driven interface screens for complete control and monitoring of any batch
blending operation. A serial printer port is included and an optional Ethernet port is available.
FEATURES
• Patented Control System
• Touch-screen interface in a remote-mount NEMA 12 (IP 54) enclosure
• Two screens allow total control and monitoring of the blending process
• Constant display of actual material used
• Load cell signal conditioning technology improves reliability and is unaffected by electrical noise
• Redesigned pneumatic and electrical systems improve metering accuracy and blender rate
• Electrical panel meets applicable specifications, with 220 volt operation and CE declaration available
• Integral alarm light and horn indicates material feed problems
• Ethernet module available for online monitoring, control, and remote troubleshooting
• Three types of recipe entry formats are available to the operator:
• “EZ” mode meters color and additives as a percentage of the virgin material (most common in injection molding)
• “Percentage” mode meters all ingredients as a percentage of the overall batch (most common in extrusion and blow molding)
• “Parts” mode allows for ratio recipe entry (e.g., 50:1)
Programmable entry screens
for all three recipe modes
(up to six components)
Real time display of process
rate and material usage of
each ingredient
121
B L E N D
&
R E C L A I M
DIMENSIONS
BLEND AND RECLAIM
122
B L E N D
&
R E C L A I M
DIMENSIONS
BLEND AND RECLAIM
123
B L E N D
&
R E C L A I M
DIMENSIONS
BLEND AND RECLAIM
BD-2500-7F
Includes:
6 Slidegates, 1 Additive Feeder
BD-2500-8FF
Includes:
6 Slidegates, 2 Additive Feeders
BD-2500-5R
Includes:
4 Slidegates, 1 R.A.M. Hopper
BD-2500-6RR
Includes:
4 Slidegates, 2 R.A.M. Hoppers
124
B L E N D
&
R E C L A I M
OA SERIES GRAVIMETRIC AUGER BLENDERS
B L E N D
&
BLEND AND RECLAIM
R E C L A I M
The OA Series™ gravimetric batch blending system features precision
auger metering of all ingredients. They should be used if more than one
regrind is required, or when difficult and hard-to-meter materials will be used.
Each OA blender features machined metering augers, precision load
cells, cast aluminum feed auger assemblies and heavy-duty industrial
design. The OA Series offers superior batch control and reliable feeding
of difficult materials.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Allen-Bradley PLC-based control system with PanelView touch-screen
interface, English or metric display, 8’ cable, serial printer port, and 3
entry modes:
Percentage recipe entry: Ingredients metered as a
percentage of the batch.
OA-012 Blender
(with standard “HC” style mixer)
OPTIONAL FEATURES
8-component “EZ” mode recipe entry: Color and additives
metered as a percentage of the virgin.
• 12” high extension for major ingredient hoppers
• SCR variable-speed DC drive motor in lieu of standard
constant-speed AC motor
“Parts” mode ratio recipe entry (i.e. 500:1)
• Spun material supply hoppers
• Material shutoff slide gates above feeder housing
• Mezzanine, drum-fill or gaylord-fill blender stands
• Precision auger feeding of all materials with constant speed AC
gearmotor. Variable speed DC is optional
• Stainless steel material supply hoppers
• “HC” mixer design promotes homogeneity (012 & 060)
• Agitated straight wall regrind hopper with gear motor (not
available on OA-002)
• Precision 1/10% span-accurate offset cantilever load cell
• Powder feeder for most powder additives, including
calcium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, etc.
• Convenient compressed air clean-out hose with blowoff tool
• Low-level solid-state proximity sensor for each supply
hopper without alarm panel (alarm functions and indicators
are included in the PLC Controller)
• Machine-mount standard; optional aluminum spool mounting
flange with drain port is available
• Drain tube below each feeder housing for quick draining
• Low-profile drawer magnet (3 bar)
• Target versus actual set point verification
• Vacuum take-off boxes mounted below the floor stand, 1.5”,
2”, 2.5”, or 3” OD, 1 position (FCO type, mild steel) 2,3,4
position (aluminum)
• Safety-interlocked access that shuts off both air supply and
electricity if blender is opened
• Standard mixer in lieu of HC style mixer
• Alarm output
• Premium aluminum spool mounting flange with drain port,
8” x 8” square
• Hopper lids arranged for AEC SRC receivers and loaders
(Standard cutout for non-AEC loaders at no charge if drawings
are provided.)
• Clean-out doors in spun material supply hoppers,
including safety grate or lock-out safety switch
125
SPECIFICATIONS
BLEND AND RECLAIM
OA-002
100 (45)
2-4
0.2 (5)
0.10 (2.8)
3 (1.4)
6 (2.7)
1/6 (0.125)
2 @ 4.4 (2)
3 (76)
145 (66)
200 (91)
Max blending rate, lbs./hr (kg/hr)
Number of materials blended
Supply hopper cap., cu. ft. (l)
Weigh hopper cap. cu. ft. (l)
Typical batch size, lbs. (kg)
Mixer capacity, lbs. (kg)
Mixer motor size, HP (kW)
Load cell capacity, lbs (kg)
Material discharge, in. (mm) dia.
Machine weight, lbs. (kg)
OA-012
400 (180)
2-6
0.9 (25)
0.17 (4.8)
5 (2.2)
40 (18)
0.5 (0.373)
1 @ 22 (10)
3 (76)
400 (182)
600 (273)
IMPORTANT INFORMATION CONCERNING MAX. BLENDING RATE LISTED
Standard maximum blending rate is based on a 3-component blend running 80% virgin, 18%
regrind (free-flowing) or second virgin, and 2% color.
Recipes with more than 50% regrind will significantly reduce the throughput and minor ingredient
accuracy of the blender. Consult factory for acceptable min. and max. recipes when regrinds will
be used at more than 30%.
Rates are based on dry, free-flowing virgin pellets with a bulk density of 35 lbs./cu. ft. Rates will
vary as a result of the number of blender components, the materials, and the recipe(s) used.
Consult the factory for guaranteed rates.
Material samples are required for testing prior to shipment for guaranteed rates. Consult the AEC
Sales Department for shipping instructions and for the amounts of each material to send for
testing. A test request form must be submitted, and typical amounts of material required for small
blenders are 300 lbs. for major ingredients and 30 lbs. for minor ingredients.
OA-060
3000 (1360)
2-6
2.0 (56)
1.4 (39)
30 (13)
75 (34)
1 (0.746)
1 @ 66 (30)
4 (101)
800 (364)
1000 (455)
OPTIONAL BLENDER STANDS
Mezzanine-mount, drum-fill and gaylord-fill blender
stands are available with pneumatic slide gate and
controls. The mezzanine-mount stand is 14” high
with a 4” OD tube stub for gravity feed. The drum-fill
stand is 42” high, and the gaylord-fill stand is 56”
high. Off-line floor stands are supplied without
pneumatic slide gate, with either 1.9 cu. ft. or 3.5 cu.
ft. surge hopper (vacuum take-off box not included).
A pneumatic slide gate below the mixer with controls
is required for off-line floor mount, or for use with
customer-supplied stand or special configurations.
ELECTRICAL OPTIONS
DIMENSIONS
• PanelView 1000 (10” color touch-screen) in lieu
of standard PanelView 550
• Additional touch-screen interface for remote
control of blender, with 8 ft. (2.4 m) cable
• 50 ft. (15 m) cable in lieu of standard 8 ft.
• Parallel printer adapter and 6 ft. (1.8 m) cable
• A3 communication software and Allen-Bradley
RSLinx software for unlimited number of new A-B
blenders
Model
OA-002
OA-012
OA-060
Max. Rate
lbs/hr
100
400
3000
Max. Rate
kgs/hr
45
180
1360
Width
38"
58"
64"
Depth
31"
33"
40"
• 220 V operation (includes CE compliance) 24
volt controls and 220 V mixer motor
Height
33"
46"
77"
126
B L E N D
&
R E C L A I M
OL SERIES LOSS-IN-WEIGHT BLENDERS
B L E N D
&
BLEND AND RECLAIM
R E C L A I M
OL SERIES CONTINUOUS LOSS-IN-WEIGHT BLENDERS
The OL Series is designed for continuous extrusion applications. The OL
Series offers the most homogeneous blend available versus common
batch-type blenders or mixers. Only the material weigh hoppers are mounted
on precision load cells, eliminating the weight and vibration of the metering
auger and motor assemblies.
The OL Series lower mass flow weigh hopper learns the exact extruder
weight and continuously sends the information to the control system. The
upper material feed rates are automatically adjusted to match the learned
extruder rate to maintain a consistent ingredient ratio.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Automatically adjusts individual ingredient feeders to match learned
extruder rate at the exact ratio required
OL Series Blender
• Upper material supply hoppers with conical reload valves
• Individual ingredient weigh hoppers, with clear side walls
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Lower mass flow weigh hopper assembly, with clear side walls
• Mezzanine mounting stand with 4” tube stub
• Parallel printer port
• RS-485 Communications port
• LCD display, touch pad control and menu driven format
• Yaskawa (MagneTek) variable frequency drive (VFD) system with
inverter duty AC motors; provides precision auger metering with greater
recipe ranges and better accuracy
• Cascade mixing section
• Machine-mount cast aluminum throat mounting flange with drain tube
• Precision 1/10% span accurate cantilever load cells provide for accurate
weighing system
• Recipe storage book for easy retrieval (up to 1,000 recipes)
• Full diagnostics
• Complete inventory and material usage information
• Alarm outputs
• Hopper lids specified for AEC SRC Series receivers and loaders.
(Cutout for non-AEC loaders at no charge if drawings are provided.)
127
• Low level solid state proximity sensor for each supply
hopper including low level alarm panel with horn and
silence button
• Spun regrind hopper with 3.5” dia. discharge, suitable
for most free-flowing regrind materials
• RCP - RS-485 remote control panel with 10 ft. cable,
100 ft. maximum distance (2 line display for 2, 3, & 4
component units; 4 line display for 5, 6, & 7
component units)
• Agitated regrind supply hopper and weigh hopper for
regrind material
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
OL 015
OL 060
OL 100
BLEND AND RECLAIM
Max. Output, lbs./hr (kg/hr)
750 (340)
3000 (1360)
5000 (2270)
Number of components
2-6
2-6
2-6
Augers have minimum and maximum output rates based on auger and gearbox size. Rates and capacities are based on free-flowing virgin
pellets with a bulk density of 35 lbs./cu. ft. Bulk density of materials, particularly regrinds, can greatly impact blender performance and rate.
Actual rates will vary. Consult the factory for guaranteed blending rates.
All materials must be free-flowing and dry. Material samples are required for testing prior to shipment for guaranteed rates. Consult the AEC
Sales Department for shipping instructions and for the amounts of each material to send for testing. Typical amounts required are 100 lbs. for
major ingredients and 25 lbs. for minor ingredients.
EXTRUSION CONTROL OPTIONS
Model
COEX
Description
co-extrusion IBM-compatible
industrial graphical control system with touch-screen. Includes an
integrated PC/Touch Screen controller, significantly easing installation and operator usage. For use with up to six (6) OL blending
systems and/or OFC-M rate monitor units without a haul-off control. Controls extruder speeds, layer percentages, and blender
recipes. Complete with all necessary hardware, software, and startup assistance. Communication wires and cables not included.
CoExpert®
Windows®-based
CoExpert® with line speed control (haul-off). Required when using a CoExpert® package to control the haul-off. For use with up to
six (6) OL blending systems or OFC-M rate monitor units and a haul-off control. Included are an encoder and a conversion panel
COEX-LS
for interfacing to the CoExpert® control system. Controls overall yield (weight/length), weight per area, and thickness. Complete
with all necessary hardware, software, and startup assistance. Communications wires and cables not included.
520-LCD
Mono-layer extruder speed (output) and/or downstream yield (weight/length) control
with two (2) digital potentiometers. (Optional start-up assistance recommended.)
NOTES
OL Series floor-mount configuration also available; consult factory or sales representative for more information.
All orders must include the following information to be processed at the factory:
• Minimum and maximum customer specified extruder rates (processing rates) – real rates
• Minimum and maximum recipe percentage ranges for each ingredient, i.e. 50-100%
• Material types and bulk densities for each ingredient (material samples may be required)
• Hopper lid arrangement by ingredient, i.e. AEC SR Series.
128
B L E N D
&
R E C L A I M
DIMENSIONS
BLEND AND RECLAIM
Typical 4-component blender
O
Co ver/
ntr Un
ol de
Pa r
ne
l
14.25
#3
#2
A
B
C
#1
#4
D 21.92
21.92
E
38.25
8
Typical 6-component blender
Mounting Surface A
8
Mounting Surface B
18
56.08
14.25
18
6
18
6
cent.
O
Co ver/
ntr Un
ol de
Pa r
ne
l
Mounting Surface A
9/16 dia. thru
(4 plcs.)
#6
Mounting Surface B
18
6
D 21.92
9/16 dia. thru
(4 plcs.)
#4
21.92
E
F
3 dia.
discharge
cent.
18 6
Model
A, in. (cm)
B, in. (cm)
C, in. (cm)
D, in. (cm)
E, in. (cm)
OL 060/100
24 (61)
95 (240)
80 (205)
54 (140)
41 (105)
OL 015
#1
#2
3 dia.
discharge
cent.
#5
#3
20 (51)
81 (205)
76 (195)
51 (130
129
39 (100)
B L E N D
&
R E C L A I M
BLEND AND RECLAIM
OUTPUT CHART: CUBIC FEET PER HOUR (LITERS PER HOUR)
Auger size,
in. (mm) OD
3 (76.2)
2 (50.8)
1 5/8 (41.2)
1 (25.4)
0.75 (19)
0.5 (12.7)
Gearbox ratio
20:1
10:1
20:1
10:1
5:1
20:1
10:1
5:1
20:1
10:1
5:1
20:1
10:1
5:1
20:1
10:1
5:1
Min. auger speed
5 rpm
10 rpm
5 rpm
10 rpm
20 rpm
5 rpm
10 rpm
20 rpm
5 rpm
10 rpm
20 rpm
5 rpm
10 rpm
20 rpm
5 rpm
10 rpm
20 rpm
OUTPUT CHART: POUNDS PER HOUR (KILOGRAMS PER HOUR)
Auger size,
in. (mm) OD
3 (76.2)
2 (50.8)
1 5/8 (41.2)
1 (25.4)
0.75 (19)
0.5 (12.7)
Gearbox ratio
20:1
10:1
20:1
10:1
5:1
20:1
10:1
5:1
20:1
10:1
5:1
20:1
10:1
5:1
20:1
10:1
5:1
Min. auger speed
5 rpm
10 rpm
5 rpm
10 rpm
20 rpm
5 rpm
10 rpm
20 rpm
5 rpm
10 rpm
20 rpm
5 rpm
10 rpm
20 rpm
5 rpm
10 rpm
20 rpm
Min. output,
cu. ft./hr (l/hr)
4.00 (117)
8.00 (235)
1.14 (30)
2.28 (61)
4.57 (123)
0.71 (20)
1.43 (40)
2.86 (80)
0.17 (4)
0.34 (9)
0.68 (19)
0.06 (2)
0.14 (4)
0.28 (8)
0.014 (0)
0.03 (0)
0.06 (1)
Min. output,
lbs./hr (kg/hr)
140 (63)
280 (127)
40 (18)
80 (37)
160 (74)
25 (10)
50 (22)
100 (45)
6 (3)
12 (5)
24 (11)
2 (1)
5 (2)
10 (4)
0.5 (0.2)
1 (0.4)
2 (0.9)
Max. output,
cu. ft./hr (l/hr)
104 (4,125)
208 (8,255)
34 (1,080)
69 (2,160)
138 (4,320)
23 (710)
47 (1,415)
93 (2,850)
5 (165)
10 (335)
21 (675)
2 (75)
5 (150)
9 (300)
0 (16)
1 (33)
2 (67)
Max. auger speed
175 rpm
350 rpm
175 rpm
350 rpm
700 rpm
175 rpm
350 rpm
700 rpm
175 rpm
350 rpm
700 rpm
175 rpm
350 rpm
700 rpm
175 rpm
350 rpm
700 rpm
Max output,
lbs./hr (kg/hr)
3,635 (1,650)
7,270 (3,305)
1,205 (545)
2,410 (1,095)
4,820 (2,190)
815 (395)
1,630 (740)
3,265 (1,485)
180 (80)
360 (165)
720 (325)
80 (35)
160 (70)
320 (145)
20 (9)
40 (15)
80 (35)
Max. auger speed
175 rpm
350 rpm
175 rpm
350 rpm
700 rpm
175 rpm
350 rpm
700 rpm
175 rpm
350 rpm
700 rpm
175 rpm
350 rpm
700 rpm
175 rpm
350 rpm
700 rpm
NOTE: These tables represent approximate output values for variable frequency AC inverter drives. These results may not be achieved, given a particular application or material.
Consult the factory for guaranteed rates.
130
B L E N D
&
R E C L A I M
DD SERIES DIGITAL DOSING SYSTEM
SYSTEM
B L E N D
&
BLEND AND RECLAIM
R E C L A I M
The DD Digital Dosing System offers precise feeding for almost any plastics
machine, whether your application is injection molding, blow molding, or
extrusion. The DD 2 dosing unit offers the ability to use dual additives at
different rates. The DD dosing unit uses a variable speed DC drive motor
and a correctly sized dosing disc to precisely feed powder or pellet additives,
at the set rate, into the throat of the processing machine. Precision design
and closed loop control ensures high accuracy to setpoint.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Disc style feeder module to dose pellets, microbatch, granulate
or powders (specify disc size)
• 0-12 RPM variable speed, closed loop drive
DD 1 Series Digital Dosing System
• Choice of several styles and sizes of discs for precise additive
feeding
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Quick disconnect additive hopper for “off the machine”
cleanout/material change
• Spare station for immediate changeover for pellets
or powders
• Clear plastic additive hopper with fill cover
• 2” diameter material feed tube with 6” square mounting flanges
(top and bottom)
• Disc style feeder module to dose pellets, microbatch,
granulate or powders (please specify)
• Optional motor speeds
• Optional hopper capacities
• Audible alarm
• Alarm light
• Low level sensors
• Hopper loaders for automatic refill
• Special voltage
• Intermediate hoppers for main component side
• Larger base piece for larger processing machines
(3” or 4”)
131
B L E N D
&
R E C L A I M
BLEND AND RECLAIM
CONTROL FEATURES
Available for either extrusion or injection molding
machines, the controller automatically calculates
calibration values and allows for direct input of
desired percentages. The controller features userfriendly icons and a 5 digit LED display that shows
additive consumption. It stores up to 10 recipes, with
memory backup for recipe and data storage.
DD 1
• Dry contact signal input and dry contact alarm output
• Input for level probe for both raw material and additives
• IP64 shielding
• Short circuit proof outputs
• Operates between 32 to 122ºF (0 to 50ºC)
• Operating voltage 115 VAC +/-10%, 50/60 Hz
• Connected load of 100 W maximum during operation
• Thermal device protection
DD 2
DD 1
Feed Rate: 0.2-800 lbs/hr
Operating Load: 0.2 kW
Weight: 51 lbs. (23kg)
DD 2
Feed Rate: 0.2-800 lbs/hr
Operating Load: 0.4 kW
Weight: 100 lbs. (45kg)
132
B L E N D
&
R E C L A I M
DD SERIES DISC DOSING GUIDELINES
SPECIFICATIONS
Disc
DD30-030672
Default
calibration #
1.50 g/rev
D30-051040
Default
calibration #
4.00 g/rev
D30-051725
Default
calibration #
7.30 g/rev
DD30-051818
Default
calibration #
13.50 g/rev
Disc
Nomenclature
P030672
3 mm thick
6 mm dia.
72 pockets
CT100562
051040
5 mm thick
10 mm dia.
40 pockets
CT21710
051725
D5 mm thick
17 mm dia.
25 pockets
CT21711
051818
5 mm thick
18 mm dia.
18 pockets
CT23057
Min/Max Disc RPM
0.2 RPM
6.4 RPM
0.5 RPM
11.5 RPM
1.0 RPM
35.5 RPM
0.2 RPM
6.4 RPM
0.5 RPM
11.5 RPM
1.0 RPM
35.5 RPM
0.2 RPM
6.4 RPM
0.5 RPM
11.5 RPM
1.0 RPM
35.5 RPM
0.2 RPM
6.4 RPM
0.5 RPM
11.5 RPM
1.0 RPM
35.5RPM
BLEND AND RECLAIM
Amount of Material per Disc
Revolution
35 lbs./ft3
44 lbs.ft3
1.53 g/rev
0.02 g/hole
1.95 g/rev
0.027 g/hole
4.24 g/rev
0.11 g/hole
5.39 g/rev
0.13 g/hole
Minimum Throughput with
Continuous Running
35 lbs./ft3
44 lbs.ft3
Maximum Throughput with
Continuous Running
35 lbs./ft3
44 lbs.ft3
0.04 lb/hr
0.02 kg/hr
0.04 lb/hr
0.02 kg/hr
1.30 lb/hr
0.59 kg/hr
1.65 lb/hr
0.75 kg/hr
0.19 lb/hr
0.09 kg/hr
0.26 lb/hr
0.12 kg/hr
7.16 lb/hr
3.25 kg/hr
9.00 lb/hr
4.10 kg/hr
0.10 lb/hr
0.045 kg/hr
0.11 lb/hr
0.05 kg/hr
0.27 lb/hr
0.12 kg/hr
0.55 lb/hr
0.25 kg/hr
0.12 lb/hr
0.05 kg/hr
0.15 lb/hr
0.07 kg/hr
0.35 lb/hr
0.15 kg/hr
2.32 lb/hr
1.05 kg/hr
2.89 lb/hr
1.31 kg/hr
3.59 lb/hr
1.63 kg/hr
6.33 lb/hr
2.87 kg/hr
4.56 lb/hr
2.07 kg/hr
8.00 lb/hr
3.62 kg/hr
0.70 lb/hr
0.32 kg/hr
19.80 lb/hr
9.00 kg/hr
25.30lb/hr
11.50 kg/hr
0.24 lb/hr
0.11 kg/hr
6.23 lb/hr
2.83 kg/hr
7.90 lb/hr
3.60 kg/hr
1.25 lb/hr
0.57 kg/hr
34.60 lb/hr
15.70 kg/hr
44.00 lb/hr
20.00 kg/hr
1.12 lb/hr
0.51 kg/hr
19.60 lb/hr
8.89 kg/hr
25.63 lb/hr
11.62 kg/hr
Consult factory - 40 pocket and 35.5 RPM motor for small pellets
and coarse powder only
7.37 g/rev
0.30 g/hole
13.42 g/rev
0.75 g/hole
9.38 g/rev
0.38 g/hole
17.08 g/rev
0.95 g/hole
0.20 lb/hr
0.09 kg/hr
0.48 lb/hr
0.22 kg/hr
0.61 lb/hr
0.27 kg/hr
0.35 lb/hr
0.16 kg/hr
0.44 lb/hr
0.20 kg/hr
1.00 lb/hr
0.44 kg/hr
0.85 lb/hr
0.39 kg/hr
1.76 lb/hr
0.80 kg/hr
2.20 lb/hr
1.00 kg/hr
11.0 lb/hr
4.99 kg/hr
11.40 lb/hr
5.15 kg/hr
63.00 lb/hr
28.60 kg/hr
14.0 lb/hr
6.36 kg/hr
14.50 lb/hr
6.56 kg/hr
80.25 lb/hr
36.40 kg/hr
Note 1: This guide is to be used for general disc selection for Digital Dosing unit applications. All rates shown are based on continuous throughput of
free-flowing materials. Consult factory for regrind, powder and all hard-to-flow materials.
Note 2: Minimum recovery time is one (1) second, and maximum feeder disc revolutions in one screw recovery cycle (injection mode) is 9.5 revolutions.
Use proper disc sizing for injection molding applications to ensure proper dispensing of material during the recovery cycle.
Note 3: Feeder should not be sized to run continuously below 15% of maximum speed - use lower RPM motor or disc with smaller pockets.
133
B L E N D
&
R E C L A I M
DD SERIES DISC DOSING GUIDELINES
SPECIFICATIONS
Disc
Disc
Nomenclature
DT30-101820
101820
Default
calibration #
28.00 g/rev
DT30-102025
“Sure-shot”
No Picture
Default
calibration #
33.00 g/rev
DT30-203012
Default
calibration #
95.00 g/rev
DT30-204010F
Default
calibration #
150.00 g/rev
DP30-250940
Default
calibration #
7.80 g/rev
DP30-050940
Default
calibration #
15.00 g/rev
10 mm thick
18 mm dia.
20 holes
CT23056
P102025
10 mm thick
Oval Hole
18 mm x 25 mm
20 holes
CT66707
203012
20 mm thick
30 mm dia.
12 holes
CT23060
204010F
20 mm thick
40 mm dia.
10 pockets
CT18405
P250940
2.5 mm thick
9 mm dia.
40 pockets
CT100864
P050940
5 mm thick
9 mm dia.
40 pockets
CT100863
Min/Max Disc RPM
0.2 RPM
6.4 RPM
0.5 RPM
11.5 RPM
1.0 RPM
35.5 RPM
0.2 RPM
6.4 RPM
0.5 RPM
11.5 RPM
1.0 RPM
35.5 RPM
0.2 RPM
6.4 RPM
0.5 RPM
11.5 RPM
1.0 RPM
35.5 RPM
0.2 RPM
6.4 RPM
0.5 RPM
11.5 RPM
1.0 RPM
35.5RPM
0.2 RPM
6.4 RPM
0.5 RPM
11.5 RPM
1.0 RPM
35.5RPM
0.2 RPM
6.4 RPM
0.5 RPM
11.5 RPM
1.0 RPM
35.5RPM
BLEND AND RECLAIM
Amount of Material per Disc
Revolution
35 lbs./ft3
44 lbs.ft3
28.00 g/rev
1.40 g/hole
35.63 g/rev
1.78 g/hole
33.60 g/rev
1.3 g/hole
95.09 g/rev
7.92 g/hole
151.15 g/rev
15.12 g/hole
7.82 g/rev
0.20 g/hole
15.64 g/rev
0.39 g/hole
42.75 g/rev
1.71 g/hole
118.72 g/rev
9.89 g/hole
188.72 g/rev
18.87 g/hole
9.76 g/rev
0.245 g/pocket
19.53 g/rev
0.49 g/hole
Minimum Throughput with
Continuous Running
35 lbs./ft3
44 lbs.ft3
Maximum Throughput with
Continuous Running
35 lbs./ft3
44 lbs.ft3
0.75 lbs./hr
0.34 kg/hr
1.00 lbs./hr
0.43 kg/hr
23.70 lbs./hr
10.75 kg/hr
30.10 lbs./hr
13.68 kg/hr
3.7 lbs./hr
1.68 kg/hr
4.70 lbs./hr
2.14 kg/hr
131.50 lbs./hr
59.70 kg/hr
167.30 lbs./hr
75.90 kg/hr
2.77 lbs./hr
1.26 kg/hr
49.77 lbs./hr
22.57 kg/hr
63.34 lbs./hr
28.72 kg/hr
1.85 lbs./hr
0.84 kg/hr
0.87 lbs./hr
0.40 kg/hr
2.18 lbs./hr
0.99 kg/hr
4.36 lbs./hr
1.98 kg/hr
2.51 lbs./hr
1.14 kg/hr
6.28 lbs./hr
2.85 kg/hr
2.31 lbs./hr
1.05 kg/hr
1.12 lbs./hr
0.50 kg/hr
197.25 lbs./hr
89.46 kg/hr
7.80 lbs./hr
3.54 kg/hr
143.28 lbs./hr
65.00 kg/hr
178.00 lbs./hr
80.71 kg/hr
5.00 lbs./hr
2.25 kg/hr
128.00 lbs./hr
59.00 kg/hr
3.13 lbs./hr
1.42 kg/hr
10.00 lbs./hr
4.53 kg/hr
12.43 lbs./hr
5.64 kg/hr
0.20 lbs./hr
0.093 kg/hr
0.26 lbs./hr
0.115 kg/hr
0.46 lbs./hr
0.21 kg/hr
1.00 lbs./hr
0.47 kg/hr
0.41 lbs./hr
0.187 kg/hr
1.00 lbs./hr
0.45 kg/hr
2.00 lbs./hr
0.94 kg/hr
35.56 lbs./hr
16.12 kg/hr
154.90 lbs./hr
70.29 kg/hr
15.65 lbs./hr
7.10 kg/hr
20.00 lbs./hr
9.00 kg/hr
27.94 lbs./hr
12.67 kg/hr
52.78 lbs./hr
23.94 kg/hr
5.55 lbs./hr
2.52 kg/hr
12.50 lbs./hr
5.70 kg/hr
4.00 lbs./hr
1.80 kg/hr
42.23 lbs./hr
19.15 kg/hr
25.00 lbs./hr
11.3 kg/hr
80.50 lbs./hr
36.50 kg/hr
446.54 lbs./hr
202.50 kg/hr
227.74 lbs./hr
103.28 kg/hr
705.00 lbs./hr
320.00 kg/hr
13.2 lbs./hr
3.00 kg/hr
100.53 lbs./hr
45.60 kg/hr
557.55 lbs./hr
252.90 kg/hr
160.00 lbs./hr
72.50 kg/hr
283.54 lbs./hr
129.00 kg/hr
886.00 lbs./hr
402.00 kg/hr
8.25 lbs./hr
3.75 kg/hr
0.60 lbs./hr
0.27 kg/hr
10.55 lbs./hr
4.78 kg/hr
13.57 lbs./hr
6.15 kg/hr
0.51 lbs./hr
0.23 kg/hr
13.20 lbs./hr
6.00 kg/hr
16.50 lbs./hr
7.50 kg/hr
1.30 lbs./hr
0.58 kg/hr
0.12 lbs./hr
0.57 kg/hr
2.60 lbs./hr
1.17 kg/hr
36.70 lbs./hr
16.65 kg/hr
22.62 lbs./hr
10.62 kg/hr
73.40 lbs./hr
33.30 kg/hr
45.85 lbs./hr
20.80 kg/hr
28.65 lbs./hr
13.80 kg/hr
91.70 lbs./hr
41.60 kg/hr
Note 1: This guide is to be used for general disc selection for Digital Dosing unit applications. All rates are based on continuous throughput of
free-flowing materials. Consult factory for regrind, powder and all hard-to-flow materials.
Note 2: Maximum Minimum recovery time is one (1) second, and maximum feeder disc revolutions in one screw recovery cycle (injection mode) is 9.5
revolutions. Use proper sizing for injection molding applications to ensure proper dispensing of material during the recovery cycle.
134
B L E N D
&
R E C L A I M
PRECISION SERIES ADDITIVE FEEDERS
B L E N D
&
BLEND AND RECLAIM
R E C L A I M
PRECISION SERIES VOLUMETRIC ADDITIVE FEEDERS
Precision Series volumetric additive feeders have become the industry
standard of accuracy and dependability for precision metering of color
concentrate, regrind, or other additives. Proven mechanical features include
a modular design for one or two materials, low-profile throat section, and an
easy-to-clean, interchangeable stainless steel auger assembly.
Free-flowing additives can be directly metered into the feed throat of a
processing machine. The AF-1 and AF-200 can also be used to starve
feed an extruder.
Model AF-1
STANDARD FEATURES
• Closed-loop graphic control with push-button digital display
• 1.0 cu. ft. aluminum additive supply hopper with 2 sight glasses
and manual fill cover, AF-1, AF-2, and AF-200 only (AF-M has 4”
OD polycarbonate additive supply hopper with manual fill cover)
• Swing-out sample and clean-out door (AF-1 and AF-2);
Calibration sample port, and drain port for clean-up (AF-M);
Calibration sample port, and drain tube with slide gate below cast
aluminum feeder housing (AF-200)
• 6” high modular steel base with 7” square flange and sight
glass (AF-1 and AF-2); 4.625” square spool aluminum feeder
body mounting flange with 4” bolt hole pattern (AF-M); Premium
mounting flange with drain port, 8” square with 6” bolt pattern
(AF-200)
• 1/10 HP DC variable speed drive motor (2 to 71 RPM) with quickchange hinged mounting (AF-1, AF-2, and AF-M); 1/4 HP DC
variable speed drive motor (1725 RPM) with hinged motor mount
(AF-200) 3” auger uses 1/2 HP
• Stainless steel auger with UHMW polyethylene insert and bearing
(AF-1, AF-2, and AF-M); Steel auger with aluminum feed tube
(AF-200)
• Heavy-duty gearbox (AF-200)
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Removable 0.3 cu. ft. additive supply hopper,
including slide gate and sight glass; hand fill cover
only (AF-1 and AF-2 only)
• 230/1/50-60 supply voltage
• Flange transition: 7” square to 4” square
• 8” high modular base (in lieu of 6”) - required for
machine hoppers with less than 60º cone
• Deduct for feeder without modular base (AF-1 and
AF-2 only)
• Additive supply hopper cover for field-mounting SR
Series hopper loader or vacuum receiver
• 2.0 cu. ft. additive supply hopper (AF-1, AF-2, and
AF-200 only)
• Calibration timer with cycle counter (injection)
• Extruder tracking control; includes customermountable 0-5 VDC optical speed sensor (extrusion) consult factory if customer already has speed sensor
• Spare auger assembly, all diameters (includes auger,
insert, and bearing)
• Regrind insert; recommended for use on regrind
applications (not available on AF-M, AF-200 or 1.75”
augers)
135
• High-performance variable frequency drive package
(AF-200 only)
BLEND AND RECLAIM
PRECISION SERIES ADDITIVE FEEDERS
SPECIFICATIONS
Auger Dia., in.
0.25”
0.375”
0.5”
0.75”
1.0”
1.25”
1.5”
1.625”
1.75”
2.0”
3.0”
Model
AF-M
AF-M
AF-1/AF-2
AF-1/AF-2
AF-1/AF-2
AF-1/AF-2
AF-1/AF-2
AF-200
AF-1/AF-2
AF-200
AF-200
Approx. Min. Throughput, lbs./hr Approx. Max. Throughput, lbs./hr
0.26 (0.2 gm/min)
1.32 (10 gm/min)
0.93 (7gm/min)
5.29 (40 gm/min)
1
7
1.5
25
4
55
7
110
13
200
60
400
18
250
90
600
300
1500
NOTE: All throughput rates are based on color concentrate pellets @ 45 lbs./cu. ft. - derate for lighter materials.
50 (23)
50 (23)
50 (23), 90 (41)
50 (23), 90 (41)
50 (23), 90 (41)
50 (23), 90 (41)
50 (23), 90 (41)
75 (34)
50 (23), 90 (41)
75 (34)
75 (34)
AF-200 OPTIONAL HIGH-PERFORMANCE DRIVE PACKAGE
High-performance variable speed drive package includes a heavy-duty ICS34 gearbox, 1/4 HP AC inverter-duty motor with
hinged motor mount, premium variable frequency inverter drive for precise control and wide metering range, and speed pot
control and digital setup capabilities.
Max throughput is increased to 1450 lbs./hr for 1.625” auger, 2150 lbs./hr for 2” auger, and 6550 lbs./hr for 3” auger. (Rates
based on color concentrate pellets @ 45 lbs./cu. ft.)
DIMENSIONS
AF-1 & AF-2
AF-M
Mounting Flange
4
29.79
4.63 sq.
4.13 sq.
4
7
6.44
18.32
5.35
27.75
7
AF-200
3” Dia.
9/16” dia. thru (4 plcs)
8 sq 6 sq
12
18.757
34.18
18.75
21.746
8
6
31.25
Controllers
Overall width of AF-1 and AF-2 is 15”
9.5
9.5
9.5
Standard
AF-2 is 55.5” long. All other dimensions
are the same as AF-1.
6.25
Standard
with options
For 2 cu. ft. hopper, mounting flange,
and 6” modular base, measurements
do not change. Add 5” to all other
dimensions.
136
B L E N D
&
R E C L A I M
A3 BLENDER CONTROL SOFTWARE
B L E N D
&
BLEND AND RECLAIM
R E C L A I M
A3 BLENDER CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE
A3 Control and Data Acquisition systems are compatible with Allen-Bradley
and existing AEC control systems when equipped with the proper
communication option.
Notes: 1. All existing blenders with HydReclaim controls can be included as
long as they are upgraded to Version 7.01 software for A3 to work
properly. (May require a service call or panel upgrade.)
2. Communication modules and cables are not included –
purchase separately.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Compatible with MS Windows® XP Home and Professional Edition
• Monitor up to 1000 A-B controlled blenders, or 255 HydReclaim
controlled blenders
• Start and stop blenders and feeders
• Monitor and control recipes for each blender
A3 Virtual Control Panel
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Software kit A-B or AEC controlled blenders
• Log up to 1000 alarms per blender
• Ethernet module for A-B blender (one per blender)
• Log up to 5000 consecutive batch weights
• USB RS422 Legacy Module for AEC blender (one per
network)
• Monitor and record all recipe changes
• Monitor material inventory, even if cleared at the blender
• Compatible with MS Works or Office 2000, including Access,
Excel and Word
• Download inventory run rates, run status, target vs. actual recipe
set points
• Store an infinite number of recipes (limited only by hard drive
space on computer)
• Upload and download recipes and access recipe storage book
functions
• Automatically generate time/date stamped reports on an hourly
basis
• Two tier password security
• Job Report Manager that tracks material reference numbers as
well as lot numbers and silo numbers
137
A3 BLENDER CONTROL SOFTWARE
PC SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
BLEND AND RECLAIM
• Pentium® II 750 Mhz minimum processor speed (Pentium 4 recommended)
• Windows® XP operating system (service pack 1 installed)
• Internet Explorer 6.0
• 30 GB minimum hard drive space (60 GB recommended)
• 128 MB minimum RAM (512 MB DDR Ram recommended)
• CD-ROM drive (CD-RW recommended)
• Video card capable of 1024x768x16 bit color (32 bit color recommended)
• 10 Mbps Ethernet (100 Mbps recommended)
• 1 USB slot (Required for optional RS-422 Legacy module needed for AEC
blender controls only)
• Standard Ink Jet Printer (if you are going to print the reports)
REQUIREMENTS FOR BD BLENDERS WITH ALLEN-BRADLEY CONTROLS
Typical A3 Network Installation
(Computer, cables, and optional
hub supplied by customer)
• Each blender must have the optional Ethernet module installed.
• Ethernet Module
• Module Cable
ACS Part # A0563939
ACS Part # A0565898
A-B # 1761-NET-ENI
A-B # 1761-CBL-AM00
• Each blender must have version 3.2 or newer software
• All blenders and the host PC must be on the same Ethernet network, which is installed by the customer using CAT 5 cable.
If the blenders are on a stand-alone network, and not part of an existing network, the customer will also need to supply a
hub or switch. The network installation should be done by the customer’s IT department or a professional. ACS does not
provide installation services for the Ethernet network. Refer to the A3 manual for further details.
REQUIREMENTS FOR BD/OL/OFC BLENDERS WITH AEC CONTROLS
• Each OS/OA blender, or OI inventory unit, with LGX controls must have software version 7.01 or newer
• Each OFC/OFE unit with LSTAR controls must have software version 5.5A or newer
• Each OL blender with LSTAR controls must have version 10.5A or newer
• The customer must purchase the "USB RS422 Legacy Module" for the PC (only one module required for entire system).
• The customer must run Belden 8103 2-twisted pair cables from the PC to the first blender, then from the first blender to the
second, and so on. At each blender the customer must solder DB9 Male connectors to the cables and a DB9 Female
connector at the PC cable. This cable must be run in separate conduit to isolate from electrical noise and static in the facility.
Refer to the A3 manual for further details.
138
B L E N D
&
R E C L A I M
COEXPERT® EXTRUSION CONTROL SYSTEM
B L E N D
&
BLEND AND RECLAIM
R E C L A I M
COEXPERT® CO-EXTRUSION CONTROL SYSTEM
CoExpert® is a Microsoft Windows®-based computer package used in
conjunction with AEC blending and feeding equipment to control the
extrusion process. It can be used on single or multi-layer applications,
including wire & cable, profile, blown or cast film, or sheet.
CoExpert® co-extrusion system uses an IBM-compatible Pentium®-based
industrial graphical control system (Windows®-based) with touch-screen.
It includes an integrated PC/Touch Screen controller, significantly easing
installation and operator usage. It controls extruder speeds, layer
percentages, and blender recipes; and comes complete with all necessary
hardware and software. Communication wires and cables are not included.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Intel® Pentium-based industrial computer includes:
SVGA color monitor
Touch-screen operator interface
OPTIONAL FEATURES
3.5” floppy disk drive
• Line Speed Control (COEX-LS), including a high
accuracy encoder and a conversion panel. CoExpert®
with line speed control is required when using a
CoExpert® package to control the haul-off. For use
with up to six (6) OL blending systems or GH-M rate
monitor units and a haul-off control. Included are an
encoder and a conversion panel for interfacing to the
CoExpert® control system. Controls overall yield
(weight/length), weight per area, and thickness.
Communication wires and cables not included.
Windows® operating system
Modem and telephony software included for factory
support and upgrades
• User-friendly screens configurable to match each specific process
• In-line surge protector
• Control functions include:
Extruder speeds
• Windows® 95/98/NT communications package
compatible with a DDE server
Layer percentages
Blender recipe storage
Remote operation
Monitoring of material usage
English or Metric units
Real-time trending chart of process
Alarm log
Configurable password protection
Integral diagnostic system
139
COEXPERT® EXTRUSION CONTROL SYSTEM
SPECIFICATIONS
BLEND AND RECLAIM
The standard CoExpert® package is for use with up to six (6) OL Series blending systems and/or GH-M Series rate monitor
units without a haul-off control. The CoExpert® system can control up to six extruders with or without line speed control.
An extrusion line running 500 pounds/hour of 1.0 mil film could consistently run 0.98 mil film with better quality, lower scrap
and produce an extra 75,000 pounds of product per year.
ADVANTAGES
• Reduced material usage
• Improved product quality
• Increased productivity
• Simplified start-up and material change-over
• Reduced start-up and shut-down times
• Monitoring of material usage
• “On-the-fly" product changes
• Precisely control co-ex layer percentages
• Set recipes from a remote control panel
• Display average product gauge by inputting product width
• Display true layer percentages
• Allow input of recycled trim width
• Remotely monitor the process
• Monitor alarm histories
140
B L E N D
&
R E C L A I M
OI SERIES INVENTORY MONITOR UNITS
B L E N D
&
BLEND AND RECLAIM
R E C L A I M
OI SERIES BATCH WEIGH INVENTORY MONITOR UNITS
OI Series batch weigh inventory and density monitor units are designed to
mount on an existing bin. The OI Series accurately monitors material usage
by weight with 1/10% span-accurate cantilever load cells.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Upper material supply (surge) hopper with conical weigh hopper
reload valve
• Spun weigh hopper with pneumatic dump valve
• Mounts to existing hopper or bin
OI Series Inventory Monitor Unit
with optional vacuum receiver
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Weigh hopper proximity switch
• Upper material supply hopper air-operated slide gate
in lieu of standard conical reload valve
• ± 1/10% span-accurate cantilever load cells
• Remote operator control panel
• RCP - RS-485 LCD remote control panel with 10 ft.
cable, 100 ft. maximum distance
• RS-485 communications
• Upper material supply hopper gaylord bypass tube
• Remote mount, solid state, high level proximity sensor
• Two line x 40 character LCD operator controller & display
• Material inventory totalized up to 999,999 lbs./kg
• Parallel printer port
• Hopper lid arranged for AEC SRC receivers and SLC loaders.
Hopper lid may alternately be cut for non-AEC loading hoppers
at no additional charge, if specifications are provided
141
OI SERIES INVENTORY MONITOR UNITS
SPECIFICATIONS
BLEND AND RECLAIM
Model
Maximum rate, lbs./hr (kg/hr)*
Weigh hopper capacity, lbs. (kg)
OI 050
2000 (900)
50 (22)
OI 025
OI 100
1000 (454)
5000 (2270)
* Rate based on 35 lbs./cu. ft. (560 kg/cu. m) free-flowing pellets. Actual rate may vary.
142
25 (11)
100 (45)
B L E N D
&
R E C L A I M
GH AND GH-M EXTRUSION CONTROL UNITS
B L E N D
&
BLEND AND RECLAIM
R E C L A I M
GH AND GH-M SERIES EXTRUSION CONTROL UNITS
The GH extrusion control and GH-M extruder rate monitor units match the
extruder throughput, track material usage, and can control extruder output
with the optional control system
STANDARD FEATURES
• Surge hopper with refill valve
• Mass flow weigh hopper design for first in/first out material flow
eliminates segregation
• Weigh hopper with sight glass for visual check
GH/GH-M Series
Extrusion Control Unit
• High accuracy, precision cantilever load cell
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Material inventory
• Speed adjust module
• Allen-Bradley remote control system with monochrome touch-screen
• Additional speed potentiometer
• Lid for non-AEC loader/receiver
• Line footage inventory
• Line and screw speed pickup
• DF-1 communications port (Ethernet optional)
• Haul-off or extruder speed control software included;specify
at time of order
• Weight per length control to ±1/2% of maximum extruder rate
• Serial printer port connection
• Hopper lid arranged for AEC receivers and loaders
• Weight per area control available
143
GH AND GH-M EXTRUSION CONTROL UNITS
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
BLEND AND RECLAIM
Feed rate, lbs./hr (kg/hr)
GH-10
GH-20
GH-40
A
60 (153)
69 (176)
74.5 (189)
100-500 (45-227)
5-1,000 (2-454)
0-2,000 (0-907)
GH SERIES BASIC OPERATION
The AEC GH Series extrusion control system
tracks extruder screw speed, and continually
learns the rate of each extruder screw revolution.
The unit then adjusts the extrusion line haul-off
speed (or optional extruder speed) to keep
product weight per length consistent. The GH
unit adjusts for varying product weights, flow
characteristics, and varying extrusion
pressures, such as plugged screen packs and
other factors.
You can adjust the GH unit to a preset
weight/length (grams/meter or pounds/foot)
specification, or you can set it to hold the
existing extrusion parameters set.
COEX-AB-LS
• Surge hopper with conical refill valve
• Allen-Bradley control system with monochrome
touch-screen
• Weigh hopper with sight glass for visual check
• Mass flow weigh hopper design for first in, first out
material flow
• Network communications
• Precision cantilever load cell
A
C
EXTRUSION CONTROL OPTIONS
COEX-AB
C
37.75 (96)
37.75 (96)
47.5 (121)
GH-M SERIES EXTRUDER MONITOR UNITS
STANDARD FEATURES
You can also configure the GH unit to
communicate with a co-extrusion controller to
provide a complete layer and overall thickness
control and monitoring system.
Model
Dimensions, in. (cm)
B
18 (46)
24 (61)
30 (76)
CoExpert®
B
Description
co-extrusion A-B VersaView™ based industrial graphical control system with touch-screen. Includes an
integrated PC/Touch-Screen controller, significantly easing installation and operator usage. For use with up to eight (8)
OL blending systems and/or GH “flow control” units without a haul-off control. Controls extruder speeds, layer
percentages, and blender recipes. Complete with all necessary hardware, software, and communications requirements.
CoExpert® with line speed control (haul-off). Required when using a CoExpert® package to control the haul-off. For use
with up to eight (8) OL blending systems or GH-M “flow control” units and a haul-off control. Included are an encoder and
a conversion panel for interfacing to the CoExpert® control system. Controls overall yield (weight/length), weight per area.
NOTE: Purchase of start-up assistance is required with any CoExpert system.
144
B L E N D
&
R E C L A I M
GH-F SERIES GRAVIMETRIC FEEDERS
B L E N D
&
BLEND AND RECLAIM
R E C L A I M
The GH-F Series gravimetric feeder adds colorant or other free-flowing
material to your process, based on a self-calibrating controller that makes
recalibration unnecessary and eliminates the overfeeding that typically
accompanies volumetric feeders.
STANDARD FEATURES
GH-F Series
Gravimetric Feeder
• Precision 0.02% span accurate weighing system
• Serial printer port
• Aluminum and mild steel contact surfaces
• DF-1 communications port (Ethernet optional)
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Field-mounted proximity switch for extruder speed pick-up
• Customer-specified mounting flange
• Surge hopper with reload valve
• Special voltage (transformer)
• Square mounting flange for machine-mount
• Supply hopper lids cut for other vacuum receivers
or loaders; cut-out pattern only1
• Allen-Bradley remote control system with monochrome
touch-screen
1 Allow additional delivery lead times
• 3” (76mm) OD discharge opening
• Extruder following circuit
145
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
GH-F 003
GH-F 009
GH-F 025
GH-F 040
GH-F 100
GH-F 200
Max. feed rate,
lbs./hr (kg/hr)1
0.5-30 (0.22-13.6)
5-90 (2.3-40.9)
25-250 (11.4-113.5)
40-400 (18.2-181.6)
100-1000 (45.4-454)
200-2000 (90.8-908)
Hopper capacity,
lbs. (kg)
10 (4.5)
10 (4.5)
25 (11.4)
25 (11.4)
50 (22.7)
50 (22.7)
BLEND AND RECLAIM
Auger size,
in. (mm)2
0.75 (19.1)
1 (25.4)
1-5/8 (41.3)
2 (50.8)
3 (76.2)
4 (101.6)
Shipping weight,
lbs. (kg)3
200 (91)
200 (91)
200 (91)
200 (91)
200 (91)
200 (91)
Crate dimensions, in. (cm)3
48 x 48 x 48 (122 x 122 x 122)
48 x 48 x 48 (122 x 122 x 122)
48 x 48 x 48 (122 x 122 x 122)
48 x 48 x 48 (122 x 122 x 122)
48 x 48 x 48 (122 x 122 x 122)
48 x 48 x 48 (122 x 122 x 122)
1 Rate is based on fifty (50) lbs./cu. ft. (800 kg/cu. m.) free-flowing pelletized additive. Actual rates may vary.
2 GH-F Series models are available with various auger sizes that will affect throughput rate. Consult factory for guaranteed rates based upon individual applications.
Material tests may be required.
3 Weights and dimensions listed are approximate; may vary based on exact feeder configuration, options, accessories, etc.
TYPICAL GH-F GRAVIMETRIC FEEDER
NOTES:
TOP VIEW
GH-F Series additive feeders are continuous
loss-in-weight systems designed to work with
continuous operation extrusion lines only. Any
use other than with factory-approved extrusion
applications is not recommended and may void
any warranty or return and refund claims,
implied and otherwise stated.
Upper surge
hopper
Weigh
hopper
SIDE VIEW
146
B L E N D
&
R E C L A I M
PB SERIES POWDER BLENDERS
B L E N D
&
BLEND AND RECLAIM
R E C L A I M
The PB Series blender is designed for continuous extrusion applications for
powder, pellet, or micro-pellet materials and offers the most homogeneous
blend available compared to common batch-type blenders or mixers.
Materials like PVC, wood flour, and additives can be efficiently blended for
your operation. Twin screw feeders can also be provided for non-free-flowing
materials. Throughput rates range up to 16,500 lbs./hr. (7,500 kgs/hr) in
continuous extrusion applications, including compounding, profile, fiber
and sheet.
STANDARD FEATURES
PB Blender
• Mezzanine mount configuration
• Blender automatically adjusts feeders to match extruder rate at
the ratio required
• Capable of starve or flood feeding of extruder
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Stainless steel and nickel plated aluminum construction
• High temperature model, 350ºF (175ºC)
• Supply hoppers with reload valves
• Twin screw feeder with integral agitator for non-freeflowing or cohesive materials
• Precision vibrating wire digital load cells
• Vacuum loading equipment
• Feed augers with DC motors
• Touch-screen operator panel features easy menu-driven graphic
format, RS-232 printer port, recipe storage book, and material
usage information
• Hopper lids arranged for AEC SRC vacuum receivers and PHL or
SLC hopper loaders. Lids may also be cut for other loaders at no
additional charge provided detailed drawings are submitted with
the order.
147
• Liquid additive introduced below blender
• MultiLineTM control system (based on an industrial
PC and required for multiple blender applications)
• Communications capability (Ethernet, Modbus,
Profibus, etc) MultiLine system only
SPECIFICATIONS
BLEND AND RECLAIM
All of these blenders are custom designed to fit the specific application. Each feeder must be sized to handle the full range of
each component, so minimum and maximum percentages must be specified up front. The range can usually change in the future
by changing auger assemblies, but an initial range must be specified. A Quote Request form must be completed to properly size
and price the blender.
No. of Components
1
4
6
8
Height, in. (mm)
70 (1780)
70 (1780)
80 (2035)
80 (2035)
Width, in. (mm)
36 (915)
54 (1375)
60 (1525)
60 (1525)
Depth, in. (mm)
40 (1020)
42 (1070)
50 (1270)
55 (1400)
Weight, lbs. (kg)
350 (160)
500 (230)
750 (345)
1000 (455)
Minimum and maximum processing (extruder) rates must be included with order to avoid processing and manufacturing delays.
Orders forwarded without proper minimum and maximum processing rates, as well as individual ingredient recipe percentages,
cannot be entered or scheduled until the information is received.
Augers have minimum and maximum output rates based on auger and motor size.
Bulk density of materials, particularly regrinds, can greatly impact blender performance and rate. Consult the factory for
guaranteed blending rates.
Material samples are required for testing in order to guarantee actual processing rates. Consult your AEC sales contact for
shipping instructions and the amounts of each material required for testing. Typical amounts required are 100 pounds for major
ingredients and 25 pounds for minor ingredients.
TYPICAL POWDER MATERIALS
Type
Feeder
Free-flowing or non-cohesive
Single screw feeder without agitation
Non-free-flowing or cohesive
Twin screw feeder with agitation
Free-flowing or non-cohesive
Single screw feeder with agitation
Materials
PVC powder or compound; Sodium carbonate; Color concentrate;
Blowing agent; Various ground materials
Wood flour; Oat, wheat, or rice hulls; Knaff; Hemp; Talc
Calcium carbonate; Talc; Clay; Titanium dioxide (TiO2); Various
wax granules; UV stabilizers; Stearates; Pigments
All materials must be the proper mesh size suitable for processing with the equipment. Obtain samples of all materials and consult the factory if in doubt of any of the materials
to be blended or fed.
PBW feeder for
wood flour
Twin screw, agitated
powder feeder
148
B L E N D
&
R E C L A I M
VI SERIES EDGE TRIM CONVEYING SYSTEMS
B L E N D
&
BLEND AND RECLAIM
R E C L A I M
VI edge trim conveying systems are used to convey edge trim to the film
grinder. AEC VI Series edge trim conveying systems include a highpressure radial blade blower, an adjustable blower inlet damper with finger
guard, a flanged outlet, and a high-efficiency venturi unit with adjustable
venturi tube.
Standard edge trim blower and
venturi (dual blowers available)
STANDARD FEATURES
• Y-tube to connect to the blower venturi inlet
• Two spun bellmouth pickups for field installation at the winder
trim station
• One 20 foot (6m) length of metal flex tube to be field-cut into
three pieces (based on specific installation to connect venturi,
Y-tube and bellmouth pickups)
• Sized to convey medium slip edge trim up to 50 feet (15 m) to
adjacent grinders
Edge trim air exhausters (relief heads) and motor starters are not
included as standard. They are available at an additional charge.
149
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Remote or manually operated starter on blower
• Inlet silencer enclosure on blower
• Sound enclosure
• Dual venturis
• Special voltage (details required)
• Edge trim air exhauster (relief head) Size 6 for 5 and
7.5 HP blowers; size 8 for 10 and 15 HP blowers;
size 10 for 20 and 25 HP blowers
EQUIPMENT SELECTION: BLOWER MODELS
Model Number
616-05FD
628-07FD
724-10FD
724-15FD
724-20FD
832-25FD
BLEND AND RECLAIM
Motor, HP (kW)
5 (3.73)
7.5 (5.59)
10 (7.49)
15 (11.19)
20 (14.92)
25 (18.65)
Venturi
3x6
3x6
4x8
4x8
4x8
5 x 10
TYPICAL VI SERIES SYSTEM
Edge trim air exhauster (relief head) is
not included with the system, since it is
usually supplied with the granulator. It
is priced separately depending on the
system design. However, it must be
sized to match the air flow of the
conveying blower.
150
B L E N D
&
R E C L A I M
GR1 SERIES FILM GRINDERS
B L E N D
&
BLEND AND RECLAIM
R E C L A I M
GR1 SERIES SINGLE-CHAMBER FILM GRINDERS
AEC’s GR1 Series film grinders are designed to handle a wide range of
materials and can be equipped with our exclusive feed roll assemblies for
automatic feeding of scrap roll stock. GR1 Series film grinders are used to
grind film scrap into small particles of fluff that can be combined with
pelletized material and fed back into an extruder.
Model GR1-812-20
STANDARD FEATURES
• Frame-mounted control panel complete with all starters, relays,
switches, etc. required for proper operation
• Frame-mounted fluff blower
• Heavy-machined plate cutting chamber
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• High shear, scissor cut design
• Standard hand feed chute
• Outboard-mounted bearings with scraper blades
• Special voltage (specify)
• 4-blade adjustable slant knife rotor, 1 bed knife; D2 steel
• Flywheel on grinder for heavy feeding
• Sound enclosure
• Reinforced grinder screen
• Carbide-coated grinder blades in lieu of D2 (5 blades)
• CPM10V grinder blades in lieu of D2 (5 blades)
OPTIONAL FEED ROLL ASSEMBLY FEATURES
• Additional spare set of D2 blades
• Feed roll reversing switch
• Doctor blade on lower roll to help reduce wrapping
• Remote-mount control panel
• Exclusive “undercut” knurl design helps prevent knurl wear
• Soft start; minimum 50 HP (37 kW) drives
• Heavy-duty hollow shaft gearbox and variable speed drive motor
• Front door with hinge and quick-release clamp
• Adjustable finger guards
• Assembly hinged with quick-release clamp for cleaning
• Pneumatic assist provided with Model 20 & Model 30 assemblies
• Angled feed roll geometry to assist in feeding thick films
• Steep wall grinder chute to advance roll stock and film
• Optional feed roll reversing switch available
• Safety switches on all hinged components
151
GR1 SERIES FILM GRINDERS
SPECIFICATIONS
Grinder motor,
HP (kW)
20 (14.92)
30 (22.38)
40 (29.84)
75 (55.95)
Model
GR1-8012-20
GR1-1218-30
GR1-1218-40
GR1-1824-75
BLEND AND RECLAIM
Grinder rate range,
lbs./hr (kg/hr)1
225-275 (102-124)
350-450 (159-204)
400-500 (181-227)
600-1000 (272-454)
Fluff blower motor,
HP (kW)
2 (1.49)
5 (3.73)
5 (3.73)
10 (7.46)
Screen hole dia.,
in. (mm)2
0.1875 (4.762)
0.1875 (4.762)
0.1875 (4.762)
0.3125 (7.438)
1 Feed rate range is based on 1.0 mil LDPE film scrap; actual rate will vary. Material types and thickness can greatly impact the performance of film grinders. AEC is not
responsible for grinder performance under certain operating conditions with which the equipment is not designed to handle, or if the material type and thickness is not known
or specified with the order. It is the responsibility of the salesperson and the customer to inform the factory of the exact scrap film application with confirming orders.
2 Screen hole diameter in mm is approximate. Screen size required may vary depending on the material type and thickness.
FEED ROLL ASSEMBLIES
Description
Model 14 with 1/2 HP (0.373 kW) SCR drive (up to 60” layflat)
Model 20 with 1.5 HP (1.12 kW) SCR drive (up to 120” layflat)
Model 30 with 5 HP (3.73 kW) SCR drive (up to 160” layflat)
Models
Model 812 only
Models 812 and 1218
Models 1218 and 1824
Model 1824 only
DIMENSIONS
A
D
E
C
F
B
Shown with optional feed roll assembly
Model
812
1218
1824
A, in. (cm)
20 (51)
17.5 (45)
B, in. (cm)
69 (176)
77 (196)
C, in. (cm)
33 (83)
40 (102)
D, in. (cm)
45 (113)
67 (171)
Consult factory
152
G
E, in. (cm)
60 (151)
61 (155)
F, in. (cm)
24 (61)
32 (80)
B L E N D
&
G, in. (cm)
51 (129)
56 (145)
R E C L A I M
GR2 HBD SERIES FILM GRINDERS
B L E N D
&
BLEND AND RECLAIM
R E C L A I M
GR2 HBD SERIES DUAL-CHAMBER FILM GRINDERS
AEC’s exclusive HBD® film grinders use dual cutting chambers to
reduce the fluff to a smaller particle size, providing a higher bulk
density, which results in higher re-feed rates. Scrap film first passes
through a primary upper cutting chamber, then through a secondary
lower chamber with a smaller screen. HBD® grinders are excellent for
tacky, heat-sensitive materials, like LLDPE and PVC. HBD® Series
grinder design permits a very high line speed edge trim, because the
top chamber stays evacuated to enable efficient ingestion of materials.
Excellent for high-speed cast film lines.
STANDARD FEATURES
Model GR2-812-20 HBD
• Two-stage high bulk density grinding performance
• Frame-mounted control panel
• Frame-mounted fluff blower
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• 4-blade adjustable slant knife rotor, 1-blade adjustable slant bed
knife per chamber, D2 steel (10 blades total)
• Special voltage (specify)
• Reinforced grinder screen
• Standard hand feed chute
• Heavy-machined plate cutting chamber
• Flywheel on grinder for heavy feeding
• Heavy-duty outboard-mounted bearings with scraper blades
• Sound enclosure
• Carbide-coated grinder blades in lieu of D2 (10
blades)
OPTIONAL FEED ROLL ASSEMBLY FEATURES
• CPM10V grinder blades in lieu of D2 (10 blades)
• Additional spare set of D2 blades
• Doctor blade on lower roll to help reduce wrapping
• Feed roll reversing switch
• Exclusive “undercut” knurl design helps prevent knurl wear
• Remote-mount control panel
• Heavy-duty hollow shaft gearbox and variable speed drive motor
• Soft start; minimum 50 HP (37 kW) drives
• Front door with hinge and quick-release clamp
• Adjustable finger guards
• Assembly hinged with quick-release clamp for cleaning
• Pneumatic assist
• Angled feed roll geometry to assist in feeding thick films
• Steep wall grinder chute to advance roll stock and film
• Optional feed roll reversing switch available
• Safety switches on all hinged, opened components for safety
153
GR2 HBD SERIES FILM GRINDERS
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
GR2-812-20
GR2-1218-30
GR2-1218-40
GR2-1824-75
Grinder motor,
HP (kW)
20 (14.92)
30 (22.38)
40 (29.84)
75 (55.95)
Fluff blower motor,
HP (kW)
2 (1.49)
5 (3.73)
5 (3.73)
10 (7.46)
BLEND AND RECLAIM
Grinder rate range,
lbs./hr (kg/hr)1
300-400 (135-180)
400-600 (180-270)
600-850 (270-850)
1000-1500 (455-680)
Primary screen hole
dia., in. (mm)2
0.25 (6.35)
0.375 (9.525)
0.375 (9.525)
0.5 (12.7)
Secondary screen hole
dia., in. (mm)2
0.1875” (4.762)
0.1875” (4.762)
0.1875” (4.762)
0.3125 (7.938)
1 Feed rate range is based on 1.0 mil LDPE film scrap; actual rate will vary. Material types and thickness can greatly impact the performance of film grinders. AEC is not
responsible for grinder performance under certain operating conditions with which the equipment is not designed to handle, or if the material type and thickness is not known
or specified with the order. It is the responsibility of the salesperson and the customer to inform the factory of the exact scrap film application with confirming orders.
2 Screen hole diameter in mm is approximate. Screen size required may vary depending on the material type and thickness.
FEED ROLL ASSEMBLIES
Description
Models
Model 812 only
Models 812 and 1218
Model 20 with 1.5 HP (1.12 kW) SCR drive (up to 120” layflat)
Models 1218 and 1824
Model 30 with 5 HP (3.73 kW) SCR drive (up to 160” layflat)
Model 1824 only
DIMENSIONS
E
A
C
Shown with optional feed roll assembly
Model
812
1218
1824
A, in. (cm)
19.375 (49)
27 (69)
D
G
B
B, in. (cm)
96 (244)
113 (288)
F
C, in. (cm)
32.375 (82)
43 (109)
D, in. (cm)
E, in. (cm)
44.375 (182) 71.625 (182)
61 (155)
89.125 (226)
Consult factory
154
H
F, in. (cm)
65.625 (167)
83 (211)
G, in. (cm)
24 (61)
31.5 (80)
B L E N D
&
H, in. (cm)
51.625 (131)
60.375 (153)
R E C L A I M
FLUFF BLOWERS AND CYCLONE SEPARATORS
B L E N D
&
BLEND AND RECLAIM
R E C L A I M
FD AND FV SERIES FLUFF BLOWERS
FD and FV conveying systems are used to convey ground film scrap to the
fluff feed unit or storage tank. FD Series fluff blowers feature direct drive
motors, and FV Series blowers feature belt drive motors. The S Series
cyclones can be used with fluff feed hoppers or fluff storage tanks.
STANDARD FEATURES
S Series Cyclone
• High-performance blowers and cyclones designed for fluff
• Choice of 230/3/60 or 460/3/60 operating voltages
Fluff Conveying Blower
• Direct drive (FD) or belt drive (FV) blower motors
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Manual starter on blower
• Special voltage (please specify)
155
FLUFF BLOWERS AND CYCLONE SEPARATORS
SPECIFICATIONS
Blower model
4001FD
4002FD
5003FD
5005FD
6075FD
6075FV
7010FV
8010FV6
10 (S4)
12 (S5)
13 (S6)
14 (S7)
18 (S8)
24 (S9)
36 (S10)
DIMENSIONS: S SERIES
Model
no.
10
12
13
14
18
24
A*
9
12
15
18
24
28
Model
no.
10
12
13
14
18
24
* Diameter
A*
22.9
30.5
38.1
45.7
60.9
71.1
B*
3
4
4
5
8
9
B*
7.6
10.2
10.2
12.7
20.3
22.9
E
C
2
4
5
5.75
9
10
C
5.1
10.2
12.7
14.6
22.9
25.4
B
C
Blower power, HP (kW)
1(0.746)
2 (1.492)
3 (2.238)
5 (3.730)
7.5(5.595)
7.5 (5.595)
10 (7.460)
15 (11.190)
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
Airflow, cfm (cmh)
545 (925)
785 (1330)
900 (1530)
1100 (1870)
1400 (2380)
1400 (2380)
1770 (3,005)
2180 (3700)
300 (510)
545 (925)
785 (1330)
1100 (1865)
1400 (2375)
1770 (3005)
2180 (3700)
Tube dia. OD, in. (approx. mm)
4 (101.6)
4 (101.6)
5 (127.0)
5 (127.0)
6 (152.4)
6 (152.4)
7 (177.8)
8 (203.2)
3 (76.2)
4 (101.6)
4 (101.6)
5 (127.0)
6 (152.4)
7 (177.8)
8 (203.2)
Inches
D*
E
F
G
H
J*
K*
L*
M*
N
4.5
2.5
4.5 22.375 31.875 4
6
0.25 5.125 5
5.75 3.5
3.5
31
43.5
4
6
0.25 5.125 6
8
4
5
32
47
6.75
9.5 0.313 8.5
12
9
4.75 5.75 42.125 60.25 6.75
9.5 0.313 8.5
12
12 5.625 9
57.25 81.25
8 10.438 0.375 9.5
16
14.5
7
10
68
96
10
13 0.375 11.75 14.5
D*
11.4
14.6
20.3
22.9
30.5
36.8
E
6.4
8.9
10.2
12.1
14.3
17.8
F
11.4
8.9
12.7
14.6
22.9
25.4
Centimeters
H
J*
K*
80.9 10.2 15.2
110 10.2 15.2
119 17.1 24.1
153 17.1 24.1
206 20.3 26.5
244 25.4 33.0
G
56.8
78.7
81.3
107
145
173
L*
0.64
0.64
0.8
0.8
0.95
0.95
M*
13.0
13.0
21.6
21.6
24.1
29.9
N
12.7
15.2
30.5
30.5
40.6
36.8
P
4.5
4.75
5
5.75
9
10
P
11.4
12.1
12.7
14.6
22.9
25.4
Q
4.75
4.75
5
5.75
9
10
R
3.5
4.5
12
12
16
14.5
S
9
12
15
18
24
28
T
4
4
4
4
5
5
Q
12.1
12.1
12.7
14.6
22.9
25.4
R
8.9
11.4
30.5
30.5
40.6
36.8
S
22.9
30.5
38.1
45.7
60.9
71.1
T
10.2
10.2
10.2
10.2
12.7
12.7
D
A F
N
BLEND AND RECLAIM
L
S
M
T
P
H
G
Seam location
C
R
Q
B dia.
J
N
F
156
B L E N D
&
R E C L A I M
FT SERIES AGITATED FLUFF STORAGE TANKS
B L E N D
&
BLEND AND RECLAIM
R E C L A I M
AEC agitated fluff storage tanks are designed with heavy-duty agitators to
handle the hardest to feed materials. Sizes range from 50 to 200 cu. ft.
capacity.
STANDARD FEATURES
Model FT 50 (shown with optional cyclone)
• Rectangular heavy-duty round bottom design
• Cleanout access door
• Slow speed gear reduction drive agitator
• Tank-mounted controller
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Lexan® cover over auger discharge chute
• Photo cell level switch with delay timer in lieu of
mechanical
• Fluff conveying blower
• Special voltage
• Mechanical high level switch with warning light
• Special cyclone hole in cover
• 230/1/60 agitator operating voltage
• Diverter valve and controls to feed 2 extruders
• 460/3/60 blower operating voltage
157
SPECIFICATIONS
Discharge
Capacity, cu.
auger dia. OD,
ft. (l)
in. (mm)
50-4
50 (1415)
4 (101.6)
100-6 100 (2832)
6 (152.4)
200-6 200 (5663)
6 (152.4)
Model
Auger drive
DC,
HP (kW)
0.5 (0.373)
0.75 (0.559)
1 (0.746)
BLEND AND RECLAIM
Agitator drive
DC,
HP (kW)
0.75 (0.559)
1 (0.746)
2 (1.492)
Discharge
blower,
HP (kW)
2 (1.492)
5 (3.730)
5 (3.730)
Blower tube
dia. OD,
in. (mm)
4 (101.6)
4 (101.6)
4 (101.6)
Length,
in. (cm)
54 (137)
54 (137)
54 (137)
Width,
in. (cm)
36 (91)
36 (91)
36 (91)
69 (175)
87 (221)
150 (381)
TYPICAL CONFIGURATION
TYPICAL FLUFF TANK WITH RECLAIM SYSTEM
158
B L E N D
&
Height,
in. (cm)
R E C L A I M
TE SERIES EDGE TRIM FEED HOPPERS
B L E N D
&
BLEND AND RECLAIM
R E C L A I M
AEC fluff feed hoppers are designed to feed a percentage of the fluff
directly back into the extruder throat. The unique dual-stage design ensures
that the fluff is mixed with the virgin material above the extruder throat.
Each auger is independently adjustable and can be set to follow the
extruder screw speed by monitoring a tachometer signal from the extruder.
The TE unit is designed to re-feed edge trim only.
TE fluff feed hoppers are designed to feed edge trim back into an extruder
at a maximum rate 25% of the extruder output. NOTE: Cannot be used with
grooved feed throats.
STANDARD FEATURES
TE Control Panel
TE 350 (shown with optional cyclone)
• NEMA 12 enclosure
• Up to 20% re-feed rate1
• Machine-mount flange
• Dependable auger metering
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• IR compensation
• High level sensor with delay timer
• Mild steel material contact surfaces
• Special voltage (please specify)
• 90º feed pedestal
• Vertical mix auger, horizontal fluff metering auger
• Special design feed pedestal
• Extruder following signal isolator
• Fluff supply hopper with bottom clean-out door;
includes safety switch
• Individual voltmeters
• Horizontal and vertical drive DC motors (SCR) 180 VDC
• Individual speed adjustments on fluff auger and Verti-Blend mixer
• Special mounting flange or throat adapter (extruder
throat and flange drawings required)
• Special cyclone hole in fluff hopper cover (exact
specifications required)
• Cyclone separators
1 Re-feed rate is based on feeding 1 mil, medium slip LDPE film scrap to a die limited
extrusion system. If the system is limited by the extruder, some loss in output rate may
occur when feeding higher percentages of fluff.
159
BLEND AND RECLAIM
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
TE250
Horizontal auger
Power, HP (kW)
Size/dia., in. (mm)
0.5 (0.373)
1.625 (41.3)
Extruder screw
dia., in. (mm)
2.5 (63)
DIMENSIONS
F
AB
C
I
J
D
K
E
L
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
DC
27.75 (70)
26.125 (66)
4 (10)
16 (41)
47.375 (120)
19.375 (49)
8.25 (21)
4.125 (10)
8 (20.3)
6 (15.2)
4 (10.2)
4 (10.2)
TYPICAL TE FLUFF FEED
HOPPER INSTALLATION
Please provide the following information with confirming order
in./mm
Straight core throat
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
G
Drive Type
All dimensions are in inches (centimeters)
REQUIRED CUSTOMER EXTRUDER INFORMATION
Make (Manufacturer)
Model
Serial No.
Screw Dia.
Vertical auger
Power, HP (kW)
Size/dia., in. (mm)
0.5 (0.373)
2.5-1.75 (63.5-44.5)
Virgin
1/2” to 3/4” clearance
L
TYPICAL TE SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Recessed throat
M
E
Tangential throat
detailed print
needed ASAP
A
B
K
C
D F
Includes film grinder, edge trim
venturi blower, and cyclone
N
J
H
G
Extruder throat flange
160
B L E N D
&
R E C L A I M
TFH SERIES FLUFF FEED HOPPERS
B L E N D
&
BLEND AND RECLAIM
R E C L A I M
AEC fluff feed hoppers are designed to feed a percentage of the fluff
directly back into the extruder throat. The unique dual-stage design ensures
that the fluff is mixed with the virgin material above the extruder throat.
Each auger is independently adjustable and can be set to follow the
extruder screw speed by monitoring a tachometer signal from the extruder.
TFH fluff feed hoppers are designed to feed edge trim and roll scrap back
into an extruder at a maximum rate of 30% of the extruder output. The
TFH-HP is designed for those applications where scrap re-feed greater than
30% is common. NOTE: Cannot be used with grooved feed throats
Model TFH 450
STANDARD FEATURES
Model TFH 600-HP
• IR compensation
• Up to 25% maximum re-feed rate1
• Dependable auger metering
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Machine-mount flange
• Special voltage
• Mild steel material contact surfaces
• 90º feed pedestal
• Independently-adjustable vertical mix auger and horizontal fluff
metering auger
• Special design feed pedestal
• Fluff hopper with bottom clean-out door, includes safety switch
• Special mounting flange or throat adapter (extruder
throat and flange drawings required)
• Individual speed adjustments using variable-frequency drives
• Special cyclone hole in fluff hopper cover (exact
specifications required)
• Digital speed potentiometers
• Fluff hopper bridge breaker
• Cyclone separators
• Extruder following signal isolator
• Horizontal and vertical drive NEMA MG-31 AC inverter-duty motors
• Optical level sensor with delay timer for field connection to grinder feed
rolls and alarm device
• Ammeters for each drive motor
• Each auger (horizontal fluff feed and vertical mixing) can be
adjusted independently, using the controls on the front panel.
1 Fluff feedback rate is based on a non-extruder limited line, recycling 1.25 mil medium slip
LDPE film. Extruder speed increase may be required to obtain maximum quoted feed rate.
If extruder is running 100% plasticizing capacity on virgin material, loss in output may occur
during fluff feeding.
161
TFH-HP ADDITIONAL FEATURES
BLEND AND RECLAIM
High performance TFH-HP models are available to handle the toughest film scrap conditions. Yaskawa (Magnetek) flux vector (closed-loop
vector) drive technology and a newly-designed re-feed pedestal combine to offer the very best fluff feeding performance available to the
processor today.
Maximum TFH-HP fluff re-feed rates are based on the ability of the screw design to accept additional fluff vs. standard TFH units. Typical
TFH-HP fluff feed rates exceed 30% of extruder output and rates of 45% have been achieved. Maximum fluff feed percentages will vary
depending on material and equipment.
All TFH-HP Series fluff feed hoppers come standard with these additional features:
• New high performance “Verti-Blend” vertical feed auger incorporates vertical compaction and mixing design to allow the maximum fluff
re-feed percentages possible
• Vertical side access door on pedestal for easier cleaning and maintenance
• Heavy-duty gearbox assemblies
• Heavy-duty fan-cooled brushless VFD-compatible Vector duty motors (AC)
• Yaskawa (Magnetek) variable-frequency Vector drives (VFD) and systems
• Ammeters for each drive motor
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
TFH 350
TFH 450
TFH 600
TFH 800
TFH 1000
TFH 450-HP
TFH 600-HP
TFH 800-HP
TFH 1000-HP
Extruder screw dia.,
in. (mm)
3.5 (89)
4.5 (114
6 (152)
8 (203)
10 (254)
4.5 (114)
6 (152)
8 (203)
10 (254)
AUGER SPECIFICATIONS
Model
TFH 350
TFH 450
TFH 600
TFH 800
TFH 1000
TFH 450-HP
TFH 600-HP
TFH 800-HP
TFH 1000-HP
Fluff hopper capacity, cu.
ft. (l)
2 (56)
3 (84)
4 (113)
4 (113)
4 (113)
3 (84)
4 (113)
4 (113)
4 (113)
Horizontal auger
Power, HP (kW)
Size/dia., in. (mm)
0.75 (0.373)
2 (41)
0.75 (0.559)
3 (76)
2 (1.492)
4 (101)
3 (2.238)
6 (152)
3 (2.238)
6 (152)
2 (1.492)
3 (76)
3 (2.238)
4 (101)
3 (2.238)
6 (152)
5 (3.730)
6 (152)
162
Std. mounting flanges,
in. (mm)
8 (203)
8 (203)
10.5 (266)
14 (355)
16 (406)
8 (203)
10.5 (266)
14 (355)
16 (406)
Drive type
Delta VFD
Delta VFD
Delta VFD
Delta VFD
Delta VFD
AC Flux Vector
AC Flux Vector
AC Flux Vector
AC Flux Vector
Supply
voltage
230/1/60
230/1/60
230/1/60
230/3/60
230/3/60
460/3/60
460/3/60
460/3/60
460/3/60
Vertical auger
Power, HP (kW)
Size/dia., in. (mm)
0.75 (0.559)
2.5 (63)
2 (1.119)
3.5 (88)
2 (1.492)
4.75 (120)
3 (2.238)
5.75 (146)
5 (3.730)
8 (203)
3 (2.238)
3.25 (82)
5 (3.730)
5.25 (133)
5 (5.595)
6.5 (165)
10 (7.460)
8 (203)
B L E N D
&
R E C L A I M
DIMENSIONS
BLEND AND RECLAIM
I
J
K
L
Model
A
B
C
D
TFH 350 32.25 (82) 26.63 (68) 4 (10) 16 (41)
TFH 450 39.88(101) 27.75 (70) 4 (10) 16 (41)
TFH 600 43 (109) 34.5 (88) 4 (10) 22 (56)
TFH 800 46 (117)
43 (109) 4 (10) 30.38 (77)
TFH 1000 45.5 (116) 46 (117) 4 (10) 21.5 (83)
All dimensions are in inches (centimeters)
E
F
G
H
I
56.625 (144) 27.63 (70) 20 (51) 10 (25) 8 (20)
60.625 (154) 28.13 (71) 24 (61) 12 (31) 8 (20)
70.88 (180) 40.63 (103) 30 (76) 15 (38) 10.5 (27)
82.63 (210) 40 (102) 30 (76) 15 (38) 14 (36)
88 (224)
37.5 (95) 30 (76) 15 (38) 16 (41)
J
K
6 (15) 4 (10)
6 (15) 4 (10)
8 (20) 5.25 (13)
12 (30) 7 (18)
14 (36) 8 (20)
TFH-HP
163
B L E N D
&
R E C L A I M
L
4 (10)
4 (10)
6 (15)
8 (20)
10 (25)
BLEND AND RECLAIM
REQUIRED CUSTOMER EXTRUDER INFORMATION
Please provide the following information with confirming order
Make (Manufacturer)
Model
Serial No.
Screw Dia.
in./mm
TYPICAL TE FLUFF FEED
HOPPER INSTALLATION
Strait core throat
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
Virgin
L
Recessed throat
M
E
Tangential throat
detailed print
needed ASAP
A
B
D F
TYPICAL TE SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
N
Includes film grinder, edge trim
venturi blower, and cyclone
K
C
1/2” to 3/4” clearance
J
H
G
Extruder throat flange
164
B L E N D
&
R E C L A I M
NOTES:
BLEND AND RECLAIM
NOTES:
BLEND AND RECLAIM
PSA AIR-COOLED PORTABLE CHILLERS
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
PSA SERIES AIR-COOLED PORTABLE CHILLERS
PS Series air-cooled portable chillers from AEC provide 2 to 30 ton cooling
capacities with very compact footprints. These chillers feature a unique enclosure
design that simplifies service and maintenance and conserves valuable production
floor space. Incorporate these chillers into your planned or existing production
layout easily and effectively.
All PS Series portable chillers have an operating leaving water temperature range
of 35ºF to 65ºF (2ºC to 18ºC). For applications outside this range, consult factory.
See pages 201-202 for flow and pressure considerations and pump curves.
STANDARD FEATURES
PSA 20-30
• Non-ferrous piping
• External fill/drain/sight glass
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Valved Process water connections
• Automatic water makeup valve1
• Low Process water: pressure switch 2-3.5 hp, flow switch 5-30 hp
• Process water sidestream 50µ filter w/ flowmeter1
• NEMA-rated ODP fan motors
• Swivel casters: 2.5” (2-3.5 hp), 4” (5-15 hp), 5” w/lock (optional on 5-15
hp, standard on 20-30 hp)
• Single pump models only: Pressure-actuated Process water
bypass valve for system protection
• General fault indicator, 85 dB @ 2 ft with audible alarm
buzzer and silence button or 100 dB @ 10 ft audible alarm
horn/108,000 peak candle-power, 80 flash/min visual alarm
strobe and silence button. Alarm conditions include high
and low water temperature, low water flow, and high and
low refrigerant pressure1
• Compressor hour meter1
• To Process 2.5” dual scale liquid-filled pressure gauge
• RS232 or RS485 communications
• Fully insulated refrigeration and process piping
• Recirculation pump (not available on 2 and 3.5 hp)
• High and low refrigerant pressure cut-outs
• High pressure fans; provides additional 0.3” WG static
pressure on fan discharge (5-15 hp only), required where
exiting air is exhausted through ductwork
• High-discharge temperature cut-out (2-10 hp models)
• High pressure spring-actuated relief valve
• Crankcase pressure regulating (CPR) valve to prevent
compressor motor overloading, required for process water
leaving temperature of 66ºF to 75º F
• Filter dryer, sight glass, balanced-port thermal expansion valve,
multiple refrigeration access ports
• 304 SS reservoir tank (not available on 2 and 3.5 hp)
• Hot gas bypass capacity control
• Mounting rails and/or mounting feet (not available on 2 and
3.5 hp)
• Hot gas bypass and liquid line shutoff valves (5-30 hp)
• UL-Labeled electrical subpanel
• Scroll compressors (2-30 hp)
• 380/3/50 or 575/3/60 operating voltage2
• Fan/blower cycling switch (5-30 hp)
• Variable-speed fans (low ambient), provides sound
attenuation in ambient temperatures below 95ºF2
(5-15 hp only)
• R-22 refrigerant
• 1 year warranty on compressor and labor
• NEMA-12 control access window2
• 2 year parts warranty, 3 year limited warranty on controller
1 Field-retrofit option
2 Additional lead time
165
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
PSA 2
PSA 3.5
PSA 5
PSA 7.5
PSA 10
PSA 15
PSA 20
PSA 25
PSA 30
Compressor, HP
2
3.5
5
7.5
10
15
2 @ 10
2 @ 13
2 @ 15
Compressor
type
Evaporator
type
Condenser
type
HEAT AND COOL
Reservoir, gallons
Hermetic scroll,
Aluminum
with compressor SS copper- fin/copper tube
staging on 20-30 brazed plate with washable
hp tandems
filters
Discharge air
openings
1 @ 18.5”
1 @ 18.5”
1 @ 27”
1 @ 27”
2 @ 27”
2 @ 27”
25” x 18.5”
25” x 18.5
25” x 18.5
Pumps
6 (polyethylene)
6 (polyethylene)
20 (polyethylene)
20 (polyethylene)
40 (polyethylene)
40 (polyethylene)
80 (polyethylene)
80 (polyethylene)
80 (polyethylene)
1 hp, 304 SS
1 hp, 304 SS
1 hp, 304 SS
1 hp, 304 SS
2 hp, 304 SS
2 hp, 304 SS
5 hp, 304 SS
5 hp, 304 SS
5 hp, 304 SS
Discharge
air, cfm
1475
2350
3400
5100
5800
10000
10200
13300
18150
NOTE: Nominal operating parameters for PSA air-cooled chillers are 50ºF leaving water temperature at 2.4 gpm per ton, with 95ºF ambient air. For 50 Hz applications, multiply
capacity by 0.83. Nominal 60 Hz flow rate must be maintained.
Model
PSA2
PSA3.5
PSA5
PSA 7.5
PSA 10
PSA 15
PSA 20
PSA 25
PSA 30
Nominal cooling cap., tons1
No pump
1.9
3.3
4.8
6.6
9.9
14.5
19.4
23.9
29.2
1 pump
1.7
3.1
4.6
6.4
9.5
14.1
18.4
22.8
28.2
2 pump
n.a.
n.a.
4.5
6.3
9.4
14.0
18.0
22.4
27.8
Process connections, in. NPT
no pump/ 1 pump/
1 pump
2 pump
no tank
no tank
1
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
1
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
1.5/2.0
2.0
1.5
1.5/2.0
1.5/2.0
2.0
1.5
1.5/2.0
1.5/3.0
2.0/3.0
1.5
1.5/2.0
2.0/3.0
2.5/3.0
2.0
2.0/3.0
2.0/3.0
2.5/3.0
2.0
2.0/3.0
2.0/3.0
2.5/3.0
2.0
2.0/3.0
2.0/3.0
2.5/3.0
2.0
2.0/3.0
Water
flow,
gpm2
4.6
7.9
11.1
15.2
22.8
33.9
46.5
57.2
70.2
FLA 1 pump3
Rated
8.0
10.9
14.0
18.2
26.1
33.3
48.3
62.1
74.1
FLA 2 pumps3
Running
Rated
6.9
8.8
11.0
14.6
21.8
27.5
42.0
48.3
64.4
Running
n.a.
n.a.
14.9
19.1
27.8
35.0
51.4
65.2
77.2
n.a.
n.a.
11.9
15.5
23.5
29.2
45.1
51.4
67.5
1 Based on 50ºF (10ºC) chilled water supply temperature and 95ºF (35ºC) ambient air. Optional additional process pump hp (kW) reduces chiller capacity by 0.2 tons per hp
(0.703 kW ref. cap. per 0.746 kW pump power)
2 Based on 2.4 gpm per ton (9.1 lpm per 3.517 kW) nominal 1 pump.
3 FLA at 460/3/60. Multiply 460/3/60 amperage by 2.0 for 208-230/3/60 amperage (0.8 for 575/3/60). An optional oversized process pump adds to the total rated or running chiller
amperage. To find the new total chiller amperage, subtract the standard process pump amperage from the optional pump amperage (see table below) and add it to the rated or
running amperage.
PUMP OPTIONS
Optional Pump
0.75 hp bronze turbine
1 hp SS
1.5 hp SS
2 hp SS
2 hp SS dual stage
3 hp SS
3 hp SS dual stage
5 hp SS
5 hp SS dual stage
7.5 hp bronze
7.5 hp SS
10 hp SS
15 hp SS
FLA @
208-230/1/60
5.4
6.4
7.5
9.6
n.a.
12.7
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
FLA @
460/3/60
1.5
1.8
2.3
3.1
2.7
4.2
4.5
6.2
6.6
9.0
9.8
13.2
19.0
Availability
2 and 3.5 hp models
standard on 2-7.5 hp models
2 and 3.5 hp models
2-15 hp models (standard on 10-15 hp)
5-7.5 hp models
2-15 hp models
5-15 hp models
5-15 hp models
5-15 hp models
20-30 hp models
10-30 hp models
20-30 hp models
166
ELECTRICAL CONTROL FEATURES
• Fully accessible NEMA 12 enclosure
• Non-fused disconnect switch with branch
fusing
• Single-point power and ground wiring
connection
• Off-the-shelf microprocessor-based PID
auto-tuning controller with To Process and
Set Point LED readout
• Low and high process water temperature
electronic cut-out switch with LCD display
• Graphic control panel w/status lights
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
DIMENSIONS: PSA 2 - 7.5
HEAT AND COOL
PSA 2-3.5
PSA 5-7.5
WEIGHTS: PSA 2 - 7.5
Model
PSA 2
PSA 3.5
PSA 5
PSA 7.5
Dry weight, lbs.
387
410
872
922
Ship. weight, lbs.
417
440
1047
1097
Oper. weight, lbs.
437
460
1205
1255
NOTES: Weights are for standard chiller. Some optional features will increase weight.
Operating weight is with a full reservoir tank of water.
167
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
DIMENSIONS: PSA 10-30
HEAT AND COOL
PSA 10-15
PSA 20-30
WEIGHTS: PSA 10-30
Model
PSA 10
PSA 15
PSA 20
PSA 25
PSA 30
Dry weight, lbs.
1305
1388
2305
2348
2610
Ship. weight, lbs.
1570
1653
2605
2648
2910
Oper. weight, lbs.
1637
1720
2971
3014
3276
168
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
PSW WATER-COOLED PORTABLE CHILLERS
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
PSW SERIES WATER-COOLED PORTABLE CHILLERS
PS Series water-cooled portable chillers from AEC provide 2 to 40 ton cooling
See pages 201-202 for flow and pressure considerations and pump curves.
STANDARD FEATURES
PSW 20-30
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Swivel casters: 2.5” (2-3.5 hp), 4” (5-15 hp), 5” w/lock (optional on
5-15 hp, standard on 20-40 hp)
• Single pump models only: Pressure-actuated Process water
bypass valve for system protection
• Recirculation pump (not available on 2 and 3.5 hp)
pressure on fan discharge (5-15, 40 hp), required where
• Hot gas bypass and liquid line shutoff valves (5 to 30 hp)
• 304 SS reservoir tank (std on 40 hp, not available on
2 and 3.5 hp)
• Mounting rails and/or mounting feet (5-15 hp only)
Reciprocating compressors (40 hp)
169
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
Compressor,
HP
PSW 2
PSW 3.5
PSW 5
PSW 7.5
PSW 10
PSW 15
PSW 20
PSW 25
PSW 30
2
3.5
5
7.5
10
15
2 @ 10
2 @ 13
2 @ 15
PSW 40
40
Compressor
type
Evaporator
type
Hermetic scroll,
with compressor SS copperstaging on 20- brazed plate
30 hp tandems
Semi-hermetic
discus with
Shell & tube
cylinder unloading
Condenser
type1
Tube-in tube
Cleanable
shell and tube
HEAT AND COOL
Reservoir, gallons
6 (polyethylene)
6 (polyethylene)
20 (polyethylene)
20 (polyethylene)
40 (polyethylene)
40 (polyethylene)
80 (polyethylene)
80 (polyethylene)
80 (polyethylene)
80 (304 SS)
Condenser water
Water
Nominal pump Tower water2 City water3
conn.,
flow, gpm
flow, gpm in. NPT
1 hp, 304 SS
6.2
4.2
1.0
1 hp, 304 SS
10.5
7.2
1.0
1 hp, 304 SS
15.7
7.9
1.0
1 hp, 304 SS
21.3
10.7
1.0
2 hp, 304 SS
32.2
16.1
1.5
2 hp, 304 SS
47.6
23.8
2.0
5 hp, 304 SS
61.7
31.5
2.0
5 hp, 304 SS
75.9
38.6
2.0
5 hp, 304 SS
93.9
47.6
2.5
7.5 hp, 304 SS
123.0
61.5
3
NOTE: Nominal operating parameters for PSA air-cooled chillers are 50ºF leaving water temperature at 2.4 gpm per ton, with 85ºF tower water. For 50 Hz applications, multiply
1 With cooling water regulating valves; select between tower or city (5-40 hp models)
2 Based on availability of 85º F (29ºC) tower water at 25 psi (172.4 kPa/1.7 bars) minimum
3 Based on availability of 70º F (21ºC) city water at 25 psi (172.4 kPa/1.7 bars) minimum
Model
PSW2
PSW3.5
PSW5
PSW 7.5
PSW 10
PSW 15
PSW 20
PSW 25
PSW 30
PSW 40
No pump
2.1
3.6
5.2
7.1
10.7
15.9
21.0
25.7
31.8
41.0
1 pump
1.9
3.4
5.0
6.9
10.3
15.5
20.0
24.7
30.8
39.5
2 pump
n.a.
n.a.
4.9
6.8
10.2
15.3
19.6
24.3
30.4
39.1
no pump/ 1 pump/
1 pump
2 pump
no tank
no tank
1
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
1
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
1.5/2.0
2.0
1.5
1.5/2.0
1.5/2.0
2.0
1.5
1.5/2.0
1.5/3.0
2.0/3.0
1.5
1.5/2.0
2.0/3.0
2.5/3.0
2.0
2.0/3.0
2.0/3.0
2.5/3.0
2.0
2.0/3.0
2.0/3.0
2.5/3.0
2.0
2.0/3.0
2.0/3.0
2.5/3.0
2.0
2.0/3.0
2.5/3.0
2.5/3.0
2.5
2.5/3.0
Water
flow,
gpm5
5.1
8.6
12.1
16.6
24.8
37.1
50.4
61.7
76.2
98.4
FLA 1 pump6
Rated
12.2
16.4
12.2
16.4
22.5
29.7
43.9
55.9
60.1
81.9
FLA 2 pumps6
Running
Rated
8.3
11.8
8.3
11.8
16.7
21.6
34.7
38.2
45.3
63.1
Running
n.a.
n.a.
13.1
17.3
24.2
31.4
47.0
59.0
63..2
85.0
n.a.
n.a.
9.2
12.7
18.4
23.3
37.8
41.3
48.4
66.2
4 Based on 50ºF (10ºC) chilled water supply temperature and 85ºF (29ºC) tower water. Optional additional process pump hp (kW) reduces chiller capacity by 0.2 tons per hp
amperage. To find the new total chiller amperage, subtract the standard process pump amperage from the optional pump amperage (see table on next page) and add it to the
rated or running amperage.
170
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
PUMP OPTIONS
Optional Pump
1 hp SS
1.5 hp SS
2 hp SS
2 hp SS dual stage
3 hp SS
3 hp SS dual stage
5 hp SS
5 hp SS dual stage
7.5 hp bronze
7.5 hp SS
10 hp SS
15 hp SS
FLA @
208-230/1/60
5.4
6.4
7.5
9.6
n.a.
12.7
n.a
n.a
n.a
n.a
n.a
n.a
n.a
FLA @
460/3/60
1.5
1.8
2.3
3.1
2.7
4.2
4.5
6.2
6.6
9.0
9.8
13.2
19.0
HEAT AND COOL
Availability
2 and 3.5 hp models
2 and 3.5 hp models
5-7.5 hp models
2-15 hp models
5-15 hp models
5-15 hp models
5-15 hp models
20-30 hp models (standard on 40 hp)
10-30 hp models
20-30 hp models
• Non-fused disconnect switch with
branch fusing
• Single-point power and ground
wiring connection
• Off-the-shelf microprocessor-based
PID auto-tuning controller with To
Process and Set Point LED readout
• Low and high process water temperature
electronic cut-out switch with LCD display
171
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
DIMENSIONS: PSW 2-7.5
HEAT AND COOL
PSW 2-3.5
PSW 5-7.5
WEIGHTS: PSW 2-7.5
Model
PSW 2
PSW3.5
PSW 5
PSW 7.5
Dry weight, lbs.
333
362
637
727
Ship. weight, lbs.
363
392
787
877
Oper. weight, lbs.
383
412
970
1060
172
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
DIMENSIONS: PSW 10-30
HEAT AND COOL
PSW 10-15
PSW 20-30
WEIGHTS: PSW 10-30
Model
PSW 10
PSW 15
PSW 20
PSW 25
PSW 30
Dry weight, lbs.
950
1024
1495
1680
1885
Ship. weight, lbs.
1175
1249
1745
1930
2135
Oper. weight, lbs.
1282
1365
2161
2346
2551
173
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
DIMENSIONS: PSW 40
WEIGHTS: PSW 40
Model
PSW 40
Dry weight, lbs.
2680
Ship. weight, lbs.
2930
HEAT AND COOL
Oper. weight, lbs.
3369
174
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
PSR REMOTE AIR-COOLED PORTABLE CHILLERS
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
PS Series remote air-cooled portable chillers from AEC provide 5 to 40 ton cooling
PSR chillers are charged with 25 psi nitrogen for shipping purposes.
Note: Remote condensers are not designed to be used indoors.
STANDARD FEATURES
PSR 20-30
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Mounting rails
• Single pump models only: Pressure-actuated Process water bypass
valve for system protection
• Recirculation pump
pressure on fan discharge (5-15, 40 hp), required where
• 304 SS reservoir tank (std on 40 hp)
• Hot gas bypass and liquid line shutoff valves (5 to 30 hp)
• Mounting rails and/or mounting feet (5-15 hp only)
Reciprocating compressors (40 hp)
• Start-up available: remote condenser units must be installed,
evacuated, and precharged before AEC arrives on-site
175
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
PSR 5
PSR 7.5
PSR 10
PSR 15
PSR 20
PSR 25
PSR 30
PSR 40
Compressor,
HP
5
7.5
10
15
2 @ 10
2 @ 13
2 @ 15
40
Compressor
type
Evaporator
type
Condenser
type
Hermetic scroll,
with compressor SS copperstaging on 20- brazed plate
Aluminum
30 hp tandems
fin/copper tube
(optional)
semi-hermetic
discus w/
shell & tube
cylinder unloading
HEAT AND COOL
Reservoir, gallons
Nominal pump
20 (polyethylene)
20 (polyethylene)
40 (polyethylene)
40 (polyethylene)
80 (polyethylene)
80 (polyethylene)
80 (polyethylene)
1 hp, 304 SS
1 hp, 304 SS
2 hp, 304 SS
2 hp, 304 SS
5 hp, 304 SS
5 hp, 304 SS
5 hp, 304 SS
80 (304 SS)
7.5 hp, 304 SS
Refrigeration connections
Discharge, in.
dia. ODS
Liquid, in. dia.
ODS
1.625
1.125
0.625
0.875
1.125
1.125
1.375
1.375
1.375
0.625
0.625
0.625
0.625
0.875
0.875
0.875
NOTE: Nominal operating parameters for PSA air-cooled chillers are 50ºF leaving water temperature at 2.4 gpm per ton, with 95ºF ambient air. For 50 Hz applications, multiply
Model
PSR5
PSR 7.5
PSR 10
PSR 15
PSR 20
PSR 25
PSR 30
PSR 40
No pump
4.8
6.6
9.9
14.5
19.4
23.8
29.2
36.9
1 pump
4.6
6.4
9.5
14.1
18.4
22.8
28.2
35.4
2 pump
4.5
6.3
9.4
14.0
18.0
27.8
27.8
35.0
no pump/ 1 pump/
1 pump
2 pump
no tank
no tank
1.5
2.0
1.5
1.5/2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
1.5/2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
1.5/2.0
2.0
2.5
2.0
2.0/3.0
2.0/3.0
2.5/3.0
2.0
2.0/3.0
2.0/3.0
2.5/3.0
2.0
2.0/3.0
2.0/3.0
2.5/3.0
2.0
2.0/3.0
2.5/3.0
2.5/3.0
2.5
2.5/3.0
Water
flow,
gpm2
11.1
15.3
22.8
33.9
46.5
57.2
70.2
88.6
FLA 1 pump3
Rated
12.2
16.2
22.5
29.7
43.9
55.9
60.0
81.9
FLA 2 pumps3
Running
Rated
9.2
12.8
18.2
23.9
37.6
42.1
50.4
68.8
Running
13.1
17.3
24.2
31.4
47.0
59.0
63..2
85.0
10.1
13.7
19.9
25.6
40.7
45.2
53.5
58.0
1 Based on 50ºF (10ºC) chilled water supply temperature and 95ºF (35ºC) ambient air. Optional additional process pump hp (kW) reduces chiller capacity by 0.2 tons per hp
amperage. To find the new total chiller amperage, subtract the standard process pump amperage from the optional pump amperage (see table on next page) and add it to the
rated or running amperage.
176
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
PUMP OPTIONS
Optional Pump
1 hp SS
1.5 hp SS
2 hp SS
2 hp SS dual stage
3 hp SS
3 hp SS dual stage
5 hp SS
5 hp SS dual stage
7.5 hp bronze
7.5 hp SS
10 hp SS
15 hp SS
FLA @
208-230/1/60
5.4
6.4
7.5
9.6
n.a.
12.7
n.a
n.a
n.a
n.a
n.a
n.a
n.a
FLA @
460/3/60
1.5
1.8
2.3
3.1
2.7
4.2
4.5
6.2
6.6
9.0
9.8
13.2
19.0
Availability
2 and 3.5 hp models
2 and 3.5 hp models
5-7.5 hp models
2-15 hp models
5-15 hp models
5-15 hp models
5-15 hp models
20-30 hp models (standard on 40 hp)
10-30 hp models
20-30 hp models
DIMENSIONS: PSR 5-7.5
WEIGHTS: PSR 5-7.5
Model
PSR 5
PSR 7.5
Dry weight, lbs.
597
644
HEAT AND COOL
Ship. weight, lbs.
748
794
• Non-fused disconnect switch with
branch fusing
• Single-point power and ground
wiring connection
• Off-the-shelf microprocessor-based
PID auto-tuning controller with To
Process and Set Point LED readout
• Low and high process water
temperature electronic cut-out switch
with LCD display
Oper. weight, lbs.
930
977
177
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
DIMENSIONS: PSR 10-40
HEAT AND COOL
PSR 10-15
PSR 20-40
WEIGHTS: PSR 10-40
Model
PSR 10
PSR 15
PSR 20
PSR 25
PSR 30
PSR 40
Dry weight, lbs.
827
870
1299
1305
1607
2243
Ship. weight, lbs.
1052
1095
1549
1555
1857
2470
Oper. weight, lbs.
1159
1202
1965
1971
2273
2909
178
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
REMOTE CONDENSER ASSEMBLY MODELS
End View
PSR 5 - 10 hp
HEAT AND COOL
Side View
PSR 5 - 7.5 hp
B
Side View
PSR 10 hp
A
A
C
4.5
21.5
38.5
0.875 dia. mtg. holes
A
A
B
42.5
C
20.25
0.875 dia. mtg. holes
Each
Dia., Motor, hp
in.
(phase)
PSR5 26 0.75, 1 ph
PSR7.5 26 0.75, 1 ph
PSR10 26 0.33, 3 ph
PSR15 30 1.5, 3 ph
PSR20 30 1.5, 3 ph
PSR25 30 1.5, 3 ph
PSR30 30 1.5, 3 ph
PSR40 30 1.5, 3 ph
Model
Side View
PSR 40 hp
Side View
PSR 15 - 30 hp
End View
PSR 15 - 40 hp
38.5
D
D
114
D
114
D
169
Remote condenser overall
Refrigeration2
dimensions, in.
Totals
Connections
Charge
Amps,
Air flow, Net wt., Length Width Height Mtg. Discharge, Liquid
R-22 lbs.
Fans
460 V
cfm
lbs.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
ODS, in. ODS, in.
2.4
1
6450
390
49.8
43.0
40.5 40.0
1.125
0.875
9.0
2.4
1
6450
390
49.8
43.0
40.5 40.0
1.125
0.875
9.0
3.7
2
12400
520
69.8
43.0
40.5 60.0 (2) 1.125 (2) 0.875
9.5
5.9
2
23000
790
125.0 45.5
50.0 108.0
1.375
1.375
8.0
5.9
2
23000
800
125.0 45.5
50.0 108.0
1.375
1.375
8.0
5.9
2
21900
860
125.0 45.5
50.0 108.0
1.625
1.625
12.0
5.9
2
20700
950
125.0 45.5
50.0 108.0
1.625
1.625
15.0
9.4
3
32900
1,300
180.0 45.5
50.0 163.0
2.125
2.125
19.0
Fans1
1 All motors are 1140 rpm. All first fan motors (header side) are 0.75 hp single phase variable speed.
2 Refrigeration charge is for remote condenser only.
179
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
HEAT AND COOL
PS SERIES PRESSURE CONSIDERATIONS
MIN. AND MAX. FLOW RATES
PS 2
Pressure drop ∆P
psig
kPa
3.5
24.1
7.0
48.3
11.5
79.3
18.0
124.1
Flow
gpm
lpm
4.06
15.4
6.01
22.8
8.02
30.4
10.00 37.9
Flow
gpm
lpm
22.0
83.3
30.0 113.6
38.0 143.8
46.0 174.1
50.0 189.3
Flow
gpm
lpm
72.0 272.5
75.0 283.9
80.0 302.8
85.0 321.7
PS 10
Pressure drop ∆P
psig
kPa
4.7
32.6
8.28
57.1
12.91
89.0
16.77
115.6
20.00
137.9
PS 30
Pressure drop ∆P
psig
kPa
6.0
41.1
6.5
44.8
8.0
55.2
9.5
65.5
Flow
gpm lpm
8.03 30.4
10.00 37.9
12.00 45.4
14.00 53.0
16.0 60.6
Flow
gpm lpm
30.0 113.6
40.0 151.4
50.0 189.3
60.0 227.1
70.0 264.9
Flow
gpm lpm
44.7 169.2
58.5 221.4
70.9 268.3
81.6 308.8
105.7 400.0
FLOW AND PRESSURE CONSIDERATIONS
Model
PSA2
PSA3.5
PSA/R5
PSA/R7.5
PSA/R10
PSA/R15
PSA/R20
PSA/R25
PSA/R30
PSR40
PSW2
PSW3.5
PSW5
PSW7.5
PSW10
PSW15
PSW20
PSW25
PSW30
PSW40
Design flow
gpm
4.6
7.9
11.6
15.7
23.8
34.9
46.5
57.2
70.2
88.6
5.1
8.6
12.6
17.0
25.7
38.1
50.4
61.7
76.2
98.4
lpm
17.5
29.9
43.8
59.6
90.1
132.1
175.9
216.4
265.6
335.4
19.1
32.7
47.7
64.5
97.4
144.1
190.8
233.7
288.5
372.4
Design ∆ P
psig
4.4
4.9
2.0
2.8
5.1
6.1
7.1
8.1
10.5
8.2
5.7
6.0
2.3
3.1
6.3
7.0
8.8
9.0
10.8
8.2
kPa
30.4
33.7
13.7
19.0
35.2
41.8
49.0
55.9
72.4
56.5
39.1
41.2
16.00
21.4
43.3
48.1
60.3
62.1
74.1
56.5
PS 3.5
Pressure drop ∆P
psig
kPa
4.0
27.6
6.5
44.8
10.0
69.
13.0
89.6
18.0
124.1
PS 15
Pressure drop ∆P
psig
kPa
4.5
31.3
7.5
51.7
12.4
85.2
17.8
122.8
24.2
166.6
PS 40
Pressure drop ∆P
psig
kPa
2.0
13.8
3.4
23.4
4.9
33.8
6.3
43.5
10.3
71.0
Standard pump
power
hp
kW
1
0.746
1
0.746
1
0.746
1
0.746
2
1.492
2
1.492
5
3.73
5
3.73
5
3.73
7.5
5.59
1
0.746
1
0.746
1
0.746
1
0.746
2
1.492
2
1.492
5
3.73
5
3.73
5
3.73
7.5
5.59
Flow
gpm lpm
10.0 37.9
12.0 45.4
18.0 68.1
24.0 90.8
PS 5
Pressure drop ∆P
psig
kPa
1.5
10.5
2.2
14.8
4.7
32.1
7.3
50.2
Flow
gpm lpm
40.0 151.4
45.0 170.3
50.0 189.3
52.0 196.8
55.0 208.2
PS 20
Pressure drop ∆P
psig
kPa
4.0
27.6
4.0
27.6
5.0
34.5
6.0
41.4
6.5
44.8
Flow
gpm
lpm
55.0 208.2
58.0 219.5
61.0 230.9
70.0 264.9
RECIRCULATION PUMP SPECS
To process pressure
psi
34.1
33.0
34.9
32.7
43.4
38.0
54.0
52.0
47.5
55.0
32.9
31.7
34.3
32.0
41.4
35.5
52.0
49.0
43.0
55.0
PS 7.5
Pressure drop ∆P
psig
kPa
2.3
16.1
2.9
20.1
5.0
34.5
6.9
47.4
9.6
65.9
12.7
87.8
PS 25
Pressure drop ∆P
psig
kPa
5.5
37.9
5.8
40.0
6.0
41.4
8.5
58.6
Flow
gpm
lpm
12.0
45.4
16.0
60.6
20.0
75.7
24.0
90.8
28.0 106.0
33.0 124.9
kPa
235.3
227.5
240.8
225.7
299.0
262.1
372.3
358.5
327.5
379.2
226.6
218.5
236.2
220.3
285.3
244.4
358.5
337.9
296.5
379.2
180
bars
2.4
2.3
2.4
2.3
3.0
2.6
3.7
3.6
3.3
3.8
2.3
2.2
2.4
2.2
2.9
2.4
3.6
3.4
3.0
3.8
Model
PS5
PS7.5
PS10
PS15
PS20
PS 25
PS 30
PS 40
Recirc. power
hp
kW
0.75 0.373
0.75 0.373
0.75 0.595
0.75 0.595
2.0
1.492
2.0
1.492
2.0
1.492
3.0
2.238
Flow rate ∆ pressure
gpm lpm psi kPa
13.0 49.2 2.3 16.0
17.0 64.3 3.1 21.4
26.0 98.4 6.3 43.3
38.0 143.8 7.0 48.0
50.0 189.2 8.8 60.3
63.0 238.4 9.0 62.0
76.0 287.6 10.8 74.1
98.0 370.9 8.2 56.5
NOTES: Pressure drop values are valid for single-pump
and no-pump PS Series portable chillers.
Subtract chiller ∆P from pump curve pressure for actual
To Process pressure.
Recirculation pump is required for flow rate values
exceeding maximums.
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
PS SERIES PUMP CURVES: 60 HZ
HEAT AND COOL
Important! Pump pressure must be corrected for pressure at chiller ‘To Process’ connection.
181
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
PS SERIES PUMP CURVES: 50 HZ
HEAT AND COOL
Important! Pump pressure must be corrected for pressure at chiller ‘To Process’ connection.
182
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
PCA AIR-COOLED PORTABLE CHILLERS
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
PCA SERIES AIR-COOLED PORTABLE CHILLERS
PCA Series air-cooled portable chillers by AEC are specially engineered for
small, demanding industrial applications. Each self-contained unit is
designed for immediate hook-up and is ready to supply clean, cooling water
at constant temperatures. A wide range of economical options are available
to meet or exceed the demands of almost any application.
The off-the-shelf microprocessor-based PID auto-tuning controller features
To Process and Set Point LED readout.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Hermetic reciprocating compressor
PCA Portable Chiller
• Tube-in-tube evaporator
• Aluminum fin/copper tube condenser
• Six gallon polyethylene reservoir w/external fill/drain sight glass
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Non-ferrous piping, fully insulated refrigeration and process piping
• Regenerative turbine, horizontally-mounted non-ferrous, pump
• Fully-accessible NEMA 1-style electrical control enclosure, single-point
power and ground connection
• Structural steel frame and panels with 2” (51 mm) swivel casters
• Pressure-actuated process water bypass valve for system protection only
• To Process 2.5” -dia. dual scale liquid-filled water pressure gauge
• Patented fixed orifice-plate bypass
• 1 year compressor and labor warranty; 2 years on parts; 3 year limited
warranty on controller
• Filter dryer
• HFC-134A refrigerant for PCA-050 and PCA-100 models; HCFC-22
refrigerant for PCA-150 models
• Cast iron, 1/3 hp centrifugal pump (does not maintain
non-ferrous construction integrity)
• Bronze pump (BZ050, BZ100, BZ150 A, B, or C)
• Crankcase pressure regulating (CPR) valve (required
for a chilled water supply temperature range of 66º F
to 75º F; CPR valve prevents compressor motor
overloading
• Graphic display package: pump on, compressor on,
low refrigerant pressure, high refrigerant pressure, hot
gas bypass
• High temperature audible/visual alarm: 85 dB @ 2 ft
audible alarm buzzer/108,000 peak candlepower, 80
flash/min. visual strobe and silence button
• Power cord (without plug)
• Process piping brass 20 mesh strainer, shipped loose
• High and low refrigerant pressure cut-outs, and hot gas bypass
capacity control
• Sight glass guard
• External communications
• High-pressure spring-actuated pressure relief valve, and thermal
expansion valve
• IEG-1 inhibited ethylene glycol
• Sight glass
• Four-year additional compressor warranty
• Multiple refrigeration access ports
183
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
Comp., Standard
HP (kW)
pump
Nominal
Capacity @
Capacity @
chilled
65ºF (18ºC)
50ºF (10ºC)
water,
LWT, 75ºF
LWT, 90ºF
gpm
(24ºC) ambient (32ºC) ambient
(lpm)
BTUH (watts) BTUH (watts)
1.5 gpm @
0.5
24 psig
PCA 050
1.2 (4.5)
(0.373) (4.5 lpm @
207 kPa)
2.4 gpm @
1
34 psig
PCA 100
2.4 (9.0)
(0.746) (9.0 lpm @
234 kPa)
3.6 gpm @
1.5
24 psig
PCA 150
3.6 (13.6)
(1.12) (13.6 lpm @
07 kPa)
Front View
Oper. Ship.
Process
FLA:
weight, weight,
Refrigerant connection,
208lbs.
lbs.
in. NPT
230/1/60
(kg)
(kg)
8100 (2374)
4800 (1407)
HFC 134A
0.75
10A
265
(121)
275
(125)
14000 (4103)
9550 (2800)
HFC 134A
0.75
13A
325
(148)
335
(153)
25400 (7444)
16000 (4690)
HCFC-22
0.75
19A
345
(157)
355
(162)
Right Side View
HEAT AND COOL
Rear View
184
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
WATER CIRCUIT PRESSURE DROP TABLE
Model
PCA-050
PCA-100
PCA-150
gpm
2.0
2.4
3.6
4.8
2.0
2.4
3.6
4.8
2.0
2.4
3.6
4.8
lpm
7.5
9.0
13.6
18.1
7.5
9.0
13.6
18.1
7.5
9.0
13.6
18.1
HEAT AND COOL
∆P (psig)
2.5
4.0
7.5
12.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
5.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.5
∆P (kPa)
17.3
27.6
51.8
86.2
17.3
17.3
20.7
34.5
17.3
17.3
20.7
24.2
∆P (bars)
0.17
0.28
0.52
0.86
0.17
0.17
0.21
0.35
0.17
0.17
0.21
0.24
CAST IRON CENTRIFUGAL PUMP CURVE
Do not extrapolate pump curves.
185
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
PCA 050 PUMP CURVES
HEAT AND COOL
PCA 100 PUMP CURVES
PCA 150 PUMP CURVES
Do not extrapolate pump curves.
186
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
R SERIES WATER-COOLED CENTRAL CHILLERS
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
R SERIES WATER-COOLED CENTRAL CHILLERS
The R Series uses hermetically sealed scroll compressors from 30 to 100 tons,
and semi-hermetically sealed screw compressors from 60 tons to 195 tons. All
scroll compressors and screw compressors up to 75 tons are matched up with
stainless steel brazed plate evaporators, and screw compressors from 90 to 195
tons with shell and tube evaporators. All of the scroll compressors use R-22
refrigerant while all of the screw compressors use R-134a refrigerant. The scroll
compressor chillers can be configured with an integral pump tank or stand alone.
All R Series central chilling stations have an operating leaving water temperature
range of 30ºF to 65ºF and have 2 independent refrigeration circuits.
STANDARD FEATURES
RS Screw Chiller
• High-efficiency scroll compressors (30-100 tons) or screw compressors
(60-195 tons)
• Allen-Bradley Micrologix 1500 PLC control with PanelView 300 Micro
monochrome/key pad interface
• Stainless steel brazed plate evaporator (shell & tube on 90-195 ton
screw compressor models)
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Advanced control package includes AB SLC 5/04 PLC
with PanelView 1000 color touch-screen, control of up
to 2 additional circuits, cooling tower system, water
treatment system, and DH+ communication capabilities
• Cleanable shell and tube condensers
• Two-way water regulating valve (scroll chillers)
• Electronic expansion valves (screw chillers)
• General fault audible/visual alarm with elevated light
stack
• NEMA 12 electrical enclosure
• U.L. Listed electrical subpanel (screw chillers only)
• UL listed electrical subpanel
• Non-fused disconnect, 460/3/60 or 208-230/3/60
• High and low refrigerant pressure safeties
• Touch-safe branch circuit fusing
• Evaporator water piping manifold (condenser manifold optional)
• EER BTUH/W average of 15.2 on scroll chillers; 15.7 on screw chillers
• HCFC-22 refrigerant (scroll); HFC-134a refrigerant (screw)
• Digital low temperature freezestat
• Special voltages, 208-230/3/60, 575/3/60, 380/3/50,
or 415/3/50 (derate capacity by multiplying by 0.83
for 50 Hz operation)
• Condenser manifold
• IEG-1 inhibited ethylene glycol; 55 gallons, P/N
A0539637
• Startup (remote condenser units including all piping
and electrical hookups, must be installed, evacuated,
and precharged before AEC arrives on site)
• Liquid line shut-off valves (scroll chillers also feature solenoids)
• Chilled water flow switches
• Auto/Manual control mode switch for emergency operation (scroll chillers)
• 1 year warranty on parts and labor
• 3 year warranty on controller
187
• 4-year additional compressor warranty
• Shell and tube evaporators on scroll compressor models
R SERIES WATER-COOLED CENTRAL CHILERS
SPECIFICATIONS: RC SERIES SCROLL CHILLERS
Model
RCW 30
RCW 40
RCW 50
RCW 60
RCW 70
RCW 80
RCW 90
RCW 100
HEAT AND COOL
Amp Draw, 460/3/60
Nominal flow, gpm
Cooling
Condenser conn. Evaporator
No. of
Capacity
EER,
1 per
2 per
capacity, tons
(no manifold) manifold conn.
RLA
MCA
compressors
stages, qty. BTUH/W
Evaporator Condensers
(50º LWT)
flange conn., in. victaulic, in.
compressor chiller unit
2
31.3
2
15.6
28
62
78
97
(2) 2
3
2
42.2
2
15.2
34
76
99
124
(2) 2
3
2
50.2
2
15.4
43
97
120
151
(2) 2
3
4
64.8
4
15.7
27
113
156
194
(2) 2.5
3
4
73.2
4
15.1
27/34
129
175
219
(2) 2.5
3
4
81.5
4
14.7
34
143
196
244
(2) 2.5
3
4
90.4
4
15.0
34/43
164
217
271
2.5/3
4
4
99.3
4
15.2
43
183
238
298
(2) 3
4
Model
RCW 30
RCW 40
RCW 50
RCW 60
RCW 70
RCW 80
RCW 90
RCW 100
Height, in.
85
85
85
85
75
75
75
75
1 RLA = running load amps 2 MCA = minimum circuit amps
Width, in.
66
94
94
94
94
94
115
115
Depth, in.
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
Ship. weight, lbs.
1520
1900
2120
2700
3000
3300
3580
3880
Max. operating weight, lbs.
1610
2010
2260
2870
3200
3520
3830
4160
SPECIFICATIONS: RS SERIES SCREW CHILLERS
Model
RSW 60
RSW 75
RSW 90
RSW 100
RSW 115
RSW 145
RSW 165
RSW 195
Amp Draw, 460/3/60
Nominal flow, gpm
Cooling
Condenser conn. Evaporator
No. of
Capacity
EER,
capacity, tons
(no manifold) manifold conn.
RLA1 per MCA2 per
compressors
stages, qty. BTUH/W
Evaporator Condensers
(50º LWT)
flange conn., in. victaulic, in.
compressor chiller unit
2
60.3
15.2
58
133
145
181
2.5
3
2
74.8
15.1
66
151
180
225
2.5
3
2
88.5
14.5
79
180
213
266
3
4
2
104.3
15.6
98
223
245
307
3
4
Infinite
unloading
2
116.2
15.3
124
281
279
349
3
4
2
146.3
16.1
144
326
350
438
4
6
2
166.2
16.0
155
351
399
499
4
6
2
192.8
16.2
182
412
463
579
4
6
Model
RSW 60
RSW 75
RSW 90
RSW 100
RSW 115
RSW 145
RSW 165
RSW 195
Height, in.
85
85
74
74
77
81
81
81
Width, in.
100
100
115
115
124
137
137
137
Depth, in.
45
45
72
72
72
75
75
75
188
Ship. weight, lbs.
3266
3512
4336
4982
5298
8844
9376
9580
3468
3754
4594
5246
5584
9428
10102
10364
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
RTCW SERIES WATER-COOLED CENTRAL CHILLERS
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
RTCW Series water-cooled central chillers from AEC feature a magneticbearing design that eliminates the frictional energy and oil issues related to
conventional compressor design. The result is increased energy efficiency,
the elimination of oil and considerably less noise and vibration. The RTCW
chillers also feature a compact design (35” wide) that reduces installation
time and costs as well as saving valuable floor space. Environmentallyfriendly R-134a refrigerant provides zero ODP (ozone depletion potential)
and a touch-screen control center provides detailed diagnostic and
performance information.
RTCW Series
STANDARD FEATURES
• Danfoss/Turbocor semi hermetic centrifugal compressors on all
RTCW models. Dual independent refrigerant circuit design from
120 to 190 tons
• Eliminate oil lubrication issues with frictionless bearing design
• Frictionless bearing design with EER of 20+ at full load and EER
at 42+ at 50% capacity represents an energy savings of 35%+
plus over rotary screw designs
• Variable speed drives for each compressor for infinite unloading
down to 10%
• Whisper quiet sound levels as low as 77 dBA (ARI standard 575)
• All cooling ratings are ARI certified with ETL & ETLc electrical
certification. Disconnect switch is standard
• Microprocessor controller with positive freeze protection and
optimal control of multiple process parameters allow the chiller
to run at less than optimal plant conditions without shutdown
• Touch-screen PLC with pictorial graphics. Building automation
communication optional
• Refrigeration circuits have liquid line isolation shut-off valves,
electronic expansion valve for improved partial load performance,
and replaceable core filter dryers
• Direct-expansion shell and tube evaporator with 3/4” insulation
• Shell & tube condenser with two independent refrigeration circuits
(1) -Year warranty parts and labor
189
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Modbus communication card
• BACnet MS/TP
• BACnet IP
• BACnet Ethernet
• LonWorks® (FTT-10A)
TYPICAL PAYBACK
HEAT AND COOL
Typical payback at 10¢/kW cost for 24/7 operation at 90% plant utilization.
Energy savings for a 150 ton chiller vs. a non-frictionless design = 28 kW or $2.80 per hour, $23,520 per year.
Local energy rebates may be applicable for further savings.
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
Dimensions and Specifications
Cooling capacity - tons
Chilled water flow - gpm
Condenser flow, 85ºF entering
Energy rating - 100% loaded EER1
Compressors
tons
MCA circuit size amps; 460/3/60
height
Dimensions (in.)
width
length
Operating weight (lbs.)
120
140
120
288
360
22.1
31.3
42.3
60/60
114.1
140
336
420
21.2
30.1
45.9
70/70
134.2
6950
135
7050
RTCW-xxx (R-134a)
150
150
360
450
21.6
30.5
49.1
75/75
140
78
35
7700
170
190
170
408
510
20.4
28.6
47.6
85/85
163
190
456
570
19.8
27.7
45.9
90/90
177.2
170
7850
7950
1 EER = btu/watt
Note: Capacity estimates based on 60ºF return from process, 50ºF chilled water supply temperature, and 85ºF entering cooling tower water. Consult factory for requirements below 40ºF.
Metric conversions
1
2
3
4
5
To calculate cooling capacity in Kcal/hr - multiply tons x 3.024
For flow liters per min (lpm) - multiply gpm x 3.785
For dimensions (cm) - multiply inches x 2.54
For weight (lbs.) - multiply lbs. x 0.454
For power (kW) - multiply hp x 0.746
190
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
R SERIES AIR-COOLED CENTRAL CHILLERS
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
R SERIES REMOTE AIR-COOLED CENTRAL CHILLERS
The R Series uses hermetically sealed scroll compressors from 30 to 100 tons,
and semi-hermetically sealed screw compressors from 60 tons to 195 tons. All
scroll compressors and screw compressors up to 75 tons are matched up with
stainless steel brazed plate evaporators, and screw compressors from 90 to 195
tons with shell and tube evaporators. All of the scroll compressors use R-22
refrigerant while all of the screw compressors use R-134a refrigerant. The scroll
compressor chillers can be configured with an integral pump tank or stand alone.
All R Series central chilling stations have an operating leaving water temperature
range of 30ºF to 65ºF and have 2 independent refrigeration circuits.
STANDARD FEATURES
RC Scroll Chiller
• High-efficiency scroll compressors (30-100 tons) or screw compressors
(60-195 tons)
• Allen-Bradley Micrologix 1500 PLC control with PanelView 300 Micro
monochrome/key pad interface
• Stainless steel brazed plate evaporator (shell & tube on 90-195 ton
screw compressor models)
• 2 remote single circuit condensers with 1.5 hp variable speed lead fans
and fan cycling
• Electronic expansion valves (screw chillers)
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Advanced control package includes AB SLC 5/04 PLC
with PanelView 1000 color touch-screen, control of up
to 2 additional circuits, cooling tower system, water
treatment system, and DH+ communication capabilities
• General fault audible/visual alarm with elevated light
stack
• U.L. Listed electrical subpanel (screw chillers only)
• High and low refrigerant pressure safeties
• Non-fused disconnect, 460/3/60 or 208-230/3/60
• Touch-safe branch circuit fusing
• Evaporator water piping manifold (condenser manifold optional)
• EER BTUH/W average of 15.2 on scroll chillers; 15.7 on screw chillers
• HCFC-22 refrigerant (scroll); HFC-134a refrigerant (screw)
• Special voltages, 208-230/3/60, 575/3/60, 380/3/50,
or 415/3/50 (derate capacity by multiplying by 0.83
for 50 Hz operation)
• Condenser manifold
• IEG-1 inhibited ethylene glycol; 55 gallons, P/N
A0539637
• Digital low temperature freezestat
• Chilled water flow switches
• Startup (remote condenser units including all piping
and electrical hookups, must be installed, evacuated,
and precharged before AEC arrives on site)
• Shell and tube evaporators on scroll compressor models
• Liquid line shut-off valves (scroll chillers also feature solenoids)
• Auto/Manual control mode switch for emergency operation (scroll chillers)
191
• 4-year additional compressor warranty
R SERIES AIR-COOLED CENTRAL CHILLERS
SPECIFICATIONS: RC SERIES SCROLL CHILLERS
Model
RCR 30
RCR 40
RCR 50
RCR 60
RCR 70
RCR 80
RCR 90
RCR 100
HEAT AND COOL
Amp Draw, 460/3/60
Cooling
Capacity
No. of
Evaporator
Nominal
No. of
EER,
2
capacity, tons stages,
MCA per RLA1 per RLA1 per MCA2 per fans per manifold conn. water flow,
compressors
BTUH/W
(50º LWT)
qty.
gpm
chiller unit condenser compressor condenser condenser victaulic, in.
28
8
2
29.0
2
12.1
62
7
2
3
72
34
8
2
39.0
2
12.1
76
7
2
3
92
43
8
2
46.3
2
12.3
97
7
2
3
111
27
8
4
59.7
4
12.2
113
7
2
3
143
27/34
8/12
4
67.5
4
11.9
129
7/10.5
2/3
3
162
34
12
4
75.3
4
11.6
143
10.5/14
3
3
181
34/43
12/15
4
83.5
4
11.9
164
10.5/14
3/4
4
200
43
15
4
91.7
4
12.1
183
14
4
4
220
Height, in.
Chiller
Cond.
85
50
85
50
85
50
85
50
75
50
75
50
75
50
75
50
Model
RCR 30
RCR 40
RCR 50
RCR 60
RCR 70
RCR 80
RCR 90
RCR 100
Width, in.
Chiller
Cond.
60
45.5
83
45.5
83
45.5
83
45.5
86
45.5
86
45.5
86
45.5
86
45.5
Depth, in.
Chiller Cond.
45
127
45
127
45
127
45
127
45
127/180
45
180
45
180/233
45
233
Ship. weight, lbs.
Chiller
Cond.
1340
730
1530
730
1730
730
2120
880
2360
880/1210
2600
1210
2870
1210/1580
3170
1580
Chiller
Cond.
1350
790
1550
805
1760
885
2150
1110
2400
110/1435
2640
1435
2910
1435/1825
3220
1825
SPECIFICATIONS: RS SERIES SCREW CHILLERS
Model
RSR 60
RSR 75
RSR 90
RSR 100
RSR 115
RSR 145
RSR 165
RSR 195
Amp Draw, 460/3/60
Cooling
Capacity
No. of
Evaporator
Nominal
No. of
EER,
2
1 per
1 per
2 per
capacity, tons stages,
fans per manifold conn. water flow,
MCA
per
RLA
RLA
MCA
compressors
BTUH/W
(50º LWT)
qty.
gpm
chiller unit condenser compressor condenser condenser victaulic, in.
Model
RSR 60
RSR 75
RSR 90
RSR 100
RSR 115
RSR 145
RSR 165
RSR 195
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
53.8
66.8
77.3
92.5
103.5
130.8
148.3
173.8
Height, in.
Chiller
Cond.
75
50
75
50
74
50
74
50
77
50
81
50
81
50
81
50
Infinite
unloading
11.7
11.8
11.1
11.9
11.8
12.3
12.3
12.3
Width, in.
Chiller
Cond.
100
45.5
100
45.5
115
45.5
115
45.5
124
45.5
137
45.5
137
45.5
137
88
133
151
180
223
281
326
351
412
7
10.5
10.5
14
14
17.5
17.5
28
Depth, in.
Chiller Cond.
45
127
45
180
72
180
72
233
72
233
75
286
75
286
75
233
192
58
66
79
98
124
144
155
182
8
12
12
15
15
19
19
29
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
8
3
3
4
4
4
6
6
6
Ship. weight, lbs.
Chiller
Cond.
2574
1190
2676
1210
3456
1580
3532
1620
4156
1760
7528
2380
7554
2480
7698
3230
129
161
190
219
250
313
356
418
Chiller
Cond.
2600
1215
2710
1240
3498
1650
3580
1660
4212
1800
7788
2435
7814
2540
8016
3300
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
CGAF, RTAA AND RTAC AIR-COOLED CENTRAL CHILLERS
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
The CGAF, RTAA and RTAC Series air-cooled central chillers from AEC provide
19-434 ton chilling capacities. The CGAF Series feature multiple scroll hermetic
compressors with a standard operating temperature of 40º to 50ºF. Dual screw
compressors with dual refrigerant circuits are standard on all RTAA & RTAC
models with a standard operating range of 20 to 65ºF.
STANDARD FEATURES
• All cooling ratings are ARI certified with UL & CUL electrical certification
• Microprocessor Adaptive® controller with positive freeze protection and
optimal control of multiple process parameters allow the chiller to run
at less than optimal plant conditions without shutdown. Clear
language display
• Multiple scroll hermetic compressors on all CGAF models. Single
refrigerant circuit design to 30 hp and dual circuits for 40 hp and larger.
Standard operating temperature of 40 to 50ºF. Other 10ºF ranges
available from 20 to 60ºF
• Dual Screw compressors with dual refrigerant circuits on all RTAA &
RTAC models with infinite staging capacity down to 15% or less.
Compressor reliability 99.5%. Standard operating range of 20 to 65ºF
• Neoprene isolators, flow switch & transformer included
• Low ambient controls for CGAF & RTAC models down to -0ºF (-18ºC).
RTAA Series include fan cycling controls down to -10ºF (-23ºC). For
lower ambient temperatures, use a Winter Kooler. Standard ambient
operation to 115ºF
• Refrigeration circuits have liquid line isolation shut-off valves, electronic
expansion valve for improved partial load performance, and replaceable
core filter dryers
• Direct-expansion shell and tube evaporator with 3” insulation. Ambient
controlled heaters on evaporators down to –20ºF (-29ºC)
• Aluminum fin copper tube coil condenser design with direct drives 3phase condenser fans
• One (1) year warranty parts and labor
• Factory startup is included
193
RTAA Series Central Chiller
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Remote evaporator for non antifreeze brine operation
from 42º to 65ºF
• Hot gas bypass
• Disconnect switch; through-the-door design
• Low temp evaporator, below 40º
• Low ambient deduct if winter koolers are used in the
system configuration
• Generic communication for remote setpoint
• Louvered panels
• Compressor parts warranty-5 years total
HEAT AND COOL
SPECIFICATIONS: CGAF SERIES (R-22 REFRIGERANT), SCROLL COMPRESSOR(S) CHILLERS
Model
Cooling capacity (tons)
Chilled water flow (gpm)
EER (Btu/watt)
Quantity
Energy rating
HP
Steps
Coil, Quantity
Condensers
Fan, 1 HP
Height
Dimensions (in.)
Width
Length
CGAF-20
18.9
55
10.5
2
10
1
2
44
62.5
60
2091
CGAF-25
25.1
73
10.6
2
10/15
2
2
3
56
73
CGAF-30
29.6
86
10.9
2
15
CGAF-40
36.6
105
10.3
4
10
2
4
65
2
4
82
3319
3553
88
2277
78
78
CGAF-50
45.9
132
10.5
2 ea.
10/15
4
2
6
98
CGAF-60
59.8
172
10.4
4
15
2
6
120
113
4193
5546
SPECIFICATIONS: RTAA SERIES (R-22 REFRIGERANT), SCREW COMPRESSOR(S) CHILLERS
Model
Energy rating
EER (Btu/watt)
Compressors-2
HP
Height
Dimensions (in.)
Width
Length
RTAA-70
71.9
207
10.5
35
133
RTAA-80
82.7
238
10.4
40
160
7332
7356
RTAA-90
10.9
40/50
190
194.5
SPECIFICATIONS: RTAC SERIES (R-134a REFRIGERANT)
Model
Energy rating
EER (Btu/watt)
Compressors-2 HP
Height
Dimensions (in.) Width
Length
RTAC-140
150.6
434
10.2
70
288
RTAC-155
163
447
10.1
70/85
160
10,950
196
11,240
RTAC-170
180.9
522
10.2
85/85
341
75.5
88.2
11,350
75.5
88.2
RTAA-100
104.5
301
10.3
50
214
RTAA-110
112.7
325
10.5
50/60
235
7751
8769
7525
RTAC-200
212
581
9.9
60
412
RTAC-225
234
641
9.9
120/100
454
232
13,607
14,600
194
RTAC-250
258.8
751
9.9
120/120
489
269
14,800
RTAA-125
125.1
361
10.4
60
253
221.5
8742
RTAC-300 RTAC-350 RTAC-400
323
368
434
885
1004
1089
9.9
9.9
9.9
3-100
120(2)/100
100(4)
597
674
782
93
96
89
434
470
19,800
21,700
25,900
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
PINNACLE SERIES CENTRAL CHILLING SYSTEM
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
The new and improved Pinnacle™ Series Central Chilling Stations provide
simply the best central chiller on the market today from 30 through 100
tons. Complete with scroll compressors, PLC microprocessor and touchscreen control, stainless steel tank and brazed plate evaporators.
Independent refrigerant circuits allow routine maintenance without costly
downtime, and compressor staging provides energy saving capacity
control.
Pinnacle Series
STANDARD FEATURES
• Scroll Compressors: The latest in rotational compression technology, hermetically
sealed scroll compressors use 50% fewer moving parts than reciprocating
compressors resulting in unparalleled efficiency, reliability and noise reduction.
• Interior Stainless Steel Reservoir (Dual Well): 100% non-ferrous stainless steel
tank eliminates the need for routine tank maintenance. 1/2" tank insulation (other
sizes available, please consult factory)
• Generously Sized Process and Recirculation Pumps: Optional dedicated standby
pumps allow longer life (with automatic motor cycling) and reduced downtime
due to pump maintenance and repair. Check valves allow automatic switchover
(manual closing not required)
• Full Size Lug Style Butterfly Valves: Allows complete servicing of one circuit
while other(s) remain online
• Automatic Water Makeup Valve With Baffle: Automatically adds water to the
system to maintain desired level
• Welded Steel Frame: One-piece construction is perimeter welded to minimize
vibrations and includes convenient fork lift slots for easy maneuvering
• Brazed Plate Evaporators: Very compact and efficient stainless steel units
• Cleanable Shell and Tube Condensers: With the epoxy-coated heads easily
accessible from the front of the unit, scale and fouling buildup can be removed
quickly and easily
• Water Regulating Valve (Water Cooled Units): Regulates the flow of water
through the condenser for stable system operation
• Hour Meters - Compressor & pumps
• Branch Fusing: Provides additional Protection for individual motors
• Compressor phase protection
• Audible/visual alarm indication
• Refrigerant: R22
195
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Pumps - up to 2 process and 2 recirculation mounted
on unit
• Through the door disconnect - padlockable handle provides
convenient local power disconnection for electrical service
• Dedicated standby pumps
• Pressure and flow transducers
• Condenser manifold on water cooled units to allow single
point connection
CONFIGURATIONS AVAILABLE
HEAT AND COOL
• Option 1 - Pinnacle Series
• Option 2 - Vertically stacked
• Option 3 - Side by side
Note: Due to shipping restrictions Options 2 and 3 will be shipped
in 2 sections. Field assembly and interconnecting piping are
required
STANDARD PLC SCREEN
ADVANCED PLC SCREEN
• Control 2 or 4 compressors in 2 circuits
• Cooling Tower Fans: 1 to 4 fans controlled with PID algorithm.
Operator may choose to alternate the fans at specific intervals
(Allen-Bradley Micrologix 1500 with PanelView 300 Micro)
• Alarm condition indicators for safety devices including motor
overloads (compressor or pump), flow switches, freezestats,
refrigerant pressures, voltage/phase sensor, high and low
temperature alarms
• Hour meters to accumulate run time in compressors and/or
pumps
• Chilled water pumps: Variable 1 to 3 process pumps and
1 or 2 recirculation pumps. In systems with multiple pumps,
they may be altered at specific intervals.
• Control of Winter Kooler pump
• Network capable over DH-485 to communicate with a chiller
featuring the Advanced Control Package
(Allen Bradley SLC 5/04 with PanelView 1000)
• Cooling Tower Pumps: Variable 1 to 4 process pumps and
1 to 3 recirculation pumps. In systems with multiple pumps,
they may be alternated at specific intervals
• Alarm condition indicators for safety devices including motor
overloads (compressor or pump), flow switches, freezestats,
refrigerant pressures, voltage/phase sensor, high and low
temperature alarms
• Hour meters to accumulate run time in compressors and/or
pumps
• Chilled water pumps: Variable 1 to 3 process pumps and
1 or 2 recirculation pumps. In systems with multiple pumps,
they may be altered at specific intervals
• Control of Winter Kooler pump
• Network capable over DH-485 to communicate with a chiller
featuring the Advanced Control or Standard Control Package
196
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
30RAN SERIES OUTDOOR CENTRAL CHILLERS
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
30RAN Series air-cooled central chillers from AEC are designed for
exterior installation, freeing up valuable indoor equipment space. With
hermetic scroll compressors, the 30RAN Series chillers provide 10-60
ton cooling capacities.
STANDARD FEATURES
30RAN Series
• Hermetic scroll compressor(s)
• Direct expansion type brazed plate evaporator(s)
• Aluminum fin/copper tube condenser with direct drive reinforced
polymer fans
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Non-fused disconnect switch
• Wind baffles may be required for -20ºF operation
• Standard ambient operation from -20º to 125º F (-29º to 52º C)
Wind baffles required for -20ºF operation
• Standard leaving water temperature setpoints are from 40º to 70º F
(4.4º to 21º C). Other setpoint ranges are available upon request.
Consult factory.
• Two independent circuits on 035 to 055
• Heavy-gauge galvanized steel frame and painted cabinet
• Refrigeration circuit(s) include filter dryer, sight glass, and thermal
expansion valve
• Safeties include: high and low refrigerant, freezestat, phase loss,
motor overload, and reverse rotation of the compressor
• Factory startup
197
• 208/3/60, 230/3/30, or 575/3/60 operating voltages
• 4 year additional compressor warranty (compressor
warranty covers the compressor parts only from years
2 through 5.)
• AWX Winter Kooler available for substantial savings
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
30RAN 010
30RAN 015
30RAN 018
30RAN 022
30RAN 025
30RAN 030
30RAN 035
30RAN 040
30RAN 045
30RAN 050
30RAN 055
Cooling
Capacity
capacity, tons1 stages
10.5
1
15.2
1
17.7
2
23.8
2
26.2
2
30.2
2
38.4
3
41.7
3
47.5
4
52.3
4
60.2
4
HEAT AND COOL
Energy rating Chilled water flow, Evaporator con.
EER (Btu/watt)
size (FPT)
gpm (lpm)
10.6
25.2
2
10.5
36.5
2
10.4
42.4
2
10.8
57.1
2
10.2
62.9
2
10.5
72.4
2
10.8
92.0
2.5
10.4
99.9
2.5
10.8
113.8
2.5
10.2
125.3
2.5
10.4
144.5
2.5
1 Cooling capacity based upon 50% ethylene glycol at 50ºF LWT with 60ºF RWT at 95ºF ambient temperature
DIMENSIONS
Model
30RAN 010
30RAN 015
30RAN 018
30RAN 022
30RAN 025
30RAN 030
30RAN 035
30RAN 040
30RAN 045
30RAN 050
30RAN 055
Height, in. (mm)
52 (1321)
52 (1321)
52 (1321)
52 (1321)
52 (1321)
52 (1321)
52 (1321)
52 (1321)
52 (1321)
52 (1321)
52 (1321)
Width, in. (mm)
43 (1092)
43 (1092)
43 (1092)
43 (1092)
43 (1092)
43 (1092)
90 (2286)
90 (2286)
90 (2286)
90 (2286)
90 (2286)
198
Compressor
qty.
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
4
4
4
Depth, in. (mm)
82 (2083)
82 (2083)
82 (2083)
108 (2743)
108 (2743)
108 (2743)
108 (2743)
108 (2743)
108 (2743)
108 (2743)
108 (2743)
Min. circuit amps,
460/3/60
23.8
33.6
35.5
44.7
50.3
58.4
73.2
78.8
86.0
95.5
110.8
Ship. weight, lbs. (kg)
946 (428)
1066 (483)
1205 (547)
1519 (689)
1584 (718)
1699 (771)
2833 (1285)
2900 (1315)
3202 (1452)
3295 (1495)
3495 (1585)
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
30RB SERIES OUTDOOR CENTRAL CHILLERS
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
30RB Series air-cooled central chillers from AEC are designed for
exterior installation, freeing up valuable indoor equipment space. With
hermetic multiple scroll compressors, the 30RB Series chillers provide
60-300 ton cooling capacities.
STANDARD FEATURES
30RB Series
• Rotary scroll compressors
• Minimum load capacity control
• Direct expansion shell and tube cooler with cooler heaters
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Puron® R-410A refrigerant
• Standard ambient operation from -20ºF to 125ºF
(-29ºC to 52ºC)
• Non-fused disconnect switch
• Standard leaving water temperature setpoints are from 40ºF to
60ºF (4.4ºC to 18.6ºC). Other below temperature setpoint ranges
are available upon request
• Three independent circuits
• Refrigeration(s) circuits include oil separator, discharge and liquid
line shut off valves, filter dryer, sight glass and electronic expansion
valve
• Safeties include: high and low refrigerant, freezestat, phase loss,
motor overload, ground fault, voltage and current imbalance,
evaporator flow switch, and reverse rotation of compressor
• One year parts and labor warranty with factory startup is standard
199
• 4 year extended compressor parts warranty
• Remote display panel
• Wind baffle / hail guard (drawings supplied)
• AWX Winter Kooler - supplemental cooling option
CONTROL UNITS
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
30RB 060
30RB 070
30RB 080
30RB 090
30RB 100
30RB 110
30RB 120
30RB 130
30RB 150
30RB 160
30RB 170
30RB 190
30RB 210
30RB 225
30RB 250
30RB 275
30RB 300
Cooling
Capacity
capacity, tons1 stages
63.8
200.7
73.7
233.8
85.3
266.9
96.2
303.9
106.2
336.6
117
370.7
131.2
416.3
141.8
447.2
161.7
507.6
170.9
537.8
185.9
585.0
210.3
662.6
225.9
709.4
239.6
753.3
265.6
836.3
290.4
914.7
315.4
993.4
HEAT AND COOL
Energy rating Chilled water flow, Evaporator con.
EER (Btu/watt)
gpm (lpm)
size (FPT)
10.4
185 (700)
10.2
214 (810)
10.3
247 (935)
4" victaulic
10.4
279 (1056)
10.3
308 (1165)
10.2
339 (1283)
10.4
380 (1438)
10.5
411 (1555)
10.4
469 (1775)
10.8
496 (1878)
10.2
539 (2040)
6" victaulic
10.5
610 (2309)
10.6
655 (2479)
10.4
695 (2631)
10.4
770 (2915)
10.4
842 (3187)
10.3
915 (3464)
1 Cooling capacity based upon 50% ethylene glycol at 50ºF LWT with 60ºF RWT at 95ºF ambient temperature
DIMENSIONS
Model
30RB 060
30RB 070
30RB 080
30RB 090
30RB 100
30RB 110
30RB 120
30RB 130
30RB 150
30RB 160
30RB 170
30RB 190
30RB 210
30RB 225
30RB 250
30RB 275
30RB 300
Height, ft. (in.)
7' 5-7/8"
7' 5-7/8"
7' 5-7/8"
7' 5-7/8"
7' 5-7/8"
7' 5-7/8"
7' 5-7/8"
7' 5-7/8"
7' 5-7/8"
7' 5-7/8"
7' 5-7/8"
7' 5-7/8"
7' 5-7/8"
7' 5-7/8"
7' 5-7/8"
7' 5-7/8"
7' 5-9/16"
Width, ft. (in.)
7' 4-1/16"
7' 4-1/16"
7' 4-1/16"
7' 4-1/16"
7' 4-1/16"
7' 4-1/16"
7' 4-1/16"
7' 4-1/16"
7' 4-1/16"
7' 4-1/16"
7' 4-1/16"
7' 4-1/16"
7' 4-1/16"
7' 4-1/16"
7' 4-1/16"
7' 4-1/16"
7' 4-1/16"
200
Compressor Min. circuit amps,
qty.
460/3/60
3
127.9
3
147.9
4
160.6
4
154.6
4
170.0
5
180.8
6
262.0
7
277.0
7
303.0
8
329.0
8
356.0
9
408.0
9
422.9
9
449.6
10
502.0
11
554.4
12
606.8
Depth, ft. (in.)
7' 10-1/4"
7' 10-1/4"
7' 10-1/4"
11' 9-1/4"
11' 9-1/4"
11' 9-1/4"
15' 8-1/4"
15' 8-1/4"
15' 8-1/4"
19' 7-5/16"
19' 7-5/16"
23' 6-1/4"
23' 6-1/4"
23' 6-1/4"
27' 5-1/4"
31' 4-1/4"
35' 3-5/16"
3872 (1758)
4077 (1849)
4335 (1966)
5667 (2571)
5890 (2672)
6144 (2787)
7315 (3318)
7615 (3454)
8564 (3884)
9656 (4380)
9990 (4531)
11,400 (5172)
13,020 (5905)
13,350 (6055)
14,750 (6690)
16,200 (7348)
17,590 (7879)
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
AWX SERIES SUPPLEMENTAL COOLING SYSTEM
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
AWX Series Winter-Kooler central chillers are used where heat recovery
chilling systems are not required. AEC’s Winter-Kooler is an energy-saving
supplemental chilling system that is designed to allow process cooling
water to bypass your chiller whenever ambient air temperatures are low
enough to provide sufficient cooling without mechanical refrigeration.
AEC has designed Winter-Kooler systems to be installed in conjunction
with air-cooled or water-cooled chillers and will work with either a central
or chiller-contained pump tank assembly.
AWX Series
STANDARD FEATURES
• Heavy-duty cabinets designed for outdoor applications
• Galvanized steel structural members
• Heavy-gauge aluminum cabinet panels
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Corrugated aluminum fins with staggered copper tubes for
optimum heat transfer
• PVC-coated steel fan guards for optimum corrosion protection
• Energy-efficient fan motors; direct-drive fans rotate at 1,140 rpm
• Pre-shipment testing includes pressure testing, dehydration, and
pressurization
• Units are UL listed and CSA-certified (UL listed for Canada)
• Thermal overload protection and permanently-lubricated ball
bearings on fan motors
• Manual switchover
• Fully baffled fan sections for structural strength; prevents fan
windmilling during OFF cycles
• Aluminum fan blades riveted to painted-steel spider and hubs;
blades are statically and dynamically balanced
• Fan motor leads wired to weatherproof electrical enclosure for
single-point field wiring
• One-year warranty on parts, materials; one-year warranty on
service, including labor and materials
201
• Switchover package option is designed for use with
divided central chilled water pump tanks. It requires
115 volts and 60 psi (414 kPa/4.2 bars) air for
operation. Available in 2.5”, 3”, 4”, 6”, or 8” (63, 76,
102, 152, or 203 mm) outlet diameter sizes.
NOTES
HEAT AND COOL
Heat recovery and Winter Kooling are not available together on the same installation.
Chiller capacities are based on cooling 50% water and 50% ethylene glycol from 60º to 50º F (15º to 10º C) with 35º F (2º C)
ambient air temperature. Consult factory for other applications.
Specifications are for 230/3/60 or 460/3/60 operation at elevations under 1000 ft. above sea level. Consult factory for other
applications.
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
AWX010
AWX015
AWX020
AWX025
AWX030
AWX040
AWX050
AWX060
AWX075
AWX090
AWX100
AWX115
AWX125
AWX130
AWX140
AWX150
AWX165
Capacity,
tons1
10
15
20
25.3
33.9
40
51.7
60.7
78.5
92.5
102
118
126
132
144
154
165
Flow,
gpm2
28
42
56
71
95
112
145
170
220
259
287
331
355
370
405
432
462
Pressured FLA,
rop, psi 460/3/60
4.5
2.6
4.7
7
2.4
3.9
5.3
7
1.9
10.5
5.5
14
5.2
14
2.5
21
5.3
28
7.1
28
7.8
28
8.1
35
9.2
35
9.9
35
13.8
42
15.5
42
17.5
42
hp
0.33
1.5
0.33
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
Fans
qty.
2
2
3
2
3
4
4
6
8
8
8
10
10
10
12
12
12
L
69.75
120.5
129.75
120.5
175.5
23.5
230.5
175.5
230.5
230.5
230.5
285.5
285.5
285.5
340.5
340.5
340.5
1 Based on 1 ton of refrigeration equal to 12,000 BTUH (metric equivalent: 3,024 Kcal/hr).
2 Flows are based on cooling 2.8 gpm per ton (1.07 lpm per 1,000 Kcal/hr) of 50% water/50% ethylene glycol.
202
Dimensions, in.
W
43
45.5
43
45.5
45.5
45.5
45.5
88
88
88
88
88
88
88
88
88
88
Weight, lbs.
Shipping Operating
470
490
1540
1594
625
660
1600
1694
2420
2554
2480
2614
3190
3364
2380
2587
3150
3416
3230
3496
3510
3856
3990
4415
4130
4555
4390
4815
4790
5295
4960
5465
5270
5775
H
40.5
50
40.5
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
ECU SERIES ECONOMICAL WATER TCU
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
ECU SERIES WATER TEMPERATURE CONTROL UNIT
The ECU Series water temperature control units meet all of your direct
injection temperature control needs. Standard features include vertically
mounted Incoloy® immersion heaters, bronze-fitted centrifugal pumps from
3/4 hp to 7 1/2 hp, solenoid valves up to 3/4" NPT, branch circuit fusing,
and automatic vent sequence. These units are protected by an independent
high temperature safety thermostat, an adjustable low supply water pressure
switch (set at 16 psig) and 150 psi pressure relief valve.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Off-the-shelf microprocessor based PID temperature controller
with Process and Set Point LED readouts
• Graphic control panel with indicator and warning lights
ECU Series
(shown with optional disconnect)
• Compact cabinet
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Motor circuit protector
• 300°F operation; includes silicon carbide seal
(requires 55 psi minimum water supply pressure)
• Incoloy® immersion heater with IEC contactor
• 12 kW heater
• 3/4" water supply, 1.5" process connections; valve size matches
drain size
• Manual bypass (shipped loose)
• 1.5" casters
• Pressure regulator/relief valve for water supply,
shipped loose
• Independent high temperature safety thermostat
• Y-strainer (From Process or Water Supply; shipped
loose)
• 150 psi (10.2 bar) pressure relief valve
• Pressure gauges (shipped loose)
• Adjustable low supply water pressure switch, factory set at 16 psi
(1.1 bar)
• 3/4 hp through 7.5 hp cast iron process pumps with SI CB/carbon
mechanical seals
• Automatic vent sequence
• Hammer arrestor
• Quick cool switch
• 1/2" and 3/4" cooling solenoid slow-closing valve
• Auto system water purge (mold purge), shipped loose
• General fault audible/visual alarm
• Operating range of 32°F to 250°F (0°C to 121°C)
• Remote start/stop
• 1 year warranty on parts and labor at the factory
• Communications – RS232, RS485, RS485 SPI
• Ten foot power cord; no plug, shipped loose
• Rotary through-the-door disconnect switch
• UL/cUL-listed subpanel
• Operating voltages: 208/3/60, 230/3/60, 200400/3/50, 575/3/60
203
ECU SERIES ECONOMICAL WATER TCU
SPECIFICATIONS
Pump, HP
(kW)
0.75 (0.56)
1 (0.75)
2 (1.49)
3 (2.24)
5 (3.73)
7.5 (5.6)
Flow, gpm
(lpm)
30 (114)
35 (132)
50 (189)
60 (227)
75 (284)
90 (341)
Pressure,
psig (bar)
25 (1.7)
30 (2.0)
30 (2.0)
40 (2.7)
54 (3.7)
63 (4.3)
FLA, 9 kW @ FLA, 12 kW
460/3/60
@ 460/3/60
12.7
16.5
13.1
16.9
14.7
18.5
16.1
19.9
18.9
22.7
22.3
26.1
HEAT AND COOL
Height, in.
(mm)
25 (635)
25 (635)
25 (635)
25 (635)
25 (635)
25 (635)
Width, in.
(mm)
12.25 (311)
12.25 (311)
12.25 (311)
12.25 (311)
12.25 (311)
12.25 (311)
Depth, in.
(mm)
26 (660)
26 (660)
26 (660)
26 (660)
26 (660)
26 (660)
Ship. weight,
lbs. (kg)
210 (95)
210 (95)
210 (95)
210 (95)
240 (109)
240 (109)
DIMENSIONS
Height
Depth
Width
PART NUMBERING SCHEME
ECU _ _ _ - _ - _ - _ - _ _
075 - 3/4 hp
100 - 1 hp
200 - 2 hp
300 - 3 hp
500 - 5 hp
750 - 7.5 hp
9 - 9 kW
12 - 12 kW
1 - 208/3/60 VAC
2 - 230/3/60 VAC
3 - 400/3/50 VAC
4 - 460/3/60 VAC
5 - 575/3/60 VAC
6 - 200/3/50 VAC
2 - 250ºF
3 - 300ºF
MB - Manual bypass
PR - Pressure regulator
YS - Y-Strainer
QC - Quick cool switch
AP - Auto system water purge
AV - Audible/visual alarm
RS - Remote start/stop
R2 - RS232 communications
RP- RS485-SPI communications
DS- Disconnect switch
PC- Power cord
RC- Remote controller
UL - UL/CUL listed subpanel
RF- Rubber feet in lieu of casters
PG- Pressure gauges
HA- Hammer arrestor
Example:
ECU075-9-4-2-AV-QC: Econo with 3/4 hp pump, 9 kW heater, 460 VAC, 250ºF maximum operating
temperature, audible/visual alarm, and quick cool switch
204
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
TRUETEMP TCU SERIES MINI WATER TCU
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
TRUETEMP SERIES MINI WATER TCU
For production applications requiring exact temperature control in limited
spaces, nothing measures up to TrueTemp TCU Series mini water
temperature control units from AEC.
Each TrueTemp Mini TCU delivers huge performance in a compact
package. Available with heater configurations in 3kW, 6kW, or 9kW, these
units provide consistent and reliable heating—just the kind of innovation
you expect from the leader in temperature control.
STANDARD FEATURES
TrueTemp Mini TCU
• Off-the-shelf 1/16th DIN microprocessor based PID controller
• Non-ferrous construction
• Easily removable panels for quick access to internal components
• Incoloy® immersion heater with IEC contactors
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Casters in lieu of rubber feet
• Pressure switch set at 16 psig
• Manual bypass (shipped loose)
• 250º F (121º C) maximum operating temperature
• Pressure regulator/relief valve for water supply,
shipped loose
• Independent safety thermostat
• Y strainer (From Process or Water Supply; shipped
loose)
• Motor circuit protector
• 1 year parts and labor warranty at the factory
• Auto system water purge (mold purge), shipped loose
• General fault audible/visual alarm
• Remote start/stop
• Communications – RS485, RS23 or General; RS485
SPI
• Ten foot power cord; no plug, shipped loose
• Rotary through-the-door disconnect switch
• UL/cUL-listed subpanel
• Operating voltages: 208/3/60, 230/3/60, 200400/3/50, 575/3/60
• Pressure gauges, shipped loose, to be mounted on
the back of unit
205
TRUETEMP TCU SERIES MINI WATER TCU
SPECIFICATIONS
Pump, HP (kW)
0.5 (0.37)
0.75 (0.56)
Flow, gpm (lpm)
15 (57)
20 (76)
Pressure, psig
(bar)
20 (138)
23 (159)
Height, in. (cm)
17.5 (44)
17.5 (44)
HEAT AND COOL
Width, in. (cm)
9.5 (24)
9.5 (24)
Ship. weight,
lbs. (kg)
110 (50)
110 (50)
Depth, in. (cm)
23 (58)
23 (58)
DIMENSIONS
To Process
Cooling Water Out
17.5”
From Process
Cooling Water In
23”
9.5”
T__-_-_-_-__
50 - 0.5 hp
75 - 0.75 hp
3 - 3 kW
6 - 6 kW
9 - 9 kW
1 - 208/3/60 VAC
2 - 230/3/60 VAC
3 - 400/3/50 VAC
4 - 460/3/60 VAC
5 - 575/3/60 VAC
2 - 250ºF
MB - Manual bypass
PR - Pressure regulator
YS - Y-Strainer
QC - Quick cool switch
AP - Auto system water purge
AV - Audible/visual alarm
RS - Remote start/stop
RP - RS485-SPI communications
DS - Disconnect switch
PC - Power cord
RC - Remote controller
UL - U.L./cUL listed subpanel
CS - Casters in lieu of rubber feet
PG - Pressure gauge
Example:
T75-9-4-2-AV-QC: TrueTemp Mini w/ _ hp pump, 9 kW heater, 460 VAC, 250°F maximum operating
temperature, Audible/Visual Alarm, and Quick Cool Switch
206
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
TRUETEMP TCU SERIES WATER TCUS
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
TRUETEMP COMPACT & UPRIGHT WATER TCUS
TrueTemp TCU Series water temperature control units from AEC provide
highly accurate control for production applications requiring a continuous
supply of temperature-controlled water. They have an operating leaving
water temperature range of 32ºF to 250ºF (0ºC to 121ºC).
TrueTemp TCUs are available in either direct injection or closed circuit
configurations for controlled cooling. For direct injection cooling, solenoid
valves regulate the flow of heated water to the process water stream.
Closed circuit configurations cycle heated water through a closed loop heat
exchanger assembly.
TrueTemp TCUs
STANDARD FEATURES
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Compact, rugged cabinet with easy-access side panels
• 12 kW, 18 kW1, 24 kW1, 36 kW2, or 48 kW2 heaters
• Cast-and-flange design to reduce connection points
• Unit without heater (includes 0.5” solenoid valve CV = 04)
• Half- and full-heat capability, 9kW heater standard
• Maintained START/STOP switch (push to stop, twist to start)
• Dual stage Incoloy® immersion heater with IEC contactors
• Manual bypass
• NEMA 12 (IP55) electrical enclosure
• 0.25” cooling solenoid valve on 0.75 to 3 hp (.56 to 2.2 kW) models; 0.5” slowclose cooling solenoid valve on 5, 7.5, & 10 hp (3.7, 5.6, and 7.5 kW) models
• Forward-facing liquid-filled To and From Process pressure gauges
• Brass construction
• Closed loop heat exchanger with 0.5” solenoid (3.7 sq. ft/.344 sq. m)
U-tube, 7.4, 11.2, 18.1, 27.1 sq. ft./0.688, 1.042, 1.683, 2.511 m2 shell
& tube)
• General fault audio/visual alarm
• Non-fused lockable rotary through door disconnect
• Off-the-shelf microprocessor-based PID temperature controller with Process
and Set Point LED readouts
• Graphic control panel with indicator and warning status lights
• Adjustable low supply water pressure switch; 16 psig (110kPa/1.1 bar)
• Pressure regulator/relief valve for water supply,shipped loose
• Auto system water purge, shipped loose
• Y-strainer, shipped loose
• Hammer arrestor
• 10 ft. (3 m) power cord, no plug, shipped loose
• 150 psig (1,034 kPa/10.3 bars) pressure relief valve
• Rubber feet in lieu of casters
• SCR heater control
• SICB/carbon pump seal
• Cooling solenoid slow-close valve
• 0.75” water supply connection, 1.5” process connections; valve size
matches drain size
• Modulating valve, 1/2" – 1 1/4" (CV = 0.4–20)
• Stack rack with casters, 2 zone (without manifold), 3 or 4 zone
(2 x 2 configuration) compact units only
• Motor branch circuit overcurrent protection with phase loss and
overload trip detection
• Side-by-side dolly, 2 or 3 zone with manifold
• Common wiring and/or piping for two zone
• 3” (76 mm) casters
• 3-year parts and labor warranty (labor at factory), 5-year controller warranty,
lifetime warranty on wetted cast components, lifetime pump seal (subject to
factory review)
207
• TEFC motor
• 300ºF (149ºC) operations, includes silicon carbide/silicon carbide
seal (requires 55 psig (379 kPa/3.8 bar) water supply pressure)
1 N.A. for closed-loop compact units
2 Direct injection upright units only, n.a. for 200/3/50 or 230/3/60 VAC
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
TCU075
TCU100
TCU200
TCU300
TCU500
TCU750
TCU075U
TCU100U
TCU200U
TCU300U
TCU500U
TCU750U
TCU1000U
Style
Compact
Upright
Pump,
hp (kW)
0.75 (0.56)
1 (0.75)
2 (1.5)
3 (2.24)
5 ( 3.73)
7.5 (5.6)
0.75 (0.56)
1 (0.75)
2 (1.5)
3 (2.24)
5 ( 3.73)
7.5 (5.6)
10 (7.46)
Flow,
gpm (lpm)
30 (113.6)
35 (132.5)
50 (189.3)
60 (227.1)
90 (340.7)
120 (454.2)
30 (113.6)
35 (132.5)
50 (189.3)
60 (227.1)
75 (283.9)
75 (283.9)
90 (340.7)
Note: Contact factory for additional lead time on 7.5 hp pumps.
FULL LOAD AMPS
Model
hp (kw)
0.75 (0.56)
1.00 (0.75)
2.00 (1.50)
3.00 (2.24)
5.00 (3.73)
7.50 (5.60)
10.00 (7.46)
9 kW htr
12.7
13.1
14.7
16.1
18.9
22.3
26.0
12 kW htr
16.5
16.9
18.5
19.9
22.7
26.1
30.0
PRESSURE DROP FLOW AND LOSS
Model
hp (kw)
0.75 (0.56)
1.00 (0.75)
2.00 (1.50)
3.00 (2.24)
5.00 (3.73)
7.50 (5.60)
10.00 (7.46)
flow, gpm (lpm)
30 (113.6)
35 (132.5)
50 (189.3)
60 (227.1)
75 (283.9)
90 (340.7)
120 (454.2)
Pressure,
psig (kPa)
25 (172.4)
30 (206.9)
30 (206.9)
35 (241.3)
50 (344.8)
50 (344.8)
25 (172.4)
30 (206.9)
30 (206.9)
35 (241.3)
50 (344.8)
50 (344.8)
55 (379.2)
HEAT AND COOL
Height, in.
(cm)
28.75 (73)
28.75 (73)
28.75 (73)
28.75 (73)
28.75 (73)
28.75 (73)
48 (122)
48 (122)
48 (122)
48 (122)
48 (122)
48 (122)
48 (122)
Ship. weight,
lbs. (kg)
210 (96)
210 (96)
210 (96)
210 (96)
240 (109)
240 (109)
210 (96)
210 (96)
210 (96)
210 (96)
240 (109)
240 (109)
270 (123)
Width, in. (cm) Depth, in. (cm)
13 (33)
13 (33)
13 (33)
13 (33)
13 (33)
13 (33)
13 (33)
13 (33)
13 (33)
13 (33)
13 (33)
13 (33)
13 (33)
Full Load Amps @ 400 Volts
18 kW htr
24 kW htr
24.0
31.6
24.4
32.0
26.0
33.6
27.4
35.0
30.2
37.8
33.6
41.2
37.0
45.0
28 (71.1)
28 (71.1)
28 (71.1)
28 (71.1)
28 (71.1)
28 (71.1)
28 (71.1)
28 (71.1)
28 (71.1)
28 (71.1)
28 (71.1)
28 (71.1)
28 (71.1)
36 kW htr
47.4
47.8
49.4
50.8
56.6
57.0
60.0
48 kW htr
62.4
62.8
64.4
65.8
71.6
72.0
75.0
Pressure Drop Flow and Loss
loss, psi (kPa)
Recommended NPT pipe size for flow rate
0.0 (0.0)
1-1/4”
1.0 (6.9)
1-1/4”
1.5 (10.3)
1-1/2”
2.0 (13.8)
1-1/2”
2.5 (17.2)
2”
3.0 (34.4)
2”
5.0 (34.4)
2-1/2”
Note: Recommended pipe size based on flow rate producing less than 10 ft/sec (3 m/sec) velocity through pipe diameter.
208
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
CONTROLLER OPTIONS
Controller
Standard
Advanced
HEAT AND COOL
Options
4 to 20 mA retransmission of process variable (E5CK only) not available with modulating valve.
4 to 20 mA remote setpoint & retransmission of process variable (E5AK only)
Communication: RS-232, RS-485, RS-485 SPI, and Modbus uses Eurotherm 3216 controller
Remote probe: local/remote control (remote probe and internal probe change to 100 ohm RTD)
Digital flowmeter (includes separate indicator)
Analog (voltage or current) remote setpoint and retransmission of process variable, setpoint, or flow rate
Communication: RS-232 Modbus, RS-485 Modbus, RS-485 SPI, Ethernet IP via Modbus RTU
Analog heat and cool, level control, heater weld contact detect with internal cascade control
Remote probe1
Integral digital flow meter
Local/remote start/stop, auto cool down with stop, general fault alarm, integral start/stop, vent and alarm silence buttons
Remote control enclosure with 20 ft. (6 m) cable (additional cable available at extra charge)
1 Remote probe with advanced controller allows customer to either monitor or control from a customer supplied type J, K or T thermocouple, 100 or 1000 ohm RTD.
Additional cost to have probe supplied by manufacturer.
ELECTRICAL OPTIONS
• General fault alarm, audible and visual
• 208-575/3/60 VAC, 200-415/3/50 VAC, or 575/3/60 VAC. (200-415/3/50
VAC uses circuit breakers in place of primary transformer fuses)
• UL, cUL listed subpanel
• CE certification (circuit breakers replace primary transformer fuses)
• Ontario Hydro specifications (Inspection to be done by others)
OTHER OPTIONS
Option
Cooling solenoid
slow-close valve
Modulating
valve
Descaler
Descaler fluid
(5 gallons)
Available Sizes
0.5” x 0.5625” (Cv = 3.5)
0.75” x 0.75” (Cv = 5.5)
1” x 1” (Cv = 11.5)
1.5” x 1.25” (Cv=24)
0.5” (Cv = 0.4, 1.3, 2.2, 3.4)
0.75” (Cv = 5.5, 7.5)
1” (Cv = 10, 14)
1.25” (Cv=20)
Optional Advanced Controller
Part Number
602.88905.00
692.88904.00
209
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
COMPACT TCU: DIRECT INJECTION
HEAT AND COOL
COMPACT TCU: CLOSED CIRCUT
210
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
UPRIGHT TCU: DIRECT INJECTION
HEAT AND COOL
UPRIGHT TCU: CLOSED CIRCUT
Note: Pictures on this page depict unit with 24, 36, or 48 kW heater options. For
piping dimension for a unit with less than 24 kW, please refer to the compact unit.
211
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
PUMP CURVES: 60 HZ
HEAT AND COOL
PUMP CURVES: 50 HZ
Note: Consult factory for 10 HP pump curves.
212
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
POSITIVE/NEGATIVE PRESSURE TCU
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
TRUETEMP POSITIVE/NEGATIVE PRESSURE TCU
Troublesome cooling circuit leaks in processes can result in serious
production losses. The leaks may be due to small stress cracks, which leak
under pressure. Our Positive/Negative Pressure TCU uses a liquid venturi
to draw cooling water through the mold under negative pressure.
Precise temperature control is provided by the operation of a solid state or
microprocessor controller, which activates a heater or a cooling water
solenoid as required.
Model TDV1NX
STANDARD FEATURES
• Off-the-shelf microprocessor-based PID temperature control with
Process and Set Value LED readout
• Graphic control panel with indicating and warning status lights
• Operating range of 32ºF to 180ºF (0ºC to 82ºC)
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Remote control enclosure (see next page for details)
• Remote thermocouple (10 ft), remote sensor must be sold
with the high temperature safety switch option
• Rubber feet in lieu of casters
• Open reservoir vented to atmosphere
• Single stage Incoloy® immersion heater with mercury contactors
• 1/4” cooling solenoid valve (Cv=0.85)
• High temperature safety switch
• High/low temperature audible and visual alarm, no
heater contactor interlock, visual alarm is a strobe
• Crash cool, holds cooling solenoid on, turns heater off
regardless of control setting
• Hi/low level sensor with 3/8” makeup solenoid valve
• 208/230/460 volt 60 Hz, 200/208/380/415 50 Hz, consult
factory for de-rated heater and pump capacities.
• Low supply water pressure switch
• 150 psi (1,034 kPa/10.3 bars) pressure relief valve
• Pressure gauge (specify locations)
• 2” (51 mm) casters
• Power cord, 10 ft., no plug
• Paint internal piping (AEC Charcoal)
• 3/4” cooling water connections
• Closed circuit with open reservoir
• Manually-operated 3-way valve for changeover to negative
pressure mode
• 0.375” solenoid valve (Cv=1.5) in lieu of 0.25” valve
• 1-year warranty on parts and labor at factory
• Modulating valve, 0.5” (Cv=4.4), 0.75” (Cv=7.5), 1”
(Cv=10 or 14), or 1.25” (Cv=20), includes VDC actuator.
mA actuator is also available. Consult factory for maximum
operating ∆P for cooling water
• Lifetime warranty on pump housing, impeller, heater tube, piping
• Cooling water in strainer
• Horizontally-mounted bronze fitted centrifugal pump
• 5-year warranty on controller
• 460/3/60 or 230/3/60 standard operating voltage
• 9 kW heater
• External communications, types RS-232C, -422, -485,
single point
• Side-by-side (2 zone) w/casters, valving not included
• Severe duty EPDM silicon carbide, 2-3 hp
• NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R disconnect with fuses
213
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
Flow, gpm
60
70
Pump, hp
2
3
TDV1NX
HEAT AND COOL
Pressure, psig
18
38
DIMENSIONS
STANDARD
3 HP EXTENDED CABINET
REMOTE CONTROL ENCLOSURE OPTION
The remote control package includes NX control in remote enclosure, terminal blocks on the
temperature controller’s electrical enclosure sub-panel and remote enclosure sub-panel. A
10 ft. shielded thermocouple extension wire is also provided.
Customer is responsible for installing electrical wiring between enclosures per applicable
codes and standards.
214
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
PUMP CURVES: 60 HZ
HEAT AND COOL
PUMP CURVES: 50 HZ
215
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
NOTES:
216
HEAT AND COOL
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
ODT SERIES 4 & 6 ZONE OPTICAL DISK TCU
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
ODT SERIES 4 & 6 ZONE OPTICAL DISK TCUS
AEC's Optical Disk Units are specifically designed to handle the needs of
Optical Disk Injection Molding. They can be configured in either four or six
zones. The top two zones are Sprue and Punch zones, while the bottom
two zones are moving and stationary halves. A second set of sprue and
punch zones are added for DVD molding. To meet strict clean room
specifications, the optional magnetically coupled pumps require no seal
changes. The 1/16th DIN controller comes with separate 24 hour timer.
3 kW heater and 0.25" x 9/32" cooling valve establish and maintain precise,
uniform temperatures.
STANDARD FEATURES
• 3 kW Incoloy® heater with brass screw plug in stainless steel tank
• 0.75” Female NPT To and From Process connections terminated
in ball valves
• 0.125” Male NPT Common Air Purge connection
• 1.5” Female NPT Common Cooling Water In and Cooling Water
Out connections terminated in ball valves
• Omron® brand 1/16th DIN Microprocessor based PID controllers
• Disconnect switch
ODT Series
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• RS 485 SPI communications protocol
• PLC with color touch-screen (less SPI)
• UL listed sub-panel
• 208/3/60 or 400/3/50 supply voltage
• Mitsubishi Alpha 1 micro-PLCs for control of LEDs
• Operating range of 32°F to 250°F (0°C to 120°C)
• 150 PSI (10.2 bar) pressure relief valve
• Manual Bypass
• All non-ferrous piping
• Wired for 3/60/460 VAC Voltage
• 0.25” x 9/32” orifice solenoid valve with 0.88 Cv
• 1 year warranty on parts and labor at the factory
217
ODT SERIES 4 & 6 ZONE OPTICAL DISK TCU
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
Moveable and stationary zones
Pump, hp (kW)
Flow, gpm
Pump, hp (kW)
11 @ 50 psi
1.47 (1.10)
5 @ 50 psi
0.67 (0.50)
11 @ 50 psi
ODT6-3-0.5-0.751
11 @ 50 psi
ODT6-3-0.5-1.12
Sprue and punch zones
Flow, gpm
ODT4-3-0.5-0.751
ODT4-3-0.5-1.12
11 @ 50 psi
0.75 (0.56)
5 @ 50 psi
0.75 (0.56)
5 @ 50 psi
1.47 (1.10)
5 @ 50 psi
1 MTH brand close coupled turbine pump with graphite impregnated silicon carbide seal
2 Speck brand magnetically coupled turbine pump
DIMENSIONS
Model
ODT4-3-0.5-0.75
ODT4-3-0.5-1.1
ODT6-3-0.5-0.75
ODT6-3-0.5-1.1
HEAT AND COOL
Height, in.
54.25
54.25
79.5
79.5
Width, in.
18
18
18
18
218
Number of zones
0.50 (0.37)
4
0.50 (0.37)
6
4
0.67 (0.50)
6
Length, in.
42
42
42
42
Ship. weight, lbs.
475
475
550
550
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
TRUETEMP TCO-U SERIES HOT OIL TCU
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
With rapid response to all your needs for process heating and cooling, our
hot oil TCO-U Series high temperature control units are no exception.
Engineered to withstand the rigors of high temperature heat transfer fluid
recirculation, the TCO-U Series is designed for a wide range of processing
applications from 100ºF (38ºC) to 550ºF (288ºC).
STANDARD FEATURES
• 550ºF (288ºC) maximum operating temperature
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Non-fused lockable rotary disconnect
• Advanced controller
• Y-strainer on From Process line
• 208/3/60, 230/3/60, 380/3/50, 415/3/50, 575/3/60
operating voltage
• Branch fusing
• Lexan® cover
• Independent safety thermostat with safety connector
• U-tube type heat exchangers
• Pressure-activated bypass valve
• CE certification
• To Process pressure gauge
• High tank level alarm, general fault visual alarm
• Dual stage immersion heater with IEC contactors
• Hour meter
• Simplified internal design delivers efficient heat transfer
• Analog flow gauge
• An off-the-shelf, DIN-style, auto-tuning PID fuzzy logic controller
accurate to within ±1ºF
• High-flow pumps with 18 gpm to 50 gpm capacities
• Compact footprint: 24" W (610 mm) x 34" D (864 mm) x 62" H (1575 mm).
Increases to 44” (1117 mm) for heaters up to 48 kW
• Full 3-year controller warranty
• Removable panels with hand grips for ease of handling
• Positive-seating water supply and drain check valves
• TEFC motor
• Dependable positive displacement gear pump with mechanical seals
• 17 gallon expansion tank with convenient, protected sight glass
• Full-sized water and oil piping connections
• Drain valve
219
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
12 kW heater
18 kW heater
24 kW heater
36 kW heater
48 kW heater
Reservoir Capacity (gal)
HP (kW)
Flow, gpm (lpm)
TEFC
Pump
Pressure, psig (bar)
Full Load
Amps,
460/3/60
VAC
Dimensions
Shipping
Wt, lbs. (kg)
Connection Size, in.
Height, in.
Width, in.
1 hp
17
25
32
47
62
1 (0.75)
1.5 (1.1)
18 (68)
30
50
(2.0)
(3.4)
1"
Depth, in.
≤ 24 kW
> 24 kW
CONTROLLER OPTIONS
Controller
TCOU-xx
1.5 hp
2 hp
18
19
26
27
33
34
48
49
63
64
2 (1.5)
24 (91)
30/50
(2.0/5.4)
24 (610)
700 (318)
950 (431)
HEAT AND COOL
3 hp
20
28
35
50
65
1 hp
34
50
64
94
124
17 gallons each zone
2TCOU-xx
1.5 hp
2 hp
36
38
52
54
66
68
96
98
126
128
3 hp
40
56
70
100
130
3 (2.2)
1 (0.75)
1.5 (1.1)
2 (1.5)
3 (2.2)
50 (227)
18 (68)
24 (91)
50 (227)
50
30
50
30/50
50
(5.4)
2.0)
(3.4)
(2.0/5.4)
(5.4)
1.5"
1"
1.5"
62 (1,575)
48 (1,220)
34 (864) ≤ 24 kW
44 (1,118) > 24 kW
850 (386)
1400 (635)
1700 (771)
1050 (476)
1900 (862)
2100 (953)
Options
Standard
4 to 20 mA retransmission of process variable (E5CK only) not available with modulating valve.
Communication: RS-232, RS-485, RS-485 SPI (Athena 16 CT)
Advanced
4 to 20 mA remote setpoint and retransmission of process variable, setpoint, or flow rate
Remote probe1
Remote control enclosure with 20 ft. cable (additional cable available at extra charge)
1 Remote probe with advanced controller allows customer to either monitor or control from a customer supplied type J or K thermocouple or 100 or 1000 ohm RTD. Additional
cost to have probe supplied by manufacturer.
220
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
TRUETEMP VULCAN SERIES HOT OIL TCU
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
Compact in size, but big in performance, Vulcan Series oil temperature
control units provide accurate process temperature control wherever you
want it—not wherever it fits. This versatile unit’s controls and connections
are optimally located for ease of use and hookup.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Off-the-shelf auto-tune microprocessor-based PID temperature
controller with process and set value LED readout
• 2-gallon (8-liter) reservoir
• Check valve on water supply
Model TDOS
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• IEC contactors
• 3.7 sq. ft. heat exchanger, outside the unit, 1/2”
supply connection, 3/4” drain
• Compact cabinet with removable panels
• Y-strainer
• Branch fusing
• Pump reverse
• 1.5 sq. ft. heat exchanger
• Lexan® cover
• Mechanical seal pump
• High temperature hose (see next page for details)
• 400ºF (204ºC) operating temperature
• Audible alarm
• 6 kW heater
• Y-Strainer on process return
• Pressure actuated bypass
• Positive displacement pump
• Reservoir with sight glass
• Independent safety thermostat with safety contactor
221
SPECIFICATIONS
HEAT AND COOL
Model
Pump, hp (kW)
Flow, gpm (lpm)
Pressure, psi (kPa, bars)
TDOS
0.75 (0.56)
6 (22.7)
50 (344.8, 3.45)
Dimensions, in. (mm)
Height 27 (705)
Width 13 (330)
Depth 31 (787)
Because of high temperatures, flash steam may accrue in heat exchangers. Some applications may require the use of a condensate tank.
Consult factory for non-matching dual zones with differing flows and pressures.
HIGH TEMPERATURE HOSE OPTIONS
Part Number
Diameter, in.
Length, ft. (m)
572-16969-12
0.75
10 (3.05)
1
10 (3.05)
1.5
10 (3.05)
572-16969-02
572-16969-76
572-16969-08
572-16969-53
572-16969-59
572-16969-49
0.75
6 (1.83)
1
5 (1.52)
1
15 (4.57)
1.5
Hose material is Flexonics Series 101 corrugated hose fabricated from carbon steel with single braid.
222
15 (4.57)
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
TRUETEMP TCO SERIES HOT OIL TCU
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
TrueTemp TCO Series Hot Oil TCUs from AEC provide highly accurate
control for production applications requiring a continuous supply of hightemperature-controlled fluids.
All TrueTemp TCO Series hot oil portable temperature control units have an
operating temperature range of 100°F up to a maximum of 550°F (38°C to
288°C). For applications outside this range, consult the factory.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Single or dual zone (2TCO) models available
TrueTemp TCO Series
• 6 kW heater [maximum operating temp of 400°F (204°C)]
• Omron® E5CK microprocessor controller with fuzzy logic; includes
diagnostic features with indicator and warning status lights
• System status graphic display
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• 12, 18, or 24 kW heaters maximum operating
temp of 550ºF (288ºC)
• Dual stage immersion heater(s) with IEC contactors
• Drain valve
• 550°F (288°C) maximum operating temperature
• Analog flow meter
• Branch circuit protection
• General fault visual alarm
• Non-fused lockable rotary disconnect
• U-tube heat exchangers, 3.9 sq. ft. or 6.7 sq. ft.
• Pressure switch for low pump pressure shut-down
• 208/3/60, 230/3/60, 380/3/50, 415/3/50, 575/3/60
operating voltage
• CE certification
• UL listed subpanel
• Oil filtration cart package with one 50 micron filter
• To Process pressure gauge
• Filters, sold by the case (30 filters per case), 25
micron, 50 micron, or 100 micron
• Independent safety thermostat
• Y-strainer on From Process line
• Positive displacement pumps capable of reversing to evacuate
the process
• Easily removable panels for quick access to internal components
• Audible alarm
• 1 year parts and labor warranty at the factory
• 5 year controller warranty
223
• TrueThermTM heat transfer fluid, 5 gallons (p.n.
A0549000) or 55 gallons (p.n. A0549001)
• TrueFlushTM flushing fluid, 5 gallons (p.n. A0549002)
or 55 gallons (p.n. A0549003)
SPECIFICATIONS
HEAT AND COOL
Model
Pump, hp (kW) Flow, gpm (lpm) Height, in. (cm) Width, in. (cm) Depth, in. (cm)
TCO 1
1 (0.746)
18 (68.1)
46 (117)
18.25 (46)
42 (107)
TCO 1.5
1.5 (1.119)
18 (68.1)
46 (117)
18.25 (46)
42 (107)
TCO 2
2 (1.492)
24 (90.8)
46 (117)
18.25 (46)
42 (107)
2TCO 1 (2 zone)
1 (0.746)
18 (68.1)
46 (117)
36.5 (93)
42 (107)
2 TCO 1.5 (2 zone)
1.5 (1.119)
18 (68.1)
46 (117)
36.5 (93)
42 (107)
2 TCO 2 (2 zone)
2 (1.492)
24 (90.8)
46 (117)
36.5 (93)
42 (107)
CONTROLLER OPTIONS
Controller
Standard
Advanced
600 (273)
600 (273)
600 (273)
1200 (546)
600 (273)
600 (273)
Options
4 to 20 mA retransmission of process variable (E5CK only)
Communication: RS-232, RS-485, RS-485 SPI (Athena 16 CT)
Hour meter, for pump run time
4 to 20 mA remote setpoint and retransmission of process variable, setpoint, or flow rate
Remote probe1
Remote control enclosure with 20 ft. cable (additional cable available at extra charge)
1 Remote probe with advanced controller allows customer to either monitor or control from a customer supplied type J or K thermocouple or 100 or 1000 ohm RTD. Additional
cost to have probe supplied by manufacturer.
224
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
TDH-6 FLUID CIRCULATING CONTROL SYSTEM
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
AEC’s vast background of experience and skill in designing and building
temperature control equipment assures you of peak performance from this
unit. Carefully designed and balanced control systems assure sensitivity and
instantaneous reaction to temperature changes. Operation is simple, and
the unit is complete and easy to use. Ready to operate when power and
circulation connections are made. Several combinations of heater sizes and
pumping rates are available. Cooling controls are optional. We will be happy
to assist you in selecting the proper unit for your requirements.
STANDARD FEATURES
TDH-6 Fluid Circulating System
• Viking positive displacement, packed pump with drip
return pump
• TEFC Pump Motor
• NEMA 12-style electrical control enclosure with IEC electrical
components
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Pressure-actuated bypass valve
• Autovent
• Mechanical seal pump
• Disconnect switch
• Autoshutdown (E5AK controller)
• System status graphics display
• Manual bypass
• To Process oil pressure gauge
• Shell and tube heat exchanger
• Temperature to 550ºF
• Advanced controller
• Heater sizes from 50 to 200 kW
Note: heat exchanger is setup to pulse heat transfer
fluid and continuously pass water through tubes.
• Pump rates of 90, 150 or 200 gpm
• Optional cooling capabilities
• E5AK, 1/4 DIN control standard
• Low level alarm
225
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
HEAT AND COOL
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
Number
TDH-6
Motor
hp
Pump Flow
gpm
Pressure
PSI
Pipe Size
NPT
15
200
50
3”
5
10
90
150
50
50
2”
2 1/2”
50
small
large*
large
60
small
large*
large
* For these capacities, the unit is built in the large cabinet as standard. In a heating only unit, it could be built in the small cabinet.
Heating Capacity (kW)
75
small
large*
large
100
120
small
large*
150
large
large
large
200
large
large
large
large
large
large
large
DIMENSIONS
Small Cabinet: 30” W x 58” D x 70” H
Large Cabinet: 46” W x 58” D x 70” H
Optional advanced controller
ADVANCED CONTROLLER FEATURES
• PID Control for both heating and cooling
• 4 line x 20 character LCD Display Screen
• Setpoint, To Process, From Process, and DT displays
• Start, stop, vent, and alarm silence switches
• Triac outputs for heating and cooling
226
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
BFC SERIES BLOWN FILM COOLERS
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
Today’s competitive blown film business calls for consistent, high-quality
product and increased productivity—especially in warmer climates or when
ambient air temperatures rise in summer months.
AEC’s BFC Series blown film coolers boost productivity by eliminating
production variables. Fully-engineered, chilled water coil assemblies deliver
air ring cooling at constant temperature, pressure, and volume.
BFC Series blown film coolers have a leaving air temperature range of 40ºF
to 50ºF (5ºC to 10ºC). Consult factory for higher leaving air temperature.
BFC Blown Film Cooler
STANDARD FEATURES
• Bolt-on support legs
• Condensate trap
• Insulated heavy gauge steel cabinet designed for 35” (8.7 kPa)
static pressure
• Dial thermometers for discharge air and chilled water
supply/return
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Pre-piped, automatic 3-way chilled water control
valves
• Complete motor controls, including factory wired
starter and on/off switch
• Air inlet and outlet adaptors, copper tube aluminum fin chilled
water cooling coil
• 16" or 35" static pressure fans
• Insulated drip pan
• Permanent filter
• 230/3/60 or 460/3/60 voltages
227
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
BFC600
BFC1000
BFC1500
BFC2000
BFC3500
BFC5000
Nominal
Air flow
Die Max.
cooling
rated hp/kW,
dia., in.
required, tons
(cm)
cfm (cmh)1
(Kcal/hr)
600 (1019)
7.3 (22075)
5 (12.7)
1000 (1699) 12.1 (36590) 18 (45.7)
1500 (2548) 18.2 (55037) 30 (76.2)
2000 (3398) 24.2 (73181) 40 (101.6)
3500 (5946) 42.4 (128217) 60 (152.4)
5000 (8495) 60.5 (182952) 80 (203.2)
HEAT AND COOL
“B” models: (base unit plus
“BH” models: (base unit plus
Base
16” static pressure fan section 35” static pressure fan section
model
with damper)
with damper)
shipping
weight,
Fan motor
Ship. weight,
Fan motor
Ship. weight,
lbs. (kg) power, hp (kW)
lbs. (kg)
power, hp (kW)
lbs. (kg)
440 (205)
3 (2.24)
570 (265)
7.5 (5.60)
1030 (478)
440 (205)
5 (3.73)
570 (265)
10 (7.46)
1030 (478)
690 (321)
7.5 (5.60)
890(413)
15 (11.19)
1325 (615)
740 (344)
10 (7.46)
965 (448)
20 (14.92)
1465 (680)
1260 (585)
20 (14.92)
1710 (794)
40 (29.84)
2365 (1098)
1880 (873)
30 (22.38)
2465 (1144)
60 (44.76)
3165 (1469)
1 Entering air @ 100º F (38º C) dry bulb, 80º F (27º C) wet bulb, 40º F (4º C), chilled water = 50º F (10º C) leaving air temp.
CHILLED WATER IN/OUT DIAMETER (NPT)
Model Number
BFC600
BFC1000
BFC1500
BFC2000
BFC3500
BFC5000
DIMENSIONS
Model
BFC600
BFC1000
BFC1500
BFC2000
BFC3500
BFC5000
Width
Dia., in. (mm)
1 (25)
1.25 (32)
1.5 (38)
2 (51)
2.5 (64)
2.5 (64)
Base Unit, in. (cm)
48.0 (122)
48.0 (122)
49.0 (124)
49.0 (124)
59.0 (150)
64.0 (163)
Length
49 (125)
49 (125)
42 (107)
48 (122)
61 (155)
70 (178)
AIR INLET/OUTLET DIAMETER
Model Number
Dia., in. (mm)
BFC 1500-2000
14 (356)
BFC 5000
18 (457)
BFC 600-1000
10 (254)
BFC 3500
Height
58 (147)
58 (147)
54 (137)
66 (168)
78 (198)
89 (201)
Width
16 (406)
“B” models, in. (cm)
48.0 (122)
48.0 (122)
49.0 (124)
49.0 (124)
59.0 (150)
64.0 (163)
Length
96 (244)
96 (244)
90 (224)
96 (244)
121 (308)
130 (331)
Height
58 (147)
58 (147)
54 (137)
66 (168)
71 (181)
89 (226)
“BH” models, in. (cm)
Width
Length
48.0 (122)
48.0 (122)
49.0 (124)
49.0 (124)
59.0 (150)
64.0 (163)
Height
96 (244)
96 (244)
90 (224)
96 (244)
121 (308)
130 (331)
58 (147)
58 (147)
54 (137)
66 (168)
78 (198)
89 (226)
COMPONENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
228
Chilled water in
Chilled water out
Chilled water thermostats
Air inlet
Air outlet
3-way valve
Blower
Air outlet thermometer
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
NORMAL DESIGN CONDITIONS SELECTION GUIDE
North American Cities: July, 3:00 pm local times.
State and city
Alabama
Anniston
Birmingham
Mobile
Montogomery
Arizona
Flagstaff
Phoenix
Tucson
Winslow
Yuma
Arkansas
Fort Smith
Little Rock
California
Bakersfield
El Centro
Eureka
Fresno
Laguna Beach
Long Beach
Los Angeles
Oakland
Pasadena
Red Bluff
Sacramento
San Bernadino
San Diego
San Francisco
San Jose
Colorado
Denver
Durango
Fort Collins
Grand Junction
Pueblo
Connecticut
Bridgeport
Hartford
New Haven
Waterbury
ºF
ºC
Dry Wet Dry Wet
bulb bulb bulb bulb
95
95
95
95
78
78
80
78
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
25.5
25.5
26.7
25.5
90
105
105
100
110
65
76
72
70
78
32.2
40.5
40.5
37.8
43.3
18.3
24.4
22.2
21.1
25.5
95
95
76 35.0 24.4
78 35.0 25.5
105
110
90
105
85
90
90
85
95
100
100
105
85
85
91
70
78
65
74
70
70
70
65
70
70
72
72
68
65
70
40.5
43.3
32.2
40.5
29.4
32.2
32.2
29.4
35.0
37.8
37.8
40.5
29.4
29.4
32.8
21.1
25.5
18.3
23.3
21.1
21.1
21.1
18.3
21.1
21.1
22.2
22.2
20.0
18.3
21.1
95
95
92
95
95
64
65
64
65
65
35.0
35.0
33.3
35.0
35.0
17.8
18.3
17.8
18.3
18.3
95
93
95
92
75
75
75
77
35.0
33.9
35.0
33.3
23.9
23.9
23.9
25.0
State and city
HEAT AND COOL
ºF
ºC
Dry Wet Dry Wet
bulb bulb bulb bulb
Delaware
Wilmington
95 78 35.0
District of Columbia
Washington
95 78 35.0
Florida
Apalachicola
95 80 35.0
Jacksonville
95 78 35.0
Key West
98 78 36.7
Miami
91 79 32.8
Pensacola
95 78 35.0
Tampa
95 78 35.0
Tallahassee
96 80 35.6
Georgia
Atlanta
95 76 35.0
Augusta
98 76 36.7
Brunswick
95 78 35.0
Columbus
98 76 36.7
Macon
95 78 35.0
Savannah
95 78 35.0
Idaho
Boise
95 65 35.0
Lewiston
95 65 35.0
Pocatello
95 65 35.0
Twin Falls
96 68 35.6
Illinois
Cairo
98 78 36.7
Chicago
95 78 35.0
Danville
96 79 35.6
Moline
96 76 35.6
Peoria
96 76 35.6
Springfield
98 77 36.7
Indiana
Evansville
95 78 35.0
Fort Wayne
95 75 35.0
Indianapolis
95 76 35.0
South Bend
92 78 33.3
Terre Haute
95 78 35.0
Iowa
Cedar Rapids
92 78 33.3
Davenport
95 78 35.0
Des Moines
95 78 35.0
229
25.5
25.5
26.7
25.5
25.5
26.1
25.5
25.5
26.7
24.4
24.4
25.5
24.4
25.5
25.5
18.3
18.3
18.3
20.0
25.5
25.5
26.1
24.4
24.4
25.0
25.5
23.9
24.4
25.5
25.5
25.5
25.5
25.5
State and city
Iowa (cont.)
Dubuque
Fort Dodge
Keokuk
Sioux City
Waterloo
Kansas
Concordia
Dodge City
Salina
Topeka
Wichita
Kentucky
Lexington
Louisville
Louisiana
Alexandria
New Orleans
Shreveport
Maine
Augusta
Bangor
Eastport
Millinocket
Portland
Maryland
Baltimore
Cumberland
Massachusetts
Boston
Fall River
Fitchburg
Lowell
Nantucket
Springfield
Worcester
Michigan
Alpena
Detroit
Escanaba
Flint
H
E
A
T
ºF
ºC
Dry Wet Dry Wet
bulb bulb bulb bulb
&
95
95
95
95
92
78
78
78
78
78
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
33.3
25.5
25.5
25.5
25.5
25.5
95
95
101
100
100
78
78
78
78
75
35.0
35.0
38.3
37.8
37.8
25.5
25.5
25.5
25.5
23.9
95
95
78
78
35.0 25.5
35.0 25.5
97
95
100
80
80
78
36.1 26.7
35.0 26.7
37.8 25.5
90
90
90
90
90
73
73
70
74
73
32.2
32.2
32.2
32.2
32.2
95
95
78
75
35.0 25.5
35.0 23.9
92
90
93
93
95
93
93
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
33.3
32.2
33.9
33.9
35.0
33.9
33.9
23.9
23.9
23.9
23.9
23.9
23.9
23.9
95
95
85
95
75
75
75
75
35.0
35.0
29.4
35.0
23.9
23.9
23.9
23.9
C
O
O
L
22.8
22.8
21.1
23.3
22.8
State and city
Michigan (cont.)
Grand Rapids
Kalamazoo
Lansing
Marquette
Saginaw
Minnesota
Alexandria
Duluth
Minneapolis
St. Cloud
St. Paul
Mississippi
Jackson
Meridian
Vicksburg
Missouri
Columbia
Kansas City
Kirksville
St. Louis
St. Joseph
Springfield
Montana
Billings
Butte
Great Falls
Havre
Helena
Kalispell
Miles City
Missoula
Nebraska
Grand Island
Lincoln
Norfolk
North Platte
Omaha
Valentine
Nevada
Las Vegas
ºF
ºC
Dry Wet Dry Wet
bulb bulb bulb bulb
95
95
95
93
95
75
75
75
73
75
35.0
35.0
35.0
33.9
35.0
23.9
23.9
23.9
22.8
23.9
90
93
95
90
95
74
73
75
75
75
32.2
33.9
35.0
32.2
35.0
23.3
22.8
23.9
23.9
23.9
98
95
95
79
79
78
36.7 26.1
35.0 26.1
35.0 25.5
100
100
97
95
97
97
78
76
79
78
79
78
37.8
37.8
36.1
35.0
36.1
36.1
25.5
24.4
26.1
25.5
26.1
25.5
90
88
95
95
95
95
95
95
66
64
65
70
67
65
68
66
32.2
31.1
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
18.9
17.8
18.3
21.1
19.4
18.3
20.0
18.9
95
95
95
95
95
95
78
78
78
78
78
78
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
25.5
25.5
25.5
25.5
25.5
25.5
115
75
46.1 23.9
State and city
Nevada (cont.)
Reno
Tonopah
Winnemucca
New Hampshire
Berlin
Concord
Keene
Manchester
Portsmouth
New Jersey
Atlantic City
Bloomfield
East Orange
Jersey City
Newark
Paterson
Trenton
New Mexico
Albuquerque
Roswell
Santa Fe
New York
Albany
Binghamton
Buffalo
Canton
Cortland
Glens Falls
Ithaca
Jamestown
New York City
Oneonta
Oswego
Rochester
Schenectady
Syracuse
Watertown
North Carolina
Asheville
Charlotte
HEAT AND COOL
ºF
ºC
Dry Wet Dry Wet
bulb bulb bulb bulb
95
95
95
65
65
65
35.0 32.2
35.0 32.2
35.0 32.2
87
90
90
90
90
73
73
73
73
73
30.6
32.2
32.2
32.2
32.2
22.8
22.8
22.8
22.8
22.8
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
78
75
75
75
75
75
78
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
25.5
23.9
23.9
23.9
23.9
23.9
25.5
95
95
90
70
70
65
35.0 21.1
35.0 21.1
32.2 18.3
93
95
93
90
90
90
92
90
95
90
93
95
93
93
90
75
75
73
73
73
73
75
75
75
75
73
75
75
75
75
33.9
35.0
33.9
32.2
32.2
32.2
33.3
32.2
35.0
32.2
33.9
35.0
33.9
33.9
32.2
93
95
75
78
33.9 23.9
35.0 25.5
230
23.9
23.9
22.8
22.8
22.8
22.8
23.9
22.8
23.9
23.9
22.8
23.9
23.9
23.9
23.9
ºF
Dry Wet
bulb bulb
North Carolina (cont.)
Greensboro
95 78
Raleigh
95 78
Wilmington
95 78
North Dakota
Bismarck
95 73
Devils Lake
95 70
Fargo
95 75
Grand Forks
95 75
Williston
95 73
Ohio
Akron
95 75
Cincinnati
95 78
Cleveland
95 75
Columbus
95 76
Dayton
95 78
Lima
95 78
Sandusky
95 75
Toledo
95 75
Youngstown
95 75
Oklahoma
Ardmore
101 78
Bartlesville
101 78
Oklahoma City 101 77
Tulsa
101 77
Oregon
Baker
90 66
Eugene
90 68
Medford
95 70
Pendleton
95 70
Portland
90 68
Roseburg
90 66
Pennsylvania
Altoona
95 75
Erie
93 75
Harrisburg
95 75
New Castle
93 75
Oil City
95 75
Philadelphia
95 78
Pittsburgh
95 75
Reading
95 75
ºC
Dry Wet
bulb bulb
State and city
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
35.0 25.5
35.0 25.5
35.0 25.5
O
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
22.8
21.1
23.9
23.9
22.8
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
23.9
25.5
23.9
24.4
25.5
25.5
23.9
23.9
23.9
38.3
38.3
38.3
38.3
25.5
25.5
25.0
25.0
32.2
32.2
35.0
35.0
32.2
32.2
18.9
20.0
21.1
21.1
20.0
18.9
35.0
33.9
35.0
33.9
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
23.9
23.9
23.9
23.9
23.9
25.5
23.9
23.9
L
ºF
Dry Wet
bulb bulb
Pennsylvania (cont.)
Scranton
95 75
Warren
93 75
Williamsport
93 76
Rhode Island
Block Island
95 75
Pawtucket
93 75
Providence
93 75
South Carolina
Charleston
95 78
Columbia
95 75
Greenville
95 76
South Dakota
Huron
95 75
Rapid City
95 70
Sioux Falls
95 75
Tennessee
Chattanooga
95 76
Knoxville
95 75
Memphis
95 78
Nashville
95 78
Texas
Abilene
100 74
Amarillo
100 72
Austin
100 78
Brownsville
95 80
Corpus Christi
95 80
Dallas
100 78
Del Rio
100 78
El Paso
100 69
Fort Worth
100 78
Galveston
95 80
Houston
95 80
Palestine
100 78
Port Arthur
95 79
San Antonio
100 78
Utah
Modena
95 65
Logan
95 66
Ogden
95 66
Salt Lake City
95 65
State and city
ºC
Dry Wet
bulb bulb
35.0 23.9
33.9 23.9
33.9 24.4
35.0 23.9
33.9 23.9
33.9 23.9
35.0 25.5
35.0 23.9
35.0 24.4
35.0 23.9
35.0 21.1
35.0 23.9
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
24.4
23.9
25.5
25.5
37.8
37.8
37.8
35.0
35.0
37.8
37.8
37.8
37.8
35.0
35.0
37.8
35.0
37.8
23.3
22.2
25.5
26.7
26.7
25.5
25.5
20.6
25.5
26.7
26.7
25.5
26.1
25.5
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
18.3
18.9
18.9
18.3
State and city
Vermont
Burlington
Rutland
Virginia
Lynchburg
Norfolk
Richmond
Roanoke
Virginia Beach
Washington State
North Head
Seattle
Spokane
Tacoma
Walla Walla
Wenatchee
Yakima
West Virginia
Bluefield
Charleston
Huntington
Martinsburg
Parkersburg
Wheeling
Wisconsin
Ashland
Eau Claire
Green Bay
La Crosse
Madison
Milwaukee
Wausau
Wyoming
Casper
Cheyenne
Lander
Sheridan
HEAT AND COOL
ºF
ºC
Dry Wet Dry Wet
bulb bulb bulb bulb
90
90
73
73
32.2 22.8
32.2 22.8
95
95
95
95
95
75
78
78
76
78
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
23.9
25.5
25.5
24.4
25.5
85
85
93
85
95
90
95
65
65
65
64
65
65
65
29.4
29.4
33.9
29.4
35.0
32.2
35.0
18.3
18.3
18.3
17.8
18.3
18.3
18.3
95
95
95
95
95
95
75
75
76
76
75
75
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
23.9
23.9
24.4
24.4
23.9
23.9
90
95
95
95
95
95
95
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
32.2
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
23.9
23.9
23.9
23.9
23.9
23.9
23.9
95
95
95
95
65
65
65
65
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
18.3
18.3
18.3
18.3
See next page for Canada and Mexico
231
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
HEAT AND COOL
CANADA
Province and
city
ºF
ºC
Dry Wet Dry Wet
bulb bulb bulb bulb
Alberta
Calgary
90ºF 66
Edmonton
90 68
Grand Prairie
85 66
Lethbridge
90 68
McMurray
90 67
Medicine Hat
90 65
British Columbia
Fort Nelson
90 65
Penticton
91 70
Prince George
90 65
Prince Rupert
80 62
Vancouver
80 67
Victoria
80 65
Manitoba
Brandon
90 71
Churchill
80 65
The Pas
90 70
Winnipeg
90 71
New Brunswick
Campbellton
90 75
Fredericton
90 75
Moncton
87 73
Saint John
85 70
Newfoundland
Corner Brook
85 70
Gander
85 70
Goose Bay
85 70
Saint Johns
80 70
Northwest Territories
Yellowknife
75 62
Nova Scotia
Halifax
90 75
Sydney
85 70
Yarmouth
80 67
32.2
32.2
29.4
32.2
32.2
32.2
18.9
20.0
18.9
20.0
19.4
18.3
32.2
32.8
32.2
26.7
26.7
26.7
18.3
21.1
18.3
16.7
19.4
18.3
32.2
26.7
32.2
32.2
21.7
18.3
21.1
21.7
32.2
32.2
30.6
29.4
23.9
23.9
22.0
21.1
29.4
29.4
29.4
26.7
21.1
21.1
21.1
21.1
CANADA (cont.)
Province and
city
Ontario
ºF
ºC
Dry Wet Dry Wet
bulb bulb bulb bulb
Hamilton
90
75
32.2 23.9
Kingston
88
75
31.1 23.9
Kapuskasing
Kitchener
London
North Bay
Ottawa
Peterborough
Thunder Bay
Timmins
Toronto
Windsor
Sault Ste. Marie
85
88
90
87
90
90
85
90
93
90
93
Prince Edward Island
72
75
75
72
75
75
70
75
75
75
75
29.4 21.1
32.2 23.9
87
75
30.6 23.9
72
31.1 22.2
Saskatoon
90
70
32.2 21.1
Swift Current
Yukon Territory
Whitehorse
93
79
72
62
79
36.7 26.1
Veracruz
91
83
32.8 28.3
Merida
97
80
36.1 26.7
31.1 24.4
88
71
98
32.2 23.9
Prince Albert
90
Monterrey
33.9 23.9
Sherbrooke
Regina
33.9 20.0
32.2 23.9
32.2 23.9
Saskatchewan
68
33.9 23.9
75
76
93
Yucatan
90
88
Guadalajara
32.2 23.9
Montreal
Three Rivers
28.3 16.1
Veracruz
26.7 21.1
75
61
30.6 22.2
70
90
83
Nuevo Leon
85
Quebec City
Mexico City
31.1 23.9
32.2 23.9
ºC
Dry Wet Dry Wet
bulb bulb bulb bulb
Distrito Federal
Jalisco
32.2 23.9
ºF
State and city
29.4 22.2
Charlottetown
Quebec
MEXICO
32.2 21.7
33.9 22.2
26.1 16.7
23.9 16.7
32.2 23.9
29.4 21.1
26.7 19.4
232
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
COOLING TOWER PUMP TANK SYSTEMS
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
All of our pump tank assemblies are backed by proven engineering and
expert construction that have made our systems the standard of the
industry for more than 30 years.
Process cooling water is circulated by centrifugal pumps with cast iron
housings, bronze impellers, and mechanical seals. Full-sized pump suction
and discharge valves, discharge check valves, pressure gauges, and gauge
trim. You can customize your AEC pump tank assembly with dozens of
pump configurations and control options.
Pump Tank
STANDARD FEATURES
• Centrifugal close-coupled pump, featuring cast iron impellers with
230/ or 460/3/60 ODP motor; other voltages and motor designs
are available
• Tank, sides, bottom, and baffles are stainless steel
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Armaflex insulation
• Composite cover
• Second pump ledge
• Stainless steel basket on process return
• OSHA handrail and ladder
• Lug-mount butterfly valves
• #304 stainless steel tank side walls 3/16” from T150 to T2000;
1/4” from T2700 to T5100D
• Standard hardware includes thermometer(s), pump pressure
gauge(s), drain valve
• Full-size pump trim for maximum efficiency; includes isolation,
throttling, and check valves
• Automatic level control makeup valve
• Sight glass
• 1” Clayton float valve (claval makeup valve)
• Well reinforcement
• P1 process pump, P2 recirculating pump
• TEFC motor, in lieu of ODP motor
• Bronze impeller
• Single suction or double suction trim
• Discharge manifold: process/recirculation standby
• Plugged or valved opening, mild or stainless steel
• 8-foot support legs
• Digital temperature display
• Butterfly valve handles
• Amp meter, hour meter, digital flow meter
• Solid diamond-plate pump ledge
• UL Panel
• NEMA 12 enclosure with fused transformer
• Through-the-door disconnect
• Panel mounted on tank and wired
233
SELECTION
Model
T150 (D)
PT400 (D)
T500 (D)
T700 (D)
T1100 (D)
T1600 (D)
T2000 (D)
T2700 (D)
T3700 (D)
T5100 (D)
Max. tower, tons1 (Kcal/hr)
1 well
2 wells
27 (102,200)
16 (63,900)
78 (295,200)
48 (184,500)
96 (363,400)
60 (227,100)
144 (545,000)
90 (340,600)
215 (813,800)
134 (508,600)
323 (1,222,600)
200 (764,100)
408 (1,544,200)
255 (965,100)
540 (2,043,800)
337 (1,277,400)
733 (2,774,400)
458 (1,734,000)
1026 (3,883,400)
641 (2,427,100)
HEAT AND COOL
Capacity, gallons (l)
Overflow
Operating
135 (511)
100 (378)
390 (1476)
350 (1325)
480 (1817)
360 (1362)
720 (2725)
540 (2044)
1075 (4069)
825 (3122)
1615 (6113)
1240 (4693)
2040 (7721)
1565 (5923)
2700 (10,219)
2065 (7816)
3665 (13,872)
2830 (10711)
5130 (19,417)
3960 (14988)
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
6
6
7
Return water conn., in.
(mm) NPT
3 (76)
5 (127)
4 (102)
4 (102)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
8 (203)
Trim size, in. NPT (mm)
Process pump, hp (kW)
Recirculating pump, hp (kW)
2.5 (64)
2.5 (64)
3 (76)
3 (76)
4 (102)
4 (102)
4 (102)
4 (102)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
5 (3.73)
7.5 (5.59)
7.5 (5.59)
10 (7.5)
10 (7.5)
15 (11.19)
15 (11.19)
20 (14.91)
20 (14.91)
25 (18.64)
30 (22.37)
30 (22.37)
40 (29.93)
50 (37.29)
3 (2.24)
3 (2.24)
5 (3.73)
5 (3.73)
5 (3.73)
7.5 (5.59)
7.5 (5.59)
7.5 (5.59)
10 (7.5)
10 (7.5)
15 (11.19)
15 (11.19)
20 (14.91)
20 (14.91)
Max. pumps/ledge
1 Calculated for cooling tower water, based on 3 gpm per ton and towers beign within 25 feet of the tank
PUMP TANK CAPACITIES
Capacity
Nominal refrigeration, tower
Nominal flow, gal. (l)
water, tons (Kcal/hr)
20 (75,600)
60 (227)
30 (113,400)
90 (341)
40 (151,200)
120 (454)
50 (189,000)
150 (568)
60 (226,800)
180 (682)
75 (283,500)
225 (852)
80 (302,400)
240 (909)
100 (378,000)
300 (1135)
125 (472,500)
375 (1416)
150 (567,000)
450 (1703)
175 (661,500)
525 (1987)
200 (756,000)
600 (2271)
250 (945,000)
750 (2839)
300 (1,134,000)
900 (3406)
DIMENSIONS
Model
T150 (D)
PT400 (D)
T500 (D)
T700 (D)
T1100 (D)
T1600 (D)
T2000 (D)
T2700 (D)
T3700 (D)
T5100 (D)
Length, in. (cm)
72 (183)
95 (241)
102 (259)
114 (289)
114 (289)
138 (350)
150 (381)
150 (381)
162 (411)
162 (411)
2 Weights are for tank only; pump weight is not included
Width, in. (cm)
36 (91)
56 (142)
48 (122)
72 (183)
72 (183)
72 (183)
92 (234)
120 (305)
120 (305)
168 (427)
Height, in. (cm)
40 (102)
64 (162)
52 (132)
52 (132)
77 (195)
77 (195)
78 (198)
78 (198)
90 (229)
92 (234)
234
Ship. weight2, lbs.
600 (273)
500 (227)
2000 (908)
2600 (1180)
3400 (1543)
4000 (1815)
5000 (2268)
6000 (2722)
7000 (3176)
7800 (3539)
Operating weight2, lbs.
1800 (817)
3500 (1588)
6000 (2722)
8600 (3901)
12400 (5625)
17500 (7938)
22100 (10025)
28500 (12928)
37600 (17056)
50700 (22998)
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
SIZING CONSIDERATIONS
HEAT AND COOL
In sizing a cooling tower pump tank, allow enough volume to avoid unacceptable levels of turbulence and enough volume for
drawdown. Drawdown is the amount of water that is pumped out of the tank on startup before water begins to return from the
towers. Standard tank sizes in this specification allow 2 gallons per ton (2 liters per 1,000 Kcal/hr) for drawdown and towers
located within 25 feet (8 m) of the tank.
tons
1 — 100
101 — 300
301 — 600
System size
Additional tank volume
gallons per foot over 25 feet
liters per meter over 8 meters
8.8
109.3
16.4
203.7
26.8
332.8
Kcal/hr
3,780 — 378,000
378,001 — 1,134,000
1,134,001 — 2,268,000
If towers are more than 25 feet (8 m) from the the tank, add more tank volume based on the table below.
To reduce turbulence when the system is in operation, allow 1 gallon of tank volume for each gpm (1 liter of tank volume for each lpm) entering the tank.
Sizing Example
A 100-ton cooling tower is being located 50 feet from the pump tank. What minimum volume should the tank have for a single-well tank and
for a dual-well tank?
Single well:
Volume = Drawdown volume + Operating volume + Distance correction
= 2 gals./ton x 100 tons + 1 gal./gpm x 300 gpm + (50 - 25) feet x 8.8 gal./foot
= 200 + 300 + 220
= 720 gallons required
Result: Select a T700 model pump tank.
Dual well:
Volume = Drawdown volume + Operating volume + Distance correction
= 2 gals./ton x 100 tons + 1 gal./gpm x 600 gpm + (50 - 25) feet x 8.8 gal./foot
= 200 + 600 + 220
= 1,020 gallons required
Result: Select a T1100D model pump tank
Simplifying fomulas where standard flow, 3 gpm per ton, is used are:
Single well volume = 5 x Tons + Distance correction
Dual well volume = 8 x Tons + Distance correction
Standard tank selections are based on the formulas listed above, where the distance correction is zero (0), meaning that towers are within 25
feet of the tank.
1 1/2" Valve
Valved ddrain
drainope
opening
ning
Water strainer basket ((optional)
optional)
Overflow
Divider (optional)
Front view
Overflow
Sight glass
(optional)
Discharge manifold
for single process
connection (optional)
Discharge
balancing
valve
Combination check
valve/increaser
L
1" makeup valve
Thermostat bracket
H
Thermometer (per well)
Return (2-well model)
1 1/2" drain
Suction
isolation
valve
W
P1
process
pump
All pumps are close-coupled
centrifugal types and include
a compound pressure gauge
and ODP-type motors. TEFC
motors are available as an
option. Trim is full size,
including butterfly valve (and
reducer if necessary) on the
suction side, combination
increaser/check valve, and
butterfly valve on the
discharge side.
Solid diamond
plate deck
P3 dual duty
standby pump (optional)
Top view
Side view
P2 recirculating
pump (optional)
235
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
PUMP INFORMATION
Pump hp
Amp draw, 460/3/60
Ship. weight. lbs. P1
TRIM SIZE
Trim size
Max. flow, gpm (lpm)
Shipping wt., lbs. (kg)
1.5
2.6
—
60
3
4.8
95
90
5
7.6
115
115
2”
50 (189)
25 (12)
7.5
11
125
275
2.5”
90 (340)
35 (16)
10
14
165
320
15
21
180
425
3”
160 (624)
50 (23)
PUMP CURVES
HEAT AND COOL
20
27
300
510
25
34
310
630
4”
320 (1211)
75 (35)
30
40
400
670
40
52
465
—
50
65
710
—
6”
900 (3406)
120 (55)
60
77
730
—
8”
2000 (7570)
165 (75)
NEMA 1 STARTERS
2-60 hp pumps are available with 460/3/60 or 230/3/60
individual NEMA 1 starters. (230/3/60 voltage not
available on 50 and 60 hp pumps).
Thermostat, well, on/off switch for cycling tower fans,
and P2 recirculating pumps are available at extra cost.
Mounting the starter on the pump tank and wiring to the
motor is also available at extra cost.
Starters are shipped loose.
Note: For 50 Hz operation, derate by multiplying pressures by 0.69
236
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
CHILLED WATER PUMP TANK SYSTEMS
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
All of our pump tank assemblies are backed by proven engineering and
expert construction that have made our systems the standard of the
industry for more than 30 years.
Process cooling water is circulated by centrifugal pumps with cast iron
housings, bronze impellers, and mechanical seals. Full-sized pump suction
and discharge valves, discharge check valves, pressure gauges, and gauge
trim. You can customize your AEC pump tank assembly with dozens of
pump configurations and control options.
Pump Tank
STANDARD FEATURES
• Centrifugal close-coupled pump, featuring cast iron impellers with
230/ or 460/3/60 ODP motor; other voltages and motor designs
are available
• Tank, sides, bottom, and baffles are stainless steel
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Second pump ledge
• OSHA handrail and ladder
• Insulation and composite covers
• Sight glass
• #304 stainless steel tank side walls 3/16” from C150 to C2000;
1/4” from C2700 to C5100D
• Standard hardware includes thermometer(s), pump pressure
gauge(s), drain valve
• Full-size pump trim for maximum efficiency; includes isolation,
throttling, and check valves
• Automatic level control makeup valve
• 8-foot support legs
• 1” Clayton float valve (claval makeup valve)
• Well reinforcement
• P1 process pump, P2 recirculating pump
• TEFC motor, in lieu of ODP motor
• Bronze impeller
• Single suction or double suction trim
• Discharge manifold: process/recirculation standby
• Plugged or valved opening, mild or stainless steel
• Digital temperature display
• Amp meter, hour meter, digital flow meter
• UL Panel
• Solid diamond-plate pump ledge
• NEMA 12 enclosure with fused transformer
• Through-the-door disconnect
• Panel mounted on tank and wired
237
SELECTION
Model
CT150 (D)
PC400 (D)
C500 (D)
C700 (D)
C1100 (D)
C1600 (D)
C2000 (D)
C2700 (D)
C3700 (D)
C5100 (D)
Max. chiller, tons (Kcal/hr)
1 well
2 wells
56 (170,300)
28 (85,100)
162 (492,000)
81 (246,000)
200 (605,700)
100 (302,800)
300 (908,300)
150 (454,200)
448 (1,356,300)
224 (678,200)
672 (2,037,700)
336 (1,018,800)
850 (2,572,700)
425 (1,286,800)
1125 (3,406,700)
562 (1,703,300)
1527 (4,624,000)
763 (2,312,000)
2138 (6,472,300)
1069 (3,236,200)
HEAT AND COOL
Capacity, gallons (l)
Overflow
Operating
135 (511)
100 (378)
390 (1476)
350 (1325)
480 (1817)
360 (1362)
720 (2725)
540 (2044)
1075 (4069)
825 (3122)
1615 (6113)
1240 (4693)
2040 (7721)
1565 (5923)
2700 (10,219)
2065 (7816)
3665 (13,872)
2830 (10711)
5130 (19,417)
3960 (14988)
Max. pumps/ledge
Calculated for chiller volume capacity based upon 2.4 gpm per ton with the chiller within 25 ft. of the tank
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
6
6
7
Return water conn., in.
(mm) NPT
3 (76)
5 (127)
4 (102)
4 (102)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
8 (203)
PUMP TANK CAPACITIES
Capacity
Nominal refrigeration, tower
Nominal flow, gal. (l)
water, tons (Kcal/hr)
25 (75,600)
60 (227)
35 (105,840)
84 (318)
50 (151,200)
120 (454)
60 (181,440)
144 (545)
75 (226,800)
180 (682)
90 (272,160)
216 (818)
100 (302,400)
240 (909)
125 (378,000)
300 (1135)
155 (468,720)
372 (1408)
185 (559,440)
444 (1680)
220 (665,280)
528 (1998)
250 (756,000)
600 (2271)
310 (937,440)
744 (2816)
375 (1,134,000)
900 (3406)
DIMENSIONS
Model
CT150 (D)
PC400 (D)
C500 (D)
C700 (D)
C1100 (D)
C1600 (D)
C2000 (D)
C2700 (D)
C3700 (D)
C5100 (D)
Length, in. (cm)
72 (183)
95 (241)
102 (259)
114 (289)
114 (289)
138 (350)
150 (381)
150 (381)
162 (411)
162 (411)
Trim size, in. NPT (mm)
Process pump, hp (kW)
Recirculating pump, hp (kW)
2.5 (64)
2.5 (64)
3 (76)
3 (76)
4 (102)
4 (102)
4 (102)
4 (102)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
5 (3.73)
7.5 (5.59)
7.5 (5.59)
10 (7.5)
10 (7.5)
15 (11.19)
15 (11.19)
20 (14.91)
20 (14.91)
25 (18.64)
30 (22.37)
30 (22.37)
40 (29.93)
50 (37.29)
3 (2.24)
3 (2.24)
5 (3.73)
5 (3.73)
5 (3.73)
7.5 (5.59)
7.5 (5.59)
7.5 (5.59)
10 (7.5)
10 (7.5)
15 (11.19)
15 (11.19)
20 (14.91)
20 (14.91)
Width, in. (cm)
36 (91)
56 (142)
48 (122)
72 (183)
72 (183)
72 (183)
92 (234)
120 (305)
120 (305)
168 (427)
Height, in. (cm)
40 (102)
64 (162)
52 (132)
52 (132)
77 (195)
77 (195)
78 (198)
78 (198)
90 (229)
92 (234)
238
Ship. weight, lbs.
600 (273)
500 (227)
2000 (908)
2600 (1180)
3400 (1543)
4000 (1815)
5000 (2268)
6000 (2722)
7000 (3176)
7800 (3539)
Operating weight, lbs.
1800 (817)
3500 (1588)
6000 (2722)
8600 (3901)
12400 (5625)
17500 (7938)
22100 (10025)
28500 (12928)
37600 (17056)
50700 (22998)
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
SIZING CONSIDERATIONS
HEAT AND COOL
In sizing a chilled water pump tank system, make sure you have enough volume to avoid unacceptable levels of turbulence in the
tank. Typically, you can accomplish this by allowing one gallon of capacity for each gallon per minute (gpm [liters per minute;
lpm]) of flow entering the tank. Standard tank selections in this specification are based on a flow rate entering the tank at 2.4
gallons per minute per ton (3 lpm per 1,000 Kcal/hr) of refrigeration.
For flow rates other than the standard tank selection specification, perform the procedure listed below.
Sizing Example
What tank size is required for a 100-ton system with standard flow through the chiller and double flow to process?
Flow entering the tank = Flow through the chiller (100 ton x 2.4 gpm/ton) + Flow through process (100 tons x 4.8
gpm/ton) = 720 gpm
Minimum tank volume to overflow = 720 gallons
Result: Select a C700D model pump tank.
Standard tank selections are based on flow rates being equal to 2.4 gpm per ton of cooling. Therefore, standard volumes are
as follows:
Single well volume = 2.4 x tons
Dual well volume = 4.8 x tons
1 1/2" Valve
Valved ddrain
drainope
opening
ning
Water strainer basket ((optional)
optional)
Overflow
Divider (optional)
Front view
Overflow
Sight glass
(optional)
Discharge manifold
for single process
connection (optional)
Discharge
balancing
valve
Combination check
valve/increaser
L
1" makeup valve
Thermostat bracket
H
Thermometer (per well)
Return (2-well model)
1 1/2" drain
Suction
isolation
valve
W
P1
process
pump
Solid diamond
plate deck
P3 dual duty
standby pump (optional)
Top view
Side view
P2 recirculating
pump (optional)
All pumps are close-coupled centrifugal types and include a compound pressure gauge and ODP-type motors. TEFC motors are available
as an option. Trim is full size, including butterfly valve (and reducer if necessary) on the suction side, combination increaser/check valve,
and butterfly valve on the discharge side.
239
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
PUMP INFORMATION
Pump hp
Amp draw, 460/3/60
TRIM SIZE
Trim size
Shipping wt., lbs. (kg)
1.5
2.6
—
60
3
4.8
95
90
5
7.6
115
115
2”
50 (189)
25 (12)
7.5
11
125
275
2.5”
90 (340)
35 (16)
10
14
165
320
15
21
180
425
3”
160 (624)
50 (23)
PUMP CURVES
HEAT AND COOL
20
27
300
510
25
34
310
630
4”
320 (1211)
75 (35)
30
40
400
670
40
52
465
—
50
65
710
—
6”
900 (3406)
120 (55)
60
77
730
—
8”
2000 (7570)
165 (75)
NEMA 1 STARTERS
2-60 hp pumps are available with 460/3/60 or 230/3/60
individual NEMA 1 starters. (230/3/60 voltage not
available on 50 and 60 hp pumps).
Thermostat, well, on/off switch for cycling tower fans,
and P2 recirculating pumps are available at extra cost.
Mounting the starter on the pump tank and wiring to the
motor is also available at extra cost.
Starters are shipped loose.
Note: For 50 Hz operation, derate by multiplying pressures by 0.69
240
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
GRAVITY RETURN PUMP TANKS
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
Whatever your small pump tank needs, AEC has the solution. Whether your
application is to recover cooling water from a trough, bearing, clutch,
furnace, die casting line, or numerous other processes, AEC has a gravity
return tank circulating system to meet your requirements.
Gravity return pump tanks are available with 0.33, 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 3, or 5
hp pumps (0.25, 0.37, 0.56, 0.75, 1.12, 2.24, or 3.73 kW). Available tank
sizes are 15, 30, 45, 60, 95, or 120 gallons (56, 114, 170, 227, 360, 454
liters). 5 hp pump is not available on 15 gallon tanks.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Flow ratings from 3 to 90 gpm (11 to 340 lpm)
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Voltages from 115/1/60 to 575/3/60
• Stainless steel tank construction
• Automatic seal venting and flush
• Second pump
• Internal overload protection on single-phase motors
• Available in one- or two-pump configurations
• Brass inlet strainer through 3 hp (2.24 kW) protects pump from
foreign materials
• Cast iron bronze-fitted pumps with ceramic seals rated for
operation up to 250ºF (121ºC)
• Low-level pump protection provided by an adjustable float switch
with stainless steel float and rod; includes double-break silver-tosilver contacts
• Permanently-lubricated pump motors through 3 hp (2.24 kW) with
stainless steel shaft
• Heavy-duty 3/16” (5 mm) steel reservoirs available from 8 to 120
gallons (30 to 454 liters)
• Factory-assembled and tested prior to shipment
• NEMA 1 starters, sent loose for field installation,
single phase manual starter or three phase magnetic
starter
• 115/1/60, 208/1/60, 230/1/60, 208/3/60, 230/3/60,
460/3/60, or 575/3/60
• Hot dipped galvanized tank
• Additional openings, 0.5” to 6”
• Armaflex insulation
• Sight glass
• Isolation valve
• Thermometer
• Pressure gauge
• NEMA 4 float switch
• X-proof float switch
• Discharge trim with check valve, throttling valve, and
fittings, 0.5”, 1”, 1.25”, 1.5”, 2”, 2.5”, shipped loose
• Motor options: TEFC, X-proof, 575/3/60 (ODP only),
or tropical (not available on 5 hp motors; TEFC, Xproof, and 575/3/60 options not available on 0.33
pumps)
241
DIMENSIONS
0.50B, 0.75B, 1B, 1.5B, and 3B Pumps
0.33G, 0.50G, and 0.75G Pumps
Ga.
30
45
60
95
120
A
18.38
26.38
28.38
28.38
36.38
B
16.12
24.12
26.12
26.12
34.12
C
22.00
22.00
28.00
28.00
28.00
D
11.00
11.00
14.00
14.00
14.00
E
23.50
23.50
23.50
33.50
33.50
HEAT AND COOL
F
18.00
18.00
18.00
28.00
28.00
G
9.00
9.00
9.00
14.00
14.00
Ga.
30
45
60
95
120
H
28.00
28.00
28.00
38.00
38.00
PUMP CURVES
A
18.38
26.38
28.38
28.38
36.38
Note:
242
B
16.12
24.12
26.12
26.12
33.75
C
22.00
22.00
28.00
28.00
28.00
D
11.00
11.00
14.00
14.00
14.00
E
29.31
29.31
29.31
39.31
39.31
F
G
18.00 9.00
18.00 9.00
18.00 9.00
28.00 14.00
28.00 14.00
Second pump opening is supplied
standard and blanked off. Additional
blanked-off opening for 15 and 30 ga.
tanks are available upon request.
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
PUMP SETS
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
PUMP SETS
Pump sets are used for cooling tower and chilled water systems for existing
underground reservoirs (sumps). They can have various configurations, in
single- or double-pump systems with standby pumping available for either
system type.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Pressure gauge
• Thermometer
• Manual priming valve
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Discharge strainer
• Foot valve
• Automatic level control makeup valves
• Centrifugal close-coupled pump featuring cast iron impellers with
230 or 460/3/60 ODP motor (other voltages and motor designs
are available)
• On/Off selector switch starter (shipped loose)
• Throttling/shutoff butterfly valve
• Individual NEMA 1 starters, 230/3/60 or 460/3/60
(Thermostat, well, on/off switch for cycling tower fans,
and P2 recirculating pumps are available at extra
cost)
• Annunciator circuit alarm: base, high-temp, low
pressure, high pressure, low flow, low level, high level
• Automatic reservoir makeup package
• Suction legs over 36” long: 2.5”, 3:, 4”, 6”, or 8” (63,
76, 102, 152, or 203 mm)
• All necessary fittings
• Electronic level control with bracket
• Pressure regulating valve: 1”, 1.25”, 1.5”, or 2”
(25, 32, 38, or 51 mm)
243
PUMP SETS
SPECIFICATIONS
HEAT AND COOL
Standard selections are based on pump(s) being located 36” (91 cm) from the bottom of the sump. Longer suction legs are
available. You must provide the distance from where the pump is located to the bottom of the sump with the order.
PS1 AND PS3 MODELS
Pump, hp (kW)
3 (2.2)
5 (3.7)
7.5 (5.6)
10 (7.5)
15 (11.2)
20 (14.9)
25 (18.6)
30 (22.4)
40 (29.8)
PS2 MODELS
Pump, hp (kW)
3 (2.2)
5 (3.7)
7.5 (5.6)
10 (7.5)
15 (11.2)
20 (14.9)
Max. flow1, gpm
(lpm)
90 (340)
90 (340)
160 (605)
160 (605)
250 (946)
320 (1211)
450 (1703)
600 (2271)
900 (3406)
Discharge size, in.
NPT (mm)
2.5 (63)
2.5 (63)
3 (76)
3 (76)
4 (102)
4 (102)
6 (127)
6 (127)
6 (152)
Max. flow1, gpm (lpm)
90 (340)
160 (605)
320 (1211)
450 (1703)
600 (2271)
900 (3406)
Suction size, in.
NPT (mm)
2.5 (63)
2.5 (63)
3 (76)
3 (76)
4 (102)
4 (102)
6 (127)
6 (152)
8 (203)
Discharge size,
in. (mm) NPT
2.5 (63)
3 (76)
4 (102)
6 (127)
6 (127)
6 (152)
PS1 Ship. weight2,
lbs. (kg)
283 (129)
303 (138)
361 (164)
401 (183)
570 (259)
694 (316)
841 (382)
1031 (468)
1470 (668)
Suction size,
in. (mm) NPT
2.5 (63)
3 (76)
4 (102)
6 (127)
6 (152)
8 (203)
PS3 Ship weight2,
lbs. (kg)
394 (179)
414 (188)
502 (228)
542 (247)
846 (385)
968 (440)
1206 (548)
1504 (683)
2292 (1041)
Ship weight2, lbs. (kg)
283 (129)
351 (160)
665 (302)
857 (390)
1056 (480)
1575 (715)
1 Flow is based on pumping water at 105ºF (41ºC) or less and sump water level being no more than 48” (115 cm) below pump(s).
2 Pump weight includes pipe and valves but not shipping crate. Pump(s) are shipped as individual units, not mounted on a common base, with the suction and discharge piping
assembled but not attached to the pump.
PS_ - _
1 - process pump
2 - recirculation pump
3 - dual standby pump
3 - 3 hp
5 - 5 hp
7 - 7.5 hp
10 - 10 hp
15 - 15 hp
20 - 20 hp
25 - 25 hp
30 - 30 hp
40 - 40 hp
244
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
PUMP SETS
TYPICAL PUMP SET SYSTEM
SPECIFIATIONS
Pump, hp (kW)
3 (2.2)
5 (3.7)
7.5 (5.6)
10 (7.5)
15 (11.2)
20 (14.9)
25 (18.6)
30 (22.4)
40 (29.8)
PS1 A dimension, in. (cm)
44 (112)
46 (117)
47 (119)
57 (145)
50 (127)
53 (135)
57 (145)
62 (157)
67 (170)
HEAT AND COOL
44 (112)
48 (122)
53 (135)
57 (145)
64 (163)
70 (178)
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
44 (112)
46 (117)
48 (122)
52 (132)
55 (140)
58 (147)
63 (160)
69 (175)
76 (193)
Note: “A” dimension is the maximum distance from the centerline of the suction leg to the end of the pump
CONFIGURATIONS
Figure A
Figure B
Figure D
Figure C
245
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
PUMP SETS
PUMP CURVES
HEAT AND COOL
Note: For 50 Hz operation, derate by multiplying pressures by 0.69.
246
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
VARIABLE FREQUENCY SYSTEMS
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
AEC’s Variable Speed Systems control either the water pressure, by
varying the speed of a pump, or the cooling tower water temperature, by
varying the speed of a tower fan.
The basic system consists of three components: pressure or temperature
transmitter, speed controller, and single variable frequency drive with NEMA
1 enclosure.
Variable Frequency System
STANDARD FEATURES
An operator enters the pressure or temperature he wants to
maintain into the controller. While in operation, the controller
monitors the actual pressure or temperature by using a 4-20 mA
signal from the transmitter. After comparing the actual condition
with the setpoint, the controller sends a PID-controlled speed signal
to the variable frequency drive, telling it to speed up or slow down.
The controller does not start and stop the drive, but only tells it how
fast to go.
AEC’s variable frequency drive features Hand, Off, and Automatic
keys, allowing an operator to set the speed manually, or allow the
controller to adjust the speed automatically. Drives are UL, cUL
listed and can display motor current, running hours, hp, kW, and
other parameters for a total of 25 selections. Each drive comes with
manufacturer’s startup and an 18-month warranty.
247
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Disconnect and fuses
• 4-20 mA pressure transmitter
• 4-20 mA temperature transmitter and well
• 0-10 VDC variable speed pressure controller
• 0-10 VDC variable speed temperature controller
• Electrical enclosure to house speed controller and
other accessories (not needed if NEMA panel is
purchased with pump tank)
SPECIFICATIONS
HP, 460/3/60 voltage1
≤3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
Height, in.
15.55
15.55
15.55
15.55
22.05
22.05
22.05
27.56
27.56
31.50
31.50
37.56
1 Consult factory for other voltages
Width, in.
8.66
8.66
8.66
8.66
9.53
9.53
9.53
9.53
9.53
12.13
12.13
14.57
Depth, in.
6.30
7.87
7.87
7.87
10.24
10.24
10.24
10.24
10.24
11.65
11.65
13.19
HEAT AND COOL
Weight, lbs.
18
23
23
23
51
51
51
66
66
106
106
267
APPLICATION USES
1. Improved process control and machine operation by maintaining tight cooling water supply
pressure and tower water temp.
2. Reduced operating costs by running motors only at the horsepower required. Match electrical
input to cooling system demand.
3. Built in soft start minimizes inrush current to the motor and the mechanical shock of across-theline hard starts.
4. Eliminates the constant starting and stopping of tower fan motors while providing better
temperature control. Instead of the constant hammering of starting and stopping, the variable
frequency drive puts the motor to sleep until the demand rises.
5. Eliminate water hammer by slowly increasing and decreasing pump speed as demands fluctuate.
6. Controlled shutdown on loss of plant power. Motors will slow to a stop until the drive DC bus has
discharged. Upon the return of plant power a controlled acceleration brings the motors back up
to speed.
7. Monitor motor performance. Data such as motor current, power (kW or hp), energy (kWh),
running hours, and more can be read from the variable frequency drive or sent to a data
collection center.
8. Utilize the amount of output required to reduce energy usage and extended life of pumps. Benefit
from energy conservation programs which may be offered by local utilities.
248
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
PLATE AND FRAME HEAT EXCHANGERS
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
Plate and frame heat exchangers consist of a series of high efficiency
gasketed embossed plates, alternately arranged and bolted together
between end frames, separating cold fluid from hot fluid.
STANDARD FEATURES
• High efficiency removable and fully cleanable 304 stainless steel
gasketed plates
• Heavy-duty epoxy coated frame
• Upright, compact, and a small footprint
• Low pressure drop plate design
• Self-cleaning turbulent flow velocity profile design
• Shroud
249
Plate and Frame Exchanger
SPECIFICATIONS: 3F APPROACH
HEAT AND COOL
3F Approach: Process side 98ºF to 88ºF (37ºC to 31ºC), tower side 85ºF to 95ºF (29ºC to 35ºC)
Note: Consult factory for other conditions. Flow rate in gpm (lpm) for hot and cold side fluids = tons (Kcal/hr) x 3
Model no.
PF-010-3
PF-015-3
PF-020-3
PF-025-3
PF-030-3
PF-040-3
PF-050-3
PF-060-3
PF-075-3
PF-100-3
PF-125-3
PF-150-3
PF-175-3
PF-200-3
PF-250-3
PF-300-3
PF-400-3
PF-500-3
PF-600-3
Tower capacity, Connection
tons (Kcal/hr)
size, in.
10 (37,800)
15 (56,700)
20 (75,600)
25 (94,500)
30 (113,400)
40 (151,200)
50 (189,000)
60 (226,800)
75 (283,500)
100 (378,000)
125 (472,500)
150 (567,000)
175 (661,500)
200 (756,000)
250 (945,000)
300 (1,134,000)
400 (1,512,000)
500 (1,890,000)
600 (2,268,000)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
8
Plate
quantity,
supplied
21
31
39
49
59
77
97
54
67
89
60
71
82
93
137
163
221
281
201
Plate
quantity,
maximum
43
43
43
65
65
110
110
97
97
97
109
109
109
109
155
251
251
346
219
250
Length,
in. (cm)
29 (74)
29 (74)
32 (81)
39 (99)
39 (99)
50 (127)
50 (127)
44 (112)
44 (112)
44 (112)
58 (147)
58 (147)
58 (147)
58 (147)
64 (163)
88 (224)
88 (224)
112 (284)
93 (236)
Width,
in. (cm)
Height,
in. (cm)
14 (36)
14 (36)
14 (36)
14 (36)
14 (36)
14 (36)
14 (36)
22 (56)
22 (56)
22 (56)
30 (76)
30 (76)
30 (76)
30 (76)
25 (64)
25 (64)
25 (64)
25 (64)
35 (89)
Weight,
lbs. (kg)
48 (122)
48 (122)
48 (122)
48 (122)
48 (122)
48 (122)
48 (122)
62 (157)
62 (157)
62 (157)
85 (216)
85 (216)
85 (216)
85 (216)
72 (183)
72 (183)
72 (183)
72 (183)
92 (234)
H
E
A
T
&
516 (233)
538 (245)
555 (252)
604 (275)
626 (285)
672 (306)
716 (326)
1,526 (693)
1,589 (722)
1,695 (769)
3,718 (1,688)
3,824 (1,737)
3,929 (1,784)
4,035 (1,832)
2,764 (1,255)
2,997 (1,361)
3,323 (1,509)
4,157 (1,888)
6,638 (3,014)
C
O
O
L
SPECIFICATIONS: 5F APPROACH
HEAT AND COOL
5F Approach: Process side 100ºF to 90ºF (38ºC to 32ºC), tower side 85ºF to 95ºF (29ºC to 35ºC)
Note: Consult factory for other conditions. Flow rate in gpm (lpm) for hot and cold side fluids = tons (Kcal/hr) x 3
Model no.
PF-010-5
PF-015-5
PF-020-5
PF-025-5
PF-030-5
PF-040-5
PF-050-5
PF-060-5
PF-075-5
PF-100-5
PF-125-5
PF-150-5
PF-175-5
PF-200-5
PF-250-5
PF-300-5
PF-400-5
PF-500-5
PF-600-5
Tower capacity, Connection
tons (Kcal/hr)
size, in.
10 (37,800)
15 (56,700)
20 (75,600)
25 (94,500)
30 (113,400)
40 (151,200)
50 (189,000)
60 (226,800)
75 (283,500)
100 (378,000)
125 (472,500)
150 (567,000)
175 (661,500)
200 (756,000)
250 (945,000)
300 (1,134,000)
400 (1,512,000)
500 (1,890,000)
600 (2,268,000)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
8
Plate
quantity,
supplied
15
21
49
49
41
53
67
55
43
57
67
87
95
119
149
89
123
163
211
Plate
quantity,
maximum
49
49
49
49
49
71
71
65
49
62
97
154
145
154
175
155
155
251
251
251
Length,
in. (cm)
29 (74)
29 (74)
29 (74)
29 (74)
29 (74)
36 (91)
36 (91)
36 (91)
31 (79)
39 (99)
44 (112)
63 (160)
44 (112)
63 (160)
63 (160)
64 (163)
64 (163)
88 (224)
88 (224)
Width,
in. (cm)
Height,
in. (cm)
14 (36)
14 (36)
14 (36)
14 (36)
14 (36)
14 (36)
14 (36)
14 (36)
21 (53)
21 (53)
22 (56)
21 (53)
22 (56)
21 (53)
21 (53)
25 (64)
25 (64)
25 (64)
25 (64)
Weight,
lbs. (kg)
39 (99)
39 (99)
39 (99)
39 (99)
39 (99)
39 (99)
39 (99)
48 (122)
54 (137)
54 (137)
62 (157)
54 (137)
62 (157)
54 (137)
54 (137)
72 (183)
72 (183)
72 (183)
72 (183)
H
E
A
T
&
415 (189)
425 (193)
425 (193)
449 (204)
459 (209)
501 (228)
524 (238)
617 (281)
1,135 (516)
1,216 (553)
1,589 (722)
1,383 (628)
1,724 (783)
1,478 (672)
1,567 (712)
2,494 (1,133)
2,685 (1,219)
2,997 (1,361)
3,267 (1,484)
C
O
O
L
DIMENSIONS
HEAT AND COOL
CLOSED LOOP SYSTEM
252
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
WATER COOLING & RECOVERY SYSTEMS
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
CTS SERIES PROCESS WATER COOLING & RECOVERY
CTS Water Cooling and Recovery Systems are shipped complete and
include: cooling tower(s), epoxy lined and painted steel, rotomolded
polyethylene reservoir assembly with close-coupled pump with trim
mounted in place. The “M” models have Metal towers, the “P” models
have Polymer towers, and the “F” models have Fiberglass towers.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Metal, polymer, or fiberglass cooling tower
• Close-coupled pump with suction shut-off valve, check valve,
throttling discharge valve, and gauge trim in accordance with
AEC pump and trim specification
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Tank legs
• “M” models: metal cooling tower
• Thermostat(s)
• “P” models: polymer cooling tower
• Thermometer(s)
• “F” models: fiberglass cooling tower
• Valves
• Strainer basket
253
WATER COOLING & RECOVERY SYSTEMS
CONFIGURATIONS
HEAT AND COOL
TOWER SUMP RESERVOIR
INDOOR RESERVOIR WITH SINGLE COMPARTMENT
INDOOR RESERVOIR WITH DOUBLE COMPARTMENT
DOUBLE PUMP WITH GRAVITY RETURN RESERVOIR
System using cooling tower basin as water reservoir. The
double pump arrangement in this system provides downtime
protection and is recommended for high volume pumping
application. The tower sump reservoir is only recommended
for warm climate process cooling or summer air conditioning
condenser water applications.
Double compartment reservoirs with separate process and
recirculating pumps maintain a constant water flow between
the tank and tower. This arrangement is recommended
where widely fluctuating loads are common, or where loads
will vary and partial system capacity will be utilized. It also
assures positive freeze protection and consistent tank water
temperature control under partial load.
Indoor water reservoir with single compartment can operate
in cold climates without danger of freezing. This system is
widely used where flow conditions are relatively constant.
The standard design condition for 100% tower efficiency in
this arrangement is 3 gpm per ton of cooling tower capacity.
Below grade reservoirs with double compartments and
separate process and recirculating pumps are normally
used in process cooling applications where zero back
pressure is required. This system is also suited to
fluctuating cooling loads, or where only partial system
capacity will be utilized.
254
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
P SERIES POLYETHYLENE COOLING TOWERS
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
Our 50 ton polyethylene cooling towers are lightweight, with corrosion and
crack-resistant polyethylene construction. AEC cooling tower systems are
used wherever a reduction of water costs and/or control of mineral
precipitation associated with cooling applications is desired.
STANDARD FEATURES
P Series Cooling Tower
• Lightweight corrosion and crack-resistant polyethylene
construction
• PVC header
• PVC honeycomb heat transfer section
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Steel base support structure
• 460/3/60 or 230/3/60 starter package, including
starter, on/off switch, thermostat, and well (consult
factory for 208V or 575V)
• Anti-clog ABS nozzle
• PVC fill and drift eliminator section with ultraviolet protection
• Basin reservoir, to be used where the basin of the
tower serves as a reservoir. It is not necessary to
purchase this package where an inside reservoir is
used. The parts consist of a 0.75” automatic float
valve, water outlet basket strainer, and overflow
connection.
• 5 hp centrifugal fan with TEFC motor
• Balancing valve; includes butterfly valve and pressure gauge
• Flex connection
• Heater, used with basin reservoir option to guard
against freeze-up when system is shut down.
Includes heater and low water heater shut off.
• Factory startup, including checking motors, flow,
and adjusting nozzles. Towers must be installed and
connected, including all piping and electrical hookups
before AEC arrives on site.
255
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
PS50
Capacity,1
tons
(Kcal/hr)
50 (151,200)
Fan motor,
hp (kW)
5 (3.73)
Water inlet Water outlet
Length, in.
dia., in.
dia., in.
(cm)
(mm)
(mm)
3 (76)
4 (102)
85 (216)
HEAT AND COOL
Width, in.
(cm)
52 (132)
Ship.
Operating
Height, in.
weight, lbs. weight, lbs.
(cm)
(kg)
(kg)
101 (257)
850 (386)
1250 (568)
1 Capacity based upon 15,000 BTU/hr (3,024 Kcal/hr) heat rejection per ton (3,024 Kcal/hr chilled water, 3,780 Kcal/hr tower water). Flow equals 3 gpm per ton (1.563 lpm per
1,000 Kcal/hr). Entering water temperature 95ºF (35ºC), leaving water temperature 85ºF (29ºC), 78ºF (26ºC) ambient wet bulb. Consult factory for other requirements.
Configuration “S”
Configuration “L”
256
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
FG SERIES FIBERGLASS COOLING TOWERS
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
FG Series cooling towers offer unparalleled corrosion resistance, energy
efficiency and performance.
If your cooling temperature requirements range from 85ºF upward, you may
reduce your process water consumption up to 98.5% by using cooling
towers to remove process heat. AEC Cooling Tower Systems are used
wherever a reduction of water costs and/or control of mineral precipitation
associated with cooling applications is desired.
STANDARD FEATURES
FG Series Tower
• High-efficiency induced-draft design
• Balancing valve and pressure gauge
• Lightweight non-corrosive fiberglass shell with fiberglass side
seams
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Vertical air discharge
• 460/3/60 or 230/3/60 starter package, including
starter, on/off switch, thermostat, and well (consult
factory for 208V or 575V)
• Stainless steel hardware
• Factory-tuned fan blade pitch
• Totally-enclosed non-ventilated energy-efficient TENV fan motor
• Large inspection/access door
• Anti-clog ABS nozzle(s)
• Bottom outlet (requires a 24” [61 cm] minimum support base
under the tower)
• Basin reservoir, to be used where the basin of the
tower serves as a reservoir. It is not necessary to
purchase this package where an inside reservoir is
used. The parts consist of a 0.75” automatic float
valve, water outlet basket strainer, and overflow
connection (Not recommended for bottom outlet
towers).
• Heater, used with basin reservoir option to guard
against freeze-up when system is shut down.
Includes heater and low water heater shut off.
• PVC Fill and Drift eliminators with ultraviolet (UV) protection
• Exterior gel coat/UV inhibitor
adjusting nozzles. Towers must be installed and
• 2 year warranty on parts
• 1 year warranty on fan motors
• Access ladder, meets OSHA requirements (shipped
loose for field installation)
• 1 year warranty on labor (labor in North America)
• Side outlet configuration available at no charge
257
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
FG 2003
FG 2004
FG 2005
FG 2007
FG 2009
FG 2011
FG 2015
HEAT AND COOL
Fan
Amp
Water inlet
Water
Ship.
Operating
Length, in. Width, in. Height, in.
Capacity,1
motor, hp draw,
dia., in. outlet dia.,
weight, lbs. weight, lbs.
(cm)
(cm)
(cm)
tons (Kcal/hr)
(kW)
460/3/60
(mm)
in. (mm)
(kg)
(kg)
50 (151,200)
2 (1.5)
75 (226,800)
5 (3.7)
100 (302,400) 5 (3.7)
125 (378,000) 5 (3.7)
150 (453,600) 10 (7.5)
175 (529,200) 10 (7.5)
200 (604,800) 15 (11.2)
3.4
7.6
7.6
7.6
14
14
21
4 (102)
4 (102)
4 (102)
4 (102)
4 (102)
4 (102)
4 (102)
4 (102)
6 (152)
8 (203)
8 (203)
8 (203)
8 (203)
8 (203)
64 (163) 64 (163) 104 (264) 600 (273)
64 (163) 64 (163) 125 (318) 750 (341)
82 (208) 82 (208) 121 (307) 1400 (636)
82 (208) 82 (208) 121 (307) 1500 (681)
100 (254) 100 (254) 123 (313) 1950 (886)
100 (254) 100 (254) 123 (313) 2100 (954)
100 (254) 100 (254) 124 (315) 2600 (1181)
1300 (591)
1700 (772)
2900 (1317)
3200 (1453)
3800 (1726)
4400 (1998)
5200 (2361)
1 Capacity based upon 15,000 BTU/hr (3,024 Kcal/hr) heat rejection per ton (3,024 Kcal/hr chilled water, 3,780 Kcal/hr tower water). Flow equals 3 gpm per ton (1.563 lpm per
1,000 Kcal/hr). Entering water temperature 95ºF (35ºC), leaving water temperature 85ºF (29ºC), 78ºF (26ºC) ambient wet bulb. Consult factory for other requirements.
L
W
H
L
258
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
M SERIES METAL COOLING TOWERS
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
Energy efficient M Series induced-draft cross flow towers are preassembled and feature galvanized components and PVC fill for
corrosion protection.
M Series Tower
STANDARD FEATURES
• Thermostat-controlled operation
• Heavy-gauge G-235 galvanized steel
• Propeller fan
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• PVC wet deck
• Over-spray eliminator
• Fan starters with thermostats, 230/3/60 or 460/3/60
(230/3/60 not available on 50 or 60 hp fans)
• 5 year warranty on the gear reducer on large capacity towers
• OSHA handrail and ladder (8302D and larger models)
• 2 inlet control valves (8302D and larger models)
adjusting nozzles. Towers must be installed and
• Consult factory for availability of forced draft design
towers and 208 V or 575 V applications.
259
SPECIFICATIONS
Model1
490B
492A
492B
493A
493B
494A
494B
494C
495A
495B
496A
496B
Fan
Water inlet Water outlet Length, in. Width, in.
Capacity2, tons
motor3, hp
dia., in.
dia., in.
(cm)
(cm)
(Kcal/hr)
(kW)
10 (30,240)
1 (0.75)
2
2
36 (91)
51 (130)
22 (66,528)
1 (0.75)
4
4
48 (122)
61 (155)
28 (84,672)
2 (1.50)
4
4
48 (122)
61 (155)
36 (108,864)
2 (1.50)
4
4
72 (183)
61 (155)
42 (127,008)
3 (2.24)
4
4
72 (183)
61 (155)
51 (154,224)
2 (1.50)
6
6
72 (183)
78 (198)
57 (172,368)
3 (2.24)
6
6
72 (183)
78 (198)
68 (205,632)
5 (3.73)
6
6
72 (183)
78 (198)
80 (241,920)
5 (3.73)
6
6
96 (244)
78 (198)
91 (275,184) 7.5 (5.60)
6
6
96 (244)
78 (198)
111 (335,664)
5 (3.73)
6
6
120 (305)
78 (198)
127 (384,048) 7.5 (5.60)
6
6
120 (305)
78 (198)
LARGE CAPACITY METAL COOLING TOWERS
Model1
8302D
8302E
8302F
8303F
8303G
8304E
8304F
8304G
8305F
8305G
8305H
8305J
8306J
8307J
8307K
8307M
HEAT AND COOL
Fan
Water Water
Length, in.
Capacity2, tons
outlet
motor3, hp inlet
(cm)
(Kcal/hr)
dia., in. dia., in.
(kW)
184 (556,416)
5 (3.73)
6
8
95 (241)
204 (616,896)
10 (7.46)
6
8
95 (241)
231 (698,544)
10 (7.46)
6
10
95 (241)
259 (783,216)
15 (11.19)
6
10
95 (241)
283 (855,792)
20 (14.92)
6
10
95 (241)
310 (937,440)
15 (11.19)
6
10
107 (272)
339 (1,025,136) 20 (14.92)
6
12
107 (272)
362 (1,094,688) 25 (18.65)
6
12
107 (272)
403 (1,218,672) 20 (14.92)
8
12
131 (333)
31 (1,303,344) 25 (18.65)
8
12
131 (333)
453 (1,369,872) 30 (22.38)
8
14
131 (333)
501 (1,515,024) 40 (29.84)
8
14
131 (333)
557 (1,684,368) 40 (29.84)
8
14
143 (363)
582 (1,759,968) 40 (29.84)
8
16
143 (363)
622 (1,880,928) 50 (37.30)
8
16
143 (363)
651 (1,968,624) 60 (44.76)
8
16
143 (363)
Width, in.
(cm)
186 (472)
186 (472)
186 (472)
186 (472)
186 (472)
204 (518)
204 (518)
204 (518)
225 (572)
225 (572)
225 (572)
225 (572)
238 (605)
269 (684)
269 (684)
269 (684)
Operating
Height, in. Ship. weight,
weight, lbs.
(cm)
lbs. (kg)
(kg)
63 (160)
437 (198)
756 (343)
89 (226)
742 (337)
1396 (633)
89 (226)
742 (337)
1396 (633)
89 (226)
982 (445)
1995 (905)
89 (226)
982 (445)
1995 (905)
108 (274)
982 (445)
1995 (905)
108 (274)
1398 (634) 2948 (1337)
108 (274)
1398 (634) 2948 (1337)
108 (274)
1758 (797) 3856 (1749)
108 (274)
1758 (797) 3856 (1749)
116 (295)
2123 (963) 4778 (2167)
116 (295)
2123 (963) 4778 (2167)
Height, in.
(cm)
123 (312)
123 (312)
123 (312)
144 (366)
144 (366)
156 (396)
156 (396)
156 (396)
156 (396)
156 (396)
156 (396)
156 (396)
156 (396)
160 (407)
160 (407)
160 (407)
Ship. weight,
Operating
lbs. (kg)
weight, lbs. (kg)
5261 (2386)
5287 (2398)
5381 (2441)
5838 (2648)
5899 (2676)
6832 (3099)
6893 (3127)
6951 (3153)
8730 (3960)
8788 (3986)
8850 (4014)
9147 (4149)
10,159 (4608)
11,384 (5164)
11,666 (5292)
11,946 (5419)
1 Model 490B has a side outlet. Models 492A through 496B have side or bottom outlets. All other models are bottom outlets.
2 Tonnage is based on cooling 3 gpm per ton (1.563 lpm per 1,000 Kcal/hr) from 95ºF to 85ºF (35ºC to 29ºC) at a 78ºF (26ºC) wet bulb.
3 Motors are 230/460 VAC, 3-phase TEFC.
260
H
E
A
T
&
11,518 (5225)
11,544 (5236)
11,638 (5279)
12,095 (5486)
12,156 (5514)
14,507 (6580)
14,568 (6608)
14,626 (6634)
19,025 (8630)
19,083 (8656)
19,145 (8684)
19,442 (8819)
21,972 (9966)
26,442 (11994)
26,724 (12122)
27,004 (12249)
C
O
O
L
TOWER WATER MANAGMENT SYSTEM
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
TWMV280 TOWER WATER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Untreated cooling tower water can rob your process cooling system of
heat transfer efficiency and cooling capacity. AEC has the answer. Our
model TWMV280 Tower Water Management System provides four-way
protection for tower sizes up to 700 tons—all in one compact, fully
automatic package that’s nearly maintenance free. The TWMV290 is
shipped with all components pre-mounted and pre-plumbed. All
components are mounted on a 33" x 33" enameled steel panel. Once
the system is mounted, plumbing completed, and power supplied, the
TWMV280 is ready for operation.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Full automatic control includes a programmable “menu-driven”
electronic controller with 2-year warranty protection
• Factory-assembled, complete with self-priming peristaltic pumps
• Preset before shipment to precisely match the tested conditions of
your application
• Quarterly analysis provided by AEC
• 5 gallons (19 liters) of biocide
TWMV280
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Heavy-duty filtration, sand and gravel filters or fullflow bag filters
• Organo phosphonate test kit, used to verify proper
chemical feed levels
• 5 gallons (19 liters) of scale and corrosion inhibitor (selection
based on water analysis)
• Chloride test kit, used to verify proper bleed-off
operation
• Branch fusing
• 3/4" water supply, 1.5" process connections, valve size matches
drain size
• Four separate treatment phases:
• Monitors make up water flow and meters an accurate blend of
scale and corrosion control agents into the tower system
• Prevents biological fouling by “slug” feeding microbiocide at
predetermined intervals
• Centrifugal Separator # 9050
• Probe & Feed Assembly # 9990
• Conductivity Sensor A0544928
• Programmable Controller 1575CTRL
• Peristaltic Metering Assembly A0544931
• Solenoid Valve Assembly A0544932
• 1” Turbine Meter A0544927
• Hall Effect Cable A0544929
• Automatically removes suspended solids by means of a
centrifugal separator coupled to a solenoid valve
• Automatically regulates the concentration of dissolved solids
by using a conductivity meter, which acts as the separator purge
261
• Pump Repair Kit PX01142
TOWER WATER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
SPECIFICATIONS
Model number
TWMV280
TEST KITS
Model number
TK-1
TK-2
140 (64)
Width, in. (cm)
33 (84)
Description
Organo phosphate test kit (p.n. A0504914)
Chloride test kit (p.n. A0509929)
HEAT AND COOL
Height, in. (cm)
33 (84)
Voltage
115/1/60
2 (1)
2 (1)
TYPICAL TOWER WATER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM SCHEMATIC
262
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
CENTRIFUGAL SEPARATION SYSTEMS
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
AEC centrifugal separation systems are for use on cooling tower or chilled
water systems requiring large capacity, heavy-duty suspended solids
removal. The CSS-150 is designed to handle up to 150-ton (453,600
Kcal/hr) tower systems, and it can be mounted on a pump tank or piped in
a bypass line. The system performs all operations, including separator
purging, automatically. The CSS-400 has been designed for larger tower
water system applications.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Centrifugal separator
• 1/3 hp (0.25 kW) pump
• 1/2” PVC electrically activated ball valve
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• 115/1/60 control station
NOTE: Not to be used for closed-loop or chilled water systems;
back flushing eliminates chemicals added to the system.
263
• Tower or chiller operation
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
CSS-150
CSS-400
Description
150-ton (453,600 Kcal/hr) tower max.
300-ton (907,200 Kcal/hr) chiller max.
400-ton (1,209,600 Kcal/hr) tower max.
800-ton (2,419,200 Kcal/hr) chiller max.
HEAT AND COOL
Length, in. (cm) Width, in. (cm) Height, in. (cm)
29 (74)
19.5 (50)
26 (66)
29 (74)
19.5 (50)
26 (66)
26 (66)
20 (51)
41 (104)
26 (66)
20 (51)
41 (104)
264
H
E
Ship. Weight, lbs. (kg)
130 (60)
130 (60)
150 (69)
150 (69)
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
SAND & GRAVEL, BAG, AND FULL-FLOW FILTERS
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
Full-flow Filter
L
AEC sand and gravel filters are offered for use on cooling tower or chilled
water systems requiring large capacity, heavy-duty suspended solids
removal. The system switches valves automatically.
BF Series bag filters can be used in full flow or bypass configurations. A
bypass configuration is recommended for chilled water systems.
WF Series full-flow filters feature a conical shaped screen. Heavy solids are
forced to the bottom of the strainer. A flush port on the filter housing allows
collected debris to be easily purged from the system.
Sand & Gravel Filter
Bag Filter
SAND & GRAVEL FILTERS
• Tank
• Valve manifold
• Gauges
• Initial charge of sand and gravel
SAND & GRAVEL FILTER OPTIONS
BF SERIES BAG FILTERS
• Pressure differential backwash or time-operated
backwash
• Tower or chiller operation
• Bypass
BAG FILTER OPTIONS
• Pressure gauges
• Differential pressure alarm, 115/1/60 supply with a
10 ft. power cord. includes 20 ft. of poly tubing,
differential pressure switch, audible and visual
alarms, and silence button for audible alarm
• 25 micron filter bags
WF SERIES FULL-FLOW FILTERS
• Filter housing, filter elements, and flanges constructed from 304
stainless steel
• Max. working pressure is 100 psi (689.5kPa/6.895 bars).
• 80 mesh standard screen size; 40 mesh can be used for tower
water.
• Valving and bypass not included
265
• Additional filter bags
FULL-FLOW FILTER OPTIONS
• Differential pressure alarm
• Automatic dump valve with timer
• Additional stainless steel strainer basket
• Other screen mesh sizes: 16M, 30M, 40M, 50M, 60M,
100M, 120M, 200M
SAND & GRAVEL FILTERS
HEAT AND COOL
Sand and Gravel Filters provide heavy-duty filtration to protect equipment by trapping dirt and other particulate matter. The AEC
unit contains a precharged bed of sand and gravel that must be cleaned periodically. Cleaning is easily accomplished by
periodically reversing the flow of water through the filter vessel. Reverse flow “fluffs” the sand bed, freeing dirt and entrapped
material, which is directed to a waste line. Automatic “backwash” can be achieved with a timer (Model SG250A), or by a pressure
differential switch (Model SG250P).
SG-250A sand and gravel automatic backwash filters are available in 250-ton (756,000 Kcal/hr) tower (Model SG-250A) and 500ton (1,512,000 Kcal/hr) chiller (Model SG250P) maximum capacity. Please specify when ordering.
Model
SG250
Length, in. (cm)
40 (101)
Width, in. (cm)
48 (122)
Height, in. (cm)
39 (99)
1800 (818)
BAG FILTERS
Full Flow Bag Filters are an economical way to remove dirt and particulate from your cooling water system. Complete assembly
includes bypass, pressure gauges and 25 micron filter bags. An optional pressure differential alarm is also available.
Model
BF-30
BF-65
BF-90
BF-200
BF-300
BF-450
30 (113)
65 (246)
90 (340)
200 (757)
300 (1135)
450 (1703)
FULL-FLOW FILTERS
Model
WF-100
WF-200
WF-350
WF-750
WF-1300
WF-2000
# filter bags required
1
1
1
1
2
3
100 (378)
200 (757)
350 (1325)
750 (2839)
1300 (4920)
2000 (7570)
Easy removable bolted or clamped lid
Pipe size, in. NPT (mm)
1.5 (38)
2.5 (63)
2.5 (63)
3 (76)
4 (102)
5 (127)
Connection size/flange, in. (mm)
2 (51)
3 (76)
4 (102)
6 (152)
8 (203)
10 (254)
Patented conical strainer screen
Stainless steel bolts (bolted models only)
Outlet gauge port
Clean water separation seal
Inlet gauge port
Large debris reservoir
Strainer stand
Debris flush/drain port
# filter bags supplied
3
3
3
3
6
12
266
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
ION EXCHANGE WATER SOFTENING SYSTEMS
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
Ion exchange softening is used to remove hardness from water to prevent
scaling. Dissolved iron up to 6 mg/I can be removed with softening. AEC
water softeners have been designed for excellent reliability. Each tank is
industrial-quality steel for strength and durability, protected inside and out
against corrosion.
The monolithic polyethylene tank lining is tightly bonded to the tank under
a high heat fusion process. All closures sit on O-ring seals that rest on a
plastic inner liner, so that water or regenerates never touch metal. The tank
exterior has a triple coat epoxy finish.
STANDARD FEATURES
Ion Exchange System
• Hydraulic 5-cycle multi-port valve with built-in eductors
• Modular design for fast, easy maintenance
• Regeneration is accomplished with NaCl (salt) brine
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Brine tank
• Internal plumbing
• Ion exchanger TK-5 total hardness test kit (p.n.
A0509927), 22 lbs. (10 kg) shipping weight
• Valves
• Quartz gravel support beds
• 14-day time clock controls
• 120V / 60 Hz / 2 amps
• 35ºF to 125ºF operating temperature (2ºC to 52ºC)
267
SPECIFICATIONS
HEAT AND COOL
Feed Water Requirements:
Turbidity: 5.0 NTU max.
Chlorine: 1.0 mg/l max.
Iron-Ferrous: 15.0 mg/l max.
Note: Ferrous iron greater than 0.1 mg/1 may require special regeneration
Tank
Model depth,
in. (cm)
120D 18 (46)
240D 24 (61)
420D 30 (76)
Tank
Pipe Continuous
Continous
Max. drain
Peak pressure,
Peak flow1,
height, dia., in. flow, gpm
pressure, psi
flow, gpm
psi (kPa/bars)
gpm (lpm)
in. (cm) (mm)
(lpm)
(kPa/bars)
(lpm)
66 (168) 2 (51)
32 (121)
48 (182)
5 (34 / 0.34)
8 (55 / 0.55)
18 (68)
66 (168) 2 (51)
55 (208)
85 (322)
7 (48 / 0.48)
13 (89 / 0.89)
18 (68)
66 (168) 2 (51)
95 (359)
140 (530) 10 (69 / 0.69) 18 (124 / 1.24)
24 (91)
Cap.2 K Media vol.,
cu. ft. (l)
grains
120
210
450
1 Peak flow rates are not recommended for extended periods of time.
2 Capacity is based on 10 gpg total hardness as CaCO3, free of color, oil, and turbidity.
Note: Use 80% capacity for tap feed Continuous Deionizing (CDI) and salt setting of 15 lb. per cu. ft. (240 Kg/m3).
4 (15)
7 (26)
15 (56)
CULLIGAN® WATER TREATMENT MAINTENANCE SERVICE
The Culligan® water treatment maintenance program provides on-site
professional water treatment service for open and closed systems. This
program is designed to eliminate chemical product inventory and
handling by the customer. Routine service is scheduled and performed
by trained water treatment personnel.
Service
• Placement, mangement, and dosing of AEC water treatment products
• Routine test and evaluation of tower and makeup water
• On-site monthly service visit
• Maintenance and service, including parts and labor of tower water
management systems
Monitoring
• Corrosion monitoring with the use of corrosion coupons and corrators
• Remote monitoring (DTM-2000 systems only)
Reporting
• Quarterly review with customer
• Report issued after each visit
• Inspection results during scheduled outages
All costs are based on a minimum 24-month contract. Consult factory for
costs outside the United States. Startup includes initial setup, corrosion
coupons and/or corrator tips and plugs, calibration of control/chemical
feed equipment, travel, and living costs.
268
Culligan service is applicable to the following
cooling tower sizes and models:
Cooling tower capacity
tons
Kcal/hr.
50
151,200
100
302,400
150
453,600
200
604,800
250
756,000
300
907,000
350
1,058,400
400
1,209,600
450
1,360,800
500
1,512,000
550
1,663,200
600
1,816,400
650
1,965,600
700
2,116,800
750
2,268,000
800
2,419,200
850
2,570,400
900
2,721,600
950
2,872,800
1,000
3,024,000
H
Maximum flow rate
gpm
lpm
150
568
300
1,136
450
1,703
600
2,271
750
2,839
900
3,407
1,050
3,974
1,200
4,542
1,350
5,110
1,500
5,678
1,650
6,245
1,800
6,813
1,950
7,381
2,100
7,949
2,250
8,516
2,400
9,084
2,550
9,652
2,700
10,220
2,850
10,787
3,000
11,355
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
WATER TREATMENT SUPPLIES
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
AEC offers a complete line of water treatment supplies, including tower
water chemicals and supplies, chilled water chemicals and supplies, and a
variety of cleaners and descalers. Specialty service chemicals and products
are also available.
TOWER WATER CHEMICALS AND SUPPLIES
AEC Descaling Fluid
• Cooling tower system water treatment
• Scale and corrosion inhibitors for cooling tower systems
• Tower water management test kit
• Descaling
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM TREATMENT
• Chilled water system treatment
• Closed system treatment for chilled water systems
CLEANERS, DE-SCALERS AND SPECIALTY CHEMICALS
• Anti-foulant
• Descaler
• Industrial cleaner
• Low foaming detergent
• System cleaner
• Dispersant
• Anti-foam
• Safe glycol
• Ethylene glycol
TEST KITS
269
TOWER WATER CHEMICALS AND SUPPLIES
Cooling Tower System Water Treatment
Model
BIO-1
Description
Biocide No. 1, p.n. A0509388
HEAT AND COOL
44 (20)
Volume, gal. (l)
5 (18.9)
Additional quantities of BIO-1 and biological test kits (a means of indicating bacterial contamination) are available
Scale and Corrosion Inhibitors for Cooling Tower Systems
Model
AEC2000-H
AEC2000-H
AEC2000-L
AEC2000-L
Description
Scale and corrosion inhibitors for hard water, p.n. A0504153
Scale and corrosion inhibitors for hard water, p.n. A0504153
Scale and corrosion inhibitors for low hardness water, p.n. A0504154
Scale and corrosion inhibitors for low hardness water, p.n. A0504154
45 (20)
495 (225)
45 (20)
495 (225)
Volume, gal. (l)
5 (18.9)
55 (208)
5 (18.9)
55 (208)
AEC2000-H is tower treatment for hard water makeup (>150 ppm) and AEC2000-L is tower treatment for low hardness water makeup (<150 ppm). Use 300 to 600 ppm in tower
water. Use STEP Test Kit for monitoring.
Tower Water Mangement Test Kit
Model
TK-1
Description
Organo phosphonate test kit, p.n. A0504914
2 (1)
Organo phosphonate test kit measures phosphonate concentration to assure proper operation and feed rate of the chemical feeder.
De-Scaling
Model
LDA-1
Description
Liquid de-scaling agent, p.n. A0502600
44 (20)
Volume, gal. (l)
5 (18.9)
AEC Liquid De-Scaling Agent (LDA-1) is circulated through the heat exchanger. After de-scaling, the piping and equipment is flushed and dried with a compressed air purge.
Additional five (5) -gallon (18.9-liter) quantities of LDA-1 are available. Contact your AEC sales representative for more information.
270
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
CHILLED WATER CHEMICALS AND SUPPLIES
Chilled Water System Treatment
Model
IEG-1
IPG-1
CWT-1
Description
Inhibited ethylene glycol, p.n. A0541358
Inhibited propylene glycol, p.n. A0542990
Chilled water treatment, p.n. W000173
HEAT AND COOL
Ship weight, lbs. (kg)
45 (21)
45 (21)
10 (5)
Volume, gal. (l)
5 (18.9)
5 (18.9)
1 (3.8)
Systems requiring glycol should be protected with an industrial-grade antifreeze. IEG-1 contains a blend of ethylene glycol and corrosion inhibitor. IPG-1 contains a blend of
propylene glycol and corrosion inhibitor.
CWT-1 is a multi-component cooling water scale and corrosion inhibitor. It is formulated for both ferrous and non-ferrous chilled water systems. It does not contain heavy metal or
other substances regulated by the EPA. Recommended dosage is 32 ounces per 100 gallons (1 liter per 400 liters) of system volume.
Closed System Treatment for Chilled Water Systems
Model
AEC2500CL
AEC2500CL
AEC2500CL
Description
6 single-gallon jugs, p.n. A0000173
5 gallons, p.n. A0553842
55 gallons, p.n. A0553833
54 (25)
45 (21)
500 (227)
Volume, gal. (l)
6 (23)
5 (18.9)
55 (208)
Closed loop treatment for protection against corrosion and deposits. Use 1 gallon per 33 gallons (1 liter per 35 liters) of water. Use STEP Test Kit for monitoring.
271
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
HEAT AND COOL
CLEANERS, DE-SCALERS AND SPECIALTY SERVICE CHEMICALS AND PRODUCTS
Part
number
Type
A0509388 Anti-foulant 5 (18.9)
45 (21)
A0502600
Descaler
5 (18.9)
45 (21)
A0553834
Descaler
55 (208)
500 (227)
5 (18.9)
50 (23)
Low foaming
5 (18.9)
detergent
40 (19)
A0553840
A0542992
Industrial
cleaner
Volume, Ship. weight,
gal. (l)
lbs. (kg)
A0509626
System
cleaner
5 (18.9)
45 (21)
A0553835
System
cleaner
55 (208)
500 (227)
5 (18.9)
45 (21)
A0553837 Dispersant
Anti-foam
18 8-oz
(237 ml)
bottles
A0552990 Safe glycol
5 (18.9)
A0553836
A0552991 Safe glycol 55 (208)
10 (5)
45 (21)
495 (225)
A0541358
Ethylene
glycol
5 (18.9)
50 (23)
A0539637
Ethylene
glycol
55 (208)
500 (227)
TEST KITS
Part number
A0553838
A0553839
Comments
For use in both open and closed recirculating water systems. Prevents fouling caused by
water-borne constituents and organic materials.
Strong acid descaler for removal of mineral scale buildup from heat exchangers, tanks,
etc. Contains muriatic acid. Inhibited to prevent corrosive attack.
Strong acid descaler for removal of mineral scale buildup from heat exchangers, tanks,
etc. Contains muriatic acid. Inhibited to prevent corrosive attack
Non-hazardous cleaner for removal of mineral scale and metal oxides from heat
exchangers, tanks, etc. For best results, use 20% (min.) solution.
Low foaming detergent for cleaning open and closed recirculating water systems. Use 2
to 4 gallons per 100 gallons (2 to 4 liters per 100 liters) of water.
New system startup chemical cleaner. Effective in removing mill scales, greases, and
other foulants associated with new construction. Use 1 to 3 gallons per 100 gallons (1 to
3 liters per 100 liters) of water.
New system startup chemical cleaner. Effective in removing mill scales, greases, and
other foulants associated with new construction. Use 1 to 3 gallons per 100 gallons (1 to
3 liters per 100 liters) of water.
Supplements AEC 2000H and AEC 2000L by enhancing the cleanliness of heat transfer
surfaces. Use 200 to 400 ppm in the system once or twice per week.
Cooling and process anti-foam. To control foam, use 2 to 4 fluid ounces per 100 gallons
(60 to 120 ml per 38 liters); packaged in 8 fl. oz. (237 ml) bottles only.
Propylene glycol solution. An environmentally safe alternative to ethylene glycol. Refer to
glycol charts for usage concentration. AEC2500 CL must be used in closed systems for
protection against deposits and corrosion.
Propylene glycol solution. An environmentally safe alternative to ethylene glycol. Refer to
glycol charts for usage concentration. AEC2500 CL must be used in closed systems for
protection against deposits and corrosion.
Freeze/burst protection fluid for closed chiller water systems. Refer to EG charts for
proper use concentration. AEC2500 CL must be used in closed systems for protection
against deposits and corrosion.
Freeze/burst protection fluid for closed chiller water systems. Refer to EG charts for
proper use concentration. AEC2500 CL must be used in closed systems for protection
against deposits and corrosion.
Description
Test kit for chemical levels
Test kit refill
272
Quantity
30 tests per kit
30 refills per package
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
DESCALING SYSTEM & FLUID FOR TCUS
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
HEAT AND COOL
L
AEC DESCALING SYSTEM & FLUID FOR TCUS
AEC is proud to offer a proven method to remove scale, lime, and rust
deposits—the AEC Descaling System and fluid. The descaling system is
designed to work with AEC temperature control units, or any other brand,
as well as other water equipment where clogging can reduce efficiency
and performance.
The descaling system is portable and easy to operate. The system
operates on any 110V outlet and connects easily to your processes with
quick-attach hoses. It is designed specifically to circulate AEC descaling
fluid, which is a tar oil-based liquid with wetting and penetrating agents.
STANDARD FEATURES
Descaling Unit
• Quick-attach hose fitting
• 3/4” delivery and return connections
• 3/4” NPT drain on side of tank
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Industrial-duty, 1/2 hp open drip-proof motor with thermal
overload protection
• Descaling fluid, 5, 30, or 55 gallons
• Easy-access start/stop buttons
• Y strainer with accessible cleaning port
• 9 ft. grounded power cord
• 15 gallon heavy-duty, non-corrosive plastic reservoir with
removable lid
• Descaling fluid is USDA approved
• Will not erode, pit, oxidize, or harm metal and other materials
• Non-toxic, non-injurious, non-corrosive, non-flammable, and can
be disposed of in normal plant sewers
273
DESCALING SYSTEM & FLUID FOR TCUS
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
Descaling System
Operating temp
Ambient
Motor, hp
0.5
Voltage
115/1/60
HEAT AND COOL
Full Load Amps
8.4
Dimensions, in.
22L x 16W x 38H
Ship. weight, lbs.
115
3/4” delivery and return connections
Y strainer with accessible cleaning port
9 ft. grounded power cord
0.75” NPT drain on side of tank
15 gallon, heavy-duty, non-corrosive
plastic reservoir with removeable lid
Centrifugal pump
Industrial-duty, 0.5 hp open
drip-proof motor with thermal
overload protection
274
H
E
A
T
&
C
O
O
L
NOTES:
HEAT AND COOL
NOTES:
HEAT AND COOL
AK SERIES UNDER-THE-PRESS AUGER-FEED GRANULATORS
AVC SERIES VACUUM CALIBRATOR AND SIZING TANKS
GRANULATE
NELMOR • SIZE REDUCTION
The AK Series under-the-press granulators feature built-in simplicity at a
low cost and are ideal for size reduction of runners, sprues, blow-molded
scrap, small thin wall parts and pre-cut thermoformed web.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Slant cut shearing design
AK Series Granulator
• Heavy-duty steel welded construction
• One-piece reverse-flight auger
• Heavy-duty auger chain drive
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Casters: two swivel, two fixed
• Oversize collection bin
• NEMA 12 magnetic across-the-line starter control
• Leg extensions
• Reversible screens
• Bin level monitor
• Scissor cut knife arrangement
• 208, 230, 460 or 575 voltage
• Wear/abrasion resistance
• Meets OSHA safety requirements
• Reduced auger speed
• Drum reverser control
• Increased or decreased auger length
• Lockable, fused disconnect
• Standard or custom engineered auger infeed chutes
• Hinged cutting chamber cover
275
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
AK-68
AK-812
AK-1216
HP
3
Auger
Avg.
Rotor
Cutting
Thruput,
Chamber
Blades: Cutting
RPM
rotor/bed Circle,
Opening, Outer Dia., Core Dia., rpm lbs./hr
in. (mm)
in. (cm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
(kg/hr)1
5
5
7.5
10
15
3/2
6 (152)
650
3/2
8 (203)
620
3/2
12 (305)
560
6x8
(15 x 20)
2 3/8
(60.3)
6 (152)
8 x 12
(20 x 30)
2 7/8
(73.0)
9 (229)
12 x 16
(30 x 40)
3 7/8
(98.4)
12 (305)
70
70 450 (204)
1 Throughput based on 3/8” (9.525 mm) screen. Different forms and types of material may change rates.
DIMENSIONS
Model
AK-68
AK-812
AK-1216
A
B
55"
49.25"
87.5"
68.5"
81.5"
57"
C
18"
25.25"
32.25"
D
18
(46)
25 1/4
(65)
32 1/2
(83)
18.02
(46)
49
(125)
28
(72)
55
(140)
32 1/2
(83)
69
(176)
48
(122)
88
(224)
25 1/4
(65)
57
(145)
35
(89)
82
(209)
650
(296)
591
(1300)
2400
(1090)
E
28"
20.75"
48"
44"
34.5"
Open Approx. Dim., in. (cm) Ship.
Floor/
Trough Screen
Weight,
Height, Area, sq.
lbs.
H
W
L
in. (cm) in. (cm2)
(kg)
175 (79)
70 250 (113)
GRANULATE
43.5"
Optional Loadamatic
Granulate Conveying
System (machine mounted)
IEC motor controls installed
in ergonomic NEMA 12
enclosure
Sequenced starting
with individual
start/stop plus
with status lights
Auger stripper bar
prevents wrap around
Feed opening
interlock
Hinged chamber
access lid with
clear viewpoint
Oversized auger and
infeed openings
Gear reducer and
chain/sprocket
auger drive
Multiple V-belt
rotor drive
Electro mechanical
interlocks for
chamber access
Full range of guarded
infeed chutes to suit
applications
Locked chain and
emergency stop push
button mounted at end
of auger trough
Flange mounted
rotor bearings
276
3 rotary/2 stationary
scissor cut knives
WG SERIES THERMOFORM UNDER-THE-PRESS GRANULATORS
GRANULATE
Designed for continuous reclamation of skeletal web directly from the
thermoform trim process, the WG Series granulators are available with
36" or 56" infeed widths. For low-power, low-rpm operation, six knives are
mounted in an offset pattern on the alloy steel rotor in conjunction with two
adjustable, stationary knives with double cutting edges. This means more
lineal inches of cut, more capacity, and less likelihood of plugging.
WG Series Granulator
STANDARD FEATURES
• 3 knife Chevron rotor
• Bolted and dowelled construction
• Pivoting screen cradle
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Rotor knives hi-angle
• Variable speed infeed
• 2 bed knives - reversible D2
• Both feed rolls driven
• Feed roll motor (3/4 hp D.C.)
• Paddle rolls
• Poly smooth rolls
• Horizontal infeed hopper
• Stainless steel or non-corrosive material contact
surfaces in cutting chamber
• Low profile caster base
• NEMA 12 controls
• Tungsten carbide surface coated knives
• 5" pneumatic discharge
• 10 hp, 15 hp, 20 hp
• 1/4", 3/8" and larger screens
• Heat-treated screens
277
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
Throat Size, in.
Cutting Circle Diameter, in.
Feed Height, in.
Throughput, lbs./hr
Working Envelope, L x W, in.
Weight, lbs.
Infeed Section
Motor Options (rotor drive)
Motor Options (feedroll drive)
DIMENSIONS
Model
WG3600
WG5600
WG3600
8 x 36
1200
86 x 50.75
GRANULATE
WG5600
7.9
24.5
8 x 56
1300
106 x 50.75
2600
Feed Rolls - Poly Smooth standard
Feed Rolls - Knurled or paddle optional
7.5 hp, 10 hp, 15 hp, 20 hp
2900
Feed Rolls - Poly Smooth standard
Feed Rolls - Knurled or paddle optional
7.5 hp, 10 hp, 15 hp, 20 hp
A
B
3/4 hp DC standard, 1 hp DC optional
36” (914.4mm)
56” (1422.4mm)
278
3/4 hp DC standard, 1 hp DC optional
39-3/4” (1009.7mm)
59-3/4” (1517.7mm)
WG 1400 SERIES THERMOFORMING GRANULATORS
GRANULATE
The AEC WG 1400 Series offer reclamation of thermoformed, extruded
scrap, sheet, web and edge trim. With a standard 50 HP motor and
throughput capacities up to 3,000 lbs/hr, there is a AEC granulator
ideal for your specific needs. The WG 1400 Series models include
14x56 and 14x62. Both provide heavy-duty construction and quiet
operation. Double sealed bearings are lubricated for life.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Open (wing) type design rotor
• Quick access to cutting chamber with swing down screen cradle
for ease of service and cleaning
• Double sealed, outboard mounted heavy-duty spherical bearings
prevent bearing contamination
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Heavy-duty construction allows noise reduction of 85 dBa or less
for most applications
Infeed:
• Dual feed hopper, pneumatic lift assembly, feed rolls,
paddle rolls
• Sheet feed hopper
• 3 Chevron-positioned rotor knives scissor cut again the bed
knives to provide optimum cutting efficiency with low power
consumption
• Reinforced, heavy-duty screen cradle
• Optimum cutting efficiency with Twinshear™ knife configuration
Motor:
• 40-100 HP REFC motors
• Special voltage (e.g. 208, 380, 415, 575)
• Magnetic disc brake
Discharge:
• 8" or 10" airveyor chute
Knives:
• HCHC with TCSC
Base:
• Drum/gaylord, angular, leg type
• Raised base
279
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
Model
Cutting Circle
Throughput
14x62
14" (360 mm)
2200 lbs./hr (1000 kg)
3000 lbs./hr (5227 kg)
Rotor Knives
HCHC, 55, Chevron
Cutting Chamber
14x56
2-bed knife, Twinshear
Discharge
8" (14x56) and 10" (14x62) airveyor chute
Drive Parts
V-belt
Motor
Base
Electrical
Components
Controls
Chamber Size
Feed Height
Overall Length
Overall Width
Weight
GRANULATE
50 HP, 1200 RPM, TEFC, 3/60/230/460
Low profile airveyor
NEMA 12 with safety interlocks
Customer supplied
14" x 56"
14" x 62"
(356 x 1422 mm)
(356 x 1568 mm)
64" (1625 mm)
122" (3099 mm)
62 1/2" (1587 mm)
102" (2591 mm)
117 5/8" (2988 mm)
90" (2286 mm)
11,500 lbs. (5227 kg)
17,000 lbs. (7727 kg)
280
LPLS SERIES LOW SPEED GRANULATORS
GRANULATE
The LPLS Series granulators are portable and low speed, with a feed chute,
motor overload protection and visual alarm signal. Not only are they easy to
maintain and quick to clean, but hinged construction allows easy accessibility
to the cutting chamber. They also handle all sprues and rejects from
injection molding machines.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Maintenance-free drive
• Staggered horizontal cutting rotor with 6 D2 steel rotor
blades (G43LPLS)
• Staggered horizontal cutting rotor with 15 D2 steel
rotor blades (G86LPLS)
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Overfill protection
• 2 HSS steel bed blades
• Special feed chute designs
• Hardened perforated screen with various holes available
• Steel coil auger style feed mechanism
• Feed chute
• Voltages multiple voltage motor (230/3/60, 400/3/60, 460/3/60)
• Vibration feed (G43LPLS)
• Blade setting tool
• Suction probe 50 mm (2 in.)
281
SPECIFICATIONS
Rotor
G43 LPLS
Staggered horizontal rotor
Bed Knives
Max. Material Size, in. (mm)
Max. Throughput, lbs./hr (kg/hr)
Connected Load, HP (kW)
Cutting Size, in. (mm)
Rotor Speed, rpm
Approx. Weight, lbs. (kg)
Working Envelope (LxW)
2 HSS steel bed knives
4 x 3 (100 x 80)
33 (15)
2 (1.5)
3.9 (100)
96
286 (130)
18.9" x 27.5"
Rotor Knives
GRANULATE
6 blades, D2 steel
G86 LPLS
Staggered horizontal rotor
15 blades, D2 steel,
scissor-cut configuration
2 HSS steel bed knives
7.8 x 6.3 (220 x 160)
55 (25)
3 (2.2)
9.8 (250)
107
463 (210)
19.4" x 34.3"
DIMENSIONS
G43 LPLS
Standard Hand/Robot Feed Combination
G86 LPLS
Standard Hand/Robot Feed Combination
Spiral Auger Option
Spiral Auger Option
282
AS SERIES SCREENLESS BESIDE-THE-PRESS GRANULATORS
GRANULATE
AS SERIES SCREENLESS BESIDE-THE-PRESS
The AS Series, the latest innovation from AEC, features screenless
operation with no longs regrind. The small footprint queezes into the
tightest of spaces. Its rugged, heavy-duty construction packed with
innovative standard features assures years of dependable, reliable service.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Screenless operation produces clean, no longs regrind
• Smallest footprint squeezes into the tightest of spaces
• Quick and easy, no tools access - just open the doors
• Vacuum bin with 1" or 2" diameter take-offs available
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Locking swivel casters mounted on base
• High level indicator
• Solid dowel and bolted construction
• Compressed air evacuation system
• TEFC 230/3/60 or 460/3/60 gear motor
• 115/1/60 control voltage wired with electrical/mechanical
safety interlock
283
AS SERIES SCREENLESS BESIDE-THE-PRESS GRANULATORS
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
Chamber Size (in.)
Cutter Size, mm (in.)
Feed Height, inches
Throughput, lbs./hr
Working Envelope (L x W)
Weight (lbs.)
Slide out discharge
AS1010
10 x 10.5"
52"
30 lbs./hr
29"x18"
396 lbs
Clamshell opening for easy cleaning
284
GRANULATE
AS1213
AS1616
11.5 x 13.5"
5mm (.18")
60"
40 lbs./hr
32.5"x23"
606 lbs
16" x 16"
63"
50 lbs./hr
23"x49"
992 lbs
“Tool free” opening for quick
access during cleaning
SEVEN SERIES BESIDE-THE-PRESS GRANULATORS
GRANULATE
Perfect for injection molding operations, the versatile Seven Series provides
efficient size reduction of small parts, sprues, and runners. The standard
large capacity discharge bin and vacuum takeoff allow the Seven Series to
integrate seamlessly into your existing material handling system. Mixed with
virgin material, the consistent high quality regrind helps to minimize process
waste and improves overall productivity.
STANDARD FEATURES
• 210 rpm motor speed
Seven Series Granulator
• TEFC motor, 5 hp
• 230, 460V @ 60 Hz
• Time delay safety switch to interlock hopper and screen chamber
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Hopper extensions for high-drop robot applications
• Mounted ratcheting opening tool to open cutting chamber
(no tools required)
• Ultra low for sprue picker and conveyor fed underthe-press applications
• High base equipped with larger vacuum bin and valve
sack discharge
• D2 knives; selection of 40º or 55º tip angle
• Double-walled construction on hopper and base
• Wear-resistant chamber parts: hardened bed knife
blocks, Astrolloy end discs and bed knife clamps, and
electrolyzed screens
• Solid flywheel drive sheave
• Top-access bed knife adjusting system
• 3 knife, wedge held, open, slant cut rotor with optional
non-adjustable or adjustable knives
• Three blade open/solid rotor with rotating end disks
• Full sound enclosure package
• Two bed knives
• “Clear View” bin level inspection window
• Vacuum removal discharge bin
• Selection of reversible screens; hole sizes of 1/4", 5/16", 3/8",
1/2" and 5/8" available
• Reversible top feed hopper design
• Two locking, two swivel casters
285
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
708
GRANULATE
712
716
Cutting Chamber Opening, in. (H x W)
6.5 x 8
6.5 x 12
6.5 x 16
Open Screen Area, sq. in.
36
55
70
Cutting Circle Diameter, in.
Average Throughput, lbs./hr
6.3
6.3
100
Bin Capacity (vacuum bin), cu. ft.
0.15
Width, in.
20.5
Average Machine Weight, lbs.
510
Height with robot chute, in.
Depth, in.
150
A
200
0.2
0.3
51.2
24.5
28.5
530
550
27.5
DIMENSIONS
Model
6.3
Dimensions, in.
B
C
D
E
716
26.67
15.81
24.86
25.88
25.97
708
18.67
7.81
16.86
17.88
17.97
712
22.67
11.81
20.86
286
21.88
21.97
MARATHON SERIES BESIDE-THE-PRESS GRANULATORS
GRANULATE
Marathon™ Series beside-the-press granulators feature innovative design
and performance improvements resulting from extensive customer
involvement in the development process. These improvements make the
Marathon™ Series significantly more efficient to service and operate than
other beside-the-press granulators.
STANDARD FEATURES
• 410 rpm rotor speed
Marathon Series Granulator
• 230 or 460 voltage
• Three-blade open-solid rotor
• Solid flywheel drive sheave
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• NEMA 1 drop-down front-access electrical enclosure
• Single set point ammeter
• TEFC motor
• Carbide coating for knives and screens
• Expanded cutting chamber access
• Side mount start/stop control buttons
• Bed knives are adjustable from the front
• Front-access bed knife adjusting system
• Permanently mounted bin-level indicator
• Double-walled construction on hopper and base
• Staggered rotor configuration with 4-edge knives
• D2 knives; selection of 40º or 50º tip angle
• Choice of alternate rotor speeds: 590, 410, 250
or 150 rpm
• Ultra-light, static-reducing manual bin
• 2 blade open rotor, 3 or 5 blade solid rotors
• Time delay safety switches to interlock cutting chamber
• Available voltages: 208 V, 380 V, 415 V, 575 V
• Mounted ratcheting opening tool to open cutting chamber
• Infeed chutes for robot/conveyor and long part
applications
• Selection of reversible screens; hole sizes of 1/4", 5/16", 3/8",
1/2" and 5/8" available
• Side cleanout door on hopper
• Two locking, two swivel casters
287
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
MV810
MV814
MV818
MV1012
MV1016
Cutting
Chamber
Size, in.
5 hp
8 x 14
X
8 x 10
8 x 18
10 x 12
10 x 16
DIMENSIONS
Model
MV810
MV814
MV818
MV1012
MV1016
X
Rotor
Cutting Open Screen
Knives/Bed
Circle, in. Area, sq. in.
7.5 hp 10 hp 15 hp
Knives
Available Motor hp
X
X
X
X
X
N/A
X
N/A
X
X
8.39
3/2
X
X
A
59.5
58.3
48.9
58.6
37.2
63.6
61.5
50.5
61.9
45.0
Manual
Infeed, in.
C
Robot/
Conveyor
Infeed, in.
Approx.
Throughput,
lbs./hr
123
55
172
70
221
65
10.5
Machine
Height
Without
Chutes, in.
B
Long Part
Infeed, in.
39
Total
Width, in.
Total
Height, in.
D
E
F
22.1
G
30.1
24.2
28.2
288
71.6
76.0
Vac.
1.4
0.4
950
1.2
0.35
1.4
340
Total
Depth, in.
Man.
Average
Machine
Weight, lbs.
Bin Capacity, cu. ft.
1.9
257
87
26.1
GRANULATE
36.9
40.9
44.9
40.7
44.7
0.5
1100
0.5
1300
0.4
1.9
Door
Open,
Width, in.
810
Machine
Open,
Depth, in.
1120
Floor Mount Fan
Hole, Height
From Floor
(centerline), in.
62.1
67.5
8.1
GP800 SERIES BESIDE-THE-PRESS GRANULATORS
GRANULATE
The GP800 Series granulators are designed for efficient beside-the-press
regrind of reject components from injection molding, blow molding, and
extrusion processes. Quiet-running and extremely versatile, they can be
used with robot feed, conveyor feed or hand feed applications.
These sound-attenuating granulators are available in three models—
GP810, 814, and 818. All provide excellent quality regrind with the added
advantage of reduced maintenance costs.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Pivoting hopper, drop-down screen cradle and machined,
bolted cutting chamber simplifies cleaning and maintenance
• Low profile, sound-attenuated infeed system for robot, hand or
conveyor feed applications
• HCHC knives manufactured in-house utilizing AEC’s proprietary
process for heat-treating ensure durability and long life
• Oversized solid flywheel
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Motor: 7.5 to 10 HP (5.5 to 7.5 kW) TEFC motors
• Discharge: 1.25”, 1.5”, 2” or 2.5” vacuum take-off
• Knives: D2 components and wear-resistant package
for abrasive applications
• Modular feed chutes
289
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
Cutting Circle
Avg Throughput (lbs/hr)
Cutting Chamber
Rotor Knives
Discharge
Motor
Base
Electrical Components
Controls
Feed Height (manual chute)
Feed Height (front robot/conveyor chute)
Feed Height (rear robot/conveyor chute)
Overall Height (manual chute model)
Overall Length
Overall Width
Weight
GRANULATE
Specifications
GP810
GP814
GP818
8.2” dia. (210mm)
123
172
221
8” x 10”
8” x 14”
8” x 18”
3-knife open-scooped with rotating end discs
Manual bin standard
5HP (3.75 kW) TEFC standard
Full machine sound enclosure with casters
Start/stop button, with complete safety interlocks
NEMA type 12
47.5” (1206mm)
59.1” (1502mm)
68.6” (1742mm)
59.4” (1507mm)
45.0” (1144mm)
30.3” (770mm)
34.3” (871mm)
38.3” (973mm)
1220 lbs
1400 lbs
1610 lbs
Machine Model
810
814
818
Dimensions
A
B
C
D
30.3” (770mm) 10.2” (260mm) 14.3” (363mm) 16.5” (420mm)
34.3” (871mm) 14.2” (360mm) 16.3” (414mm) 20.5” (520mm)
38.3” (973mm) 18.2” (462mm) 18.3” (465mm) 24.5” (622mm)
Optional Feed Chute Drawings
290
GRANULATE
The GP1012 and 1018 Series granulators are designed for efficient
beside-the-press regrind of reject components from injection molding, blow
molding, and extrusion processes. Quiet-running and extremely versatile,
they can be used with robot feed, conveyor feed or hand feed applications.
These sound-attenuating granulators are available in two models - 10x12
and 10x18. Both provide excellent quality regrind with the added advantage
of reduced maintenance costs.
STANDARD FEATURES
Hopper:
• Hand, robot or conveyor operation
• Sound attenuated
• Multi-feed
OPTIONAL FEATURES
Cutting Chamber:
• Offset design, 2 bed knives
• Machined, bolted and doweled
• Fully sound-attenuated to approximately 70-80 dBA
• Motor: 7.5 to 15 HP (5.625 to 11.25 kW) TEFC motors
• Discharges:
• 1.25", 1.5" or 2.5" vacuum takeoff
• 4" blower discharge
3-Knife Rotor:
• Open-scooped with rotating end discs
• Knives:
• D2 components and wear-resistant package for
abrasive applications
Rotor and Bed Knives:
• D2 OEM manufactured
• Proprietary process
Removable pivoting drop-down screen and screen cradle:
• 1/4" standard, 3/16", 5/16", 3/8" and other sizes available
• 5 HP TEFC Motor and solid flywheel drive
• Standard metal bin discharge
• Quick-Release hand knob access
291
GRANULATE
SPECIFICATIONS
Selector Guide
Model
Cutting Circle
Throughput
Cutting Chamber
Rotor Knives
Discharge
Motor
Drive Parts
Base
Controls
Feed Height
Overall Height
Overall Length
Overall Width (A)
Weight
GP1012
GP1018
10" (254.0 mm), 426 rotor rpm
450 lbs/hr (204.5 kg/hr)
550 lbs/hr (249.5 kg/hr)
10" x 12" (254 mm x 304.8 mm)
10" x 18" (254 mm x 457.2 mm)
3 knife open-scooped with rotating end discs
Bin standard
5 HP (3.75 kW) TEFC standard
Flywheel/rotor (solid), drive belts, taper lock bearings, and adjustable motor base
Sound-enclosed base, caster-mounted for bin enclosure
Start/stop button, complete set of safety interlocks
NEMA Type 12
49.44 " (1255.8 mm)
58.25" (1479.6 mm)
44.5" (1130.3 mm)
29.875 " (758.8 mm)
35.875" (911.2 mm)
1275 lbs (578.3 kg)
1440 lbs (653.2 kg)
VENT W/PURVEYOR
BLOWER OPTION
6.1”
154.9 mm
A
10” FEED OPENING
254.0 mm
426 RPM
ROTOR STD
SAFETY
INTERLOCK
10” CC
254.0 mm
18”
457.2 mm
44.5”
1130.3 mm
START/STOP
PUSH BUTTON
60.875”
1546.2 mm
58.25”
1479.6 mm
49.44”
1255.8 mm
FEED
HEIGHT
COVER OVER OPENINGS FOR (OPTIONAL)
AIRVEYOR DISCHARGE– 4” STD
NOTE: WHEN SPECIFIED THE AIRVEYOR
CAN BE INSTALLED L.H. OR R.H.
292
4” DIA
CASTERS
101.6 mm
CUTTING CHAMBER ACCESS DOORS
1012 SINGLE DOOR HINGED FROM RIGHT SIDE
1018 DOUBLE DOOR AS SHOWN
GP1200 PREMIER SERIES GRANULATORS
GRANULATE
The GP1200 Premier Series granulators offer a wide range of capabilities
to handle the most demanding injection molding, blow molding and
extrusion requirements. With a horsepower range from 7 1/2 to 25 HP,
throughput capacities from 500 to 800 lbs./hr, and a wide range of sizes,
there is a AEC granulator ideal for your specific needs. The 3-knife open
slant-cut rotor with scooped wings provides for both positive feeding of
bulky parts and improved airflow for cooler operation.
STANDARD FEATURES
GP1200 Premier Series Granulator
• TEFC motor and solid flywheel drive
• Metal bin discharge
• Quick-Release hand knob access
OPTIONAL FEATURES
Hopper:
• Hand, robot or conveyor operation
• Sound attenuated
• Multi-feed
• Special infeeds
• Level indicator
Cutting Chamber:
• Offset design, 2 bed knives
• Machined, bolted and doweled
• Fully sound-attenuated to approximately 85 dBA
• Reduced RPM rotor speed
• Abrasion-resistant cutting chamber and rotor
• Vacuum or blower discharges
3-Knife Rotor:
• Open-slant cut with scooped wings
• Rotating end discs
Rotor and Bed Knives:
• D2 OEM manufactured
• Proprietary process
Removable pivoting drop-down screen and screen cradle:
• 5/16" standard, 3/16", 1/4", 3/8" and other sizes available
Controls:
• NEMA type 12 with 120V P/B 230/460V
293
AVC SERIES VACUUM CALIBRATOR AND SIZING TANKS
SPECIFICATIONS
Selector Guide
Features
GP1212
GP1218
GP1224
Infeed
Rotor
Base
Tray feed
Portable Stationary
3-knife open
Metal
Removable flap assembly
caster
vibration
slant cut
Bin
Double-walled SP
mount
pad
Tray & Sheet
Tray & Pipe
Tray & Feed Rolls
STD
STD
D
36 3/4"
42 3/4"
48 3/4"
Optional
STD
Discharge
Airveyor
4" 5" 6"
Vacuum
or
Gaylord
Optional
Optional
Motor/Controls
GRANULATE
Drive Parts
Throughput
TEFC 230/460V Solid High-Inertia
Lbs/Hr
Start/Stop P/B Flywheel V-belt
5/16" Screen
Controls
Drive
3-Knife Rotor (approx)
7 1/2 - 25 HP
7 1/2 - 25 HP
10 - 25 HP
STD
DIMENSIONS
Specifications
Model
GP1212
GP1218
GP1224
A
B
C
56"
80 1/4"
50 1/4"
E
17"
F
12 1/4"
18 1/2"
24 1/4"
294
G
17 5/8"
23 1/2"
15" (2 doors)
H
12"
Weight
Lbs.
500
1750
900
2850
750
2300
GRANULATE
The GP1600 Premier Series granulators offer a wide range of capabilities
to handle the most demanding injection molding, blow molding and
extrusion requirements. GP1600 models include 16x20, 16x28 and 16x40,
providing excellent quality regrind and quiet operation. Unique machined,
bolted and doweled construction ensures durability. Double-sealed bearings
are lubricated for life. Rotating end discs are standard throughout the
Premier Series line for minimized friction and heat buildup.
STANDARD FEATURES
GP1600 Premier Series Granulator
• Pivoting hopper, drop-down removable screen cradle and
machined, bolted cutting chamber simplifies cleaning and
maintenance
• Low-profile, sound-attenuated infeed systems for robot, hand or
conveyor feed applications
• HCHC knives manufactured in-house utilizing AEC’s proprietary
process for heat treating ensures durability and long life
• Oversized solid flywheel
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Motor: 25, 30 or 40 HP TEFC motors
• Infeed: Sheet/profile/pipe/feed rolls
• Rotor: 5 knife, 3 and 5 knife with knife carriers
• Discharge: 1.25", 1.5", 2" or 2.5" vacuum takeoff, 4"
or 5" pneumatic, bin discharge available on model
1620 only
• Knives: D2 components and wear-resistant package
• Base: Caster-mounted
• Abrasion-resistant cutting chamber and rotor
295
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
Model
GP1620
Throughput
900 lbs/hr (408.2 kg/hr)
Cutting Circle
Cutting Chamber
Rotor Knives
Discharge
Motor
Drive Parts
Base
GP1628
GP1640
1500 lbs/hr (680.4 kg/hr)
1800 lbs/hr (818 kg/hr)
16.54" (420.1 mm), 437 rotor RPM
16" x 20"
(406.4 mm x 508 mm)
16" x 28"
(406.4 mm x 711.2 mm)
16" x 40"
(406.4 mm X 1016 mm)
3 knife open scooped with rotating end discs (knife carriers and 5-bladerotor optional)
6" pneumatic
8" pneumatic
20 HP (15 kW) TEFC motor standard, 230/460 VAC
30 HP (23KW) TEFC motor standard 230/460 VAC
Flywheel/rotor (solid), drive belts, taper lock bearings, and adjustable motor base
Totally enclosed for sound control, stationary with vibration pad
Controls
Feed Height
Overall Height
Overall Length
Overall Width (A)
Weight
GRANULATE
Start/stop push button, complete set of safety interlocks
NEMA Type 12
56.27" (1429.3 mm)
79.99" (2031.7 mm)
71.18" (1808 mm)
59.25" (1505 mm)
3400 lbs. (1542.3 kg)
51.25" (1301.8 mm)
3025 lbs. (1372 kg)
71.25" (1809 mm)
4000 lbs. (1818 kg)
DIMENSIONS
296
MEDIUM TANGENTIAL SERIES GRANULATORS
GRANULATE
AEC’s 2024/2036 tangential granulators accept larger products with improved
performance and are 100% American made. It offers customers a solution
to granulation problems by minimizing part bouncing and optimizing material
processing for large bulky parts.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Complete flexibility for all rigid plastic profiles
• 24" and 36" wide models
• Angled infeed for easy hand or conveyor feed
• Convenient lower feed height of 63"
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Tangential feed design for improved application versatility
• Pneumatic discharge systems
• Fully sound-dampened to 85dBa or less for most applications
• Conveyor with amperage feedback system
• Machine bolted/doweled assembly for ease of cleaning and
replacement
• Dust and angel hair removal system
• Specially designed feed hoppers
• Dual bed knives - counter slant, reversible and adjustable,
doubling knife life
• 3 knife slant cut rotor (steep angle) including solid knife carriers
• Open design - scooped rotor for maximum air flow and ingestion
of product
• Large 20" cutting circle on rotor for efficient processing of large
bulky products
• High carbon, high chrome (D2) rotor and bed knives
• Swing down reversible screens with solid edges doubling screen
life and providing easy maintenance
• Airveyor discharge standard
• TEFC design - 1800 RPM motor with sliding motor base
• NEMA 12 controls with safety switch meeting latest OSHA/ANSI
specifications
• Disconnect switch 115V to push-button provides safer design
297
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
2024
2036
A
24 (609)
36 (914)
B
C
D
7.4 (188)
52 5/8 (1285)
6 (152)
8.4 (213)
62 5/8 (1590)
8 (203)
Heavy-duty, easy access base
creating a stronger design with
easy cleanout and servicing.
E
25.5 (647)
37.5 (952)
High carbon, high chrome D2
knives for maximum knife quality
and consistency. Solid knife
carriers provide extra support.
298
GRANULATE
Motor
30 HP, TEFC, 1800 rpm
40 HP, TEFC, 1800 rpm
Throughput
1400 lbs./hr (630 kg)
2000 lbs. /hr (907 kg)
Dual solid flywheels offer heavy
duty cutting inertia.
LARGE TANGENTIAL SERIES GRANULATORS
GRANULATE
AEC’s Large Tangential Series granulators feature heavy-duty construction,
including an easy access base, which creates a stronger design with easy
clean out and servicing.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Tangential feed cutting chamber
• Large diameter cutting circle (20" on the 2045TF and 30" on the
30 Series) for positive ingestion of “bulky” feedstock such as
bottles, containers and blow molded parts
• Integral full machine sound enclosures
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Conveyors with amperage feedback
• Front access doors with safety interlocks
• External mounted “pillow block” style bearings to eliminate grease
contamination to material or material contamination to bearings
• Multiple rotor styles: 3 and 5 blade available on 2045 TF, 5 and
7 blade available on the 30 Series
• Keen edge rotor to minimize dust and “angel hair” generation
• Drop down screen cradle
• Dual sheaves
• Reversible bed knives
• Airveyor discharge
299
• Dust and angel hair removal system
• Customized hoppers
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
2045
3030
3045
Cutting Chamber Size, in.
20x45
30x30
30x45
Throughput
2200 lbs./hr
2200 lbs./hr
3300 lbs./hr
GRANULATE
Motor (HP)
40-100
50-150
100-150
Tangential feed cutting
chamber allows for better
ingestion of feedstock
Hydraulic screw jack to
lower screen cradle
Dual sheaves offer
additional cutting inertia
Side cleanout door
with safety interlock
Heavy duty, easy access
base creating a stronger
design with easy clean
out and servicing
300
MB HEAVY DUTY SERIES GRANULATORS
GRANULATE
AEC’s MB heavy-duty central granulators are designed for high capacity
central reclamation. They can granulate a wide range of plastic scrap,
from low density fiber to thick, high molecular weight purgings and can
be integrated with a variety of handling equipment.
STANDARD FEATURES
• High shear rotor
• Internal surfaces machined for ease of cleanout and material flow
• Heavy duty double roller bearings mounted outboard
to avoid contamination
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Designed for high capacity central reclamation
• Water cooling
• Hardfacing
• Conveyors with amperage feedback systems
• Hog-style rotor with “raised” bed knife
301
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
Throat Size
Cutting Circle
Throughput (3/8" screen)
Infeed
Cutting Chamber
Rotor
Rotor Knives
Bed Knives
Screen Diameter
Base
Discharge
Motor (tefc)
Drive
Controls
Labels
Accessories
Feed Height
Length
Width
Height
LxWxH (mm)
Weight (lbs.)
Outboard mounted motor with
“heavy duty” flywheel
G1524MB
15"x24"
14"
1000
G1828MB
18"x28"
16"
1800
G1837MB
18"x37"
16"
2500
75 hp
100 hp
100 hp
90"
53"
73"
107"
1346x1854x2718
6000
Conveyor
(2) Bed
Open 3 Blade
(3) HCHC
(2) HCHC
3/8"
Step Type
Airveyor
G2050MB
20"x50"
18"
3500
GRANULATE
G2062MB
20"x62"
18"
4500
150 hp
200 hp
V-belt
Safety switches wired to common junction box
To suit voltage, 100V at operator station
Safety labels are provided for proper operation and maintenance
Available upon request
104"
104"
112"
112"
46"
46"
46"
46"
117"
135"
140"
145"
135"
127"
164"
164"
1168x2972x3429
1168x3429x3226
1168x3556x4166
1168x3683x4166
7000
11,000
15,000
22,000
G2072MB
20"x72"
20"
5000
200 hp
112"
46"
171"
164"
1168x4343x4166
26,000
Drop down screen cradle for
access during knife change and
cleanout
302
GP2000 SERIES CENTRAL GRANULATORS
GRANULATE
Featuring Twinshear™ knife configuration to increase cutting efficiency, the
GP2042 and 2062 Series granulators offer throughputs from 1800 lbs./hr
up to 2600 lbs./hr. The granulators are easy to maintain, with a drop-down
screen cradle and hydraulic tilt mechanism on the infeed hopper for quick
and easy access to the cutting chamber and rotor. The 2042/2062 Series'
low feed height and large widths are ideal for thermoforming, and a variety
of infeed, discharge, and rotor options provide added flexibility for almost any
application.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Hand-feed hopper, double wall construction
• Offset cutting chamber, 2 Twinshear™ bed knives, top access:
single edge, HCHC
• 3-knife Twinshear™, steep angle rotor with extended shaft for
optional flywheel
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• 75 HP, V belt drive, 450 RPM
• Wear-resistant cutting chamber and rotor
• Feed roll/paddle wheel, sheet feed or side feed
• Steep angle, 55º, landed HCHC rotor knives
• Modular conveyor feed add-on chute: 88" feed height
• 8" airveyor discharge chute (10" on model GP2062)
• 3-knife high shear, 5-knife steep angle, or 5-knife high
shear rotor (all Twinshear™)
• Steep angle, keen edge HCHC high shear, HCHC
rotor knives
• Sound enclosure
• 50 HP, 60 HP, 100 HP
• 10" airveyor discharge chute
• Dual flywheel drive
• Variety of screen sizes available
• NEMA 12, 110 volt controls with safety interlocks.
Free standing control panel with 460V service
• Other voltages
• #8 or #10 floor mtg. blower, cyclone, cyclone stand,
infeed conveyor
303
GRANULATE
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
Cutting Chamber Size
Throughput
GP2062
20" x 62"
2600 lbs/hr
GP2042
20" x 42"
A drop down screen
cradle provides quick
screen access for
simplified maintenance
1800 lbs/hr
A
42 ( 1067)
62 (1574)
73.5 (1867)
93.5 (2375)
C
75.2 (1910)
95.21 (2418)
Twinshear™ knife
configuration increases
cutting efficiency
Hydraulic tilt mechanism for
the infeed hopper provides
complete access to the
cutting chamber and rotor.
B
304
D
8 (203)
10 (254)
E
9.1 (229)
6.3 (159)
Low feed height and
large widths are ideal for
thermoforming
GRANULATE
AEC’s GP2400 Series is one of the most versatile central granulators
available. Ideally suited for applications including large injection molded
parts, blow molded parts, automotive moldings, light purgings, furniture and
appliance parts, etc. The GP2400 Series comes in 27" (700mm), 39"
(1000mm), and 56" (1400mm) widths, cutting circle diameter of 24”, and
horsepower options from 50 thru 150 hp with throughput rates ranging from
1800 to 6000 lbs/hr.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Unique rotor and disc design reduces frictional heat, helps prevent
end plate smearing
• Exclusive Twinshear™ slicing action reduces energy consumption,
fines and extends knife life
• Split chamber, easy cleanout service access
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Multiple hopper designs
• Hydraulic opening
• Adjustable rotor knives
LOW HEAT GRANULATION
• Replaceable rotor knife seats
• Unique rotor and cutting chamber design helps prevent polymer
“melt down”
• Virtually eliminates “end plate smearing”
• End ring (disc) rotates in relationship to the cutting chamber,
vastly improving airlfow and minimizing frictional heat
REDUCED ENERGY CONSUMPTION
• Made possible by the Twinshear™ “scissor cutting” action
knife design
• More efficient than chopping motion knife designs
• Uses lower horsepower motor without sacrificing throughput
performance
305
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
GP2428
Throat Size
GP2439
600 x 700 mm (24” x 28”)
Cutting Circle
Throughput (3/8” screen)
Infeed
Cutting Chamber
Rotor
Rotor Knives
Bed Knives
Labels and plates provided for operator safety
Width
2456
123-3/4
2660 mm (104 3/4”)
1473 mm (58”)
Height
Weight
95-3/4
107-3/4
1778 mm (70”)
3429 mm (125”)
5910 kg (13,000 lbs)
4545 kg (10,000 lbs)
28-1/8
40-1/8
56-1/8
90 kW (125 HP)
Conveyors, blowers, cyclone separators to suit application
2175 mm (104 3/4”)
Length
2428
2439
Plate Type
Airveyor
90 kW (100 HP)
V-Belt
Safety switches wired into common junction box
To suit voltage - 110V at operator station
37 kW (50 HP)
Labels
B
1600 kg (3500 lbs.)
9.4 mm (3/8” dia.)
Accessories
Feed Height
A
600 x 1400 mm (24” x 56”)
600 mm (23 5/8”)
1200 kg (2500 lbs.)
Convey
(2) Bed Knife Chevron
(3) Knife Chevron
(6) HCHC
(4) HCHC
820 kg (1800 lbs.)
Base
Discharge
Motor
Drive
Controls
Model
GP2456
600 x 1000 mm (24” x 40”)
Screen Diameter
DIMENSIONS
GRANULATE
Dimensions, in.
C
32-7/8
44-7/8
60-7/8
D
23
35
51
2184 mm (86”)
7270 kg (16,000 lbs)
E (Outside Dia.)
Std
Opt
8
10
12
10, 12
8, 12
10
306
GPH SERIES CENTRAL GRANULATORS
GRANULATE
AEC’s GPH Series is designed for heavy-duty, high capacity granulation.
Ideally suited for applications including heavy extruded purgings, sheet,
pipe scrap, X-ray film, post consumer bailed bottles, film and fibers. The
GPH Series has a cutting circle diameter of 18" and horsepower options
from 100-200 hp.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Dual flywheel high torque design
• Unique rotor and disc design reduces frictional heat, helps prevent
end-plate smearing
• Exclusive Twinshear™ slicing action reduces energy consumption,
fines and extends knife life
• Split chamber, easy cleanout service access
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Up to 200 hp
• Hog-style rotor
SPLIT CHAMBER
• Raised bed knife
• Conveyor feed system with amperage feedback
• Raises the upper half of the cutting chamber and lowers the
screen cradle and discharge assembly via hydraulic jacks
• 50% reduction in clean out time
• Simplifies access for knife adjustments and replacement
• Allows further reducing of service downtime by not requiring the
air evacuation piping system to be disconnected
307
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
Throat Size
Cutting Circle
Throughput (3/8” screen)
Infeed
Cutting Chamber
Rotor
Rotor Knives
Bed Knives
Screen Diameter
Base
Discharge
Motor (TEFC)
Drive
Controls
Accessories
Feed Height
Length
Width
Height
Weight (lbs)
GPH2039
20” x 40”
2500
18”
GRANULATE
GPH2056
20” x 56”
Clamshell opening
design allows for easy
access during cleaning
and maintenance
3500
Conveyor
(2) Bed
3-blade Twin High Shear
(3) HCHC
(2) HCHC
3/8”
Airveyor
Airveyor
100
125
V-Belt
Safety switches wired into common junction box
To suit voltage - 110V at operator station
Conveyors, blowers, cyclone
separators to suit application
DIMENSIONS
102”
87” (2200 mm)
126” (3200 mm)
148” (3700 mm)
122” (3100 mm)
122” (3100 mm)
14,000
17,000
Model
Ruggedly built to international standards, these machines will handle a wide variety of applications
including bulky blow molded parts, thermoformed web and cut-sheet products, extruded sheet and film,
plus the full gamut of post-consumer plastics for recycling operations.
Twinshear™ rotor
directs material to
center of cutting
chamber, improving
cutting efficiency and
reducing side wall
“smearing of material”
308
2039
2056
A
107-3/4
123-3/4
B
40-1/8
56-1/8
Dimensions, in.
C
44-7/8
60-7/8
D
35
51
E (Outside Dia.)
Std
Opt
10
12
8, 12
10
GPH 3200 SERIES HEAVY-DUTY GRANULATORS
GRANULATE
The GPH 3200 Series granulators have been designed with you, the
processor in mind. They cover a wide range of applications including
heavy extruder purgings, blow-molded flashings, thick sheet, pipe, large
blow-molded parts (automotive, appliance, furniture, profiles), X-ray
films, packaging films and large-capacity post-consumer products.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Hydraulic actuation system for hopper and cradle
• Slide-out pivoting discharge chute assembly
• Replaceable rotor-knife seats
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Bearings are close-fit, taper-mounted and adjustable
• Auto-Lube systems feeds a constant amount of lubricant for
automated PM service
• Wear-resistant package
• Simplified access for service and maintenance
• Clean-out is quick and easy, saving valuable time
• Precise control for tight-tolerance applications, critical
for high-capacity bulk film
• Programmable service cycle ensures proper
lubrication of bearings—no worry
• Adjustable rotor knives with setting fixture
309
SPECIFICATIONS
Selector Guide
Standard
Features
3263
3284
Infeed
Cutting
Chamber
Conveyor
feed
electrohydraulic
tilt
Split design,
drop cradle,
integral
bearings,
Chevron bed
knives
Tray Feed
Raised
Pipe Feed
Bed Knife
Sheet
Water-Cooled
Feed
Wearplates
Rotor
3-knife
Staggered
open offset
“HOG”
36º C/C
(Optional)
(Standard)
12-knife
18-knife
30-knife
Base
Discharge
Motor
Drive Parts
Controls
Low
profile
common
plate
Airveyor
L/R Side
(12'/12'/14')
1200
RPM/TEFC Optional
(Standard)
Solid
High-Inertia
Flywheel/
Sheave
V-Belt Drive
NEMA
Type 12
Safety
Interlocks,
Hydraulic
Actuation
Twin High
Shear™ 5Knife Open Standard
Hard-Faced
Water-Cooled
Front/Rear
or
Conveyor
Dual
Flywheel
Motor
Special
Options
200 HP
250 HP
150-400
HP
GRANULATE
Throughput*
Lbs/Hr
(Approx.)
Weight
Lbs/Hr
(Approx.)
3/8" Screen
3-Knife Open
Rotor
Dimensions
A
B
C
35,000
143-1/2 63-1/8 65-3/8 172-1/8
12
12,000
42,000
164-1/2 84-1/8 86-3/8 183-1/8
14
Twin heavy-duty hydraulic
cylinders ensure smooth
pivoting of the hopper and
upper chamber.
A hydraulic tilt mechanism
for the infeed hopper
provides complete access
to the cutting chamber and
rotor for simplified
maintenance, saving time
and money.
Discharge transition chutes
roll out on tracks beneath the
cradle for simplified access
and cleaning. Twin-pipe
discharge creates highvelocity material evacuation
and efficient airflow, critical
for high-capacity applications.
310
F
10,000
* Rates may vary with application and are based on 3/8” diameter screen
E
SH SERIES SHREDDERS AND SHREDDER/GRANULATORS
GRANULATE
SH Series single-stage Shredders and dual-stage Shredder/Granulators
from AEC provide high-volume size reduction of bulky or hard-to-handle
material such as plastic drums, purgings, sheet materials, and heavy
industrial scrap. Both hydraulic-powered and electric-powered models
are available.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Rugged construction for long life
SH Series Shredder
• Low speed, high torque gear reduction with high tip forces
• Electric and hydraulic models
• Choice of multi-lobed cutters to suit your specific application
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Custom hopper fabrication for specific applications
• Metal detection/separation equipment
• Low noise and dust hopper design
• Upstream/downstream infeed discharge conveyors
• Low rpm and low residence time for reduced mechanical wear
• Heavy-duty steel base
• Second stage granulator equipment
• Multiple cutter profiles fit any application
• Amp feedback and photo eye anti-jam systems
• Load sensing, auto-reversing shafts to prevent jams
• Self-metering cutter geometry controls material flow and provides
uniform delivery to secondary operation
• Sealed roller bearings to eliminate material contamination
• Hardened steel cutters for long life and durability
• High strength alloy hex shafts
• Programmable process controls facilitate variations in process
parameters, depending on type and volume of material processed
• NEMA 4 standard electrics with programmable controller for
automatic reversing
311
SPECIFICATIONS, SHREDDERS 1OHP TO 15HP
Model
Chamber Size, in.
Motor, hp
SH10/1420
14 x 20
SH10/1720
17 x 20
10
14
12
Number of blades1
Cutter Width, in.
Throughput range,
lbs./hr
SPECIFICATIONS, SHREDDERS 25HP TO 30HP
Model
Chamber Size, in.
Motor, hp
SH10/1920
19 x 20
SH15/2024
19 x 24
SH15/2224
23 x 24
16
16
1.18
19
SH25/5024
50 x 24
SH30/3033
30 x 33
SH30/4033
40 x 33
25
25
1.96
33
300-660
1) Double for 0.59” blades
SH25/3024
30 x 24
blades1
Number of
Cutter Width, in.
Throughput range,
lbs./hr
SH25/4024
40 x 24
25
20
15
800-1760
1) 1.18” also available
SPECIFICATIONS, SHREDDERS 50HP TO 100HP
Model
Chamber Size, in.
Motor, hp
blades1
Number of
Cutter Width, in.
SH50/3033
30 x 33
25
Throughput range, lbs./hr
SH50/4033
40 x 33
50
33
1.96
SPECIFICATIONS, SHREDDERS 150HP TO 225 HP
Number of blades1
Cutter Width, in.
SH150/6043
60 x 43
15
150
SH15/5024
50 x 24
34
42
SH30/5033
50 x 33
SH30/6033
60 x 33
41
49
400-1000
30
1300-3300
SH50/5033
50 x 33
SH100/6043
60 x 43
41
15
SH150/7843
78 x 43
SH225/6043
60 x 43
20
15
Throughput range, lbs./hr
3.93
100
3.93
225
SH100/7843
78 x 43
20
SH225/7843
78 x 43
20
Consult Factory
1) 2.95” also available
15
SH15/4024
40 x 24
Consult Factory
1) 1.18” also available on 50 hp models; 2.95” also available on 100 hp models
Model
Chamber Size, in.
Motor, hp
GRANULATE
312
SINGLE SHAFT SHREDDER
GRANULATE
AEC Single Shaft Shredders are designed for processing plastic
waste for reclamation and recycling, large extruder purgings, large
reject parts, trim scraps, baled or loose film, synthetic fiber, wood
processing scrap, medical waste, cardboard, paper and carpet.
STANDARD FEATURES
Single Shaft Shredder
• Low speed/high torque design
• Easy accessibility
• Tramp metal protection
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Touch pad monitoring and control
• Optional control brands
• Low RPM/low noise
• Quick disconnect and quick clean screens
• Large infeed hopper
• Precision hydraulic “process ram”
• Application specific programming and control
integration
• High output “torsion point” cutting rotor
• Special purpose screens
• 4-way, indexable cutting inserts
• Multiple rotor configurations
• Critical-duty drivetrain
• Severe-duty construction with rugged hydraulics
• High speed ram
• 0.015” knife gap and easy-access screen
• Wear-resistant cutting chamber
• Stress-free frame
• Turnkey installation with custom conveyor systems
engineering and material handling
• Limited lifetime warranty on cutting rotor
• Oversized drivetrain
• Heavy outboard spherical roller bearings
• Fluid “turbocoupling”
• PLC control panel
• ISO 9001 manufactured
313
GRANULATE
SPECIFICATIONS
Chamber size
24
32
42
52
62
78
98
Infeed opening,
in.
24 x 14
32 x 40
42 x 48
52 x 68
63 x 80
78 x 87
98 x 120
20
X
X
25
30
X
X
X
40
50
60
X
X
X
X
X
Available HP
75
100
125
X
X
X
X
X
X
150
200
225
250
X
X
X
X
X
X
1 Hinged cover provides protection to ram drive cylinders and allows easy access for cleaning.
2 Heavy shelf over ram cavity to protect against impact with heavy parts.
3 Cutting rotor is engineered for durability and carries a Limited Lifetime Warranty. Cutting inserts are precision
fit for easy maintenance.
4 Anvil has a replaceable counterknife plate with close tolerance profile.
5 Hinged clean-out access doors with safety switches to access screen and cutting rotor for maintenance.
6 High quality, double row, self-aligning spherical outboard mounted roller bearings to prevent contamination.
7 Oversized reduction gearbox rated to crush rock.
8 Flanged discharge to accommodate assortment of pneumatic and mechanical conveyance systems.
9 Sizing screens from 3/8 to 3" add economical production of consistent particles in one pass.
10 Fluid coupling absorbs micro vibrations and converts torque under load.
11 Banded belt drive provides positive transmission and protection of drive train.
12 High quality, energy efficient drive motors with thermocouple interlocks.
13 Torque arm with disc springs to shock absorb gearbox. Equipped with shut down switch to limit damage from
tramp metal.
14 Heavy side walls, braces and reinforcements.
15 Heavy duty hydraulic pump package reacts quickly to high shock loads. Hydraulic system includes a 2-stage
pump, oversized cooling capacity and large reservoir.
16 Process ram provides precision feed of material to cutting rotor. Ram quickly adjusts to different load
variables to maximize processing efficiency.
17 Quick change oversized ram guide rails.
18 Heavy dual cushioned hydraulic cylinders to advance process ram. Cylinders are secured with reinforced,
vibration dampening clamps.
314
VH SERIES SINGLE SHAFT SHREDDER
GRANULATE
The VH Series Rotary Grinder is designed especially for size
reduction of vinyl siding, PVC fencing, plastic extrusion profiles
and other scrap materials
STANDARD FEATURES
• Low speed/high torque design
• Easy accessibility
• Equity “buyback” guarantee
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• 4-Way, indexable cutting inserts
• Includes 16’ vibratory infeed conveyor
• High output “torsion point” cutting rotor
• Optional high speed chipper rotor with precision blades
(produce high quality chips for paper and composite
board production)
• Severe duty construction
• Built-in pneumatic discharge port
• Stress-free frame, robotically welded
• Limited lifetime warranty on cutting rotor
• Oversized drivetrain
• Powerbelt rotor drive
• PLC controls with interlock capability
• Heavy spherical roller bearings
• ISO 9001 manufactured
315
SPECIFICATIONS
Infeed Opening (inches)
Rotor Diameter (inches)
Number of Cutters
Rotor Speed (rpm)
Drive Motor HP
Machine Weight (lbs.)
Voltage (V/PH/Hz)
Infeed Conveyor
Feed Rollers
Throughput (lbs/hr)
VH14
in/mm
VH18
in/mm
VH22
in/mm
VH25
in/mm
VH34
in/mm
VH50
in/mm
VH14
in/mm
VH18
in/mm
VH22
in/mm
VH25
in/mm
VH34
in/mm
VH50
in/mm
A
41 17/32
1055
51 3/16
1300
51 3/16
1300
51 3/16
1300
51 3/16
1300
64.57
1640
B
C
36 5/8 25 31/32
930
660
49 7/32 35 7/16
1250
900
49 7/32 35 7/16
1250
900
49 7/32 35 7/16
1250
900
49 7/32 35 7/16
1250
900
49 7/32
43.7
1250
1110
O
18 1/8
460
20 7/8
530
28
730
24 13/16
630
28
730
N/A
N/A
P
25 31/32
660
36 17/32
928
44 13/32
1128
40 15/32
1028
44 13/32
1128
N/A
N/A
VH 14
14 x 3.5
12
18
350-400
40
4,000
VH 18
18 x 5
15
24
350-400
50-60
5,500-5,600
200-2,000
300-3,000
D
20 21/32
525
21 11/32
542
21 11/32
542
21 11/32
542
21 11/32
542
29.13
740
Q
12 25/32
325
17 23/32
450
33.46
850
25 19/32
650
33.46
850
N/A
N/A
E
13 15/32
342
19 11/16
500
19 11/16
500
19 11/16
500
19 11/16
500
21.26
520
F
7 7/8
200
11 13/16
300
11 13/16
300
11 13/16
300
11 13/16
300
N/A
N/A
VH 22
21.5 x 6
20
30
350-400
75
6,000
GRANULATE
VH 25
25 x 5
15
34
350-400
60-75
6,800
460/3/60
16’ Vibratory Conveyor
(2) Positioned on Top & Bottom
300-3,000
400-4,000
G
H
24 19/32 45 9/23
625
1150
31
63
800
1600
31
63
800
1600
31
63
800
1600
31
63
800
1600
32.68
59.06
830
1500
I
J
39 3/8 16 11/32
1000
415
47
15 5/8
1200
397
47
15 5/8
1200
397
47
15 5/8
1200
397
47
15 5/8
1200
397
N/A
21.73
N/A
552
VH 34
34 x 5
15
44
350-400
75
7,600
VH 50
50 x 6
15
64
350-400
125
9,500
1,000-6,000
2,000-15,000
K
N/A
N/A
19 11/16
500
19 11/16
500
19 11/16
500
19 11/16
500
N/A
N/A
L
196 27/32
5000
196 27/32
5000
196 27/32
5000
196 27/32
5000
196 27/32
5000
78.74
2000
M
15 3/4
400
16 15/16
430
16 15/16
430
16 15/16
430
16 15/16
430
18.9
480
R
17 7/16
433
21 31/32
558
37.72
958
29 27/32
758
37.72
958
N/A
N/A
316
N
22 1/16
560
23 7/32
590
23 7/32
590
23 7/32
590
23 7/32
590
26.38
670
APM SERIES IMPACT PULVERIZERS
GRANULATE
APM SERIES IMPACT PULVERIZERS
The APM Series impact pulverizer features high-speed precision pulverizing
of medium-hard, impact resistant and friable materials. The two piece
design makes maintenance easier, allowing the outer discs to be reshaped
or replaced without removing the inner discs.
STANDARD FEATURES
• High speed precision pulverizing of medium-hard, impact resistant
and friable materials
• Grinding rings allow gap adjustment to a fineness of less than
1000 mm without a screen
APM-500 Impact
Pulverizer
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Grinding rings can be resharpened several times
• Up to 2500 lbs./hr throughput
• High peripheral speeds and highly effective crushing ensure low
drive power and high throughputs
• Small grinding chamber cross section
• Metal separation equipment
• Vibratory screen for consistent size particles
• Reprocess system to reintegrate large particle load
into pulverizer
• Wear-resistant grinding rings
• Vertical grinding discs
• Two-piece design reduces maintenance time
• New bearing technology eliminates the need for counter rotation
and extra drive motors
• Integrated temperature control system to control high
temperatures in the grinding chamber
317
APM SERIES IMPACT PULVERIZER
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
Diameter of Discs, in. (mm)
Drive Capacity, hp (kW)
Approx. Weight, lbs. (kg)
Approx. Throughput, lbs./hr (kg/hr)
APM 300
11.8 (300)
30 (22)
2645 (1200)
500 (227)
APM 500
19.6 (500)
75 (55)
4188 (1900)
1500 (650)
318
GRANULATE
APM 800
31.5 (800)
120 (90)
7054 (3200)
2500 (1134)
STRAND PELLETIZERS
GRANULATE
STRAND PELLETIZERS
Strand Pelletizers are rugged, reliable machines, built to provide troublefree service. They are simple to operate and maintain. Synchronized feed
roll and rotor speeds provide accurate pellet-length control, and quickchange gears offer a wide selection of pellet lengths. Infeed sizes range
from 6 inches all the way to 32 inches, with strand capacities of 30 to
180. Choose between helical cutters or bolt-on knives—from 12 to 75
cutting edges.
STANDARD FEATURES
Strand Pelletizer
• Synchronized feed roll and rotor speeds providing accurate
pellet-length control
• Quick-change gears
• Infeed widths: 6” to 32”
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Strand capacities of 30 to 180
• Multiple cutter design
• Option of helical cutters or bolt-on knives
• Water baths
• 12 to 75 cutting edges available
• Upper feed roll is pneumatically loaded, polyurethane covered
stainless steel and the lower feed roll is stainless steel/knurled
• Air knives
• Size classification screener
• Abrasive-resistant material
• Bolt-on knives
• Slant cut rotor with 48 small solid knives distributing
cutting action, while keeping knives sharper, longer
• Moveable rotor and fixed bed knife mounting support
allows sensitive knife gap adjustment as low as 0.001”
• Split cutting chamber with hydraulic actuator for quick
release and easy cleaning
319
STRAND PELLETIZERS
SPECIFICATIONS
Model Number
Infeed Width, in. Cutting Circle, in. Strand Capacity Rotating Cutting Edges
AEC6P
6
8 1/8
30
AEC8P
8
8 1/8
45
AEC11P
11
9 7/8
50
AEC14P
14
9 7/8
80
AEC17P
17
9 7/8
100
AEC20P
20
9 7/8
110
AEC26P
26
9 7/8
140
AEC32P
32
12 1/4
180
AEC126P
12 x 6
12 1/4
30
AEC128P
12 x 8
12 1/4
45
AEC1212P
12 x 12
12 1/4
60
Width, in.
Height, in.
Depth, in.
Infeed
Height, in.
Discharge
Height, in.
Approx.
Weight, lbs.
GRANULATE
Helical: 24, 36, 48
Bolt-on: 12, 16
Helical: 24, 36, 48
Bolt-on: 12, 16
Helical: 36, 48, 60
Bolt-on: 16, 24
Helical: 36, 48, 60
Bolt-on: 24
Helical: 36, 48, 60
Bolt-on: 24
Helical: 36, 48, 60
Bolt-on: 24, 24 (slanted)
Helical: 36, 48, 60
Bolt-on: 24
Helical: 48, 60, 66, 75
Bolt-on: 32
Wedge held: 48 (slanted)
Helical: 48, 60
Bolt-on: 24 (slanted)
Helical: 48, 60
Helical: 48, 60
AEC6P
AEC8P
AEC11P
AEC14P
AEC17P
AEC20P
AEC26P
60
60
68
76
76
80
80
37
35
50
37
35
50
42
36
54
55
44
60
58
44
60
61
44
64
67
44
64
Throughput
Motor, hp
1500
7.5
2500
10
3600
15
5000
20
6500
25
8500
30
11000
50
12000
50
2000
10
3000
15
4500
20
AEC32P AEC126P AEC128P AEC1212P
80
44
46
50
40
36
36
36
76
72
72
72
60
57.5
57.5
57.5
37
37
40
46
46
50
50
33
37
37
37
1800
2000
3500
4000
4250
4600
5000
6500
2500
3200
3800
320
PNEUMATIC CONVEYING SYSTEMS
GRANULATE
Pneumatic discharge systems ranging from 2” to 12” line size; 1-25 hp.
The blower systems are designed to convey material from the granulator to
a discharge box or silo. Available in machine-mount or floor-mount design.
STANDARD FEATURES
Pneumatic Conveying System
• Carbide coated steel wheel design for high wear applications
• Multiple bag side mounted filter head standard
• Stand alone cyclone separator stand
• Full line of reducers, couplings, pipe, elbows, and diverters
• Controls: stand alone or integrated with the granulator/shredder
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Dust removal
• Metal separation
• Special inlet design
• Sound enclosure
321
UNLOADING SYSTEMS
Blower/Fan
Type
Non-hinged
Model
Hinged
F2112
F410
Hinged
F614
Hinged
Non-hinged
F512
F819
2 (50.8)
Max
Throughput
per hour1,
lbs. (kg)
135 (61)
5 (127)
810 (368)
Capacity,
max. distrib.,
cfm (cmh)
Line Dia.
In/Out, in.
(mm)
350 (595)
4 (101.6)
900 (1529)
6 (152.4)
75 (127)
450 (765)
1400 (2379)
8 (203.2)
1620 (735)
1 Fan throughput rates and flow capacities increase as distance from fan to Cyclone unit diminishes
2 Includes fifteen feet (4.575 m) of wire-reinforced flexible tubing
CYCLONE SYSTEMS WITH MANIFOLDS
Model2
CS-101
HE-50
HE-75
HE-100
HE-150
HE-250
Use with Fan Type
F211
F410
F512
F512
F614
F819
1 Manifold assembly not available for CS-10 Cyclone models
2 Under 50' of length, use next larger size cyclone
CYCLONE FILTER BAGS
Model
CS-101
HE-50
HE-75
HE-100
HE-150
HE-250
1 Includes filter bag support rod
Filter Dia., in. (cm)
8 (20.3)
18 (45.7)
18 (45.7)
18 (45.7)
24 (60.9)
24 (60.9)
Drive
1 (0.75)
Direct
10 (3.05)
3 (2.24)
Direct
20 (6.10)
1 (0.75)
5 (3.73)
10 (7.46)
Inlet/Outlet Remove
“Range”, in. dia. (mm dia.)
2/3 (50.8-76.2)
4/4 (101.6-101.6)
5/5 (127-127)
6/6 (152.4-152.4)
6/6 (152.4-152.4)
8/8 (203.2-203.2)
Filter Length, in. (cm)
15 (38.1)
72 (182.9)
96 (243.8)
96 (243.8)
93 (236.2)
93 (236.2)
322
Approx. Max. Conveying
Distance, ft. (m)
Power, hp
(kW)
630 (286)
2500 (1135)
GRANULATE
Direct
Direct
Belt
Vertical
Horizontal
12 (3.66)
50 (15.25)
30 (9.15)
40 (12.2)
25 (7.63)
90 (27.45)
100 (30.5)
170 (51.85)
Length Without Filter
Bag, in. (cm)
20 3/4 (52.7)
40 1/2 (102.9)
51 1/2 (130.8)
59 3/16 (150.3)
59 3/16 (150.3)
85 13/32 (216.9)
Length Without Filter
Bag, in. dia. (cm dia.)
8 (20.3)
16 (40.6)
20 (50.8)
24 (61.0)
24 (61.0)
38 (96.5)
Filter Type
Qty. of Bags
1
2
2
4
4
4
Polypropylene
NOTES:
GRANULATE
NOTES:
GRANULATE
AVC SERIES VACUUM CALIBRATION TANKS
EXTRUSION
The AVC Series Vacuum Calibration Tanks feature a durable 12 gauge stainless
steel tank for wet sizing. The wet sizing tanks are divided into separate cooling
compartments and also include an air wipe section and an adjustable water level
control for immersion cooling.
Water baths and spray tanks are also available.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Complete flexibility for all rigid plastic profiles
• Stainless steel tank for wet sizing
• Rigid table with “T” slot for dry sizing
• Integral direct vacuum system supplies vacuum to
calibrator tooling:
• Stainless steel manifold
• Regulator, gauge and ports with individual shutoffs
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• 5 HP vacuum pump (n/a on model DWAVC-2V-4T-12)
• Additional 3 HP vacuum (Model WAVC-1V-3T-12 only)
• Thermometers (Model WAVC6D-1T-16 only)
• Water ring vacuum pump with muffler
• Clear plexiglass covers (model WAVC6D-1T-16 only)
• Cooling system includes:
• Stainless steel manifold
• Multiple ports with shut-offs, hoses and fittings
• Micrometer vertical handwheel adjustment (WAVC6D1T-16 only; standard on all other models)
• V-groove casters and leveling screws for in-line alterations
• Water saver recirculation/heat exchanger system
(standard on model DWAVC-2V-4T-12)
• Handwheels allow micrometer horizontal and vertical
adjustments
• Heater unit (n.a. on model DAVC-1V-R-10; standard
on DWAVC-2V-4T-12)
• 230 or 460/3/60 supply voltage
• Air pressure manifold with 12 outlets (DAVC-1V-R-10
only)
• Chilled water systems available
341
EXTRUSION
SPECIFICATIONS
Model #
DAVC-1V-R-10
WAVC6D-1T-16
WAVC-1V-3T-12
DWAVC-2V-4T-12
# ports in vacuum manifold # ports in water manifold
12
12
8
8
8
8
15
10
342
Cooling length, ft.
10
16
12
12
Tank cross section, in.
12 x 24
14 x 14
20 x 12
20 x 12
AVP SERIES PRECISION VACUUM SIZER
EXTRUSION
The AVP Precision Vacuum Sizer features a three-compartment, 12 gallon stainless
steel tank. The tank consists of an upstream vacuum sizing compartment, a cooling
section with a water seal at the end of the compartment, and a drainage and water
stripping compartment.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Tight tolerance, non-contact sizing of small tubing at high
extrusion rates
• Great accuracy with tacky materials, i.e. flexible PVC and
polyurethane
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Three compartment stainless steel tank:
• Upstream vacuum sizing compartment
• Cooling section with a water seal at the exit of the vacuum
compartment
• Compartment for drainage and water stripping
• AVP Series Options
• Loop control for regulation of vacuum level
• Tooling for rigid polymers
• Tooling for tacky polymers, (fixed or adjustable sizing
tool set)
• Stainless steel drain collector runs full length of sizing tank
• Vacuum system for 2-90” vacuum system (208/1/60
or 460/1/60)
• Variable speed vacuum pump, coupled with the reservoir
design, results in unprecedented stability
• Deionized water modifications
• Unique quench chamber and sizing sleeve provides a film
of cooling water as the tube enters the tank
• Large capacity reservoir with easy access
• Advanced control system:
• Soft-touch key pad
• Digital readout of vacuum and temperature levels
• Available for tube sizes up to 2” or 3” diameter with 6” or 8”
square tanks
343
EXTRUSION
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
2.0 AVP-6
2.0 AVP-10
3.0 AVP-6
3.0 AVP-10
Capacity (tube diameter, in.)
2
2
3
3
344
Tank, in.
6.5 x 6.5
10.5 x 10.5
6.5 x 6.5
10.5 x 10.5
AVS SERIES VACUUM SIZING TANKS
EXTRUSION
The AVS Series Vacuum Sizing Tanks are engineered and built to your
requirements. Each unit comes with a noise muffling system and an overflow tank
on each end.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Vacuum sizing of hollow tubes and pipe
• Multi-compartment tanks with independent controls
• Integral direct vacuum system
• Custom engineered for your application
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Multi-compartment stainless steel tanks with independent
temperature and vacuum control, as well as covers and
windows
• Additional 3 hp vacuum (n.a. for models AVS-2D-1V1T-6, AVS-4D-1V-1T-6, or AVS-4D-2V-3T-15; standard
for models AVS-6D-2V-3T-14 and AVS-8D-2V-3T-14)
• Water recirculation/heat exchanger system
• Corrosion-free piping
• Heater unit
• V-groove casters and leveling screws for in-line alterations
• Contoured hold down rolls
• Handwheels allow micrometer horizontal and vertical
adjustments
• Standard tanks for up to 16” x 16” tank cross section, or up
to 8” pipe
• Standard lengths of 6 to 14 feet
• Additional sizes available
345
EXTRUSION
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
2D-1V-1T-6
4D-1V-1T-6
4D-1V-2T-8
4D-1V-2T-12
4D-2V-3T-14
6D-1V-2T-12
6D-2V-3T-14
8D-1V-2T-12
8D-2V-3T-14
Capacity, dia. in.
2
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
Cooling length, ft.
6
6
8
12
14
12
14
12
14
346
Vacuum pump, hp
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
AWB WATER BATHS AND ASB SPRAY TANKS
EXTRUSION
WATER BATHS AND SPRAY TANKS
AEC water baths are offered with a variety of lengths and cross sections. The
tank is 12 gauge stainless steel and the frame is of reinforced welded steel
construction. The units include supply and drain piping with manual shut-offs
along the full interior of the tank to insure uniform distribution of the cooling water.
AWB WATER BATHS STANDARD FEATURES
• Stainless steel tank construction
• V-groove casters and leveling screws for in-line alteration
• Air wipe compartment at end of tank
• Supply and drain piping with shut-off valves
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Overflow drain at end of tank
• Water saver recirculation/heat exchanger system
• Heater unit for tempered water temperature control
(requires heat exchanger system)
• 2” tanks include drip pan and are generally used in medical
applications
• Thermometers
• Plexiblass covers
ASB SPRAY TANKS STANDARD FEATURES
• Lateral hand wheel adjustment
Include the above featured plus:
• Longitudinal handwheel adjustment
• Micrometer vertical hand wheel adjustment
• Four mist spray pipes around perimeter
• Modifications for de-ionized water
• Plexiglass tank covers
• Contoured hold down rolls
• Shut-off valves
• Left-to-right operation
• Filters
• Special paint (Industrial enamel)
347
AWB WATER BATHS AND ASB SPRAY TANKS
EXTRUSION
SPECIFICATIONS: 2” AND 3” MODELS
Model Number
Capacity diameter, in.
Cooling length,
ft.
Tank cross
section, in.
Centerline
height, in.
Width, in.
Shipping weight,
lbs.
AWB-2-1-10
AWB-2-1-20
AWB-2-1-30
AWB-3-1-10
ASB-3-1-10
AWB-3-1-16
ASB-3-1-16
AWB-3-1-20
ASB-3-1-20
AWB-3-1-30
ASB-3-1-30
2
2
2
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
10
20
30
10
16
20
30
6x6
6x6
6x6
10 x 10
10 x 10
10 x 10
10 x 10
42 +/- 2
42 +/- 2
42 +/- 2
42 +/- 2
42 +/- 2
42 +/- 2
42 +/- 2
18
18
18
24
24
24
24
800
800
800
1000
1000
1000
1000
SPECIFICATIONS: 4”, 6” AND 8” MODELS
Model
Number
Capacity diameter, in.
Cooling
length, ft.
Tank cross
section, in.
Centerline
height, in.
Width, in.
Shipping
weight, lbs.
AWB-4-1-10
ASB-4-1-10
AWB-4-1-16
ASB-4-1-16
AWB-4-1-20
ASB-4-1-20
AWB-4-1-30
ASB-4-1-30
AWB-6-1-16
ASB-6-1-16
AWB-6-1-20
ASB-6-1-20
AWB-8-1-16
ASB-8-1-16
AWB-8-1-20
ASB-8-1-20
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
6.5
6.5
8.5
8.5
10
16
20
30
16
20
16
20
12 x 12
12 x 12
12 x 12
12 x 12
14 x 14
14 x 14
16 x 16
16 x 16
42 +/- 2
42 +/- 2
42 +/- 2
42 +/- 2
42 +/- 2
42 +/- 2
42 +/- 2
28
28
28
28
32
32
36
36
1200
1200
1200
1200
1400
1400
1600
1600
AWB - 2 - 1 - 6
Tank sections
W - Water Bath
S - Spray Tank
Capacity - maximum diameter
(in inches)
348
Total tank length
(in feet)
APG AND APC SERIES BELT PULLERS
EXTRUSION
The APG Medium-Duty Series machines are ideal for flexible and semi-rigid
tubing applications, such as automotive or building products.
APC40
The APC Economy Series belt pullers are designed to economically
process flexible, semi-rigid and medical tubing. Where high vacuum or long
tooling are a must, the APC Heavy-Duty Series will process heavy walled
profile and pipe for maximum productivity.
APC12-2
STANDARD FEATURES
• AC Flux Vector variable speed drives for more precise machine
control
• Greater accuracy
• Higher operating speed
• Reduced noise levels
• Reduced maintenance
• Non-marking, poly “V” groove traction belts for clean contact
with extrudate
• Lubricated-for-life, sealed ball bearing rollers between the drive
and take-up pulleys on each belt assembly assure maximum
contact to the extrudate
APG30-6
APG18
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• IP Control Enhancement Package features a backlit,
4-line LCD operator interface, closed-loop speed
control through a digital speed tachometer, electronic
footage counter, and display of drive-motor load
• 5 HP drive in place of 3 HP (APC40-60)
• Remote speed control with 50 ft. cable
• Totally enclosed belt guards and emergency stop button ensure
operator safety
• 460/3/60 power supply
• I2 HP AC flux vector motor (175, 350 or 450 FPM
max speed) (APG18-4 thru 26-4)
• 4 speed transmission (APG30-48)
• Pneumatic upper belt actuation (APG18-26; standard
on APG30-48 and APC40-60)
• Four adjustable height jack screws and swivel casters
• Digital speed tachometer (fpm)
• Electronic footage counter
• Digital speed tachometer AND electronic footage
counter
349
EXTRUSION
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
APC12-2 APG18-3 APG18-4 APG26-3 APG26-4 APC40-(w) APC48-(w) APC60-(w) APG30-6 APG40-6 APG48-6
Belt Drive, H.P.
1/2
1 (optional 1-1/2 or 2)
3 (optional 5)
3
2
Belt Height, in.
42 +/- 2
Max. Belt
2
4 (equally spaced from center lline)
8
6
Opening, in.
Belt Contact
12
18
26
40
48
60
30
40
48
Length, in.
Belt Width, in.
2
3
4
3
4
6, 8, 12, or 18
6
Belt Speed, FPM
Customer Specified
Power Supply 115/1/60
230/3/60*
Length, in.
24
32
68
76
88
46
56
64
Width, in.
24
26
30 for up to 12” belts; 36 for 18” belts
26
Weight, lbs.
300
650
2200
2700
3200
1300
1500
1700
*Optional 208/1/60 or 460/3/60 available.
Other options are available. Contact the factory for more information. Specifications subject to change without notice.
APC ECONOMY BELT PULLER
• Ideal for flexible, semi-rigid and medical tubing applications
• 2” wide belt and 12” contact area
• Small footprint--minimal floor space
• Economical, yet dependable chain and sprocket drive system
• Adjustable nylon entrance rollers align the extrudate as it passes through the puller
• Top belt assembly opens and closes by a single handwheel adjustment
• Set speed can be easily adjusted with convenient controls
APC HEAVY-DUTY PULLERS FOR MAXIMUM PRODUCTIVITY
• Use where high vacuum or long tooling are a must; ideal for heavy walled profile and pipe
• Three horsepower, flux-vector variable speed drive and four speed transmission allow a speed range up to 80:1
• Each drive train includes three idler sprockets, double number 40 roller chain and flame hardened tooth sprockets for long life
• Top belt assembly is pneumatically operated for efficiency and can be precisely set with a single handwheel adjustment
• 6”, 8”, 12” or 18” widths are available with 40”, 48” or 60” contact area
APG MEDIUM DUTY BELT PULLER
• Ideal for flexible and semi-rigid tubing applications
• Double-sided timing belt drive system
• Surface defects caused by puller vibration are virtually eliminated, and cut tolerance is improved
• Adjustable nylon entrance guide rollers align the extrudate as it enters the belts
• Top and bottom assemblies open and close around the center line of the extrudate with a single adjustment
• Set speed can be adjusted with convenient controls
• 3” and 4” wide belt available with 18” and 26” contact area
APG MEDIUM-DUTY PRECISION PULLER
• Ideal for automotive and building product applications
• Double-sided timing belt drive system
• Top belt assembly is pneumatically operated and can be precisely set with a single handwheel adjustment
• 6” wide belt available in 30”, 40”, or 48” contact area
• 4 speed transmission also available
350
AW SERIES WHEEL PULLERS AND EMBOSSERS
EXTRUSION
The AWP Wheel Pullers are used when a traditional belt puller could damage
the profile. Typical applications include V-channel and lawn edging. Roller
pullers are also available for extremely flexible profiles. (AWP8 Wheel Puller
shown at right) AWE Embossers are available to mark or imprint your
extruded profile. They can be located anywhere on the line that fits your
process, and they are designed for maximum flexibility.
8 Wheel Puller
with Double Stand
2 Roller Puller
with Single Stand
STANDARD FEATURES
• 18” maximum profile width
• 4” maximum wheel opening
• Adjustable nylon guide rollers
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• 10” diameter and 2” wide rubber-covered wheels
• Line Speed without transmission: 10-100
FPM or other 10:1 speed range
• 4 and 8 wheel models available
• Automatic drive chain tension control
• Line speed with transmission: 1/2-80 FPM,
1-160 FPM or 2-320 FPM
• 1 HP TEFC Flux Vector variable speed motor
• Controls include “E” step, disconnect and power cord with plug
• Upper shaft driven
• Pneumatic upper wheel activation
• Rotary unions for roll cooling on embossers
• IP Control Enhancement Package:
• Backlit LCD 4 line operator interface
• Digital speed tachometer
• Closed-loop speed control through tachometer
• Display of drive motor load
• Digital speed tachometer (fpm)
• Digital speed tachometer AND electronic footage
counter
351
EXTRUSION
SPECIFICATIONS
Number of stands
Number of wheels
Wheels
Maximum Wheel Opening, in.
Maximum Product Width, in.
Wheel Roll Height, in.
Weight, lbs.
Wheel Pullers
AWP4
AWP8
1
2
4
8
10” OD x 2” face width rubber covered
4
18
42 +/- 2
700
900
352
Embossers
AWE1
AWE2
1
2
N/A
650
800
ASI AND ASC SERIES SERVO CUTTERS
EXTRUSION
The AEC’s revolutionary servo-driven cutter was designed based on market
input to eliminate downtime and increase productivity.
ASC STANDARD FEATURES
ASI Series
Servo Cutter
• Considerably less maintenance than a traditional clutch
brake cutter
• High torque ratings for fast, clean cut
• Easy access for necessary maintenance
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Design significantly reduces noise levels
• High torque option for cutting heavy wall tubing
• State-of-the-art controls produce superior operability
• Blade lubrication system
• Discrete instrument control system
• Heaters with control for heating the extrudate as it
enters the bushing to ensure cut quality
• Faster set-up with user-friendly touch screen
• Transformer for 460/1/60 or 208/1/60 volt power supply
• Special knives
ASI STANDARD FEATURES
• Quick-change system for blades requires no tools
(patent pending)
Includes all of the ASC features, plus the following:
• Quick change blade system
• Quick change bushing system
• New quick-change bushing system for fast product
changeovers
• Built-in storage cabinet
• Integral height adjusting casters
• Integral height adjusting casters
• User-friendly touch screen control system
353
EXTRUSION
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
Cut Capacity, in.
Bushing Dia., in.
ASI2 ASC2 ASI3 ASC3 ASI4 ASC4 ASI5 ASC5 ASI6 ASC6
0-2
0-3
0-4
0-5
0-6
2.25
3.25
4.25
5.25
6.25
Max. Cuts per Min. 1000 250 1000 250 1000 250 1000 250 1000 250
200200200200200Blade Speed, RPM
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
Max. Cut Length
9999.99 Inches/Feet Other Units Available
Min. Cut Length
Standard Torque
Rating, In. lbs.
0.010 Inches/Feet Other Units Available
High Output Torque
Rating, In. lbs.
115
250
250
Consult factory
290
625
625
Consult factory
Power Supply
Optional Voltage
Dimensions, in.
208/230/1/60
460/3/60
A
32
B
30
C
Weight, lbs.
27
28
29
500
30
Easy-access machine
housing features four
fasteners that open with
just a quarter turn of a
flathead screwdriver.
31
550
Quick Change
Bushing Holder
Std. Opt. Std. Opt. Std. Opt. Std. Opt. Std. Opt.
Quick Change
Blade Holder
Height-Adjusting
Casters
AVAILABLE CONTROL VERSIONS
• ASI: Automatically selects continuous vs. cyclic
blade spinning based on line speed
• ASC: Cyclic blade motion regard less of line speed
Low maintenance servo
drive minimizes downtime.
Quick-change blade system
allows for blade changes in
just a few seconds.
(Standard on ASI models)
354
Quick-change bushings
make changeovers faster
and easier. No tools are
required. (Standard on
ASI models)
ACS, ACC AND AMP SERIES PULLER/CUTTER COMBINATIONS
EXTRUSION
The servo-driven cutters boost productivity and reduce downtime. All of our
puller/cutters feature easy-access housing. High torque ratings are available for
increased force and clean cuts on heavy wall tubing. The AM Series is ideal for
small medical tubing and profiles, and it is available for straight tube (AMT) or
bubble tube (AMP). The AC Series are heavy-duty pullers for tubing and profile
applications.
AMP Series
AC Series
ACS STANDARD FEATURES
• AC Flux Vector puller drive (Servo drive on AM straight and bubble
tube models)
• Servo-driven cutter boosts productivity and reduces maintenance
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Easy-access machine housing opens with just a screwdriver
• Cut length control provided by precise control of
motor speed
• High torque option for increased force and clean cuts on heavy
wall tubing
• Precise control of acceleration and deceleration
provides close tolerances and identical transitions
• Max.Cut Length 9999.99” or 999999 ft; Min.Cut Length: 0.010”
• Dual linear adjustments allow easy string-up,
increased belt life and reduced down-time
• Direct instrument control system
• Repeat accuracy and zero backlash ensure close
tolerance cutting
ACC STANDARD FEATURES
• IP control package for adjustable blade speed
(standard on AMP)
ACS Series features all of the above features, plus the following:
• User-friendly touch screen control
• AC models feature quick-change brushing, quick-change blade, and height
adjustable swivel casters
• Blade lubrication system
• Heaters with control for heating the extrudate as it
enters the bushing to ensure cut quality
• Digital tachometer (FPM) indicator
AMP AND AMT STANDARD FEATURES
• Remote speed control with 50 ft. cable
• Designed for medical tube applications, including bubble tube, etc.
• 4-speed transmission
• 0.01% speed regulation (digital tach. feedback)
• 2 HP AC flux vector (175 or 350 FPM max. speed)
• Transformer for 460/3/60 volt power supply (208/1/60
available on AMP models)
• Quick-change blade system requires no tools
• Height adjusting casters ensure portability
355
EXTRUSION
SPECIFICATIONS
AM_6-0.5(B)
AM_12-1(B)
AC_18-2 AC_18-3 AC_18-4 AC_26-2 AC_26-3 AC_26-4
Cut Capacity, in.
0-1/2 or equiv. Profile 0-1 or Equiv. Profile
2
3
4
2
3
4
Bushing Diameter, in.
.75
1.25
2.25
3.25
4.25
2.25
3.25
4.25
Max. Cuts per minute on
1000
demand (ACC and AMP)
Max. Cuts per minute on
N/A
250
demand (ACC)
Torque Rating, lbs.
84
115
250
115
250
Belt Drive
AC-flux vector (std.); Servo (Bubble tube)
AC-flux vector (variable speed)
Belt Height, in.
42 +/- 2
Maximum Belt Opening, in.
1-1/2
2
6
Belt Contact Length, in.
6
12
18
26
Belt Width, in.
1
2
3
4
3
4
Belt Type
Poly-V (variety of materials)
Belt Speed, FPM
3-50, 5-100, 10-200, 15-300, 20-400, 30-600
Consult Factory
Weight
950
1000
1250
1300
1250
1300
Supply Voltage
230/1/60
230/3/60
NOTE: Options Available. Specifications subject to change without notice
USER FRIENDLY CONTROLS
ADDITIONAL AMP OPTIONS
• State-of-the-art touch-screen control for easy set-up:
• AMP and ACC Series feature automatic control of cutting blades
• ACS Series cyclically spins cutter blade
• Quad or single output module
• Control modifications to allow independent adjustments of the puller
speed changes and analog signal outputs
• Control modifications to allow bump/taper up to 3, 4, or 5 diameters
Cutter moves laterally
for easy string-up.
• Microair I standard low pressure regulator
• Microair II low pressure controller accepts contact closure
• Microair IV high speed programmable low pressure air controller
with 0-10V input
The computer-based
bubble tube control has
a color touch-screen that
displays tube design and
parameters and real-time
process status.
Quick-change blade
system requires no
tools. (ACC Series only)
The state-of-the-art
touch-screen has clearly
defined buttons for fast,
easy setup. (ACC
Series only)
356
ADS, AS AND AUS SERIES SAWS
EXTRUSION
ADS, AS, AND AUS SERIES SAWS
A wide range of saws to fit most applications, AEC’s complete line of saws
will improve product quality in virtually every application. Our chop-cut saws
feature fast performance at up to 25 cuts per minute, our cross-cut saws
offer exceptional versatility, and our up-cut saws provide heavy-duty,
reliable operation. Choose between two levels of control to meet your
needs.
ADS CHOP-CUT SAWS
• Cut rigid or semi-rigid, 2” max. O.D. tubing and profiles with up to 3” x 6”
cross sections
• High-speed performance up to 25 FPM
• Air-powered saw table provides increased capacity
• Adjustable, polyurethane-faced pneumatic clamps ensure positive hold
on extrudate
• Flow valves and hydraulic shock absorber ensure smooth operation
• Product counter
• Chip pan for particle collection
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• IP servo control system
• Carbide-tipped blade
• 24” table travel (N/A on cross-cut saws)
AS CROSS-CUT SAWS
• Electronic cut to length measuring system
• Automatic in-line cutting of tubing and up to 6” x 20” cross sections,
semi-rigid and rigid profiles
• Line speeds up to 20 FPM: up to 10 cuts per minute
• Table is air-powered in both directions with a hydraulic cushioned return
• Saw blade and motor assembly are mounted above the table and travel
across into the extrudate
• Positive extrudate clamping on entrance and exit side of blade
• Limit switch adjusts blade travel
• Product counter
• Chip pan for particle collection
AUS UP-CUT SAWS
• Rigid profile and pipe applications up to 9” O.D.
• Line speeds up to 25 FPM: up to 15 cuts per minute
• Heavy-duty, reliable design
• Needle valves control table and saw travel speed
• Positive clamping on both sides of extrudate results in superior
cut quality
• Quiet operation
• Product counter
357
ADS, AS AND AUS SERIES SAWS
EXTRUSION
SPECIFICATIONS
ADS-24
Type
Cutting Capacity, in.
Saw Blade, in. Dia.
Center Line Height, in.
Supply Voltage
Weight, lbs.
Motor, HP
Air Supply, PSI
Table Travel, in.
Dimensions, in.
ADS-36
Chop-Cut
2H x 4W, 2 Tube 3H x 6W, 3 Tube
10
12
AS-520
AS-420
4H x 20W
14
1100
1575
1.5
2
34W x 42L
46W x 50L
Cross-Cut
5H x 20W
AS-620
AUS-3
6H x 20W
18
3 O.D.
12
14
42 +/- 2
230 or 460/3/60
1600
1650
3
60-80
18 (24 Optional)
36W x 50L 56W x 50L
AEC offers a complete line of saws to improve your
product quality and profitability. Our chop-cut, cross-cut
and up-cut saws come in several sizes, with two levels of
control available to choose from.
AUS-5 AUS-7
Up-Cut
5 O.D. 7 O.D.
16
20
800
900
2
1000
3
36W x 55L
The user-friendly operator
interface on the optional
servo package leads the
operator through every step.
The optional servo control systems will improve cut-length
tolerances, reducing scrap and eliminating off-line
operations. Since the table follows the extrudate, the
operator doesn’t have to adjust saw table speed.
Cut-length tolerance in a standard pneumatic saw is +/0.125” or greater. The servo system will produce the best
results, reducing tolerance to +/- 0.015”. The servo system
includes a user-friendly touch-screen for easy operator
interface.
This graph demonstrates
the effectiveness of servodriven cross-cut saws.
The table glides on precision
finished rails and linear
motion bearings for smooth
travel and long bearing life.
358
AUS-9
9.8 O.D.
24
1100
5
40W x 55L
ADT AND AT SERIES DUMP TABLES AND TAKE-AWAY CONVEYORS
EXTRUSION
ADT AND AT SERIES DUMP TABLES AND CONVEYORS
Dump tables and take-away conveyors are used to move cut pieces of
extruded profile out of the way of the extrusion process. They are located
downstream of the saw or cutter. The dump table is typically used to off
load cut sections of pipe and heavy profile. The take-away conveyor is
used for tubing and some profile applications. It can also be equipped with
air eject to move the tubing or profile off the side of the conveyor.
Air cooling tables are also available.
AT Series Take-Away Conveyor
AT SERIES TAKE-AWAY CONVEYOR
• 3” and 4” models up to 12’ long
• Welded steel construction
• Variable speed DC motor and SCR control (10-250 FPM)
• Swivel, locking casters
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Adjustable height
• Left to right operation
• Complete control system
• Special paint
• Air eject models include an air knife, full controls and a
contact closure to turn air on.
ADT SERIES DUMP TABLE
• Welded steel construction
• Easy attachment to saw (4 bolts)
• 20’ long x 6” wide maximum table area
• Mounting rail on frame for “length cut” and “dump control” switches
• Complete controls including:
• Dump well limit switch
• Solenoid valve
• Flow control valve
359
ADT AND AT SERIES DUMP TABLES AND TAKE-AWAY CONVEYORS
EXTRUSION
DUMP TABLE SPECIFICATIONS
Dump Tables
Model
ADT-10-4
4" x 10'
Table Size, W x L
Centerline Height, in.
Supply Voltage
Air Supply, psi
Width, in.
Length, ft.
Weight, lbs.
ADT-20-4
4" x 20'
ADT-10-6
6" x 10'
ADT-20-6
6" x 20'
10
550
20
750
42 +/- 2
115/1/60
60-80
20
10
500
20
700
TAKE-AWAY CONVEYOR SPECIFICATIONS
Model
Table Size, W x L
Centerline Height, in.
Supply Voltage
Air Supply, psi
Width, in.
Length, ft.
Weight, lbs.
AT(A)4-3
3” x 4’
AT(A)6-3
3” x 6’
AT(A)8-3
3” x 8’
4
225
6
250
8
280
Take-Away Conveyors
AT(A)10-3 AT(A)12-3 AT(A)4-4 AT(A)6-4
3” x 10’
3” x 12’
4” x 4’
4” x 6’
42 +/- 2
115/1/60
60-80 Air Eject Models (A) only
18
10
12
4
6
300
320
250
275
360
AT(A)8-4
4” x 8’
AT(A)10-4
4” x 10’
AT(A)12-4
4” x 12’
8
300
10
325
12
350
EM SERIES MANUAL SCREEN CHANGERS
EXTRUSION
The line of Manual Screen Changers was designed using finite element
modeling, ensuring leak-free operation up to 10,000 psi. AEC Screen
Changers feature a patented pressure activated seal that allows processing
of polymers up to 850ºF. The seals are designed to be accessible through
the slide plate opening, allowing service with no machine disassembly.
Another feature of the Manual Screen Changer is its unique multi-position
handle design. This safety and convenience feature helps avoid
interference and allows better operator access to the screen changer.
EM Series Manual Screen Changer
STANDARD FEATURES
• Multi-position handle for better operator access
• Major components designed by finite element modeling for leakfree operation up to 10,000 psi
• Patented pressure activated seal
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
• Standard machines in stock
• Close-coupled extruder connections available
• Cost-efficient design guaranteed for leak-free operation
up to 10,000 psi
• Six models available from 1" through 4.5" (25mm - 120mm)
• Allows leak-free processing from 0-850ºF
• Designed and built in the US
• Adapters are cost-efficient and designed for optimum
flow rheology. Thread-on adapters are available,
eliminating C-clamp costs
• Extruder screws may be pulled through the screen
changer while mounted on the barrel
• Unmatched price, delivery, and after sales service
361
EXTRUSION
SPECIFICATIONS
Model Size
Bore
Screen Diameter
Inches
mm
Inches
mm
Heater kW
EM-10
1.010
25.65
1.063
26.99
EM-15
1.510
38.35
1.563
39.69
EM-20
2.010
51.05
2.063
52.39
EM-25
2.510
63.75
2.563
65.09
EM-35
3.555
90.30
3.563
90.49
EM-45
4.735
120.27
4.188
122.24
0.6 kW
0.9 kW
1.2 kW
1.8 kW
3.0 kW
4.8 kW
10.00
254.00
M30
12.00
304.80
M36
Heater Voltage
B.C.
Bolts
Inches
mm
(3)
230 or 460 V
4.250
107.85
M12
5.50
139.70
M16
6.50
165.10
M20
“L” Screws
3 Places on Ø “M”
On Vertical C.L.
362
7.50
190.50
M24
EH SERIES HYDRAULIC SCREEN CHANGERS
EXTRUSION
The EH Hydraulic Screen Changers were designed with the most
impressive list of features available. Designed using finite element modeling
for operation up to 10,000 psi, pressure drops to 3000 psi and processing
temperatures up to 850ºF. Close coupling to the extruder is available with
the standard bolt through extruder connection. The EH Screen Changer
comes fully assembled, pre-wired and requires only a single temperature
control zone. AEC provides full time, total support—without compromise,
without exceptions.
STANDARD FEATURES
EH Series Hydraulic Screen Changer
• Bolt through extruder connection for easier installation and
better seal
• Finite element modeling
• Pressure activated seal for leak-free processing
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
• New breaker plate design
• Easier installation, better sealing and improved reliability
• Tamper resistant safety switches
• Cost-efficient design for operation up to 10,000 psi and
pressure drops to 3000 psi
• Six hydraulic EH Screen Changer models available from
2.5" to 10"
• Allows leak-free processing from 0-850ºF
• Complies with NFPA-79 and European CE specifications
• 24% more screen area and improved retention
• Extruder screw may be pulled through the screen
changer while mounted on barrel
• Standard unit designed for worldwide use
363
EXTRUSION
SPECIFICATIONS
Model Size
Heater kW (body)
Heater kW (slideplate)
Total Heater kW
Screen Dia. “A”
Inches
EH-25
2.6 kW
0.6 kW
3.2 kW
2.875
EH-35
3.8 kW
1.0 kW
4.8 kW
3.9375
EH-45
5.6 kW
1.6 kW
7.2 kW
5.1875
EH-60
8.0 kW
1.6 kW
9.6 kW
6.5625
EH-80
8.0 kW
2.0 kW
10.0 kW
8.0625
EH-100
20.0kW
4.0 kW
24.0 kW
10.125
mm
73
100
132
167
205
257
(size)
Note: Sideplate heat optional on horizontal EH-25, EH-35 and EH-45
Horizontal Standard
Horizontal Opposite
364
MSDP STANDARD GEAR PUMP
EXTRUSION
Install a MSDP Gear Pump System and reduce the load on your extruder.
This load reduction can translate into higher output rates, lower melt
temperatures, lower energy consumption, and longer screw and barrel life.
In summary, maximize the efficiency of your extruder with a Gear Pump.
Consistent on-spec production has an enormous effect upon production
and profits. Not only does more production go out the door, but your
extruder line runs smoother and more efficiently, even with 100% regrind.
MSDP Standard Gear Pump
DESIGNED SPECIFICALLY FOR:
• Highly filled materials
• Pressures up to 5000 psi - 345 bar
THE LONG LASTING EXTRUSION SOLUTION
MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
• Increased extruder life
• Housing: Carbon Steel 4140; Optional 410
Stainless Steel
• Faster startup
• Gears: Helical or Spur; Tool Steel D-2 Thru Hard
• Lower processing temperature
• Bearings: Nitrided Steel
• More accurate gauge control
• Seals: Stainless Steel 304
• Reduced scrap
• Lower shear stress
• Process recycled materials
• Fast payback
• Sizes available for all products and extruders
365
EXTRUSION
SPECIFICATIONS
MSDP
050/006
Model
MSDP
050/012
MSDP
050/025
MSDP
090/020
MSDP
090/039
MSDP
110/022
MSDP
110/043
MSDP
110/078
MSDP
110/110
MSDP
155/155
MSDP
183/183
MSDP
240/240
MSDP
275/275
MSDP
300/300
MSDP
350/350
Throughput/min. 1.0 S.G. @ 5
rpm (lbs/hr)
.06
.13
.27
.41
.79
1.36
2.66
4.82
6.8
22.1
38.5
76
116
186.5
293
(kgs/hr)
.03
.06
.12
.18
.36
.61
1.2
2.18
3.07
10.0
17.4
39.5
52.4
84.3
132
Throughput/max. 1.0 S.G. @
100 rpm (lbs/hr)
1.3
2.6
5.4
8.2
15.8
27.2
53.2
96.4
136
442
769
1520
2320
3730
5180
2341
(kgs/hr)
.6
1.17
2.4
3.7
7.14
12.3
24
43.6
61.4
200
348
687
1049
1686
CC/REV
.10
.20
.41
.62
1.2
2.06
4.03
7.3
10.3
33.8
58.2
114.8
176
282.6
392
PPH/RPM @ S.G. = 1.0
.013
.026
.054
.082
.158
.272
.532
.964
1.36
4.42
7.7
15.2
23.2
37.3
51.8
KG/RPM @ S.G. = 1.0
23.4
.006
.012
.024
.037
.071
.123
.24
.436
.61
2.00
3.48
6.87
10.49
16.86
Total KW
.8
.8
.8
.8
.8
1
1
1
1
2
2
4
6
6
6
Weight (lbs)
.7
7
7
7
7
22
22
22
22
48
65
135
188
240
310
Weight (kg)
3.2
3.2
3.2
3.2
3.2
10
10
10
10
22
29
61
85
109
141
Maximum Pressure: 5000 psig (345 bar)
Maximum Differential Pressure: 4000 psig (276 bar)
Maximum Temperature: 650ºF (343ºC)
Transducer Ports: 4 locations in body
MSDP
PCP
PCP
PCP
PCP
PCP
430/430 600/300 600/400 600/500 700/525 880/660
Model
Throughput/min. 1.0 S.G.
@ 5 rpm (lbs/hr)
480
730
975
1220
1595
3085
(kgs/hr)
217
330
441
551
721
1394
Throughput/max. 1.0 S.G.
@ 50 rpm (lbs/hr)
4805
7300
9750
12,200
15,950
30,850
(kgs/hr)
2172
3300
4407
5514
7209
13,944
CC/REV
727
1108
1477
1846
2418
4670
PPH/RPM @ S.G. = 1.0
96.1
146
195
244
319
617
KG/RPM @ S.G. = 1.0
43.4
66
88
110
144
279
Total KW
10
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Weight (lbs)
700
1500
1625
1750
2300
2900
Weight (kg)
318
680
737
794
1043
1315
D
C
B
E
Diameter
A
B
C
D
E
A
MSDP MSDP MSDP MSDP MSDP MSDP MSDP MSDP MSDP MSDP MSDP MSDP MSDP MSDP MSDP MSDP PCP
PCP
PCP
PCP
PCP
050/006 050/012 050/025 090/020 090/039 110/022 110/043 110/078 110/110 155/155 183/183 240/240 275/275 300/300 350/350 430/430 600/300 600/400 600/500 700/525 880/660
inches
2.48
2.48
2.48
2.48
2.48
3.5
3.5
3.5
mm
63
63
63
63
63
88.90
88.90
88.90
3.5
5
7
8
inches
4.50
4.50
4.50
4.51
4.51
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.63
6.0
8.5
mm 114.31 114.31 114.31
114.5
114.5
152.4
152.4
152.4
152.4
168.4
152.4
215.9
88.90 127.00 177.80 203.20
9
10.25
10.25
228.6 260.35 260.35
9.5
10.25
12
20
24
20
23
26
508
609.6
508
584.2
660.4
3.5
4.5
5.5
5.5
7
0.125
0.25
0.25
0.437
1
1
1
1
1.625
2
2.5
2.75
3.5
3.5
5
3.18
6.35
6.35
11.09
25.40
25.40
25.40
25.40
41.28
50.89
63.50
69.85
88.90
88.90
127.00
3.12
4.41
4.31
4.13
4.29
5.12
6.96
8.69
10.83
10.5
12.28
3.12
3.12
3.12
79.24
79.24
79.24
inches
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
79.24 112.01 109.47 104.90 108.96 130.04 176.78 220.72 275.08 266.70 311.91
5.5
7.28
7.28
7.28
7.6
9
11.53
14.7
18.44
17.3
20.6
mm 139.70 139.70 139.70 139.70 139.70 184.90 184.90 184.90 193.04 228.50 292.86 373.38 468.37 439.67 522.98
366
17
15
1.60
3.12
16
381
0.063
79.24
13.5
10.25
mm
mm
13.5
241.3 260.35 260.35
inches
inches
13.5
304.80 342.90 342.90 342.90 406.40 431.80
16.32
88.90 114.30 139.70 139.70 177.80
15
15.5
16
22
234
414.52 381.00 393.70 406.40 558.80 594.40
27.16
30.3
31.3
32.3
44.3
47
689.96 769.60 795.02 820.40 1125.20 1193.80
MHDP HIGH PRESSURE GEAR PUMP
EXTRUSION
Install a MHDP Gear Pump System and reduce the load on your extruder.
This load reduction can translate into higher output rates, lower melt
temperatures, lower energy consumption, and longer screw and barrel life.
In summary, maximize the efficiency of your extruder with a Gear Pump.
Consistent on-spec production has an enormous effect upon production
and profits. Not only does more production go out the door, but your
extruder line runs smoother and more efficiently even with 100% regrind.
MHDP High Pressure Gear Pump
DESIGNED SPECIFICALLY FOR:
• Tough-to-run fractional melt materials
• Highly filled materials
• Pressures up to 10,000 psi - 689 bar
MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
THE LONG LASTING EXTRUSION SOLUTION
• Housing: Carbon Steel 4140; Optional 410
Stainless Steel
• Increased extruder life
• Spur Gears: Tool Steel D-2 Thru Hard
• Faster startup
• Bearings: Nitrided Steel
• Lower processing temperature
• Seals: Stainless Steel 304
• More accurate gauge control
• Reduced scrap
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Lower shear stress
• Adaptors
• Process recycled materials
• Controls
• Drive Packages
• Fast payback
• Stands
• Sizes available for all products and extruders
• Corrosive Material
• Internal Fluid Channels (heat/cool)
• Manual Screen Changers
• Hydraulic Screen Changers
• Static Mixers
• Divert Valves
367
EXTRUSION
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
CC/REV
LBS/HR/RPM AT SP GR = 1.0
KG/HR/RPM at SP GR = 1.0
LBS/HR at 5-50 RPM
MHDP
MHDP
155/080
183/100
19.6
30.7
2.1
4.1
.95
1.8
13-130
21-210
MHDP
240/120
55.4
7.3
3.4
36.5-365
MHDP
275/175
99
13.1
5.9
65.5-655
MHDP
300/200
183.2
24.2
11
121-1210
MHDP
350/230
254.6
33.6
15.3
168-1680
MHDP
430/300
504
66.6
30.2
333-3330
KG/HR at 5-50 RPM
5.9-59
9-90
17-170
29.5-295
55-550
76.5-765
151-1510
Heater KW Required
1
2
4
6
4
6
10
Pump Weight (lbs)
49
66
135
188
199
312
706
Pump Weight (kg)
22
30
61
85
90
141
319
MHDP
300/200
10.25
260.3
10.25
260.3
2
50.8
11
279.4
MHDP
350/230
10.25
260.3
10.25
260.3
2.375
60.3
12.9
328.7
Discharge Pressure: up to 10,000 psig (689 bar)
Maximum Differential Pressure: 7500 psig (517 bar)
Temperature Range: 60-750ºF (16-400ºC)
Transducer Ports: 4 locations in body
MHDP
155/080
Dimensions
inches
mm
inches
mm
inches
mm
inches
mm
A
B
C
D
C
5
127
6.63
168.4
1
25.4
5.5
139.7
MHDP
183/100
MHDP
240/120
7
177.8
6
152.4
1
25.4
7.4
187.2
8
203.2
8.5
215.9
1.25
31.8
9.3
235.7
D
A
B
368
MHDP
275/175
9
228.6
9.5
241.3
1.75
44.5
11.3
287.8
MHDP
430/300
12
304.8
15
381
3
76.2
17
431.3
STATIC MIXER
EXTRUSION
STATIC MIXER
The Static Mixer is installed right after the gear pump to improve consistency
of the melt feed to the die. Flow is divided equally, passing each element,
and the number of divisions increases in a geometrical progression as the
number of elements increases.
STANDARD FEATURES
• 6 and 9 element designs to match appliation (same overall length)
Static Mixer
• Flow is divided equally, passing each element, and the number of
divisions increases in a geometrical progression as the number of
elements increases
• 6 standard sizes from 1"- 4" diameter
BENEFITS
• Generally installed immediately after the gear pump to improve
consistency
• More uniform homogenization of polymer properties
• Temperature
• Color
• Flow viscosity
• Additive dispersion
• System integration with adapter to shorten length of the line
• Mixes color uniformly
• Improved dimensional control
• Higher quality product appearance
369
STATIC MIXER
EXTRUSION
Gear pump reference table
below for standard pump
and mixer combinations
1/2" - 13 UNC x 1/2" DP
(2) places for eyebolts
Std. adapter plate
designed to mate pump
to mixer housing
Thermocouple tap
M14 x 1.5 x 8mm DP
“J” diameter thru
“J” places, equally
Spaced on a “B” diameter bolt circle
G
Flow
E D
Electric band heater
240V/480V
.22"
1/2" - 20 pressure tap
(supplied with plug)
C
B
A
F
H
Static
Mixer
Item Flange Bolt Barrel
Size Number O.D. Circle O.D.
Pump/Static Mixer Combinations
Socket Dia.
Bore Dia.
D
E
Outlet Flange Mixer
C’Bore Width O.A.I.
Hole # of
Dia. Bolts
A
B
C
F
G
H
I
J
1"
008802
4.50"
3.50"
2.50"
1.626" - 1.629" 1.000" - 1.003"
.188"
1.25"
9.75"
.437
4
1 1/2"
008803
6.00"
4.75"
3.50"
2.251" - 2.254" 1.500" - 1.503"
.250"
1.25"
14.25"
.437
4
2"
008804
7.00"
5.75"
4.50"
3.001" - 3.005" 2.000" - 2.004"
.375"
2.00"
19.00"
.563
6
2 1/2"
008805
9.00"
7.25"
6.00"
4.292" - 4.298" 2.500" - 2.504"
.375"
2.00"
23.50"
.563
6
3"
008806
10.00"
8.50"
7.00"
4.502" - 4.508" 3.000" - 3.004"
.50"
2.00"
28.00"
.688
8
4"
008807
13.50" 11.00"
9.00"
6.003" - 6.009" 4.000" - 4.004"
.50"
2.75"
37.00"
.813
8
C
A
Mixer Pump Mixer Pump Mixer Pump
Size Size Size Size Size Size
110/110
1"
155/155
183/183
2"
110/110
240/240
3"
350/350
275/275
430/430
240/240
350/350
1 1/2" 155/155 2 1/2" 275/275
183/183
300/300
4"
430/430
300/300
F
G
B
H
J
.125 Dia. Pin Typ.
I
E
D
Mixer
Size
Item
Number
Retainer
Ring O.D.
Retainer Ring
I.D.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
1"
008802
1.602" - 1.598"
1.003" - 1.000"
.750" - .747"
.125"
9.00"
1.50"
.875" - .870"
.093"
.25"
.650"
1 1/2"
008803
2.223" - 2.219"
1.503" - 1.500"
1.125" - 1.120"
.125"
13.50"
2.25"
1.380" - 1.375"
.188"
.25"
.930"
2"
008804
2.969" - 2.963"
2.003" - 2.000"
1.500" - 1.495"
.125"
18.00"
3.00"
1.880" - 1.875"
.250"
.25"
1.211"
2 1/2"
008805
4.257" - 4.253"
2.503" - 2.500"
2.250" - 2.245"
.125"
22.50"
3.75"
2.380" - 2.375"
.250"
.25"
1.688"
3"
008806
4.467" - 4.463"
3.005" - 3.000"
2.250" - 2.245"
.125"
27.00"
4.50"
2.880" - 2.875"
.250"
.25"
1.867"
4"
008807
5.969" - 5.964"
4.005" - 4.000"
2.250" - 2.245"
.125"
36.00"
6.00"
3.875" - 3.865"
.250"
.25"
2.491"
Retainer
Ring Width
Leading
Depth
370
6 Element
Ass’y O.A.L.
Element
Width
Element O.D.
Element
Thickness
Pin
Length
Pin
Location
WATER RING PELLETIZER
EXTRUSION
Easy to start up, simple to use and economical to operate, AEC Water Ring
Pelletizers are ideal for a wide range of unfilled and filled thermoplastic
materials. Typical applications include polymer reclaim, compounding, color
concentrate and polymerization.
Advanced cutter head design evenly distributes molten polymer to the die,
ensuring continuous, uniform pellet production. Since pellets are cut in the
air, there are no strands to drop, nor will die holes freeze off in the event of
a momentary flow disruption.
12i Water Ring Pelletizer
STANDARD FEATURES
• Simple startup—no strands to handle, no water flow timing concerns
• Hot die face cutting is insensitive to melt flow interruptions.
Production is continuous—no scrap generated, no surveillance
required
• Exclusive flex-blade design eliminates sensitive knife adjustment,
extends service life
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Hot cutting in air saves power compared to cold strand or
underwater cutting. No intensive die plate heating required
• Adapter for cutter head connection to upstream
apparatus
• Hot die face cutting head and water ring cooling chamber provide
simple, reliable start-up and processing of unfilled and filled polymers
• Cutter head support cart
• Flexible knife blades require no adjustment
• Pellet discharge duct
• Lift-n-turn lower chamber tube allows quick blade access. No need
to remove cooling chamber. Accommodates center-line heights from
36 1/2" to 45" when track mounted
• Dryer sound abatement package
• Easy operator access for startup and pellet view during production.
Trough is fully guarded to prevent knife-touch during operation
• Heavy-duty stainless steel trough-tank is supported by castered
structural steel frame. The design eliminates operator/process
sensitive trough pitch adjustment and provides quick access for
easy cleaning
• High capacity bag filters allow total fines management and on-the-fly
change
• 12 kW heater
• Heat exchanger and temperature regulating valve
• Dryer wear resistance package
• Slurry hose immerses pellets for best cooling efficiency.
Variable hose length controls pellet residence time in
the water and is selected according to specific polymer
and process conditions
• Stainless steel dewatering unit with cleanout door
automatically separates pellets from water without
need of adjustment
• Centrifugal dryer with built-in blower removes pellet
surface moisture. Large panel door provides total dryer
access for clean-up of all internal parts. Single door
design increases structural rigidity and integrity
• Remote mount control panel with operator panel
mounted on pelletizer
371
EXTRUSION
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
12i
35S
36S
Nominal Rate* (lbs./hr.)
300-1800
1800-3000
3000-5000
36.5" - 45"
36.5" - 45"
36.5" - 45"
3600
460/3/60
N/A
3600
460/3/60
3.0
3600
460/3/60
6.0
Center Line Height
(track mounted)
Cutter RPM (Max.)
Electric Supply
Die Body Heater (kW)
Die Plate Heaters (kW)
2.5
1.25
2.8
Temperature Control
1
1
1
Zones Die
0
1
1
Plate Body
Cutter Horsepower
3
3
7.5
Circulating Pump HP
3
1.5
5
Slurry Pump HP
N/A
5
3
Dryer HP
3
5
5
Circulating Water Temp.
Up to 140ºF
Up to 140ºF
Up to 140ºF
Circulating Water Flow
135
120
350
(GPM)
Cooling Water*
Consult factory Consult factory Consult factory
*Dependent Upon Application
All Data Approximate and Subject to Change Without Notice
Cutter Drive
Shaft Housing
Cutter Shaft
Die Body
Die Mandrel
Die Plate
Knife
Flow
adapter
Cooling Chamber
Water Ring
372
APEX YS SERIES SPRUE PICKERS
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
AUTOMATE
N
The AEC YS Series pickers feature high payload capacities, a proven
design and a state-of-the-art control system. These pickers are backed by
AEC’s worldwide network of technical, sales and service support personnel,
including experienced design and application engineers.
YS Series sprue pickers from AEC are designed to be a cost-effective
sprue removal robot and feature a single stage vertical arm for simple
operation. The standard controller provides teach-programmable sequences
for maximum flexibility.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Slow-down at part release
YS Series Sprue Picker
• Main arm swing angle: 60º-90º (Adjustable)
• Compressed air pressure: 60-90 psi
• Effective payload: 8 lbs
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• State-of-the-art controller
• Ten standard sequences
• Ten user-programmable sequences
• Two spare outputs, one spare input
• Built-in help and diagnostics
• Standard SPI interface with connector
• Vacuum grip circuit including a generic vacuum tooling
kit and B-90 wrist rotate
• Power requirement: 120 or 240 VAC, approximately 40 VA
• Wrist rotate B-90
• Spare parts kit
• Mold spray system with controller (excludes nozzles)
• Swing out home position for rack molds
• Non-SPI version
• Easy strip adjustment
• No tools needed for strip adjustments
• Simple swing adjustment
• Quick and easy adjustment of swing direction and swing angle
• Pivoting base
• Easy adjustment and pivot of robot position allows robot to pivot
out of the way for mold changes
• Patented gripper
• Patented sprue gripper is strong and compact
• Pressure differential switch for sprue/runner detection on gripper
eliminates mechanical switch adjustment and increases reliability
323
• Spanish version controller
• Tool-free adjustments
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
YS-550
YS-550W
YS-650
YS-650W
YS-750
YS-750W
YS-850
YS-850W
Vertical
Stroke
(mm/in)
IMM
Range
(tons)
Dry Cycle (sec)
Take-Out
Overall
60-180
0.7
3.2
650/25.6
120-250
0.8
3.4
750/29.5
200-350
1.0
3.8
850/33.5
300-450
1.2
4.0
550/21.7
W: Wrist Rotation
AUTOMATE
Gripper Heights
(mm/in)
(B)
115-315/4.5-12.4
Overall Height
(mm/in)
(C)
115-315/4.5-12.4
1288-1488/
50.7-58.6
35-235/1.8-9.3
35-235/1.8-9.3
75-275/3.0-10.8
0.0-190/0.0-7.5
75-275/3.0-10.8
0.0-190/0.0-7.5
Net Weight
(kg)
33.5
1188-1388/
46.8-54.6
34
34
34.5
34.5
1388-1588/
54.6-62.5
35
35
1488-1688/
58.6-66.5
35.5
YS-xxx
324
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
N
APEX ST SERIES SPRUE PICKERS
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
AUTOMATE
N
The AEC ST Series pickers feature high payload capacities, a proven
design and a state-of-the-art control system. These pickers are backed by
AEC’s worldwide network of technical, sales and service support personnel,
including experienced design and application engineers.
ST Series sprue pickers from AEC are available with an optional two-stage
telescopic vertical arm for minimizing required overhead clearance and
higher speeds. Units are available with vertical strokes up to 950mm. The
standard controller provides teach-programmable sequences for maximum
flexibility.
ST Series Telescopic
Sprue Picker
STANDARD FEATURES
• B-90º wrist rotation
• Main arm safety lock prevents arm from descending in the event
of air pressure loss
• Audible and visual alarms for operator alerts
• Main arm swing angle: 45º-90º (Adjustable)
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Telescopic vertical arm (standard on 750-950 models)
• Vertical motions ride on linear bearings which allow
for lower profiles with increased speed and rigidity
• Compressed air pressure: 60-90 psi
• Effective payload: 6 lbs
• Venturi vacuum circuit with verification and adjustable
vacuum tool
• Power requirement: 120 or 240 VAC, approximately 40 VA
• Ten standard sequences
• Ten user-programmable sequences
• Two spare outputs, one spare input
• Built-in help and diagnostics
• Standard SPI interface with connector
• Slowdown at part release (standard on telescoping
‘T’ units)
• Mold spray system with controller (excludes nozzles)
• Swing out home position for rack molds
• Pivoting base
• Easy adjustment and pivot of robot position allows robot to pivot
out of the way for mold changes
• Patented gripper
• Patented sprue gripper is strong and compact
• Pressure differential switch for sprue/runner detection on gripper
eliminates mechanical switches and increases reliability
325
• Non-SPI version
• Spanish version controller
• Tool-free adjustments
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
T: Telescopic
ST-550
ST-550T
ST-650
ST-650T
ST-750T
ST-850T
ST-950T
Model
ST-550
ST-550T
ST-650
ST-650T
ST-750T
ST-850T
ST-950T
Vertical Stroke
(mm/in)
IMM Range
(tons)
550/21.7
60-150
650/25.6
125-250
750/29.5
850/33.5
950/37.4
Gripper Height (mm/in)
A
180/7.1
230/9.1
280/11
330/13
380/15
ST-550/650
AUTOMATE
Dry Cycle (sec)
Take-Out
0.7
0.5
1.2
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
200-350
300-450
400-700
Overall Height (mm/in)
B
1236/48.7
1094/43.1
1393/54.8
1194/47
1294/50.9
1394/54.9
1494/58.8
Net Weight
(kg)
Overall
3.7
3.5
4.2
3.6
3.8
4.0
4.2
40
49
44
53
55
57
59
Handle Height (mm/in) Swing Centerline (mm/in)
C
373/14.7
403/15.9
423/16.7
453/17.8
503/19.8
553/21.8
603/23.7
D
563/22.2
594/23.4
613/24.1
644/25.4
694/27.3
744/29.3
794/31.3
ST-XXXT
326
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
N
APEX SA SERIES SINGLE AXIS SERVO DRIVEN TRAVERSING ROBOTS
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
AUTOMATE
N
APEX SA SERIES SINGLE AXIS SERVO DRIVEN
TRAVERSING ROBOTS
The SA Single Axis, Servo-Driven Traversing Robot features an
AC brushless servomotor drive on the traverse axis, which is
accurate to within +/-0.1mm. The state-of-the-art controller comes
with 10 standard and 10 teachable programs, with each teachable
program able to write up to 100 steps with 4 motion sequences
per step. The one-key/one function controller comes with a large
LCD screen, providing easy and user-friendly operation.
SA-700
STANDARD FEATURES
• Cable guide protection on electrical wires and hoses
• AC brushless servomotor drive on traverse axis is accurate to
within ±0.1mm
• Uniquely designed wrist flip device with air shut off pin,
excellent for protecting and changing your end-of-arm tooling
• Power Source: 120V - Single Phase Standard (220V optional)
• 1 pressure and 1 vacuum circuit
• Quick change end of arm tool system with basic end of arm tool
vacuum pad and frame are standard
• Parts drop off can be accomplished with 9 programmable cycle
positions and 2 areas for 18 points
• 8 spare output and 5 spare input terminals for connection to
conveyors, spray mist, shear cutters, and sensors
• Counter can be set to drop parts for inspection at regular intervals
or to stop after a designated quantity has been reached
• I/O available to detect reject signals and drop reject parts at a
designated point
• The Self Diagnostic System surveys input/output status at all
times and can accumulate up to 20 error messages
• Traverse axis speed can be adjusted by percentage rate
• 10 standard and 10 teachable programs
327
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Extend traverse stroke by 7.8” (200 mm)
• Additional vacuum circuit (total of 2)
• Additional pressure/grip circuit (circuit only, no gripper/nipper) (total of 2)
• Wrist rotate
• Additional end of arm tooling quick change system
• Telescopic vertical arm for overhead clearance issues
• Sub-arm configurations for 3-plate mold applications
APEX SA SERIES SINGLE AXIS SERVO DRIVEN TRAVERSING ROBOTS
SPECIFICATIONS
Dry Cycle
(sec.)
Model
SA-700
SA-700S
Single-stage, single arm
Single-stage, sub arm
SA-700T
Telescopic, single arm
SA-900
SA-700TS
SA-900S
SA-1200
SA-1200TS
Telescopic, sub arm
SA-1200T
11
A
2100
2100
2100
2100
2280
2280
2280
2280
2520
2520
2520
B
1226
1226
1226
1226
1406
1406
1406
1406
1646
1646
1646
C
100
100
79
79
100
100
79
79
100
79
79
D
1000
1000
1000
1000
1120
1120
1120
1120
1240
1240
1240
Vertical
main sub main sub
--
80-200
150
100
--
700
12
200-450
200
100
--
1.6
E
1417
1417
1125
1125
1617
1617
1225
1225
1917
1375
1375
13
F
370
370
410
410
370
370
410
410
393
410
410
G
180
180
140
140
180
180
140
140
157
140
140
450-650
H
154.5
154.5
114.5
114.5
154.5
154.5
114.5
114.5
127
110
110
I
150
150
150
150
200
200
200
200
300
300
300
300
--
100
--
1226
main sub
900
950
--
1200
--
1250
--
180
--
200
3
-1406
3
3
3
1646
190
42.5
210
41
32.5
185
46.5
210
40.5
52.5
220
--
50.5
190
--
6
37
200
--
950
--
Net
Comp. Air
Weight Consumption
(kg)
(NL/Cycle)
3
3
--
100
--
750
Max.
Payload
(kg)
750
--
1.4
Traverse
--
100
Telescopic, sub arm
SPECIFICATIONS (MM)
SA-700
SA-700S
SA-700T
SA-700TS
SA-900
SA-900S
SA-900T
SA-900TS
SA-1200
SA-1200T
SA-1200TS
1.2
Stroke (mm)
Strip
Telescopic, sub arm
SA-900T
SA-900TS
Take-Out Cycle
I.M.M.
Range
(tons)
AUTOMATE
59.5
215
3
51.5
230
63.5
J
K
565 779
380 779
515 769
300 769
685 899
500 899
635 889
420 889
805 1029
755 1013
505 1013
328
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
N
APEX SB SERIES 3-AXIS SERVO DRIVEN TRAVERSING ROBOTS
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
AUTOMATE
N
APEX SB SERIES 3-AXIS SERVO DRIVEN
TRAVERSING ROBOTS
The SB Servo Driven Traversing Robots feature built-in multi-function
programming. Speed, position and timers can be changed during
operation. The robot’s unique wrist-rotation device enables
easy access to the quick-change end of arm tool system. The 3-axis
AC brushless servo motors can be independently controlled, and the
3 axes can be synchronized to move to a designated point at the same
time with ±0.1 mm accuracy. Stacking and palletizing functions are
standard programs in the state-of-the-art controller.
SB Series
STANDARD FEATURES
• 14 spare inputs and 14 spare outputs
• 1 pressure and 1 vacuum circuit
• Built-in multi-function programming
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Speed, position and timers can be changed during operation
• Wrist flip device with easy to change end of arm tooling
using quick change plate system
• Additional vacuum circuit (total of 2)
• Additional pressure/grip circuit (circuit only, no gripper/nipper) (total of 2)
• The 3 axis AC brushless servo motors can be independently
controlled
• A-axis wrist rotate
• Additional end of arm tooling quick change system
• 3 axes can be synchronized to move to a designated point at
the same time with ±0.1mm accuracy
• Telescopic vertical arm for overhead clearance issues
• Sub-arm configurations for 3-plate mold applications
• Stacking and palletizing functions
• Multiple QC function capabilities
• The one-key/one function controller comes with a large LCD
screen, providing easy and user-friendly operation.
• Positive servomotor drives with rack and pinion gear on
vertical arm
• Standard accessories include a vacuum pad and frame, as well
as a quick change system
• Cable guide protection on electrical wires and air hoses
• Unique designed wrist flip device with air shut off pin
329
APEX SB SERIES 3-AXIS SERVO DRIVEN TRAVERSING ROBOTS
SINGLE STAGE SINGLE ARM SPECIFICATIONS (MM)
Model
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
K
L
N
SB-700
90
130
370
810
180
150
1000
1638
2546
1472
550
SB-1200
90
130
370
1050
180
150
1240
2116
3026
1972
790
SB-900
90
130
370
930
180
150
1120
1876
SINGLE-STAGE SUB-ARM SPECIFICATIONS (MM)
Model
SB-700S
SB-900S
B
C
90
130
90
130
D
370
370
E
810
930
F
G
180
H
150
180
I
1000
150
1636
1120
B
C
D
E
F
G
L
I
P
400
2786 1672
H
1672
N
2546 1472
1876
TELESCOPIC SINGLE ARM SPECIFICATIONS (MM)
Model
K
2786
170
520
K
170
L
670
1510
1710
N
69
190
410
817
140
110
1000
1656
2546
1200
520
SB-1200T
69
190
410
1057
140
110
1240
2136
3026
1450
760
69
190
410
937
140
110
TELESCOPIC SUB-ARM SPECIFICATIONS (MM)
Model
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
1120
I
1896
K
2786
L
1300
N
P
SB-700TS
69
190 410
817
140
110 1000
1656
2546 1200
335
195
SB-1200TS
69
190 410 1057
140
110 1240
2136
3026 1450
542
226
SB-900TS
69
190 410
937
140
110 1120
1896
2786 1300
455
195
Single-Arm
Q
SB-700T
SB-900T
AUTOMATE
640
Single-Arm and Sub-Arm
Q
1155
1255
1405
Sub-Arm
Model
SB-700
SB-700S
SB-700T
SB-700TS
SB-900
SB-900S
SB-900T
Telescopic, sub arm
SB-1200
SB-1200T
SB-1200TS
Telescopic, sub arm
SB-900TS
Telescopic, sub arm
Dry Cycle
(sec.)
Take-Out Cycle
I.M.M. Range
(tons)
1.2
9
80-200
1.3
10
200-450
1.4
Power Source: AC 220V Single Phase
11
450-650
Strip
main sub
550
-400 100
520
-335 100
670
-520 100
640
-455
790
760
542
330
100
--100
Stroke (mm)
Vertical
main sub
-750
700
-750
-950
900
-950
-1200 -1250
Traverse
Max. Payload
(kgs)
main
1636
6
1876
6
2116
Net Weight
(kgs)
sub
-3
-3
-3
--
230
240
250
260
235
250
260
3
A
U
5kg/cm2
270
--3
6
Comp. Air
Pressure
240
265
280
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
N
APEX SC SERIES 3-AXIS SERVO DRIVEN TRAVERSING ROBOTS
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
AUTOMATE
N
The SC Series robot is for molding machines from 80 to 4500 tons. Three
axis servo drives provide the molder with a cost-effective robot for most
applications. The linear bearing guideways on all axes provide smooth operation
and low maintenance. The hand-held pendant comes equipped with 30 teachable
sequences. The SC Series robot’s rapid acceleration and deceleration reduces the
cycle time, while maintaining precision positioning and accurate repeatability.
SC Series
STANDARD FEATURES
• C-axis 90º wrist flip
• 2 pneumatic pressure circuits
• 1 vacuum circuit
• SPI compatible 32-pin/10 amp robot side connector
• Rigid steel structure built for steady movement and precision positioning
with various payload capabilities
• Multi function program built in as standard
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Additional pneumatic pressure circuit(s)
• Additional vacuum circuit(s)
• A-axis pneumatic wrist rotate
• 14 spare inputs / outputs
• End of arm tooling quick change plate(s) for
additional tools
• Cable guide protection on electrical wires and air hoses
• Two-stage telescopic vertical arm for overhead
clearance issues (standard on models 1500 and
higher)
• Offers rapid acceleration and deceleration
• Precision positioning and accurate repeatability within ±0.1mm
331
SMALL BEAM (80-1000 TON) TRAVERSE ROBOTS
Model Number
Vertical Stroke,
mm (in.)
Single stage vertical arm
SC-900-1720
SC-900-1960
900 (35.4)
SC-900-2200
SC-900-2600
SC-900-3000
SC-1100-1960
SC-1100-2200
SC-1100-2600
SC-1100-3000
SC-1300-2200
SC-1300-2600
SC-1300-3000
Kick Stroke,
mm (in.)
400 (15.7)
1100 (43.3)
520 (20.5)
1300 (51.2)
640 (25.2)
AUTOMATE
Traverse Stroke, Payload,
mm (in.)
lbs.
1720 (67.7)
1960 (77.2)
2200 (86.6)
2600 (102.4)
3000 (118.1)
1960 (77.2)
2200 (86.6)
2600 (102.4)
3000 (118.1)
2200 (86.6)
2600 (102.4)
3000 (118.1)
26.4
Note: Above models 900-1300 also available in two-stage telescopic configuration for low overhead clearance
LARGE BEAM (1500-4500 TON) TRAVERSE ROBOTS
Model Number
Vertical Stroke,
mm (in.)
Two stage telescopic vertical arm
SC-1500T-2140
SC-1500T-2320
1500 (59.1)
SC-1500T-2500
SC-1500T-3000
SC-1500T-3500
SC-1700T-2320
SC-1700T-2500
SC-1700T-3000
SC-1700T-3500
SC-2000T-2500
SC-2000T-3000
SC-2000T-3500
SC-2500T-3060
SC-2500T-4000
SC-2500T-5000
SC-3000T-3060
SC-3000T-4000
SC-3000T-5000
Kick Stroke,
mm (in.)
760 (29.9)
1700 (66.9)
880 (34.6)
2000 (78.7)
1000 (39.4)
2500 (98.4)
1200 (47.2)
3000 (118.1)
1380 (54.3)
* Operating voltage: 220/3/60
Traverse Stroke, Payload,
mm (in.)
lbs.
2140 (84.3)
2320 (91.3)
2500 (98.4)
3000 (118.1)
3500 (137.8)
2320 (91.3)
2500 (98.4)
3000 (118.1)
3500 (137.8)
2500 (98.4)
3000 (118.1)
3500 (137.8)
3060 (120.5)
4000 (157.5)
5000 (196.9)
3060 (120.5)
4000 (157.5)
5000 (196.9)
66.0
110.0
332
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
N
SMALL BEAM (80-1000 TON) TRAVERSE ROBOTS - SINGLE STAGE
Model Number
SC-900
SC-1100
SC-1300
C (mm)
900
1100
1300
H (mm)
1232
1352
1472
Extension traverse available: 2600mm and 3000mm
I (mm)
1720
1960
2140
K (mm)
L (mm)
2746
2986
3166
1691
1891
2091
N (mm)
400
520
640
SMALL BEAM (80-1000 TON) TRAVERSE ROBOTS - TWO STAGE TELESCOPIC
Model Number
SC-900T
SC-1100T
SC-1300T
C (mm)
900
1100
1300
H (mm)
1329
1449
1569
I (mm)
1720
1960
2140
K (mm)
L (mm)
2746
2986
3166
1318
1398
1498
333
N (mm)
400
520
640
AUTOMATE
LARGE BEAM (1500-4500 TON) TRAVERSE ROBOTS - TWO STAGE TELESCOPIC
Model Number
SC-1500T
SC-1700T
SC-2000T
C (mm)
1500
1700
2000
H (mm)
1818
1938
2058
I (mm)
2200
2320
2500
K (mm)
L (mm)
3156
3276
3456
1911
2031
2151
AUTOMATE
N (mm)
760
880
1000
LARGE BEAM (1500-4500 TON) TRAVERSE ROBOTS - TWO STAGE TELESCOPIC
Model Number
SC-2500T
SC-3000T
C (mm)
2500
3000
H (mm)
2330
2510
I (mm)
3060
3060
K (mm)
L (mm)
4005
4005
2430
2670
334
N (mm)
1200
1380
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
N
SYTRAMA TOUCH-SCREEN CONTROLLER
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
AUTOMATE
N
With enhanced full color touch-screen controls and “at the robot” fully-end-user
programmability, Sytrama robots are packed with all of the latest tools necessary
to automate even the most difficult applications without the need for specialized
“programming” training or off-line software packages. The Robot Controls feature
Network capability using the readily available Windows XP Remote Desktop
providing user’s even greater access to and control of their manufacturing
processes. From simple pick and place to advanced Insert-Load, In-Mold
Decorating and secondary equipment control, this is one robot you can count
on to bring value to any process.
STANDARD FEATURES
• 8.4" high resolution, color touch-screen user interface
• Ergonomic design (right or left handed control)
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• On-board flash card program storage
• 100 On-board program storage
• 300 lines per program
• 100 sub-programs
• 100 customizable program variables
• 300 configurable system variables
• No options available
• Three-way safety switch equipped pendant for enhanced operator safety
• USB port for offline program storage and file transfer between robots
• User configurable I/O. Spare I/O - 12 input /12 output (expandable to 253 modules)
• Network-ready using Windows XP remote desktop. No additional software
purchase necessary
• Kick-free ready
• Core-pull sequence control ready
• Central system monitoring (Cycle Time, Number of Cycle / Hours, Motors
and Drive Status)
• Extensive alarm history reporting (downloadable via USB) for reliable diagnostics
• Highly reliable B&R automation drives and motors
• Floor-based controls cabinet for easy access
• Independent axis control (3D all axis simultaneous movement)
• Dynamic axis movement for enhance precision and speed
• Definable safe working area (8 total)
• Automatic Periodic Maintenance Alert Signaling
• Multi-level password protection (4 levels / 30 per level)
• Multiple languages available
• SPI-ready with 32 pin DIN plug
335
SCREEN SHOTS:
AUTOMATE
Main Screen
Program Screen
IMM Interface Screen
Operating Data Screen
Axis Configuration Screen
Control Panel Screen
336
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
N
SYTRAMA 91/101 SERIES 3-D SERVO DRIVE ROBOTS
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
AUTOMATE
N
SYTRAMA 91/101 SERIES 3-D SERVO DRIVE
ROBOTS 50 TO 700 TONS
With superior mechanical design features and advanced full end-user
programmable controls, Sytrama robots are packed with all of the latest
tools necessary to automate even their most difficult applications and the
payload capacity to carry the load. The robot controls feature network
capability using the readily available Windows XP remote desktop
providing user’s even greater access to their manufacturing processes.
From simple pick and place to advanced insert load, in-mold decorating
and secondary equipment control, this is one robot you can count on to
bring value to any process.
91 Series
101 Series
STANDARD FEATURES
• All axis digital AC servo actuation
• All axis linear rail guides with large block sealed bearings
• Rigid traverse beam construction provides maximum resistance
to vibration and deflection
• Two-stage telescopic vertical arm construction – standard
(101 and larger)
• Provides faster axis speed during part removal and greater
overhead clearance
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• A-Axis adjustable 180º wrist rotation for secondary
part(s) orientation
• AC digital servo A, B and C-Axis wrist actuations
• Cantilevered stripe / kick carriage design – precision direct
drive rack and pinion actuation
• Increased part size handling capacity (no box frame obstruction)
• EOAT quick disconnect – all electrical and pneumatic connections
• C-Axis 90º degree wrist flip (pneumatic)
• Triple-telescoping vertical arm for low overhead environments
• Custom robot mounting spacer with IMM bolt-hole pattern
• Electric vacuum pump
• Additional EOAT quick-change plates
• Additional I/O modules
• Extended stroke lengths (varies by model)
• One (1) vacuum circuit with detection
• Traverse beam-end support (for traverse beams over
2,500mm in one direction)
• One (1) pressure circuit with detection
• Air requirement: 80 PSI clean, dry air
• Spare parts kit
• Electrical requirement: 460 VAC, three phase, 60 Hz
• Specify operator or non-operator unload direction
• Three year parts warranty (excluding technician visit / expenses)
337
ROBOTS
SYTRAMA 91/101 STANDARD OVERALL SPECIFICATIONS (MM)
Model
Model
91-F3SV
101-F3SV
101-F3SVL
Max Payloads
Optimum Speed
6.6 lbs
17.6 lbs
26.4 lbs
Press Range
91-F3SV
101-F3SV
101-F3SVL
50-200 tons
150-300 tons
350-700 tons
A
2350
2670
3350
B
1225
1252
1453
C
558
445
450
D
1610
1103
1283
Standard: 1 vacuum circuit, 1 pressure grip circuit, 8 spare inputs and outputs
Power Required: 460/3/60 10A
Air Required: Max 10CFM (80-90 PSI)
91 Series
E
-
AUTOMATE
F
9
78
28
G
100
100
150
Strip
X
450
500
700
Traverse
Y
1400
1800
2500
91/101 Series
338
Maximum Lift
17.6 lbs
33.0 lbs
33.0 lbs
Vertical
Z
800
1100
1400
101 Series
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
N
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
AUTOMATE
N
ROBOTS 500 TO 3,500 TONS
bring value to any process
201 Series
STANDARD FEATURES
(101 and larger)
overhead clearance
OPTIONAL FEATURES
part(s) orientation
• Spare parts kit
339
ROBOTS
Model
Press Range
201-F3SV
201-F3SL
201-F3SV-3T
201-F3SL-3T
301-F3S
301-F3SL
Model
A
B
C
D
E
1703
-
201-F3SV
3640
1975
570
1583
201-F3SV-3T
3640
2043
570
1270
201-F3SL
201-F3SL-3T
301-F3S
301-F3SL
Optimum Speed
26.4 lbs
26.4 lbs
26.4 lbs
26.4 lbs
66.0 lbs
66.0 lbs
500-800 tons
800-1500 tons
500-800 tons
800-1500 tons
1500-2500 tons
2500-3500 tons
4120
4120
4740
5240
2295
2343
2725
3045
570
570
600
600
1330
2365
2545
201 Series
F
Traverse
Y
Vertical
Z
150
1200
3000
2000
150
1200
n/a
1800
150
-
11
150
-
11
7
7
Maximum Lift
44.0 lbs
44.0 lbs
44.0 lbs
44.0 lbs
88.0 lbs
88.0 lbs
Strip
X
70
-
Max Payloads
G
-
70
AUTOMATE
n/a
900
2500
900
2500
1560
3000
1500
1740
3500
2400
4000
2700
301 Series
201/301 Series
340
1800
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
N
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
AUTOMATE
N
ROBOTS 3,500 TO 6,000 TONS
bring value to any process
401/501 Series
STANDARD FEATURES
(101 and larger)
overhead clearance
OPTIONAL FEATURES
part(s) orientation
• Spare parts kit
341
Model
Press Range
401-F3SL
501-F3SL
3500-4500 tons
4500-6000 tons
Max Payloads
Optimum Speed
A
B
C
D
E
F
401-F3SL
6325
3535
900
2870
-
244
6800
4360
900
Maximum Lift
88.0 lbs
132.0 lbs
Model
501-F3SL
AUTOMATE
3250
-
107
110.0 lbs
132.0 lbs
Strip
X
Traverse
Y
Vertical
Z
2500
5000
3500
2000
4500
3000
401/501 Series
342
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
N
HARMO HRXi SERIES HAND-HELD CONTROLLER
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
AUTOMATE
N
HARMO HRXi SERIES CONTROLLER
Superior performance, powered by the industry’s most complete fully enduser programmable controls package, the HRXi Series from Harmo brings
every molder the tools necessary to deliver value to every job—large or
small. Smart programming, fully editable screens and limitless I/O capacity
are just a few of the hallmarks that make this the robot of choice for those
serious about automating molding machines to the greatest extent possible.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Large format, touch-screen graphic user interface
• Fully end-user programmable (no additional software/hardware
required)
• Global standard open network (DeviceNet equipped)
• On-board mold memory (100 Setups)
• Dual USB port equipped for unlimited mold memory
• Network ready - remote monitoring and programming from any
Windows XP computer using remote deskop (no software necessary)
• Teach on-the-fly axis speeds, positions and timers
• Palletizing feature (99 Point per Axis)
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• Two-stage telescopic vertical arm construction for low
overhead environment (All HRX-300 and larger robots
are two-stage telescopic standard)
• A-Axis pneumatic two-position 0-90 or 0-180 degree
wrist rotation
• Additional pressure and/or vacuum circuit(s)
• Machine platen spacer with custom mounting bolt
hole pattern
• Kick-free enhanced parts take-out
• EOAT quick-change system (robot and EOAT side)
• First-up reject and quality sampling modes
• Multi layered password protection
• End of beam support
• Programmer - operators - maintainer - quality specialist
• EuroMap 12 or 67 IMM interface (SPI interface/plug
is standard)
• Traverse beam mounted control cabinet
• SPI interface plug kit (10 amp / 32 pin) for molding
machine side
• Transformer for voltages other than 200-220 VAC /
three phase
343
HARMO HRXi SERIES HAND-HELD CONTROLLER
SCREEN SHOTS:
User Editable Main Screen
Main Screen Content Select Screen
344
AUTOMATE
Edited Main Screen by
Content and Position
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
N
HARMO HRX-80Si AND HRX-80Gi
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
AUTOMATE
N
HRX-80Gi
STANDARD FEATURES
• All axis AC digital servo actuation (absolute encoder)
• Three-dimensional axis movement
• Thick-walled aluminum extrusion traverse beam with steel
sub-weldment
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• C-Axis 90º wrist flip unit
• Two-stage telescopic vertical arm construction for
low overhead environment (all HRX-300 and larger
robots are two-stage telescopic standard)
• One (1) part vacuum circuit with detection
• One (1) mechanical circuit with detection
• One (1) sprue grip circuit with detection
wrist rotation
• Air requirement is: 80 PSI
hole pattern
• SPI ready with 32 Pin DIN plug
• Power requirements: AC 200 ± 20% (50 / 60 Hz) - Three Phase
• Operator or non-operator side unload
• Two (2) year parts warranty
• One (1) year on-site labor (excluding travel expenses)
is standard)
• SPI interface plug kit (10 amp/32 pin) for molding
machine side
three phase
345
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
HRX-80Si
HRX-80Gi
Vertical Stroke (mm)
Main
650 (750)
Working Air
Pressure (Mpa)
Model
HRX-80Si
0.6
HRX-80Gi
Sub
----
Strip Stroke (mm)
Main
Sub
300
300
700 (800)
Air
Consumption
(N /cyc) *1
0.7
*1 Additional 63N /min is consumed for each vacuum ejector
0.8
425
---
Traverse Stroke
(mm)
Drive System
Digital AC servo motor
(3/5 axes)
1200
(1600)
Control
Method
PTP•CP
AUTOMATE
Pax. Payload
(kg)
Machine Weight
(kg)
205
3
(including EOAT)
220
Power
Consumption (W)
Power Supply (V)
1350
3P200ACV+10%/-15%
(50Hz/60Hz)
1950
DIMENSIONS
Pendant and Control Box (mm)
346
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
N
HARMO HRX-80SWi AND HRX-80GWi
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
AUTOMATE
N
HRX-80GWi
STANDARD FEATURES
sub-weldment
OPTIONAL FEATURES
wrist rotation
hole pattern
is standard)
machine side
three phase
347
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
HRX-80SWi
HRX-80GWi
Model
HRX-80SWi
HRX-80GWi
Main
650 (750)
Working air
pressure (Mpa)
Sub
Strip stroke (mm)
----
700 (800)
Air
consumption
(N /cyc) *1
0.6
0.7
0.8
Main
Sub
265
265
425
---
Traverse stroke
(mm)
1200
(1600)
AUTOMATE
Max. payload
(kg)
Machine Weight
(kg)
210
3
(including EOAT)
Drive system
Control
method
Power supply (V)
(3/5 axes)
PTP•CP
3P200ACV+10%/-15%
(50Hz/60Hz)
225
Power
consumption (W)
1350
1950
DIMENSIONS
348
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
N
HARMO HRX-150/200Si AND HRX-150/200Gi
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
AUTOMATE
N
HRX-150Gi
STANDARD FEATURES
sub-weldment
OPTIONAL FEATURES
wrist rotation
hole pattern
is standard)
machine side
three phase
349
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
HRX-80Si
HRX-80Gi
HRX-200Si
HRX-200Gi
Model
HRX-150Si
HRX-150Gi
HRX-200Si
HRX-200Gi
Main
800 (680)
900 (1000)
Working air
pressure (Mpa)
0.6
Sub
Strip stroke (mm)
---850 (730)
---950 (1050)
Air
consumption
(N /cyc) *1
2.7
2.8
2.7
2.9
Main
705
584
705
584
Sub
--584
--584
Traverse stroke
(mm)
1400
(1600.1800.2000)
1600 (1800.2000)
Drive system
(3/5 axes)
AUTOMATE
Max. payload
(kg)
Machine Weight
(kg)
270
290
310
330
5
(Including EOAT)
Control
method
Power supply (V)
PTP•CP
3P200ACV+10%/-15%
(50Hz/60Hz)
Power
consumption (W)
1700
2300
1700
2300
DIMENSIONS
350
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
N
HARMO HRX-150/200SWi AND HRX-150/200GWi
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
AUTOMATE
N
HRX-150GWi
STANDARD FEATURES
sub-weldment
OPTIONAL FEATURES
wrist rotation
hole pattern
is standard)
machine side
three phase
351
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
HRX-150SWi
HRX-150GWi
HRX-200SWi
HRX-200GWi
Main
800 (680)
900 (1000)
Working air
pressure (Mpa)
Model
HRX-150SWi
HRX-150GWi
0.6
HRX-200SWi
HRX-200GWi
Sub
Strip stroke (mm)
---850 (730)
----
950 (1050)
Air
consumption
(N /cyc) *1
2.7
2.9
2.7
2.9
Main
Sub
705
---
705
552
552
--552
552
Traverse stroke
(mm)
1400
(1600.1800.2000)
1600 (1800.2000)
Drive system
(3/5 axes)
AUTOMATE
Max. payload
(kg)
Machine Weight
(kg)
5
(including EOAT)
315
Control
method
Power supply (V)
PTP•CP
3P200ACV+10%/-15%
(50Hz/60Hz)
275
295
335
Power
consumption (W)
1700
2300
1700
2300
DIMENSIONS
352
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
N
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
AUTOMATE
N
HRX-300GWi
STANDARD FEATURES
sub-weldment
OPTIONAL FEATURES
wrist rotation
hole pattern
is standard)
machine side
three phase
353
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
HRX-300SWi
HRX-300GWi
Model
HRX-300SWi
HRX-300GWi
Main
1100
Working air
pressure (Mpa)
0.6
Sub
Strip stroke (mm)
----
1150
Air
consumption
(N /cyc) *1
2.7
2.9
Main
Sub
861
861
1015
---
Traverse stroke
(mm)
Drive system
(3/5 axes)
1800
(2000)
Control
method
PTP•CP
AUTOMATE
Max. payload
(kg)
Machine Weight
(kg)
360
10
(including EOAT)
385
Power
consumption (W)
Power supply (V)
1700
3P200ACV+10%/-15%
(50Hz/60Hz)
2300
DIMENSIONS
354
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
N
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
AUTOMATE
N
HRX-500GWi
STANDARD FEATURES
sub-weldment
OPTIONAL FEATURES
wrist rotation
hole pattern
is standard)
machine side
three phase
355
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
HRX-500SWi
HRX-500GWi
Model
HRX-500SWi
HRX-500GWi
Main
1300
Working air
pressure (Mpa)
0.6
Sub
Strip stroke (mm)
----
1350
Air
consumption
(N /cyc) *1
6.89
6.96
Main
Sub
861
861
1100
---
Traverse stroke
(mm)
Drive system
(3/5 axes)
2000
(2400)
Control
method
PTP•CP
AUTOMATE
Max. payload
(kg)
Machine Weight
(kg)
496
15
(including EOAT)
523
Power
consumption (W)
Power supply (V)
2800
3P200ACV+10%/-15%
(50Hz/60Hz)
2800
DIMENSIONS
356
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
N
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
AUTOMATE
N
HRX-800GWi
STANDARD FEATURES
sub-weldment
OPTIONAL FEATURES
wrist rotation
hole pattern
is standard)
machine side
three phase
357
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
HRX-800SWi
HRX-800GWi
Model
HRX-800SWi
Main
Sub
-1550(1800)
1550(1800)
Working Air
Pressure
(mpa)
Air
Consumption
(N / Cyc) *1
20.3
Stripe Stroke (mm)
Main
Sub
-1220(1520)
1070(1370)
Drive System
20.5
Digital AC Servo
Motor (3 / 5 Axis)
358
HRX-800GWi
0.6
Traverse
Stroke (mm)
2200
(2600.3000)
AUTOMATE
Max. Payload
(kg)
Machine
Weight (kg)
800
900
20
(including EOAT)
Control
Method
Power Supply
(V)
PTP•CP
3P 200 ACV +10%/-15%
(50Hz/60Hz)
Power
Consumption
(W)
800
900
DIMENSIONS
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
N
HARMO HRXf SERIES HAND-HELD CONTROLLER
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
AUTOMATE
N
The HRXf Series controller features comprehensive help instructions
provided with each screen, manual maneuvering controls for maintenance
and provides two-screen views for simultaneous input and output monitoring.
The HRXf is password protected to eliminate accidental deletion of mold
memories, offers mold data grouping with easy retrieving and editing
features and has multilingual capabilities.
STANDARD FEATURES
• Large format, touch-screen graphic user interface
• Falcon-ED offline programming package
• Global standard open network (DeviceNet equipped)
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• On-board mold memory (100 setups)
• Air requirement: 80 PSI
• Teach-on-the-fly axis speeds (100 setups)
• Standard palletizing feature (99 point per axis)
• Power requirements: AC200 ± 20% (50/60Hz) three phase
• Multi-layered password protection
• Two (2) years parts warranty
• First-up reject and quality sampling modes
• Traverse beam mounted control cabinet
359
SCREEN SHOTS:
AUTOMATE
Two half-screen views allow
simultaneous input and output monitoring
Password protected mold memories
eliminate accidental deletion
Multilingual capabilities
Features convenient mold data grouping,
with easy retrieving and editing features
Comprehensive help instructions
provided with each screen
Manual maneuvering controls
for maintenance
360
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
N
HARMO HRX-80Sf AND HRX-80Gf
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
AUTOMATE
N
With pinpoint accuracy and repeatability, rugged durability, and high
speed performance, the HRXf Series Full Servo Extraction Robots are
redefining the automation industry.These powerful yet very cost
effective robots are perfect for automating horizontal molding machines
from 40–80 tons in both three and five axis configurations.
The HRXf Series features the highest quality linear guideson all axes,
employing THK rail and bearing systems. The redesigned kick frame
provides more rigidity for enhanced support and repeatability.
HRX-80Gf
STANDARD FEATURES
• All axis AC digital servo actuation-absolute encoder
sub-weldment
OPTIONAL FEATURES
• THK linear guide rail with large block bearings (all axes)
• C-Axis 90° wrist flip
• Programmable part extraction from stationary or moving platen
low overhead environment (standard on HRX-300
and larger robots)
wrist rotation
hole pattern
• EOAT quick-change system (robot & EOAT side)
is standard)
machine side
• Transformer for voltages other than 200-220 VAC/
three phase
361
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
HRX-80Sf
HRX-80Gf
Model
HRX-80Sf
Main
Sub
-650(750)
700(800)
Working Air
Pressure
(mpa)
HRX-80Gf
Air
Consumption
(N /Cyc) *1
0.6
0.7
0.8
Stripe Stroke (mm)
Main
Sub
425
-300
Traverse
Stroke (mm)
1200
(1600)
300
AUTOMATE
Max. Payload
(kg)
Machine
Weight (kg)
200
215
3
(including EOAT)
Drive System
Control
Method
Power Supply
(V)
Digital AC Servo
Motor (3/ 5 Axis)
PTP•CP
3P 200 ACV +10%/-15%
(50Hz/60Hz)
Power
Consumption
(W)
1350
1950
DIMENSIONS (MM)
362
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
N
HARMO HRX-80SWf AND HRX-80GWf
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
AUTOMATE
N
With pinpoint accuracy and repeatability, rugged durability,and high
redefining the automation industry. These powerful yet very cost
from 40–80 tons in both three and five axis configurations.
HRX-80GWf
STANDARD FEATURES
sub-weldment
OPTIONAL FEATURES
and larger robots)
wrist rotation
hole pattern
is standard)
machine side
three phase
363
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
HRX-80SWf
HRX-80GWf
Model
HRX-80SWf
Main
Sub
-650(750)
700(800)
Working Air
Pressure
(mpa)
HRX-80GWf
Air
Consumption
(N /Cyc) *1
0.6
0.7
0.8
Stripe Stroke (mm)
Main
Sub
425
-265
Traverse
Stroke (mm)
1200
(1600)
265
AUTOMATE
Max. Payload
(kg)
Machine
Weight (kg)
205
3
(including EOAT)
Drive System
Control
Method
Power Supply
(V)
Digital AC Servo
Motor (3/ 5 Axis)
PTP•CP
3P 200 ACV +10%/-15%
(50Hz/60Hz)
220
Power
Consumption
(W)
1350
1950
DIMENSIONS (MM)
364
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
N
HARMO HRX-150/200Sf AND HRX-150/200Gf
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
AUTOMATE
N
from 100-350 tons in both three and five axis configurations.
HRX-150Gf
STANDARD FEATURES
sub-weldment
OPTIONAL FEATURES
and larger robots)
wrist rotation
hole pattern
is standard)
machine side
three phase
365
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
HRX-150Sf
HRX-150Gf
HRX-200Sf
HRX-250Gf
Model
HRX-150Sf
HRX-150Gf
HRX-200Sf
HRX-250Gf
Main
800(680)
900(1000)
Working Air
Pressure
(mpa)
Sub
--
850(730)
--
950(1050)
Air
Consumption
(N /Cyc) *1
0.6
2.7
2.9
2.7
2.9
Stripe Stroke (mm)
Main
Sub
--
705
584
584
--
705
584
Traverse
Stroke (mm)
1400
(1600.1800.2000)
1600
(1800.2000)
584
Drive System
Digital AC Servo
Motor (3 / 5 Axis)
AUTOMATE
Max. Payload
(kg)
Machine
Weight (kg)
5
(including EOAT)
285
265
305
325
Power
Consumption
(W)
Control
Method
Power Supply
(V)
PTP•CP
3P 200 ACV +10%/-15%
(50Hz/60Hz)
1700
2300
700
2300
DIMENSIONS (MM)
366
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
N
HARMO HRX-150/200SWf AND HRX-150/200GWf
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
AUTOMATE
N
from 100-350 tons in both three and five axis configurations.
HRX-150GWf
STANDARD FEATURES
sub-weldment
OPTIONAL FEATURES
and larger robots)
wrist rotation
hole pattern
is standard)
machine side
three phase
367
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
HRX-150SWf
HRX-150GWf
HRX-200SWf
HRX-250GWf
Model
HRX-150SWf
Main
800(680)
900(1000)
Working Air
Pressure
(mpa)
HRX-150GWf
HRX-200SWf
HRX-250GWf
0.6
Sub
--
850(730)
--
950(1050)
Air
Consumption
(N /Cyc) *1
2.7
2.9
2.7
2.9
Stripe Stroke (mm)
Main
Sub
--
705
552
552
--
705
552
Traverse
Stroke (mm)
1400
(1600.1800.2000)
1600
(1800.2000)
552
Drive System
Digital AC Servo
Motor (3/5 Axis)
AUTOMATE
Max. Payload
(kg)
Machine
Weight (kg)
270
290
5
(IncludingEOAT)
310
330
Power
Consumption
(W)
Control
Method
Power Supply
(V)
PTP•CP
3P 200 ACV +10%/-15%
(50Hz/60Hz)
1700
2300
700
2300
DIMENSIONS (MM)
368
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
N
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
AUTOMATE
N
With pinpoint accuracy and repeatability, rugged durability,and high speed
performance, the HRXf Series Full Servo Extraction Robots are redefining
the automation industry. These powerful yet very cost effective robots are
perfect for automating horizontal molding machines from 100-350 tons in
both three and five axis configurations.
The HRXf Series features the highest quality linear guides on all axes,
HRX-300SWf
STANDARD FEATURES
sub-weldment
OPTIONAL FEATURES
and larger robots)
wrist rotation
hole pattern
is standard)
machine side
three phase
369
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
HRX-300SWf
HRX-800GWf
Main
Sub
-1100
1150
Working Air
Pressure
(mpa)
Air
Consumption
(N /Cyc) *1
Stripe Stroke (mm)
Main
Sub
-1015
861
Traverse
Stroke (mm)
1800
(2000)
861
AUTOMATE
Max. Payload
(kg)
2.7
2.9
Control
Method
Power Supply
(V)
Digital AC Servo
Motor (3/ 5 Axis)
PTP•CP
3P 200 ACV +10%/-15%
(50Hz/60Hz)
370
HRX-300SWf
HRX-300GWf
0.6
355
10
(Including EOAT)
Drive System
Model
Machine
Weight (kg)
380
Power
Consumption
(W)
1700
2300
DIMENSIONS (MM)
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
N
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
AUTOMATE
N
With pinpoint accuracy and repeatability, rugged durability,and high speed
performance, the HRXf Series Full Servo Extraction Robots are redefining
the automation industry. These powerful yet very cost effective robots are
perfect for automating horizontal molding machines from 100-350 tons in
both three and five axis configurations.
The HRXf Series features the highest quality linear guides on all axes,
HRX-500GWf
STANDARD FEATURES
sub-weldment
OPTIONAL FEATURES
and larger robots)
wrist rotation
hole pattern
is standard)
machine side
three phase
371
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
HRX-800SWf
HRX-800GWf
Model
HRX-800SWf
Main
Sub
-1300(1400)
1300(1400)
Working Air
Pressure (mpa)
Air
Consumption
(N / Cyc) *1
0.6
12.5
HRX-800GWf
Stripe Stroke (mm)
Main
Sub
-1100
1045
Traverse
Stroke (mm)
2000
(2400)
AUTOMATE
Max. Payload
(kg)
Machine
Weight (kg)
15
(IncludingEOAT)
Drive System
Control
Method
Power Supply
(V)
Digital AC Servo
Motor (3/ 5 Axis)
PTP•CP
3P 200 ACV +10%/-15%
(50Hz/60Hz)
473
Power
Consumption
(W)
2800
DIMENSIONS (MM)
372
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
N
DOWNSTREAM AUTOMATION
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
AUTOMATE
N
WORKCELL SOLUTIONS
AEC has standardized workcell solutions that increase the value of
molded parts at the point of manufacture, the injection molding machine.
Maintaining part integrity and orientation through the beside-the-press
operations increases yields, minimizes inventories, assures part
quality, and reduces direct labor and facility costs. AEC specializes in
beside-the-press injection molding workcell solutions for the following
applications: Integrated Vision Inspection, Primary Packaging, Insert
Molding, In-Mold Decorating, Assembly and Application-specific Tooling.
PRIMARY PACKAGING
Box and tray loading, part stacking, and bagging can be expensive
secondary operations. Introducing the parts directly to their primary
packaging at the molding operation reduces this need for secondary
part orientation and handling.
INTEGRATED VISION INSPECTION
Cosmetic defects, dimensional attributes, and key part features are
detected before advancing from the molding process to the next
operation, eliminating the buildup of “bad part” inventories.
Consistent and reliable process verification is achieved without the
introduction of non-value added labor.
ASSEMBLY
Pre-engineered assembly modules are integrated into the workcell
to perform value-added tasks such as flex-and-close operations,
small part assembly, ultrasonic welding, degating, and heat staking.
Increasing the utilization of the part removal robot with integrated
controls during the molding cycle improves operation efficiency and
process stability.
373
WORKCELL SOLUTIONS
Integrated workcell controls and modular application
solutions provide ease of use and maximum equipment
utilization. We have the experience and skills to create
turnkey workcell solutions that help plastics processors
excel in their markets.
DOWNSTREAM AUTOMATION
IN-MOLD DECORATING
AUTOMATE
The automatic introduction of pre-formed appliques, pre-printed labels, and films
directly into the mold increases the overall part yield when compared to secondary
printing and labeling operations. Model and color variations are possible without
costly changeover time or interruption to the overall molding process. AEC can
provide the complete solution including materials and equipment, assuring the
product integrity and a seamless process.
INSERT MOLDING
Manually placing mechanical inserts, such as fasteners, clips, rods, and electrical
contacts into horizontal and vertical molds is often dangerous and cycle-time
prohibitive. Automatically presenting the inserts and coordinating their placement
into the mold with the part removal robot saves valuable time and reduces the
potential for expensive mold damage.
APPLICATION SPECIFIC TOOLING
Tooling is an integral component of every robotic solution. From complex insert
loading end-of-arm tools to shuttles and degators designed for specific parts, AEC
applies strict engineering design guidelines and practices.
ARTICULATING ROBOTS
AEC, Inc. is a certified partner integrator of ABB articulating robots. ABB leads in
articulating robot based automation with more than 100,000 robots supplied
worldwide. ABB robots are known for superior performance in terms of speed,
accuracy, repeatability, reliability, flexibility, reach, and payload. Available in many
configurations including floor mounted, wall mounted, and ceiling mounted, robots
from ABB promote optimum productivity. Whatever the application, whether
machine tending, picking, palletizing, simple assembly or a combination of these,
ABB is equal to the challenge.
Applications:
• Simple assembly
• Multi-station machine lending
• Trimming/Deburring
• Low overhead obstruction applications
374
A
U
T
O
M
A
T
I
O
N
NOTES:
AUTOMATE
NOTES:
AUTOMATE

Material Handling.qxd

Transcription

Similar documents

to now. - Kugel Komponents

classic service van for ford transit

cold planer series ii

creeping bentgrass creeping bentgrass - Tee-2

Sanitation Through Separation - Cisco

Marvel Outdoor Mobile Beer Dispensers

Spec Sheet

Amite Facilities

PLUMBING GENERAL SERVICE TELECOMMUNICATIONS HVAC #1

We have a Hippo Hopper for EVERY JOB!!!